PROCEEDINGS

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ilomil jfooetg of §ictoiti.

VOL. IX. (New Series).

Edited under the Authority of the Council.

ISSUED MARCH, 1897.

{Containing Papers read before the Society during 1896).

THE AUTHORS <)E TIIR SEVERAL PAPERS ARE SEVERALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE

SOUNDNESS OE THE OPINIONS GIVEN AND FOR THE ACCURACY OE THE

STATEMENTS MADE THEREIN.

MELBOURNE :
FORD & SON, PRINTERS, DRUMMOND STREET, CARLTON.

AGENTS TO THE SOCIETY:

WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON.

To whom all communications for transmission to the Royal Society of Victoria,
from all parts of Europe, should be sent.

1897.

Eointl So cuti) af tftjctoria.

1896.

patron:

HIS EXCELLENCY LORD BRASSEY, K.C.B.

■President :
PROFESSOR W. C. KERNOT, M.A., C.E.

ttice-|lrrr.iirut5 :
E. J. WHITE, F.R.A.S. | II. K. RUSDEN, F.R.G.S.

I^on. fiTnMsnrcr :

C. R. BLACK ETT, F.C.S.

Ifton. S>rrrctnrii :
PROFESSOR BALDWIN SPENCER, M.A.

Iljon. librarian :

E. F. J. LOVE, M.A.

fltonnril :

PIETRO BARACCHI, F.R.A.S.

F. A. CAMPBELL, C.E.

JOHN DEXNANT, F.G.S.

11. L. J. ELLERY, C.M.G., F.R.S.,

F.R.A.S.
T. W. FOWLER. M.C.E.

T. S. HALL, M.A.

II. R. HOGG, M.A.

J. JAMIESON, M.D.

PROFESSOR T. R. LYLE, M.A.

H. MOORS.

REV. E. H. SUGDEN, B.A., B.Sc.

W. PERCY WILKINSON.

CONTENTS OF VOLUME IX,

Aiii'. I. — On the Occurrence of the Anchoring Tubes of Adeona
in the Older Tertiaries of Victoria with an Account
of their Structure. (Plate I.). By T. S. Hall, M.A. 1

II. — Description of a New Species of Marsupial from
Central Australia. By Professor Baldwin Spencer,
M.A., C.M.Z.S. (Plate II.) ... ... ... 5

III. — Description of a New Genus of Terrestrial Isopoda,
allied to the Genus Phreatoicus. By Professor
Baldwin Spencer, M.A., and T. S. Hall, M.A.
(Plates III. and IV.) ... ... ... ... 12

IV. — Geological Notes on the Gehi and Indi Rivers and
Monaro Gap, Mount Kosciusko, N.S.W. By A. E.
Kitson ... ... ... ... ... 22

V. — Note on Aboriginal Rock Painting in the Victoria
Range, County of Dundas, Victoria. By Rev. John
Mathews, M.A. , B.D. (Plate V.) ... ... 29

VI. — On some Facts in the Geographical Distribution of
Land and Fresh- water Vertebrates in Victoria. By
A. H. S. Lucas, M.A., B.Sc. ... ... ... 34

VII. — Description of two new Species of Lizards from Central

Australia. By A. H. S. Lucas and C. Frost ... 51

VIII.— The Temperatures of Reptiles, Monotremes and Mar-
supials. By Alexander Sutherland, M.A. (Plate
VI) 57

IX. — A Locality List of all the Minerals hitherto recorded

from Victoria. By John A. Atkinson ... ... 68

X. — The Burbung of New England Tribes, New South

Wales. By R. H. Mathews ... ... ... 120

XI. — Aboriginal Bora held at Tallwood, Queensland, in 1895.

By R. H. Mathews ... ... ... ... 137

40442

vi. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

PAGE

Art. XII. — Probable Miocene Age of a Conglomerate at Shelford.
By J. Dennant, F.G.S., and J. F. Mulder. (Plate
VII.) 174

XIII. — On the Occurrence of Graptolites in North-Eastern

Victoria. By T. S. Hall, M.A. ... ... ... 183

XIV. — A Contribution to our Knowledge of the Tertiaries in
the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. By T. S. Hall,
M.A., and G. B. Peitchard. (Plate VIII.) ... 187

XV. — Catalogue of Non-Calcareous Sponges collected by J.
Bracebridge Wilson, Esq., M.A., in the Neighbour-
hood of Port Phillip Heads. Part III. By Arthur
Bendy, D.Sc. ... ... ... ... ... 230

XVI.— On the Spectra of the Alkalies. By L. Hummel ... 260

XVII. — On the Variations in the Spinal Nerves of Hyla aurea.

By Miss Georgina Sweet, B.Sc. ... ... ... 264

Annual Keport of the Council, 1895-96 ... ... ... 297

Balance Sheet for 1895-96 ... ... ... 300

Eeports of Committees ... ... ... ... 302

List of Members, &c. ... ... ... ... ... 303

List of Institutions and Learned Societies which Receive

Copies of the Society's Publications ... ... ... 311

Art. I. — On the Occurrence of the Anchoring Tubes of
Adeona in the Older Tertiaries of Victoria with
(in Account of their Structure.

(Plate I.).

By T. S. Hall. M.A.,

Demonstrator and Assistant Lecturer in Biology in the University
of Melbourne.

[Bead 12th March, 1896.]

In the residue obtained from washing samples of the older
Tertiary marine clays of various parts of Victoria, there occur
numerous small cylindrical calcareous bodies, the nature of which
has long been a puzzle to those who have examined them.
Recently, while examining some specimens of Adeona in the
collection of the late Dr. MacGillivray, in which the anchoring
tubes were well preserved, the resemblance of the joints of the
anchoring tubes of the jDolyzoon to the objects in question struck
me very forcibly, and a dried specimen in the collection of the
Biological School afforded sufficient material for making a careful
comparison with the fossil forms.

The fossils are very variable in size and shape, but speaking
generally they are cylindrical objects ranging up to about 3 mm.
or 4 mm. in diameter and to about 5 mm. in length. The two
terminal plane faces of the cylinder are generally perpendicular
to its long axis, and are pierced by a number of fine pores, which
are apparent without the aid of a lens. The lateral wall of the
cylinder is formed by closely applied threadlike cords which
branch and anastomose, leaving narrow elongated pores between
them, the long axis of the pores coinciding in direction with that
of the cylinder. Usually the diameter of the cylinder slightly
increases somewhat suddenly at each end. In many cases the
joints are branched, three branches sometimes meeting at one
point. The pi'oportion of the length of the cylinder to its
diameter varies greatly in different specimens. Some are very
elongate, while others are flat discs, all grades between the two
extremes being found. <■

l

2 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

A transverse section shows a cylindrical canal occupying the
organic centre and a series of canals, which are somewhat
reniform in transverse section, arranged round this in several
concentric circles. The canals are connected with those on the
same radius by very fine tubules, connection of one canal with
another beside it occurring rarely in the sections I have examined.
The whole structure has therefore very much the appearance of
an Haversian system of a mammalian bone, but the central
canal is smaller and the fine tubules corresponding to the
canaliculi are far fewer and coarser than in bone.

In longitudinal section the canals are seen as parallel tubes,
and the connecting tubules, which are far apart, run, as a rule,
somewhat obliquely from one canal to another. In one instance
a " tabula " crossing a large canal was clearly seen.

A longitudinal section through the point where branching
takes place shows that the central canal itself divides into two,
a division running up the axial line of each branch. The fine
tubules occasionally pierce the outer wall of the cylinder and
their openings form the slitlike pores before mentioned. Some
of the specimens of which I have made sections are infiltrated
with iron pyrites, which has filled even the fine tubules, and the
structure is thus more clearly shown than in those specimens
where no infiltration has taken place.

In the recent condition the members of the genus, as restricted
by MacGillivray, are fixed to foreign bodies by a fiexible organ
of attachment, which is built up of alternate calcareous and
chitinous portions resembling, as Lamouroux remarks, the stem
of fsts. The rooting apparatus is very variable in form and in
the amount which is in contact with the usually pointed stalk
{stiel of Kirchenpauer). Near its origin the calcareous portions
are disc-like, but towards its distal portion become more elongate,
and the rooting organ breaks up into cylindrical jointed twigs
which branch copiously and frequently anastomose. Branching
always takes place from the calcareous segments. The latter
vary very much in length. The ultimate ramifications consist of
a single hairlike tube which becomes firmly attached to a foreign
body such as a rock or fragment of a molluscan shell, and in
which the alternations of calcareous and chitinous segments is
clearly visible, and in which branching and anastomosis also
occur.

A iichori ii;j Tubes of Adeona. 3

An examination of incinerated fragments and of a number of
sections of the anchoring tubes of a dried, recent specimen shows
that their structure is identical with that just described in the
fossil. Each branch of the " root," in short, is a bundle of
tubes arranged in several concentric circles. In the calcareous
segments these tubes communicate with one another by fine
connecting tubules, which do not apparently occur in the chiti-
nous segments, where the tubes remain distinct and separate
from one another.

The chitinous tubes are continued as a lining for a variable
distance into the canals of the calcarous segments, and occasion-
ally chitin may be traced into the connecting tubules. Judging
by Kirchenpauer's description and figure he appears to have not
noticed the larger canals in the calcareous segments, but to have
seen the smaller ones only.* The structure of the rooting organ
would be then, as he remarks, entirely different from that of any
other genus of Cheilostomata, as in all other instances it consists
of a chitinous tube more or less encrusted with calcareous matter.
It will, however, be seen that the differences are not as great as
lie thought, though the alternation of calcareous and chitinous
joints still marks it off strongly from the attaching structure of
all other polyzoa.

Nicholson f figures the central portion of a transverse section of
the zoarium of a recent Cellepora which shows practically the
same structure as is seen in the rooting " organ " of Adeona.
Sections which I have made of Cellepora incrassata from the
Kara sea show that towards the centre of the older portion of a
branch the zocecia have assumed an elongate tube-like form, and
the communication tubes have the appearance described by
Nicholson. In the younger parts of a branch, that is towards its
distal end, the structure is very like that shown in Nicholson's
tig. 152, C. The modifications of the skeleton have their parallel
in those of the zooids which build up its different parts, and the
polymorphic character of the polyzoon colony has long been
recognised.

The genus Adeona is restricted to the southern seas, several
species having been recorded from Australia and South Africa.

* (Jeber die Biyozoen-Gattung Adeona.

t Manual of Paleontology, Nicholson and Lydekker, 3rd ed., vol. i., p. 687.

1a

4 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

In our own seas it is rather a rare form, and is usually, I
believe, dredged from a depth of about twenty fathoms.

It is noted as a common characteristic genus in our older
Tertiaries by Dr. MacGillivray in his " Monograph of the
Victorian Tertiary Polyzoa."

In common with several other geologists I regard the beds
from which Dr. MacGillivray's Tertiary Polyzoa came, and from
which I obtained these specimens, as of Eocene age.

The localities at which I have found examples are Mornington ;
Mouth of Duck Ponds Creek, Corio Bay (bore) ; Campbell's
Point ; Belmont (well sinking) ; Birregurra ; Southern Moora-
bool Valley ; Shelford ; Muddy Creek.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE.

The Figures are all drawn from Fossil Specimens.

Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4. — Calcareous joints of Anchoring Tubes of

Adeona. Enlarged.
Fig. 5. — Portion of external surface of same, showing corded

nature of the surface and openings of pores.
Fig. 6. — Transverse section of same, infiltrated with pyrites.

x 22.
Fig. 7. — Portion of 6 more highly magnified.
Fig. 8. —Longitudinal section showing bifurcation of central

canal at point where branch is given off. x 22.

(Figs. 6, 7, 8, drawn under the camera lucida).

Proc R S. Victoria 1896 Plait I.

4tt

}* «

»

<r^

J*

T. S.Hall del.

Troedel I C Print.

nWendellith.Mdb.

Art. II. — Description of two Neio Species of Marsupials
from Central Australia.

(With Plate II.)

By Baldwin Spencer, M.A., C.M.Z.S.,

Professor of Biology in the University of Melbourne.
[Bead 12th March, 1896].

In the Report on the Mammalia of the Horn Expedition to
Central Australia the following was appended as a foot-note to
the list of mammals therein enumerated. "In addition to those
named in this list, there certainly exist in Central Australia a
species of Dasyurus and at least one of Perameles. Mr. Gillen
informs me that at Alice Springs the blacks have a special corro-
boree associated with the ' Chilperta ' or native cat. Perameles
fasciatus is included in Sanger's list, and Mr. Byrne of Charlotte
Waters, who is well acquainted with the Marsupial fauna of that
district, tells me that he knows of the existence of one species
of Perameles and believes that a species of Peragale occurs of
considerably smaller size than and distinct from P. lagotis"

Since this was written I have received through the kindness of
Mr. Gillen of Alice Springs and Mr. Byrne of Charlotte Waters
four species of Marsupials, which more than corroborate the
statement referred to.

From Alice Springs specimens of Perameles obesula and of
Dasyurus geoffroyi have come. An incomplete skin of what is
presumably the same species as the latter has also been secured
by Mr. Bryne from Crown Point on the Finke River, so that
evidently the species has a wide range in the centre.

The occurrence of Perameles obesula is of interest as it serves
to considerably extend its distribution, which now stretches right
across the whole of West and South Australia, Victoria, New
South Wales, probably Southern Queensland and southwards to
Tasmania. It is also of interest as being one of the very few
species of animals belonging to any group which is possessed in
common by Central Australia and Tasmania. The native name
of the animal which has so far only been obtained in the Burt

6 Proceedings of the Roycd Society of Victoria.

Plains to the north of Alice Springs is " quirra ;" Mr. Besley of
Alice Springs states that it is plentiful in the neighbourhood of
Tennant's Creek, which lies well within the tropics.

In addition to these two forms I have received from Messrs.
Gillen and Byrne specimens of a new species of Perameles, and
from Mr. Bryne specimen of a new species of Peragale, and T
have once more to thank these gentlemen for their continued
exertions, which have resulted in adding considerably, now as on
previous occasions, to our knowledge of the Central Australian
fauna.

The following is a description of the two new species : — ■

(1) Peragale minor. (Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4).

Size considerably smaller than P. /ago/is. Fur very long, soft
and silky ; composed almost entirely of under-fur. General
colour fawn-grey but darker than in P. lago/is.

Head long, muzzle narrow. Rhinarium naked at the tip of
the snout but no backward prolongation of the naked part as
in P. la got 'is.

Face grey -brown, the under-fur on the face grey basally, then
fawn coloured with a dark tip, the longer hairs with a longer
black tip.

On the dorsal surface and sides of the body the under-fur is
black basally, then fawn coloured. The longer hairs very little
longer than the under-fur, with a black tip. The hairs of the
under-fur very often have a dark brown tip.

Chin and inner side of fore-limbs white, the rest of the limbs
and under surface grey, the fur with a dark grey basal part and
white distal half.

Hands white. Hind feet white above, hairy beneath, the
hairs on the posterior two-thirds black, the anterior third white.

Tail with the proximal two-thirds short haired. Along the
dorsal line is a sharply marked narrow band of dark hair
increasing in length distally. At one-third of the length from
the posterior end the black hairs stop abruptly and are succeeded
by a dorsal series of white hairs forming a distinct crest, the
hairs of which- are proportionately shorter than in P. lagotis.
Sides and under surface of tail with scanty stiff white hairs.

Two small round pads at the base of the fourth and fifth toes.

New Marsupials from Centred Australia.

A few long whisker-like hairs on the posterior side of the
fore-limb, just above the wrist, the longest measuring about
40 mm.

Mamixue, 8. Two or three young ones apparently produced at
one time.

Dimensions.

Adult ?

(&)

Adult 2

(c)
Adult $

Adult ?

Adult $

in al.

in al.

in al.

in al.

in al.

Head and Body

215

200

215

240

270

Tail

124

118

127

152

160

Hind Leg

5S"5

57

65

62

73

Ear

71

68

87

85

92

Muzzle to Eye

31-5

31

37

39

41

Specimen (a) has two young ones in the pouch. Specimen (/>)
has the hinder pair of mamma? very small. Specimen (d) has
three young ones in the pouch. The posterior mamma on the
right side is wanting. The anterior pair are small. The second
pair has an embryo attached on each side. The third mamma
on the right side is small, that on the left has an embryo
attached. The fourth on the right side is not developed, and
that on the left side is small.

Skull (Plate II., Figs. 1 and 2). Much smaller and more delicate
than in P. lagotis. The upper anterior end of the Premaxillary
only slightly directed forwards, not so strongly marked as in
P. lagotis, and in consequence the tip of the muzzle seen from
the side is not so markedly trifid as in P. lagotis. Nasals long
and narrow, their greatest breadth going between 4| to 4| times
into their length. Interorbital region flat and not conspicuously
constricted :* relatively much broader than in P. lagotis. Lachry-
mals much as in P. lagotis with a distinct ridge marking off the
facial from the orbital surface.

* In the specimen of which the dimensions are given the intertemporal breadth (11 mm.)
is exactly the same as in a skull of Peragale lagotis, the basal length of which is 90 mm.

8 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

There is a deep concavity between the two limbs forming the
anterior forked end of the malar ; the part of the zygomatic
process of the maxilla in contact with the lower limb of the fork
is produced into a distinct bluntly rounded process (Fig. 2).

Paroccipital process inconspicuous, forming a smooth rounded
downgrowth fitting on to but not projecting beyond the hinder
wall of the swollen mastoid portion, of the auditory bulla.

Bull*, both alisphenoid and mastoid portions, relatively more
inflated with their surfaces smoother than in P. lagotis.

Anterior palatine foramen extending nearly as far back as
the canine. Posterior palatine foramina extending from />3 to
m3; divided by a narrow long septum. Large but irregular
vacuities behind.*

Teeth. Is separated from i* by a diastema of 1*5 mm. and
from the canine by a diastema of 3 mm. Canine long and
strong, its distance from p1, 4-5 mm. Premolars as in P. lagotis.
Molars differing from those of P. lagotis in not being rounded
in section, their summit with cusps much like though not so
prominent as those in Perameles and in this respect resembling
those of P. hucura. Lower canine slightly longer than the
premolars. Pl slightly longer longitudinally than/4, p* decidedly
longer than either of them. Molars distinctly cuspidate.

Skull Dimensions (<?)•

Mm.

Basal length .. ... ... 66

Greatest breadth ... ... ... 34

Nasals length ... ... ... 32

Xasals greatest breadth ... ... 6-5

Intertemporal breadth ... ... 11

Palate length ... ... . 41

Palate breadth outside ms ... ... 17-5

Palate breadth inside nrs ... ... 10-5

Palatal foramen ... ... ... 7

Basi-cranial axis ... . . ... 20

Basi-facial axis ... ... ... 46

Facial index ... ... ... 230

* In the specimen figured there is a single vacuity on the right side only between the
anterior and posterior foramina — see Fig. 2.

New Marsupials from Central Australia. 9

Teeth. Distance from front of canine to

back of m4 . . . ... ... 28

,, Horizontal length pa ... ... 3

,, Horizontal length p4 ... ... 3

„ Horizontal length ms1""3 ... 12

Type, in the National Museum, Melbourne.

There can I think be little doubt as to the specific distinction
of the animal now described. Its smaller size, skull measure-
ments and teeth distinguish it from P. iagotis, whilst its colour,
skull measurements and the length of molars 1-3 (Fig. 4), serve
to distinguish it from P. leucura. As yet we have not been able
to meet with any further specimens of the latter species, though
Mr. Byrne has spared no efforts to secure it.

With regard to the habits of the species now described Mr.
Byrne writes, " whilst the ' Urgarta ' (P. Iagotis) occupies the
inner end of his burrow the 'Urpila' [P. minor) during the winter
months lies within a foot or so of the entrance of his and only
uses the inner chamber during the summer. This peculiarity
is taken advantage of by the natives who jump on the surface
of the ground behind the 'Urpila' breaking it in and so cutting
off his retreat to the inner chamber. He is thus compelled to
rush out through the entrance where a native is waiting to give
him his quietus. The ' Urgarta ' (P. iagotis) cannot be captured
in this way and has to be dug out. Both species are nocturnal
in their habits."

Locality. — .Sand-hills about forty miles to the north-east of
Charlotte "Waters.

(2) Pe^ameles epemiana, sp. n. (Figs. 5, 6, 7).

Size medium ; proportions slender. Fur soft with numerous
long, dark, spiny hairs on the dorsal surface of the head and
body \ continued as two dark bands down either side of the
rump. General colour of upper surface dull orange. Margin of
upper jaw and under surface of head together with the whole
under surface of the body white. An orange patch on the
shoulders. A patch of dark grey under-fur on the outer side of
the arm and fore-arm, the rest of the front limb being white.
An orange patch on the rump between the two lines of long,

10

Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victori-a.

black, spiny hairs where the latter are absent. A patch of grey
under-fur on the outer side of the hind-limb at the lower end of
the hinder line of long black hairs. Inner side of hind-limb and
upper surface of foot white.

Long hairs white at their base, the flattened out part and fine
tip being black. Under-fur on the back grey basally with a
white median part and an orange extremity. On the sides of the
body the grey is wanting, and on the under surface, chin, etc.,
the orange is also absent.

Muzzle fairly long and slender.

Ears very long, narrow and pointed (Fig. 5), laid forward they
reach 17 mm. beyond the anterior canthus of the eye, grey
behind, with a brownish patch anteriorly. Metatragus about as
broad as long with a rounded end.

A few long, white, whisker-like hairs just above the wrist ; the
longest measuring 58 mm.

Soles of the hind foot covered with dark brown hairs up to the
pads at the base of the fourth or fifth toes.

Tail distinctly bicolour for its whole length. The upper
surface with black (or very dark brown) spiny hairs sharply
marked oft' from the white hairs on the under surface and side.

Mamma-, 8. Apparently two young produced at a time.

Dimensions.

(<0

(6)

Adult 3

Adult £

in al.

in al.

Head and Body

235

275

Tail

US

135

Hind Foot -

50-2

55

Muzzle to Eye

37

38

Ear

51

51

Proc R 5 Victoria 1836 Mate 2

Fig. I x /.

Fi(J Y A 3

Fig. 5 -x I

Fig 6 x /.

Rjr7x/.

Spancer del

Troedtl & d Print.

Fig 3x1
R. Wen del lit/l. Melb.

New Marsupials fr<yn\ Central Australia.

11

Skull Dimensions (?)•

Basal length
Greatest breadth
Nasals length
Nasals greatest width...
Intertemporal breadth
Palate length

Palate breadth between outer corners of
Palate inside nv'
Palatal foramen
Basi-cranial axis
Basi-facial axis
Facial index

Teeth. Distance from point of canines
back of m4 ...
,, Length p4

Length m1"3 ...

to

Mm.

55-5

24

24

4-2
12-7

3-6
14-5

8-2

6:5
15
41
273-3

24
2-5
0-2

Type, in the National Museum, Melbourne.

The native name at Alice Springs is Mulgaruquirra, and at
Charlotte Waters is Iwurra.

With regard to its habits Mr. Gillen says "the Mulgaruquirra
scoops out a shallow hole on the surface of the ground just
sufficiently large to lie in and thatches it with grass ; habits
nocturnal."

Mr. Byrne says: — "The Iwurra and Tubaija (Charopus
castanotis) are almost identical in their habits, and build similar
nests of grass and twigs in shallow oval hollows scooped out in
the ground. They are captured in the same way, viz., by placing
one foot on the nest, pinning the animal down and then pulling
him out with the hand."

Locality. — Burt Plain north of Alice Springs, and sand-hills
about forty miles to the north-east of Charlotte Waters.

Art. III. — Description of a New Genus of Terrestrial
Isopoda, allied to the Genus Phreatoicus.

(Plates III. and IV.)

By Prof. Baldwin Spencer, M.A., and T. S. Hall, M.A.

[Read 7th May, 1896.]

For the specimens upon which our work is based we are
indebted to Mr. W. H. F. Hill, by whom they were obtained
burrowing in earth on the hills overlooking the Gellibrand River,
about twenty miles south of Colac in Victoria. The country is
covered with dense forest, principally of Eucalyptus, and owing
to its rugged nature has been but little explored zoologically.

In 1882 Dr. Charles Chilton* described a new genus of subter-
ranean Isopoda to which he gave the name of Phreatoicus,
obtained from wells in New Zealand; in 1891 f he described
another species of the same genus secured in water-holes on the
summit of Mount Kosciusko, close to the boundary line between
New South Wales and Victoria, and in 189-4, in an important
paper on "The Subterranean Crustacea of New Zealand,"; he
gave further particulars with regard to the New Zealand species
of the genus.

The genus now described is evidently closely related to though
distinct from Phreatoicus, and we therefore propose the name of
Phreatoicopsis for it. To facilitate comparison we have adhered
as closely as possible to the method of description and nomen-
clature of Dr. Chilton.

Phreatoicopsis, n.g.

Body long, subcylindrical, laterally compressed. Upper antennae
short, lower long, with flagellum. Mandible with an appendage.
First pair of legs subchelate, others simple. The legs are divided
into an anterior series of four and a posterior series of three.

v Trans. N.Z. Inst., vol. xv., p. S9. ■

t Records Aust. JIus., Sydney, vol. i., p. 140.

% Trans. Linn. Soc. London, May, lv.>4.

New Genus of Terrestrial Isopoda. 13

Pleon long, of six distinct segments, last joined to telson.
Uropoda biramous, short and powerful. Telson large, sharply
truncate.

Phreatoicopsis terricola, n.sp.

Specific diagnosis. — -Body stout. Pleura of second, third, fourth
and fifth segments of pleon moderately developed, being only as
deep as their respective segments ; their inferior margins fringed
with a few small spinose setae. Telson abruptly truncated.
Lower antennae about one-third of the length of the body ;
peduncle longer than nagellum ; fourth and fifth joints of
peduncle longest and equal in length. Legs long, slender.
Lower lip with the adjacent edges of both lobes much hollowed
out at the base, so as to leave a wide central space. Inner lobe of
first maxilla narrow and with numerous plumose setae at its
extremity.

Colour. — Creamy white.

Length. — About 45 mm.

Habitat. — Banks of the Upper Gellibrand Biver, in burrows.
(W. H. F. Hill).

Detailed Description.

The only specimens that we have hitherto received have all
been males, so that the description of the points of difference
shown by the female must be deferred for the present.

Body (Plate III., Fig. 1). — The length of the largest specimen
we have is 48 mm. The body is broadest at the third and
fourth segments of the pereion and then gradually decreases in
width posteriorly. The depth of the body is somewhat less than
its breadth in the pereion, but owing to lateral compression is
slightly greater than its breadth in the pleon. The differences
are, however, not very marked, though, owing to the great
downward prolongation of the pleura, the compression appears
more considerable than it really is. The dorsal surface of the
pereion is very convex, the ventral being only slightly so. In
the pleon the dorsal surface is more convex than in the pereion
and the ventral surface is flat.

14 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Head. — The head is very convex on the dorsal and anterior
surfaces. The anterior end, as seen from above, is truncate.
The anterior margin has a slight V-shaped cleft immediately
below the level of the eyes. From the anteroinferior margin of
the head a strong furrow runs upwards and then backwards,
parallel to the long axis of the body, and reaches as far as the
posterior end of the head. This furrow divides the head into
two well-marked portions, the upper of which has the form of a
quarter of a sphere, while the lower, as seen from the side, is
oblong and forms a prominent convex cheek. The transverse
depression mentioned by Chilton in P. australis and in P.
assimilis is absent in the present species.

Eyes.- — The eyes are as in P. australis, except that they consist
of about forty lenses, in proportion with the greater size of the
animal.

Pereion. — The first segment of the pereion is fused to the head,
the line of union being strongly marked. The Krst segment is
very little narrower than the second. The anterior and posterior
dorsal edges are straight, and parallel to one another. In side
view the segment widens slightly and is bent forwards in close
apposition to the side of the head. The sides of the segment are
globose and larger than in the case of the succeeding segments.
The second, third and fourth segments are all of about equal
size. The inferior margins (epimera) of each segment have a
notch in the centre for the reception of the basi of the legs.
The anterior angle is thickened and slightly produced downwards.
In the fourth segment the posterior angle is formed by a slight
flat fold, which gradually decreases in size in the preceding
segments until, in the first, it forms merely a ridge which does
not reach the posterior angle. The epimera of the fifth, sixth
and seventh segments are broadly notched. The anterior margin
of the fifth segment is produced forwards into a broad, rounded
plate. The corresponding plates in the two succeeding segments
are smaller and more angular in shape. The posterior marginal
plates are of the same size in the three segments, that of the
seventh segment being of about the same size as the anterior one.

Pleon. — The first segment is narrower than the seventh
segment of the pereion, and gradually narrows as it passes
downwards. It extends downwards considerably beyond the

New Genus of Terrestrial Isopoda. 15

epimera of the seventh segment and beyond the level of the joint
between the basos and ischios of the seventh appendage. There
is a tendency for the breadth of the segments to increase as they
pass posteriorly, and this increase is most marked in the fifth
segment. The pleura of the second, third, fourth and fifth
segments are produced downwards further than those of the first
and are about equal to their respective segments in depth.

The sixth segment and telson are coalesced, forming a tail-
piece slightly concave below and convex above in both transverse
and longitudinal section ; the sides are flattened and the whole
structure has a characteristic horse-shoe shape in transverse
section. The posterior end is truncated and gapes widely. The
margin of the posterior end is bordered by a series of strong,
spinose setae of varying length. The shape of this part of the
body is markedly different from that of any of the three species
of Phreatoicus yet described.

From the level of the upper and posterior ansde of the insertion
of the uropod a ridge, devoid of seta?, extends upwards and for-
wards for about half the height of the body, probably indicating
the posterior limit of the sixth segment.

The inferior and posterior margins of the pleura of segments
1-5 bear a few short, spinose setae, a sparse, narrow row of
which is continued around the posterior margin of the segment.

The anterior inferior angle of the sixth segment is produced
into a process, which bears a single strong spine.

The inner side of the basal part of the appendage is produced
so as to form a process running along the inner side of the inner
ramus, and bearing a few short spines.

Surface of Body. — The surface of the body is smooth, with only
a very few short setae scattered about irregularly. The whole
surface of the body has a light cream colour in spirit specimens.

First Antemne. — The first antenna1 are short, reaching more
than half way along the fourth joint of the second antennae.

The peduncle consists of three joints, and is clearly dis-
tinguishable from the flagellum. The first joint of the peduncle
projects freely beyond the head. It is broader than long and
about the same length as the second. The third is shorter and
narrower.

The 'flagellum consists of from ten to twelve joints. The second
segment is the largest. The succeeding ones are about equal in

16 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria,

size to one another, excepting the last two which are smaller, the
terminal one being the smallest.

Seta? are scattered sparsely on the surface of the peduncle. A
row of seta? (1 auditory cilia) passes round the distal end of each
tiagellum joint. There are a few seta? on the tip of the terminal
joint. „

Second Antenna. — The pediuicle consists of five joints and is
about one fourth longer than the nagellum. The first joint is
much the shortest ; the second and third are equal in length and
short ; the fourth and fifth are longest and are equal in length.
The third joint is rounded on the ventro-internal aspect. A few
seta? are scattered spai'sely and irregularly over the segments of
the peduncle, with a row round the distal end of the fourth and
fifth.

The flagelluin consists of 23-27 joints. Of these, the first is
much the longest, the next two or three are very slightly shorter
than the rest, which are sub-equal, and gradually become
narrower towards the distal end, where they increase in length.
There is an interrupted row of seta? around the distal end of
each joint.

Upper Lip. — The upper lip is large and strong and is regularly
rounded at its distal end. It is divided into two portions. The
proximal has a median and two lateral elevations. The distal
part has a median depression and a raised rim. A strong trans-
verse ridge separates the distal from the proximal part. The
distal part is bent inwards to the mouth. There are a large
number of close-set seta? on the inner surface which slant towards
the median line.

Mandible. — The mandible has the same general shape as in
P. anslralis, and the left one differs slightly from the right.

The left mandible (Plate IV., Fig. 2) has a cutting edge formed
by two processes, both of which bear three strong, brown
teeth. Within these is a short process with a truncate end, the
somewhat circular margin of which is bordered by a row of
spiniform seta? about twenty in number. There are no seta?
between the base of this process and that of the molar tubercle,
such as occur in P. australis. The molar tubercle is columnar in
shape, with a squarely truncate end covered by a well-developed,
chitinous cap, which is slightly concave. The concavity is

Xe>'- GeriU8 of Terrestrial Isopoda. 17

crossed by numerous ridges running parallel to one another and
transversely to the length of the mandible. Each ridge is
divided into a series of minute tubercles by transverse lines.

The right mandible (Fig. 3) has a cutting edge unlike that of
P. australis and consists of two processes, the outer with four, the
inner with two projecting points, which are, however, not so
strongly chitinized as the corresponding structures of the left
mandible. The next process is somewhat narrower than that of
the left mandible, and its distal margin is crowned with a circle
of spiniform setae. The molar tubercle is longer and more slender
than the left one, the distal end is more obliquely truncate, and
the grinding surface, in minute structure, resembles that of the
left. The inner of the two cutting processes is united proximally
with the base of the setiferous process, and these two are capable
of slight movement on the basal portion of the appendage.

The palp is three-jointed. The proximal part is the shortest;
the median is the longest and bears setae which are especially long
at the distal end. The third joint bears three long seta? at its
extremity.

Loiver Lip (Fig. 4). — The lower lip consists of two fleshy
lobes united proximally. The distal end of each is rounded and
densely fringed with short setae which curve in towards the
middle line. These setae are carried on a series of processes of
the lobes and are thus collected into little brush-like groups.

The median part, connecting the bases of the two free lobes, is
produced into the buccal cavity in the form of a grooved fold
fringed by setae.

First Maxilla (Figs. 5, 5a). — Consists of two divisions, of
which the outer is the larger. It bends over somewhat towards
the middle line and its end is truncate and carries about twenty-
five strong brown chitinous teeth. The four outer ones are the
largest and are separated from the remainder, which are arranged
in three rows. The inner and the outer edges bear hair-like setae.

The inner division is much smaller than the outer and forms
a narrow flattened plate pointed at its distal extremity, where
there is placed a group of setae, more numerous than those in
P. australis, and arranged in two series, an outer row formed of
stout, strong setae not more than one-third of the length of the
others and doubly pectinate at their distal ends, and an inner
group of long, strong, finely plumose setae. 2

18 Proceed! ay* of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Second Maxilla (Fig. 6). — The basal part is produced at its
inner distal end into a rounded, elongate lobe. External to this
are two processes articulated to the basal joint. The inner
margin differs in form from that of P. australis, and its outline
is represented in the figure.

The end of the inner process carries a large number of seta? of
two kinds ; first long, plain seta? with curved, almost hooked
extremities, and secondly, pectinate seta?. The inner margin has
a fringe of long, plumose seta?. The whole surface bears sparsely
scattered, large, pectinate seta?.

The two articulating lobes are slightly longer and much more
slender than the inner lobe and are flattened from side to side.
Each terminates in two stout, pectinate spines. The inner lobe
also bears two simple spines. Both lobes carry a large number
of pectinate seta? of varying length, which are more numerous on
the inner than the outer process.

Maxillipedes (Fig. 7). — Coxos distinct and broader than long.
The epipodite is relatively larger than in P. australis. The outer
edge bears a fringe of very numerous short seta?. The basos is
about half as long again as broad, but not so long relatively as in
P. australis. From the inner side of the basos distally arises a
flat plate, which reaches as far forwai'd as the middle of the
carpopodite. This plate, owing to the broadening of the carpo-
and meropodite, cannot be seen from the outer side. The end of
this plate is rounded and bears a number of strong, pectinate
seta?, which are continued for some distance along the outer
margin. The inner margin is fringed by a series of long, plumose
seta? and at the basal part of the outer margin are three strong
seta?, which are not hooked as they ai-e in P. australis.

The ischios is short and rounded. The meros has its outer
angle produced into a long process which runs upwards by the
side of the carpus. The carpus is broadly subtriangular and
very different in appearance from that of P. australis. The
propodos is subtriangular, and the dactylos is roundly oblong.
The whole appendage is strongly setose.

First pereiopod. The basos and ischios are much as in P. aus-
tralis. The meros is subtriangular, the anterior side being
produced into a long, strong process, which terminates in a single
spiniform seta. The face turned towards the propodite is

New Genus of Terrestrial Isopoda. 19

flattened and expanded transversely, so as to form a surface
against which rests the face of the propodite when the latter is
bent back. The shape of the carpus is represented in the
drawing. The propodite is much more swollen than in any of
the three species hitherto described and is broadly triangular.
The proximal half of the palm surface is produced so as to form
a more or less flattened plate which terminates distally in a
single stout tooth. Proximally to this the plate is bordered by a
row of six short, stout spines, which lie slightly to the outer side,
so that, when closed, the dactylos lies inside them. The dactylos
is a long, powerful, curved structure, which can be closed down
upon the palm of the propodite. At about half its length it
bears a strongly-developed tooth, which tits into the space
between the tooth on the propodite and the base of the dactylos.

Setaj are not so numerous as on the corresponding appendage
of P. anstralis. The basos bears a few which are very short ;
the ischios carries a few tufts on its posterior side ; the meros
has very few ; the carpus has well-developed tufts on its posterior
side ; a fringe of seta? lies to the outside of the spines on the
posterior edge of the propodite, which also carries a narrow
transverse band of setae at the base of the dactylos on the
anterior and posterior sides. The dactylos carries minute groups
of little setae, the groups being arranged in longitudinal rows.

Other Appendages of the Pereion. — The second, third and fourth
appendages agree generally in form with those of P. australis,
but the setse are short, strong and spiney and very much less
numerous. In the male there are no spines on the propodite
similar to those of P. australis, and the dactytopodite is not bent
round so as to form a claw, and has only a slight tooth developed.
The fifth, sixth and seventh are similar to the fourth, the basos
not being expanded as in P. australis.

First Pleopod (Fig. 8). — The endopodite is much stouter than
the exopodite. At the inner proximal end a small lobe is
indicated, and is indistinctly separated off from the main
part, which terminates distally in a rounded end which is not
emarginate as in P. australis.

The exopodite is long, narrow and pointed, with a slight
curvature outwards and a lobe at its proximal end running
alongside the basal portion. The margin of the exopodite is
fringed with long simple setae. 2a

20 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Second Pleopod. — The second pleopod is larger than the first
pleopod. The endopodite consists of two parts. First the penial
filament. This lies on the inner side and does not extend so far
as the first joint of the exopodite. It curves slightly outwards
and in transverse sections has the form of figure 8. A few short,
stout setae are present along the inner margin proximally.

The second portion is similar to the endopodite of the first
pleopod except that the proximal lobe is not so well marked.

The exopodite consists of two joints. The proximal one has a
process extending along the margin of the base and bears a fringe
of simple setae. The second joint is short and lanceolate. Its
margin carries about forty-four simple setae.

Third Pleopod. — The third pleopod has the endopodite similar
in form to that of the first, except that the proximal lobe, though
present, is not so large. The exopodite is similar to that of the
second, except that the basal process is smaller. The protopodite
gives off' on the outer side a lobe which, according to Dr. Chilton,
perhaps represents an epipodite, the margin of which is fringed
with long, simple setae.

The Fourth and Fifth Pleopods. — These are similar in general
shape to the third, but the epipodite gradually increases in size
from the third pleopod backwards.

Uropods. — The uropods do not project backwards beyond the
pleon. The basal joint is as long as the longer of the two rami.
and very stout. On its inner surface it beai-s, about half-way
along its length, a strong spinose seta, and a few smaller seta*
are present at intervals. Its distal extremity carries a single
strong and one or two smaller spinose setae, no pectinate ones
being present in this position as in P. australis.

Its upper surface is broad and concave, and at the inner angle
it is produced into a well-marked process terminating in a strong,
spinose seta. A few large and small setae are present along the
upper inner margin.

The two rami are strong and curved : the inner is considerably
longer than the outer, and both bear a few strong setae which are
not arranged in groups. The points of the rami are dark brown
in colour.

ProcRS Victoria. I&9S. Plated.

R Weniel deUt lithWdb

Proc R S- Victoria . 1896 Plate 4.

f/o.Sx.8.

R Wendi I

New (ji'ii a* of Terrestrial Isopoda. 21

Generic Position. — The present species differs from the members
of the genus Phreatoicus, to which it is closely allied in two par-
ticulars, and to such an extent as to warrant the formation of a
new genus for its reception. These are the form of the uropods
and of the telson. In his generic description of Phreatoicus, Dr.
Chilton characterises the telson as " subcorneal,"* and each of
the species he describes has the telson terminated by a small,
prominent projection of very characteristic form. This process is
absent in our species and, though it is difficult by a single word
to express the form of the telson, yet it certainly is not " sub-
conical." Its sudden truncation and horse-shoe shape in trans-
verse section are features which mark it off strongly from the
form found in Phreatoicus. The uropods again are short and
stout and do not project appreciably behind the telson, differing
greatly in this respect from the long, styliform uropods of
Phreatoicus.

A sexual difference found in the males of Phreatoicus again is
not found in the present species. As described by Dr. Chilton
the fourth pereiopod of the male is modified slightly so as to form
a grasping organ of the subchelate type ; whereas in our species
this modification does not occur and the appendage is similar to
the others.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES III. and IV.

Fig. 1. — Phreatoicopsis terricola. $
Fig. 2.— Left Mandible.
Fig. 3.— Right Mandible.
Fig. 4. — Lower Lip.
Figs. 5, 5a. — First Maxilla.
Fig. 6. — Second Maxilla.
Fig. 7. — Maxillipede.
Fig. 8. — First Pleopod.
The magnification is indicated in the case of each figure.

* Trans. New Zealand Institute, 1882, vol. xv., p. S9. Records of the Australian
Museum, vol. i., p. 151. Trans. Linn. Soc. London, vol. vi., pt. 2, p. 185.

Art. IV. — Geological Notes on the Gehi and Indi Rivers
and Monaro Gap, Mount Kosciusko, N.S.W.

By A. E. Kitson.

[Read 7th May, 1896.]

The portion of New South Wales referred to in this paper is
comparatively little known, and therefore it may be advisable to
make a few remarks on its topography before entering upon its
geological features. By reference to the map submitted, which
with certain alterations and additions is a copy of that published
in 1881 by the Department of Lands and Survey of this Colony,
it will be noticed that opposite the Bringeinbrong homestead the
main stream receives a large tributary called the Little Murray,
Swamp or Gehi River. From here to its source it is known as
the Indi and on the east for some distance is flanked by the
Youngal Range which runs to Mount Kosciusko and forms the
divide between it and the Gehi; on the west by a range running
to Mount Pinnibar in Victoria. On the east of the Gehi are
many subsidiary spurs of the Dargal and Bogong Mountains,
from which among others come its affluents, the Swampy Plain,
Khancoban, Black and Gehi Creeks. Near its junction the river
flows through the rich grassy flats of the Bringeinbrong and
Khancoban Runs, but about ten miles higher up the valley
rapidly narrows and the stream is more or less confined between
steep gorges. The country between here and Groggin on the
Indi, some thirty miles away, is uninhabited, but huts at Black
Creek and Gehi River are used by drovers and travellers gene-
rally. Groggin has three inhabitants, the stockman of the run
and two selectors on the Victorian side. From here the Kosci-
usko track crosses the Snowy and Leatherbarrel Creeks and their
divides, which are spurs from the main peak, and branches off
north at Monaro Gap, six miles from Mount Kosciusko, at an
altitude of 5900 feet.

On the geological map of New South "Wales, published in 1893,
most of the country bordering on the Gehi and Indi Rivers is
coloured as Silurian with a little granite some distance to the

Geological Notes, Mount Kosciusko, A.N. IT. 23

east. As far as I have been able to discover, however, the
geological features of the greater portion of the district have not
yet been described. In his "Southern Gold Fields," p. 125, the
late Rev. W. B. Clarke, M.A., F.G.S., etc., briefly speaks of the
country between the Indi and the Muniong Range as granite
and slate with dykes of porphyry from the subjacent granite, and
near the summit the slate transmuted into an imperfect gneiss.
The map published with the volume does not delineate the
features of the country on the west of the Muniong Range and
as the names of localities have since been changed it is exceed-
ingly difficult to trace his course, but judging by the description
given on p. 121, he appears to have followed the Snowy Creek
up to the point opposite Leatherbarrel ford which is probably
identical with his Woolayian, then along the present track to
Burramungee (Monaro Gap ?). Tangaruccan, spoken of on p.
138, may be the place now known as Tom Groggin or more
commonly Groggin. and Piaderra also somewhere in the same
locality. As regards that portion along the Groggin track the
boundaries shown on the geological map will require a little
variation since, with the exception of one limited portion, the
whole area consists of various kinds of granite. In the following
paper I shall endeavour to give a brief outline of the general
geological features on this and the Kosciusko track as gathered
during a hurried journey along it. Time forbade a careful
examination of any particular locality, so the observations were
necessarily general and there are several portions, more especially
near the " Gehi Wall," that are highly interesting and worth
careful study.

The Victorian township of Towong on the Murray River lies
at the northern termination of the Mount Elliot Range consisting
of granite and mica schist with highly auriferous quartz veins and
reefs. A flat about a mile and a half wide separates this range
from those in New South Wales and is a rich alluvium several
feet deep with a sub-stratum of sand and gravel containing
pebbles of granite, slates, mica schists, quartz, quartzite, etc.
For some eight miles the track follows the valley of the Little
Murray, then turns to the east to cross a low range forming the
Khancoban — Black Creek Divide. The rock is a tine-grained,
pinkish-grey granite with much orthoclase and quartz, but little

24 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

mica. It is greatly decomposed, forming a cold, poor soil of
little depth, mainly of siliceous fragments with numerous pieces
of rose quartz. The Black Creek contains granitic detritus only
and from this point a plateau rises gently over a light grey
biotite granite, with well-defined bosses here and there, to the
" Gehi Wall," where the igneous rocks give place to vertical grey,
yellow, brown and olive-green phyllites, argillaceous schists and
slates. Many of them are exceedingly fissile, while others break
into irregular, ragged-edged pieces. The boundary is plainly
marked by a much more vigorous growth of timber on the
" Wall " than on the plateau. The rocks have an almost due
north and south strike, and so steep is the descent into Bain
Creek at the foot that in a distance of some 350 yards the
height comes from 2225 feet to 1400 feet.

Between Bain and Gehi Creeks the track crosses the point of
a small spur where the rocks are similar to those in the "Wall."
No outcrop occurs on this point, but in the bed of the Gehi
Creek at the foot of the spur a striking example of contact
metamorphism may be noticed. The original slates having a
S. 50° W. dip of 61° have been transmuted into white, black,
brown and grey porcellanite, lydianite and jasper, while on the
southern bank a mass of grey granite outcrops at the water's
edge, showing clearly that the stream at this point flows along
the line of junction. The granite extends to the bank of the
Gehi River near, and evidently the spur between the river and
creek is composed of the same rock. The pebbles in both streams
consist of the rock already mentioned as well as mica-schist,
slate and quartzite, with glittering sand of white, yellow and
black mica. In the river are large boulders of the local granite.
At the " Wall " the stream enters a precipitous cailon and from
its source to here is known as the Gehi.

At none of the three river fords close by is there any evidence
of sedimentary rocks in situ, yet as the pebbles in the river above
the creek junction include many of metamorphosed sedimentary
origin it is highly probable that an outcrop of those rocks occurs
in the neighbourhood. There is a marked absence of fossils in
the " Wall," but judging by the great inclination and lithological
characteristics of the rocks they are probably Lower Silurian.

Geological Notes, Mount Kosciusko, X.N. IT. 25

Between the last-mentioned spur and the southern ridge there
is a deposit of alluvium, twenty-live feet deep, showing the
remains of old river terraces. The southern ridge is granite, some
of it consisting of light-pink orthoclase, and pearly muscovite
in about equal proportions with milky quartz, other portions
of an exceedingly fine-grained, red, gneissose variety mainly
composed of mica, highly decomposed and having a foliated
appearance much like that of a mica schist.

. From the end of this ridge the river valley bears straight
towards Mount Kosciusko, through extremely rugged country
hitherto found impracticable for horses and the track trends
southwards to the Indi Valley. On leaving the river it follows
the course of a large creek for some distance. In the gravels on
the flat are several prospecting shafts from three to five feet deep.
Between here and Scrubby Creek lies a low, granite spur of the
Youngal Range whose highest point is some 2300 feet. The
granite is a fine-grained muscovite variety of shades of grey, pink
and red, the former prevailing on the Gehi slope and the latter
on that into Scrubby Creek, where the rock decomposes into a
rich, red loam of considerable depth. Granite of the same
character occurs on the opposite slope, beyond which it changes
to a greyish-white with little muscovite forming a poor soil.
This is the main Youngal Range and has here an altitude of
2700 feet. After getting into the valley of the Indi no outcrop
is visible till the river is reached. Between this point and
Groggin the rock in situ may be seen in the bed of the stream,
and also at the junction of Omeo Creek and again at Selk Creek,
where it forms a bar almost across the river. It is a pretty, grey
granite showing little decomposition, and is totally different from
any met with south of the Gehi. It is evidently an intrusive
one of more recent age, and comes in from the south through
Groggin. The bed of the river contains several kinds of schists,
slates, sandstones and granites. At Groggin the rock is of a
much darker colour owing to an increase in the quantity of
biotite.

Here the track leaves the Indi Valley and bears off for the
Monaro Gap. As far as the Snowy Creek there is no appreciable
change in the rock, and the stream contains the same kinds of

26 Proceeding of the Royal Society of Victoria.

pebbles as the Indi. In the bank, however, there is a small
outcrop of gneissose granite, much decomposed and overlain by
two or three feet of gravels.

For some two miles the track ascends very rapidly up the
range between the Snowy and Leatherbarrel Creeks over an
interesting area of granite. In many places it is an amorphous
or micro-crystalline felspar with a few small crystals of biotite
and a little quartz ; in others it has very much the appearance of
a foliated granite ; and again it is a typical granite with large
crystals of white orthoclase and muscovite, with masses of grey
opaque quartz. The orthoclase changes into various shades of
pink, red and grey, and with the disappearance of the muscovite
the rock becomes a pretty porphyrinic aplite. Running through
the granite with a general north and south strike are many dykes
from five to twenty-five feet wide, some of a dense, hard, dark
rock resembling diorite, much jointed and breaking into small
blocks, others of a rock something like diabase. About four
miles from Groggin the sedimentaiy rocks again become visible.
No outcrop can be seen at the junction but small loose pieces of a
red, very micaceous granite, much decomposed, appear on the
granite side of the boundary. Some fifty yards further on the
first outcrop of the stratified rocks occurs. It is a slightly con-
torted, white slate so much altered, broken and decomposed as to
make it difficult to get an accurate dip. This, however, appears
to be G6° to E. From here to the ford at the Leatherbarrel, over
a mile away, the rocks gradually merge into the softer and less
indurated slates and schists. Several outcrops convey the
impression that those which now are much jointed, disintegrated
and crumbling to a white clay were once very fissile, argillaceous
slates. The strike of all varies from N. to N.E. with a clip of 55°
to 71° E. to S.E. This western ridge has a height varying from
3300 to 3800 feet,

On the point overlooking the ford the rocks are talcose and
argillaceous schists. Much jointed, yellowish-grey phyllites with
a dip of 85° to 87° to E.N.E. outcrop in the bed of the creek
which has here an altitude of about 3300 feet. On the steep
eastern slope, however, the rocks can be seen to much better
advantage, and observations taken are more accurate than on
the opposite ridge where the outcrops are small. Argillaceous

Geological Notes, Mount Kosciusko, KS.W. 27

schists and slates principally olive-green in colour are the prevail-
ing rocks. They have a clip varying from 57° to 73° N. 50° E.
to E.N.E.

Some of the slates are so exceedingly fissile that a good hand
specimen cannot be obtained. They are also much jointed and
slightly contorted. The joints run in many directions at high
angles. Near the top of the cutting is a band of deep reddish-
brown talc-schist intercalated between the slates. It presents a
rough pitted surface and stands out in a well-marked ridge,
affording a striking contrast to the soft, brittle and fissile slates
on each side.

Veins of quartz from mere threads to reefs several inches wide
intersect the strata on both sides of the creek, and at one place
on the eastern ridge a reef nine inches to two feet wide crosses
the track. The quartz is of a milky, vitreous nature, cellular,
and highly charged with a green mineral which lines the walls of
the cavities in minute hair-like crystals. These veins run more
or less in the same direction as the strike of the rocks. The
pebbles in the stream consist of schists, slates, and the foliated
granite of the Kosciusko region, with many large sub-angular
pieces of the local rocks. The gravel and sand is one glistening
mass of brownish-yellow mica relieved by fragments of parti-
coloured slates. The Leatherbarrel rocks resemble those at the
" Gehi Wall " in many respects and probably belong to the same
beds.

The top of the eastern ridge just above the creek is about
4000 feet high. From here no outcrop was noticed, still the
character of the rocks indicates a transition similar to that on
the western ridge. About two-and-a-half miles from the creek a
highly siliceous granite makes its appearance. The junction is
masked, but probably is at the point where the ridge meets the
main divide. The quartz predominates greatly over the felspar
and the crystals of mica are few and small. Rose quartz is
plentiful and litters the bed of a small watercourse.

Nearer the Monaro Gap a distinctly foliated structure is
apparent, and the rock partakes of the character of a siliceous
gneiss. The foliations are finely marked and close together, the
intervening felspar being removed for some little distance from
the edge, giving the rock an interesting fretted appearance. The

28 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

pocket lens reveals a few minute flakes of peai'ly muscovite
among the felspar bands. Later on biotite takes the place of
muscovite though the rock is otherwise similar. This laminated
characteristic occurs also in the rose quartz, many pieces having
a distinctly banded appearance and occurring in certain definite
shapes apparently indicating jointing. The joint planes run
almost at right angles to the planes of lamination. Another
feature of the rose quartz is a peculiar flecking of colourless
quartz in a milky matrix to both of which the rose colour seems
to be imparted.

The fretted fragments of gneiss and rose quartz persist to near
the Monaro Gap where a grey, gneissose granite, appears. It
is composed of quartz, medium crystals of light flesh-coloured
orthoclase which weathers quite white, and small crystals of
biotite, and is the prevailing rock on this part of the main
divide.

I desire to express my thanks to Mr. A. W. Howitt, F.G.S.,
for generously undertaking to microscopically examine several of
the rocks noticed ; to Mr. T. S. Hall, M.A., for his kindness in
revising this paper and suggesting several alterations which I
have gratefully adopted ; and to Mr. C. A. Robinson, for kindly
preparing an enlargement of the maps before mentioned.

"With the permission of the Society I hope at a future time
to submit a few notes on the Geology of the country between
Monaro Gap and Mount Kosciusko.

Note. — The distances and heights (aneroid) are to be taken
as approximate only.

Art. V. — Note on Aboriginal Rod- Painting in the
Victoria Range, County of Dundas, Victoria.

(With Plate V.)

By Rev. John Mathew, M.A., B.D.

[Eead 4th June, 1896.]

The Victoria Range, in the County of Dundas, Victoria, is
remarkable for the multitude of bold, bare crags which crown its
peaks and dot its sides. Some of them are gigantic in size and
fantastic in form. On the face of one of these huge masses the
sketches are to be seen which form the subject of this note. It
is situated in the Parish of Billiminah about five miles east of
Mr. Carter's Glenisla homestead, which is on the main road about
half-way between Horsham and Hamilton.

On the north bank of the Billiminah Creek, at the point where
it emerges from the bosom of the ranges and some three hundred
yards from its bed, the rock stands, an impressive object, on the
southern slope of a western rib of the Victoria Range. It rises
abruptly to a height of upwards of sixty-five feet. The outline
of the base is an oblong; the angles at the south end are approxi-
mately right angles, and the north end is rounded. Half-way up
the rock on the northern side there is a large, natural cavern
extending into the cliff some ten feet, the interior being visible
from the ground.

The southern face of the rock is about fifty feet in width and
projects over a plat of ground which has been cleared and levelled
partly by nature, partly by human agency. The angle at the
base is about sixty deg., but as the rock rises it declines more
from the perpendicular. As the horizontal line taken from the
middle of the base forward to the point whence a perpendicular
would reach the brow of the rock measures forty-nine feet, the
height of the brow from the ground must be at least sixty feet,
and is probably more. The face fronts a little to east of south.
widening and taking a slight turn to eastward near the summit.

30 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

The ground sheltered by the overhanging crag is marked by a
curved line where herbage begins. From the centre of the face
to this line the distance is thirty-three feet. This grassless,
sheltered space is now a camp for sheep and cattle. At one
time it must have formed a favourite resort of the blacks. Its
former occupants have taken considerable trouble to clear away
loose fragments of rock. There is also some indication of loose
soil having been banked up at the southern edge of the protected
part, suggesting that a breakwind may have been erected there.
Looking southerly the view is charming. From the opposite side
of the Billiminah Creek the Victoria Range extends to the south
south-west as far as the eye can reach in a serrated line of rocky
hills lightly clad with timber. In the immediate neighbourhood
of the huge rock-shelter the hills are also wooded, the prevailing
timber being stringy-bark. The delightful murmur of a waterfall
comes from a short distance up-stream, and is audible at the
rock.

At the base the cliff is a quartzose sandstone, of a greyish
colour, translucent in places. Upwards the stone becomes redder
and looser grained, and the striations are more distinct. Apart
from a few cracks and easy undulations the surface on the south
side is even and comparatively smooth, thus offering an enticing
" canvas " to any one of artistic inclination.

As the highest markings are eight feet five inches from the
ground in perpendicular height, it is evident that certain loose
fragments of rock which lie outside the sheltered patch were
lying at the base of the face and served as scaffolding to the
artist when the paintings were executed, and were subsequently
removed to render the place a comfortable camp. The lowest
marks occur four inches from the ground. I take this as an
indication that, since the completion of the work, a quantity of
gravel has been gradually deposited under the shelter, having
been conveyed from the east side by heavy downpours of rain
and the trampling of animals.

The surface upon which the painting has been done measures
from side to side thirty-seven feet. The work consists chiefly of
numerous short upright strokes, a few slightly undulating lines
drawn perpendicularly or horizontally, branches, foliage, and
hgures of animals. To get a fairly accurate reproduction is a

Aboriginal Rock Painting. 31

matter of considerable difficulty and necessitates very close and
careful inspection for several reasons. The outlines are weather-
worn and in various places it is next to impossible to distinguish
them from the red blotches naturally in the stone. The difficulty
of copying has been increased through the ambition of white
people to secure a cheap fame by scribbling over the aboriginal
work with charcoal. One feels indignant that so rare a relic of
aboriginal art should be wantonly desecrated and defaced.

The paintings were discovered in 1866 by Messrs. Muirhead
and Carter. The latter affirms that they look just about as
fresh as when h'rst seen. This is not surprising, as they are
perfectly protected from rain. The oldest blacks professed to
have seen them in their boyhood, but were so unfamiliar with
the spot that they could not find it in spite of a day's deliberate
searching. The authorship and date of execution were alike
unknown to them.

An exceptionally intelligent black suggested that the strokes
were a record of time during which encampments had been
continued at the place. From their being visible upon some of
the larger figures they are obviously, in part at least, a later
addition to the picture. I have not delineated all the short
strokes. Those I have given show how thickly they are distri-
buted and their relative lengths and positions. It appeared to
me that some of them were intended to represent grass and
foliage.

The natives who inhabited the locality were called by them-
selves Kuli. They were of the same stock as the Victorian
blacks generally, and formed part of the advance guard of the
Wiraidheri, who inhabited the centre and south of New South
Wales ; the language of the Kuli, however, was marked by more
numerous and distinct traces of relationship with the extinct
Tasmanian race.

The principal subjects delineated are as follow : —

1. Seven men engaged in a corroboree.

2. An incomplete oval with a small figure like the conven-

tional heart.

3. A man and woman, the man's left hand holding the

woman's I'ight.
I. Indistinguishable.

32 Proceed! a;/* of the Royal Society of Victoria.

5. A wild turkey.

6. Man and woman, like No. 3.

7. Man climbing a tree.

8. An emu.

9. A native dog.

10. A man in the act of throwing a boomerang, the weapon

remarkable as having an almost rectangular bend.

11. "What seems to be a human hand. On the rock it has the

appearance of having been impressed by the hand
daubed with pigment.

12. Indistinguishable.

13. A man probably dancing in a corroboree. He wears a

kangaroo tail and appears to hold weapons in his
hands.

14. A man and woman like Nos. 3 and G, but much better done.

15. Figure of a man, much worn away.

16. Kangaroo hunt ; two men and two kangaroos ; one of the

men launching a boomerang, rectangular like that in
No. 10.

17. Woman carrying child on her back.

18. Three figures, much worn, two of them female.

19. Two like figures, each holding a club in the right hand.

20. Seems meant for an iguana.

At the south-west corner I found small water-worn fragments
of a loose-grained dark-red sandstone, which, when used as a
chalk, marked the rock with exactly the same colour as the
aboriginal scoring, but with a more sharply defined outline.

Rubbing the finger along this streak produced the same
appearance as the drawing on the face which had been thus
softened and dimmed by the weather. The figures in the
painting are mostly of a darker tint than the strokes, and seem
to have been made by smearing. Mr. Carter informed me that
the natives used to gather a fine red dust, worn from the surface
of rocks in the neighbourhood by the action of the weather.
Mixing this powder with opossum fat they formed a paste which,
when dried, they used as raddle for marking. No doubt the
figures of darker hue were done with this preparation.

On a smaller shelter, distant some 200 yards south-east from
the large rock, a few marks are to be seen. These embrace a

1

IS

r*v

I

10

i

i<|

SX

vv// /*

Proc. R.S Victoria Ifiixi I'l 3

f\ —U.

11 "'if/, J.

X

\u// /// ///\ |,

////I

v

(i»/

/w

/o

V

v a>)

will

Scale, one foot to an inch.

H Vcniid htti Ndb.

Aboriginal Rod' Painting. 33

number of upright strokes, three short upright strokes within
two short lines joined by the upper ends at a right angle, a bird's
foot, and an oval figure possibly the outline of a human head,
with a dot for the mouth and shading for a beard.

As compared with aboriginal paintings elsewhere, those at
Billiminah are distinguished by the use of only one colour, and
by having the bodies of the animal figures entirely filled in.
They differ absolutely from those at the other Glenelg River in
the north-west of Australia in subjects, treatment and colouring,
but in the pose of the human figures in action, bear a strong-
resemblance to the aboriginal sketches in New South Wales
which have been figured bv Mr. R. H. Mathews and others.

Akt. VI. — On some Facts in the Geographical Distribution
of Land and Fresh-water Vertebrates in Victoria.

By A. H. S. Lucas, M.A., B.Se.

[Eead 8th July, 1896.]

A part of this paper was prepared for the Melbourne meeting
of the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science,
1890, and was read before the Biological Section. As, at that
time, certain orders, the Lizards and Batrachians, had not been
carefully studied, it seemed better to defer publication until the
facts of distribution of these orders had been ascertained. I
have since published in the Proceedings of this Society a Census
of Victorian Batrachians (1891), and also, in conjunction with
Mr. Frost, a Monograph of the Victorian Lizards (1893). I am
accordingly now able to present a rnore complete account of the
general features of the geographical distribution of Victorian
Land and Fresh-water Vertebrates.

Limited as is its area, the colony of Victoria comprises in its
territory a great variety of country. The grass plains of the
north, the mallee scrub of the north-west, the rich undulating
grazing country of the Western District, the Alps of the North-
East, the moist forests of Gippsland, and the Southern District
which surrounds Port Phillip, lying between the Otway Ranges
and Wilson's Promontory, and comprising but slightly elevated
country with moors and swamps and lightly timbered areas,
constitute some half dozen well-marked natural divisions. For
years Baron von Mueller has been indefatigable in collecting
precise records of the occurrence of our native plants in all parts
of the colony (as indeed of all parts of our continent), and in his
" Key to the System of Victorian Plants " he has published a
table of their distribution. The regions which he adopts as a
result of his knowledge of the flora are the same as those

Land and Fresh-water Vertebrates in Victoria. 35

indicated, except that he combines in one the Mallee and the
Murray Plains.

While Victoria thus possesses provinces which are sufficiently
distinct from one another in their geographical and botanical
features, these are in most instances physically continuous
with adjacent regions of the neighbouring colonies. Thus the
northern plains form but a part of the great Central Murray
basin, the Mallee and Western District are only separated by an
imaginary meridian from South Australia, and the Alpine and
East Gippsland regions merge in the mountain and coast regions
of New South Wales, and thus form an extension of the eastern
strip of our continent.

We have no such complete and definite information as to the
local distribution of animals as the Baron has secured of that of
the plants. Animals, especially the higher forms, are more difficult
to obtain and to preserve than plants. In this regard the need
is felt of local museums in each of the provinces in which
examples from as many localities as possible might be preserved
and be available for the aid of students of distribution and
variation. This is especially desirable in the case of the Verte-
brates, which are so liable to compulsory migrations or local
extinction on the advent of civilised man.

In this paper I have attempted, as far as is possible in the
present state of our knowledge, to tabulate the distribution of
Victorian A^ertebrates, omitting birds, and to discuss the sum-
marised facts. I have made use of all precise records in Gould,
the British Museum catalogues, the Victorian National Museum,
and Professor McCoy's " Prodromus of Victorian Zoology," and
of a large number of private and persona] collections. Mr. D.
LeSouef gave me very valuable information on the distribution
of the mammals. For purposes of comparison the distribution
of Tasmanian forms is included as far as known with precision.
In the Mammalian table, " T," in the first column, stands for
Tasmania, the other columns giving the distribution in Victoria.

36 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

MAMMALIA.
CHIROPTERA.

T.

s.

s.w.

"

X.W. y.lL. IL.

A. Frugivora.
Pteropus.

P. poliocephatus, Temm.

X

X

B. IXSECTIVORA.

Nyctinomus.

( = Molossus of Gray)

N australis, Gray

A1, plicatus, Buch.-Harn.

X

X

Chalinolobus.

C. tuberculatus, Forster
C. gouldi, Gray -

X
X

X
X

Nyctophilus.

N timoriensis, Geoffroy

X

X

Vesperugo.

V. pumilus, Gray*
V. kreffti, Peters

X
X

The Victorian Bats have not been thoroughly collected or
studied. Bats, too, as winged animals with considerable powers
of flight would be capable of being carried with ease over such
barriers as the Dividing Bange or Bass's Straits. Wallace states
that two small species of North American bats occasionally reach
Bermuda, a distance of at least 700 miles. Nyctinomus australis
occurs in New Guinea, N. plicatus in India, and Nyctophilus
timoriensis all over Australia and in the Malay Archipelago. We
cannot conclude much from our table then, except that we may
probably consider that the conspicuous absence of Fruit Bats
from Tasmanian orchards is due in parts to the lower tempera-
tures of the southern island.

* Said to occur all over Australia

Land and Fresh-iuater Vertebrates vn Victoria, 37
RODENTIA.

T.

s.

S.W.

x.w.

N.E.

E.

MuRID^E.

Mus.

M. novce-hollandice, Waterh.

X

M. tetragonurus, Hig. & Pet.

X

M. pachyurus, H. & P.

X

M. castaneus, H. &, P. -

X

J/, tamarensis, H. & P.

X

.1/. velutinus, Thomas -

X

M. setifer, Horsfield

X

M. fuscipes, Waterh. -

X

M. griseo-coeruleus, H. & P. -

X

M. leucopus, H. & P. -

X

M. variabilis, H. k, P.

X

J/. simso?ii, H. ife P.

X

J/, penicillatus, Gould -

X

Hydro.mys.

H. chrysogaster, Geoff. -

X

X

X

Mastacomys.

M. fuscus, Thomas

X

Hapalotis.

( = Conilurus, Og.)

If. conditor, Gould

X

H. mitchelli, Ogilby

X

H. apicalis. Gould

X

H. albipes, Licht.

X

Here we are at once struck with the restriction of Hapalotis to
the northern parts of Victoria. The moister climates of Southern
and Eastern Victoria and of Tasmania are unfavourable to the
genus. Mastacomys has been met with in Central Australia
(Horn Expedition) and in the fossil state in New South Wales.
Hydromys is widely spread over Australia. The species of Mus
clearly need more attention. If the Tasmanian species enume-
rated all hold good, it would be a very remarkable thing if a
large number of them should not also occur in Victoria. That
the Victorian mice have been so far pretty much neglected must
indeed be freely admitted.

38 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.
CARNIVORA.

T.

S.

s.w.

N.W.

N.E.

Canid^e.

Canis. -

C. dingo, Blum. -

x

X

X

X

X

I suppose there is but little doubt that the Dingo is a compara-
tively late arrival in Australia. The Bass Straits were very
much as they are at present, and the Dingo had no means, or
need, of crossing them. On the mainland his rivals, the Thyla-
cine and the Tasmanian Devil, early became extinct before him.
They have survived in Tasmania, though the progress of the
white man threatens their extinction.

MARSUPIALIA.

Dasyurid.e.

s.

S.W. N.W. N.E.

Phascologale.

P. flavipes, Waterh.

(var. typica, B.M.C.)
P. calura, Gould -
P. penirillata, Shaw
P. swainsonU Waterh.
P. minima, Geotfr.

Sminthopsis.

S. murina, Waterh.

6". leu opus, Gray

*S. crassicaudata, Gould

Antechinomys.

A. la?iigera, Gould

Dasyurus.

D. geoffroyi, Gould
D. viverrinus, Shaw
D. maculatus, Shaw

TlIYLACINUS.

T. cynocephalus, Fischer

Sarcophilus.

S. ursinus. F. Cuv.

Land and Fresh-water Vertebrates in Victoria. 39

Among the Dasyurids we may note the restriction of Phasco-
logah caiura, Sminthopsis murina, Antechinomys lanigera and
Dasyurus geoffroyi to N.W. Victoria, and the restriction of
Phascologah minima, Thylacinus cynocephalus and Sarcophilus
ursinus to Tasmania ; the former apparently due to the climatic
(especially, as has been suggested by Professor Spencer, probably
the hygrometric) barrier, and the latter to the absence of the
dingo, while we have already alluded to the influence of the
absence of the dingo on the perpetuation of the larger Tasmanian
carnivorous marsupials in Tasmania. Further, while Phascologah
flavipes and the more widely distributed P. penicillata occur in
North and in South Victoria, P. sivainsoni and Sminthopsis
leucopits and Dasyurus maculatus are found in Tasmania and only
the moister districts of Victoria.

Peramelid^e.

T.

s.

s.w.

N.W.

N.E.

X

X
X

X

X

X

X
X

X

Perameles.

P. ooesuta, Shaw -
P. nasuta, Geoff. -
P. gunnii, Gray -
P. bougainvilii, Quoy A; Gaim.
var. Jasciata, Gray

CH.EROPUS.

C. castanotis, Gray

Thus Perameles fasciata and Chceropus castanotis are confined to
the less humid part of Victoria, where P. obesula is wantingj
though it occurs in Tasmania and Southern Victoria.

40 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

PlIALAXGERIDiE.

T.

s.

s.w.

N.W.

N.E.

E.

Phascolarctus.

P. cinereus, Goklfuss -

X

X

X

X

X

Phalangista.

Trichosurus.

T. vulpecula, Kerr

X

X

X

X

X

var. fulioinosns, Og.

X

T. caninus, Ogilby

X

X

Pseudochirus.

P. cooki, Desm. -

X

X

X

X

X

P. peregrinus, But 1 < 1 .

X

Dromicia.

D. lepida, Olcltield Thomas -

X

D. nana, Desm. -

X

X

Petauroides.

( = Petaurista, Desm.) -

P. taguanoides, Desm. -

( = volans, var. typica, Thomas)

X

X

X

Petaurus.

( = Belideus)

P. breviceps, Waterh. -

X

X

X

P. aus/ra/is, Shaw

X

P. sciureus, Shaw

X

( ! V.MNOBELIDEUS.

G. /eadbeateri, McCoy -

X

ACROBATES.

A. pygmceus, Shaw

X

Phascolomyid.e.

T.

s.

s.w.

x.w.

N.E.

E.

Phascolomys.

P. ursinus, Shaw-
P. mitchelli, Owen

X

X

X

X

Land and Fresftr-water Vertebrate* in Victoria. 41

Tasmania is distinctly weaker in Phalangeridce. The absence
of Phascolarctus is very marked. There are no peculiar North
Victorian forms in these two families. This distribution agrees
well with the nearly total absence of the forest-loving Phal-
angeridce from Central Australia (Horn Expedition).

Macropodid.e.

T.

s.

S.W.

N.W.

N.E.

E.

Macro pus.

J/, giganteus, Zimm. -

X

X

X

X

X

var. fuliginosus, Desm. -

X

X

var. melanops, Gould

x

M. robustus, Gould

X

M. rufus, Desm. -

X

21. ualabatus, L. & G.

typicus, Thomas -

X

X

M. ruficollis, Desm.

var. typicus, Thomas

X

var. bennettii, Waterh. -

X

X

X

M. thetidis, Less.

X

Onychogale.

0. frcenata, Gould

X

0. lunata, Gould

X

Lagorchestes.

L. leporoides, Gould

x

Petrogale.

P. penicillata, Gray

X

Bettoxgia.

B. cuniculus, Og.

X

X

B. penicillata, Gray

X

Potorous.

P. tridactylus, Kerr

= P apical is, Gould - i x

= P. rufus, H. & P. -

X

42 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

The northern group of Macropodidcz is very marked, consisting
of M. rufus, M. rolnistus, Onychogale fraenata and O. lunata, and
Lagorchestes leporoides. The Tasmanian forms are few in number
but are all closely allied to those of Southern Victoria.

MONOTREMATA.

T.

s.

s.w.

N.W.

N.E.

E.

EcHIDNIDjE.

Echidna.

E. aculeata, Shaw

X

X

X

X

X

var. setosa, Cuv.

X

ORNITHORHYNCHIDiE.

Ornithorhyxchus.

0. anatinus, Shaw

X

X

X

X

REPTILIA.
CHELONIA.

T.

S. &E.

N. k W.

ClIELYDIDiE.

Emydura (Ciielymys).

E. macquaria, Cuv. -

X

Chelodixa.

C. /ojigicollis, Shaw -

X

X

Neither of these Chelonians seems to have reached Tasmania.
Emydura macquaria does not appear to be an inhabitant of
Coastal New South "Wales or South-East Victoria, while Chelo-
dina longicollis occurs freely on both sides of the mountain chain
in both colonies.

Land and Fresh-uxder Vertebrates in Victoria. 43

OPHIDIA.

T.

S. &E.

x. \- w.

Typiilopid.e.

Typhlops.

T. bicolor, Peters

X

T. polygrammicus, Schleg.

X

T. bi-tuberculatus, Peters -

X

Dexdrophid.e.

Dexdrophis.

D. pu7ictulata, Gray

X

Pythonid-j:.

MORELIA.

M. variegata, Gray -

X

AL spilotes -

X

Elapid.e.

DlEMEXIA.

D. superciliosa, Fischer -

2

X

X

D. microlepidota, McCoy -

X

D. aspidorhyncha, McCoy

X

D. reticulata, Gray -

X

PSEUDOXAJA.

P. nucha/is, Giinth. -

X

PSEUDECHIS.

P. porphyriacus, Shaw

X

X

P. australis, Gray -

X

FURIXA.

F. bicucullata, McCoy

X

HOPLOCEPHALUS.

H. curtus, Schl.

X

X

X

H. superbus, Giinth.

x

X

H.flagellum, McCoy

X

X

H. coronoides, Giinther

X

X

H. signatus, Jan.

X

Vermicella.

V. aimulata, Gray -

X

Acaxthopiiis.

A. a/itarctica, Shaw

x

44 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

In summaries of this sort, while we may make use of numbers,
we are very far from being able to obtain in accurate numerical
terms the relations which the compared regions bear to one
another. The number of species which are common to two
regions may be the same as that for two other regions, but, if
the former are species abounding in individuals while the latter
are rare forms, it is plain that the latter relationship points to a
more ancient continuity than the former. Inaccuracy in report
of single or infrequent occurrences may greatly affect numerical
statistics. There is always a margin of doubtful cases which we
cannot altogether exclude, and cannot put into the same category
with well-authenticated or especially with well-known species.
Numbers then can do little more than indicate the general trend
of the evidence.

Of the harmless snakes there are no Tasmanian records, but in
Victoria there are Blind Snakes, Green Tree Snakes and Cai'pet
Snakes. Of the Blind Snakes Typhlops polygrammicus is com-
mon in the warm, drier, northern parts of the colony. Krefft
mentions T. bicolor as being found near Melbourne, but it is
certainly uncommon.

The Tree Snake, Dendrophis punctulata, is in Victoria confined
to the northern area, where it is tolerably plentiful. The Carpet
Snake, More/in variegata, is not met with south of the Divide,
but becomes common toward the Murray border. It occurs in
all parts of Australia, except in South Victoria and the adjacent
coast district of New South Wales. Krefft records the allied
Diamond Snake of New South Wales, M. spilotes* from the
Murray district of Victoria,

Speaking generally then, the harmless snakes are characteristic
of the northern, and are but rare visitors of the southern, parts of
Victoria. Of the venomous snakes, Furina, Vermicella and
Acanthopsis are northern genera exclusively.

*.V. variegatus and M. spilotes are united in the B.M. Catalogue.

Land and Fresh-water Vertebrates in Victoria. 45
LACERTILIA.

(jkckoxid.e.
Gymnodactylus.

G. milii/sii, Bory. -

Phyllodactylus.

P. marmoratus, Gray

DlPLODACTYLUS.

D. strophurus, D. it B. -
D. vittatus, Gray -
D. tessellatus, Gunth.

Gehyra.

G. variegata, D. ct B.

Pygopodid.e.
Pygopus.

P. lepidotus, Lac.

Delma.

D.fraseri, Gray
D. impar, Fischer -

Aprasia.

A. pulchella, Gray

Lialis.

L. burtouii, Gray

AGAMIDiE.

Amphibolurus.

A. adelaidensis, Gray
A. pictus, Peters
A angulifer, Gray -
A muricatus, White
^4. barbatus, Cuv. -

Tympanocryptis.

71. lineata, Peters -

Physignathus.

/^. lesueiirii, Gray -

VARANIDiE.

Varanus.

J' varius, Shaw
F. gouldii, Gray

_ ScINCIDjE.

Egerxia.

_£. whitii, Lacep.
Zi. striolata, Peters -
Zi. cunninghami, Gray

s. & e. x. & w.

x (var.)

* Portland.

46 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

T.

S. i E.

N. & W.

Trachysaurus.

T. rugosus, Gray

X

Tiliqua.

T. scincoides, White

X

X

X

T. nigro-lutea, Gray

X

X

X*

T. occipitalis, Peters

X

HlNULIA (LYGOSOMA).

H. /esueurii, D. &, B.

X

X

H. hvniolata, White

X

H. gitoyi, D. & B. -

X

X

LlOLEPISMA (LYGOSOMA)

L. mustelinum, O'Sh.

X

L. entrecasteauxii, D. & B.

X

X

L. trilineatitm, Gray

X

X

X

L. metallicum, O'Sh.

X

X

L. guichenoti, D. k,. B.

X

X

L. pretiosum, O'Sh. -

X

X

L. ocellatum, Gray -

X

K. tetradactylum, O'Sh. -

X

Emoa (Lygosoma)

E. spenceri, L. cfc F.

X

Homolepida (Lygosoma)

H. casuarime, D. & B.

X

Hemiergis (Lygosoma)

H. peronii, Fitzing -

X

H. decresiensis, Gray

X

Siaphos (Lygosoma).

,S. maccoyi, L. & F. -

X

xt

Rhodona (Lygosoma).

R. bougainvillii, Gray

X

X

R. punctato-vittata, Giinth.

X

Ablepharus.

A. boutonii, Desjard.

X

A. lineo-ocellatus, D. k, B.

X

X

A. greyi, Gray

X

A. r/wdonoides, L. & F. (M.S.)

X

* Grampians.

t Goulburn Yalley.

Land and Fresh-water Vertebrates in Victoria. 47

The table discloses the interesting fact that the Geckos are
apparently altogether absent from Tasmania, and the forests of
south-east Victoria, while they abound in the drier interior.
Other forms restricted to the north-west are Lialis, Amphibolurus
pictus, Vara mis gouldii, Trachysaurus, Tiliqua occipitalis, Rhodona
punctato-vittata, and Ablepharus bontonii, and A. greyi. The
Tasmanian Lizards are of much fewer species than the Victorian,
but they are of South Victorian alliances, comprising a rather
marked subsection of Amphibolurus, and a number of the skinks
with a transparent disk in the lower eyelid. Homolepida
casuarince, probably occurs or has occurred in East Gippsland, as
it is found in Coastal New South Wales.

AMPHIBIA.

T.

s.

s.w.

N.W. N.E. E.

Cystignathid.e.

LlMNODYNASTES.

L. peronii, Gunth.

X

X

L. tasmaniensts, Gunth.

X

X

X

x

L. dorsal is, Gray -

X

Crinia.

C. signi/era, Girard

X

x

C. tasmanienesis, Gunth.

X

C. Icevis, Gunth. -

X

C. victoriana, Boulgr. -

X

C. froggatti, Fletcher -

X

X

X

X

Heleioporus.

H. picl/is, Peters -

X

X

BUFONID.E.

PSEUDOPHRYNE.

P. bibrom'i, Giinth.

X

X

X

P. semimarmorata, Lucas

X

P. dendyi, Lucas -

X

Hyla. Hylid^.

H. aurea, Lesson

X

X

H. peronii, Bibron

X

X

H. parvidens, Peters -

?

H. ewingit, D. & B.

X

X

X

H. lesueurii, D. & B. - '

X

48 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

In the Census of Victorian Frogs, P.R.S.V., 1891, I included
Heleiopoi-its albopunctatus. This was an error. The specimens on
which the inclusion was based proved to be very old and large
individuals of Limnodynastes dorsnlis.

I am inclined to suspect that all the smooth Crinias of Victoria
and Tasmania are varieties of but one species.

There does not seem to be in Victoria the marked distinction
between the interior and coast forms of Batrachians which Mr.
Fletcher has pointed out in the New South Wales species.
Certainly the drier conditions of inland New South Wales are
much severer than those of inland Victoria. The frogs of
Northern Victoria, too, it must be admitted are not sufficiently
known.

The most striking fact brought out by the table is the absence
of Heleioporus and Pseudophryne (as far as is known) from
Tasmania.

PISCES.

T.

s.v.

N.V.

x Pekcid.e.
Lates.

L. colonorum, Giinth.

L. simi/is, Castelnau

L. antarctiais, Cast.

L. victoricz, Cast.

X

X
X

X
X

MlCROPERCA.

M. tasmaiiice, Johnston
M. yarrce, Cast.

X

X

Oligorus.

0. macquariensis, C. & V.

0. mitdielli, Cast. -

X

X

Ctenolates.

C. auratus, Cast.
C. chrystyi, Cast.

X
X

rp, Pristipomatid.e.
Therapon.

T. niger, Cast.

T. richardsoni, Cast.

X
X

MURRAYIA. .

M. guntheri, Cast. -
M. cyprinoides, Cast.

X
X

Land and Fresh-water Vertebrates in Victoria. 49

T.

sv..

N.V.

M. bramoides, Cast,

X

M. riverina, Krefft -

X

RlVERINA.

R. fiuviatilis, Cast.

X

SPARIDiE.

GlRELLA.

G. tricuspidata, C. & V. -

X

X

G. simplex, Richardson -

X

X

G. blackii. Cast, -

X

Chrysophrys.

C. austra/is, Giinth.

X

X

Trachixid^e.

Aphritis.

A. wvillii, C. & V. -

X

1

^4. /wi7, Cast.

X

MuGILID^E.

AOOXOSTOMA.

^4. die mens is, Rich. -

X

X

^4. lacustris, Cast.

X*

X

Gadopsid^e.

Gadopsis.

(?. marmoratus, Rich.

X

X

xt

G. gibbosits, McCoy -

Similar

X

G. gracilis, McCoy -

Varieties

X

SlLURID^E.

COPIDOGLANIS.

C. tandamis, Mitchell

X

3

Varieties

HaPLOCHITONIDjE.

Prototroctes.

P. mamna, Giinth. -

X

X

Galaxias. Galaxim'

G. trnttaceus, C. k V. -

X

X

G. attemtatiis, Jenyns

X

X

G. ocellatus, McCoy

X

G. auratus, Johnston -

X

G. cylindricus, Cast. -

X

G. delicatuhis, Cast.

X

G. weedoni, Johnst.

X

* Kinar Island.

t Small in upper reaches.

50

Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

T.

S.V.

\ A*

G. atkinsoni, Johnst.

X

G- amoenus, Cast. -

X

G. versicolor, Cast. -

X

G. ornatus, Cast.

X

G. nigothoruk, Lucas

X

Cyprinid.e.

Neo-carassius.

N. ventricosus, Cast.

X

ClUPEID/E.

Chatoessus.

C. ricliardsoni, Cast.

X

MCR.ENID.E.

Anguilla.

A. australis, Rich. -

x

x

A. reitihardtii, Cast.

X

PeTKOMYZONTIMS.

Mordacia.

M. mordax, Rich. -

X

X

Geotria.

G. allporli, Giinth. -

X

G. australis, Gray -

X

Professor McCoy, in his " Prodromus of Victorian Zoology,"
long ago pointed out the remarkable distinctness between the
fishes of the rivers which flow into the Bass Straits and those
of the rivers of the Murray system.

The absence of Gadopsis from the northern rivers of Victoria
may be due to the presence of Oligorus. Young individuals
occur in the upper reaches in which Oligorus does not, and the
introduction of the Murray Cod into the Yarra since 1857, has
practically destroyed the Blackfish in that river.

The close correspondence of the South Victorian and Tas-
manian genera, often species, will be obvious from the table. In
the case of Galaxias almost every local stream or lake has its
own varieties. A similar variation has been noticed by Macleay
and by Ogilby in the New South Wales species of Galaxias.

Land cud Fresh-water Vertebrates in Victoria. 51

GENERAL CONCLUSIONS.

Ever since it was formed, or existed in anything like its
present condition, Bass Straits must have presented a very
formidable mechanical barrier to the passage of all land and
fresh-water Vertebrates unfurnished with wings. On the other
hand, seeing the exceedingly wide continental distribution of
such slow-travelling animals as Irichosums vulpecula, Trachy-
saurus mgosus, Egernia zvhitii, Liaiis burtonii, it seems plain
that the Dividing Range in its present state cannot have acted
at all as a serious mechanical barrier. But the Dividing Range
has been felt in its action on the rainfall. Widely divergent
climatic conditions have thus been produced, yielding a humid
region in the south-east and a dry region in the north-west.
Where the nature of the soil was favourable great forests have
nourished, as in Gippsland and in south-west Tasmania. Thus in
the one district we have excess of moisture and abundant shade,
and in the other lack of moisture and consequent excess of sun-
shine by day and of radiation by night, all potent factors in
animal life. Hence two faunas suited to the two regions. Where
this barrier is most perfect the separation of the districts is most
sharply marked ; in the west, where it gradually disappears, the
faunas merge to some extent, but as the presence of the range
intensities the humid conditions on the coast side, there is less
mingling of forms than might at first have been expected.

As we have seen from the tables, the characteristic assemblage
of animals of the drier area comprises the Jerboa-Rats (ffapaloiis)
among the Rodents ; the Jerboa Pouched Mouse (Antechinomys),
two other Pouched Mice (Phascologak calura and Sminthopsis
murina), and Geotf'roy's, or the Black-tailed, Native Cat (Dasy-
urus geoffroyi) ; the Striped Bandicoot (Peratneles Iwugainvillii,
var. fasciata) and the Pig-footed Bandicoot {Chieropus castiuiotis) ;
the Wallaroo (Macropus robustus) and Great Red Kangaroo (A/,
ritfus), the Hare Wallaby (Lagorchestes kporoides), and the
Bridled Wallabies (Onychogale frenata and O. lunata) among
the Marsupials ; the Murray Tortoise (E my dura macquaria) ;
the Blind Snakes (Typhlops), Tree Snake (De/idrop/iis), and the
two Pythons, the Carpet Snake {Morelia variegata) and Diamond
Snake (Af. spi/oks), and among venomous snakes the genera

4A

52 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Furina, Vermicella (Ringed Snake), and Acanthophis (Death
Adder) ; half-a-dozen kinds of Gecko (of genera Gymnodactylus,
Phyllodactyhts, Diplodactylus, and Gehyrd) ; the snake-like
Lizards (Aprasia, Lialis) ; Amphibolurus pictus : Gould's Monitor
(Varanus gouldii); the Stump Tailed Lizard (Tracliysaun/s
rugosus), and Western Blue Tongued Lizard (Tiliqua occipitalis)
with a few smaller forms ; and lastly the assemblage of fishes of
the Murray basin, of the genera Oligorits, Ctenolates, Therapon,
Murrayia, Riverina, Copidoglanis and Chatoessus, known as
Murray Cod, Murray Perch, Murray Bream, Murray Cat-
tish, etc.

While the number of species in Tasmania is always much
smaller than the number in southern Victoria in all the groups
except the Fish and perhaps the Mice, the two faunas present a
very similar facies. Thus every genus of Marsupial, Reptile,
Amphibian, and Fish which is represented in Tasmania, except
Thylacimts and Sarcophilus is met with in southern Victoria.
Thylacimts and Sarcophilus did live on the continent, but have
been exterminated by the Dingo. Even the Tasmanian species*
are in most cases identical with those of the adjacent portion of
Victoria.

The fresh-water and forest forms are characteristically similar
in the two regions. The fish scarcely show more than varietal
differences. The common genera are Lales, Mtcrqperca, Girella,
Chrysophrys, Aphn'/is, Agonostoma, Gadopsis (Blackfish), Proto-
troctes (Yarra Herring), Galaxias (Mountain Trout), Anguilla
(Eel), and Mordacia and Geotria (Lampreys). Professor McCoy
pointed out in his Prodromus how absolutely distinct this as-
semblage is from that of the Murray basin. Mr. R. M. Johnston's
" Census of Tasmanian Fish " has enabled us to see how the fish
of Tasmania are almost identical with those of Southern Victoria.
If, as I have long believed, the Tasmanian Crinias are not separ-
able from the smooth Victorian species with tiny vomerine teeth,
then the resemblance of the amphibians of the two regions is as
close as that of the fish. Amongst the forest-frequenters the
mammals are most prominent and most important. The great
Grey Kangaroo, Forester par excellence, the Scrub Wallabies

* See Professor Spencer's Address to the Biological Section of the A.A.A.S., Hobart,
1S92, for a detailed account of the Tasmanian Fauna.

Land and Fresh-water Vertebrates in Victoria. 53

(J/, ualabatus and M. billardieri) and the Thylacine ranged in
the high woods of both regions. The two native cats, the
common and the ring-tailed Opossums, and the two Dormouse
Opossums (Dromia'a) are the representatives in Tasmania of an
arboreal fauna which is much more strongly developed in South
Victoria and Eastern Australia. The Flying Opossums and the
Koala, most specialised of all for life among the trees, are
wanting altogether in Tasmania. With the exception of the
common Opossum, a most enterprising and versatile animal,*
the Tasmanian forest forms are absent from north-west Victoria.
From the zoological facts we are able to arrive at some definite
conclusions as to the relative age of the two barriers, the Bass
Straits and the Dividing Range. The marked distinctness,
frequently extending to the genera, of the faunas of the north-
west plains and the well-watered south-east hill and coast
country points to the long persistence and ancient origin of the
Dividing Range. So, going on the zoological evidence only, it
seems clear that the Bass Straits were formed sufficiently to
serve as an effective barrier before the dingo and the most highly
differentiated tree-forms had reached southern Victoria, and after
the forests had been established and the streams stocked with the
existing fish, long after the separation or evolution of the two
Victorian faunas had taken place. During the process of
widening and deepening of the Straits, the dingo invaded
Victoria, the Thylacine and Tasmanian Devil disappeared, while
the Koala and the beautiful Flying Opossums came in from the
north along the eastern strip of Australia, and took possession of
the Gippsland forests along with a less desirable immigration of
the Fruit-eating Bats, and, speaking generally, the present distri-
bution of Vertebrates in Victoria has been effected.

* In Kent Island this animal has in the total absence of trees taken to the ground and
lives among the grass tussocks.

Art. VII. — Description of two new Species of Lizards
from Central Australia.

By A. H. S. Lucas, M.A., B.Sc, and C. Frost, F.L.S.

Ophidiocephalus, gen. now

Parietal bones distinct. Tongue nicked at the tip, inferiorly
with six longitudinal ridges bearing papilla?. Ear hidden.
Rudiments of hind limbs externally. Head with symmetrical
plates. Scales smooth, cycloid, hexagonal, imbricate, all similar,
subequal. No pneanal pores.

Ophidiocephahis adds a new genus to the Australian family of
snake-like lizards (Pygopodidtz). Its nearest ally is Delma. In
De/ma, however, the ear is exposed, and there are two median
series of transversely enlarged ventral scales.

O. tceniaius, sp. nov.

Snout very prominent, pointed, as long as the distance behind
the eye of the posterior border of the parietals; no distinct
canthus rostralis; eye very small, without a distinct circular
scaly lid ; ear hidden. Tail about once and one-half the length
of the head and body. The rudimentary limbs as long as the
distance between the eye and the nostril. Rostral large, pro-
iecting, triangular, twice as broad as high ; nostril pierced between
the first labial, the nasal, and the fronto-nasal; a pair of narrow
nasals, a pair of narrow fronto-nasals and a pair of large pre-
frontals; frontal large, hexagonal, about as long as its distance
from the rostral; a pair of large parietals; a pair of temporals
and a pair of enlarged scales separated by a small azygos scale
border the parietals; two supra-orbitals, a loreal, a post-ocular
and a series of small scales between the eye, the labial, and the
loreal ; six upper labials, the fourth below the eye, and five lower
labials; mental large, truncate behind; first lower labials narrow,
not meeting behind the mental. Sixteen longitudinal rows of
scales around, the middle of the body, subequal. Dorsal surfaces
uniformly cream-coloured; lateral and ventral brownish-grey, each
scale with a light border.

New Species of Lizards front Central Australia. 55
Dimensions.

Head

8 mm

Width of head

... 4-5 „

Body

94 „

Tail

... 160 „

Hind-limb

... 2-5 „

Locality. — Charlotte Waters.

Diplodactylus conspici/Iatus, sp. nov.

Head short, high, convex; snout pointed, deep, longer than the
distance between the eye and the ear-opening; canthus rostralis
sharply defined; diameter of orbit two-thirds the length of the
snout; ear-opening small, rounded. Body moderate ; limbs slender,
meeting or slightly overlapping when adpressed. Digits not much
depressed, with small rounded tubercles below ; the apex not
dilated, with two small oval plates inferiorly, all clawed. Upper
surfaces covered with small granular scales, largest and flattest on
the middle of the back. Rostral large, hexagonal, not twice as
broad as high, with trace of median cleft above; nostril pierced
between seven or eight nasals, the superior and the anterior
swollen, the latter largest and transversely dilated, the posterior
small, granular; a polygonal plate between the nasals behind the
rostral; one anterior upper labial distinct, but all the other scales
bordering the gape above and below are quite indistinguishable from
the surrounding small granules or scales; mental large, nearly as
large as the rostral, produced and rounded behind ; no distinct
lower labials or chin-shields; abdominal scales very small, not so
large as mid-dorsal. Tail short, suboval, discoid, convex above,
flat beneath, with rings of small muriform scales, most regular
and convex and largest above, flat and imbricate below. No pores.
Males with cluster of about eight small conical scales on each side
of base of tail. Pinkish-grey above, with irregular, more or less
transverse, brownish-black reticulations, a whitish streak along
the canthus rostralis ; sides and upper surfaces of limbs dotted
with creamy-pink ; under surfaces whitish, immaculate.

56 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Dimensions.

A

B

Total length

61 mm.

73 mm

Head

... 11-5 „

. 12 ,.

Width of head

8-5 „

.. 9 „

Body

... 34-5 „

42 „

Fore-limb ...

16 „

.. 16 „

Hind-limb

... 18-5 „

.. 18 „

Tail

15 „

.. 19 „

Locality. — Charlotte Waters.

The above lizards were sent to Professor Spencer by Mr. P. M.
Byrne, of Charlotte Waters, to whom we are already so deeply
indebted for valuable specimens.

We are also indebted to the kindness of Professor Lyle of the
University of Melbourne, who secured for us a radiograph of the
unique specimen of Ophidiocephalus taniatus, and thus enabled us
to determine the distinctness of the parietal bones.

Art. VIII. — The Temperatures of Reptiles, MonotreTnes
and Marsupials.

(Plate VI.).

By Alexander Sutherland.

[Read 4th June, 1S9G.]

There has for many years past been a tendency to tl'minish or
ignore the distinction between the cold-blooded and the warm-
blooded types of animal life. Quite a number of writers adopt
the habit of speaking of " the so-called cold-blooded animals," as
if the contrast were an unfounded belief that increasing know-
ledge is fast abolishing. Yet the difference is one that is not
only real, but in some respects radical. In very few, however, of
nature's classes is there found a line of sharp demarcation, and
the chief purpose of this paper is to point out that, though the
distinction between the two types is real, there lies between these
two types a line of steady gradation.

Although the invertebrates have the capacity of producing
heat, they are themselves cold-blooded. With the exception of
the insects, they very rarely rise more than a fraction of a degree
above the temperature of the media in which they happen to be.
According to observations of Professor Valentin, polypi, medusa?,
echinoderms, molluscs, crustaceans and cephalopods are able to
raise themselves about a fifth of a degree, sometimes as much as
three-fifths of a degree, above their environment.*

Among insects the power of heat-production is very much
greater. Though essentially cold-blooded creatures, in the sense
that they have no fixed standard of body-heat towards which
they approximate, they are almost always warmer than their
media; but if they are at rest that excess is only a degree or two.
In case, however, of severe exertion, they are capable of warming
themselves to a remarkable extent. George Newport showed
that an ants', bees', or wasps' nest at a period when its inmates
are dormant will not be more than a tenth of a degree warmer
than the surrounding air. But when the insects are roused and
excited they are able, by rapid movements of their wings, to warm

" AH Degrees in this paper are Centigrade.

58 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

themselves and their nests very considerably. As the result of
twelve experiments on a nest of thirty bees, Newport found
an average elevation of 3-5°; but on seven occasions when he
violently agitated them he obtained an average elevation of 5*3°.
At times when bees are naturally much excited, as at swarming
time, their temperature may rise as much as 22°. According to
experiments of Juch and Newport (Phil. Trans., 1837, p. 259),
ants in an ordinary state of activity keep their nests some seven
or eight degrees warmer than the surrounding air, but when
agitated the difference readily rises to twelve or thirteen degrees.

These more intelligent insects apparently make use of this
capacity of generating heat for the purpose of quickening the
hatching of eggs and the development of nymphs. Nevertheless
they are distinctly cold-blooded animals, for at rest they take the
temperature of their media, and any elevation is temporary and
due to the immediately preceding display of energy.

In the case of tish, amphibia and reptiles the same is true.
At rest all of them remain at the temperature of their environ-
ment, rising and falling with it. and showing no capacity,
however rudimentary, of maintaining a fixed and characteristic
temperature ; yet all can warm themselves by exertion. The
large blue-tongued lizard, which is common in the southern parts
of Victoria {Cyclodus gigas), can warm himself as much as half a
degree in ten minutes of anger. In five experiments of this sort
I found that different individuals had different capacities of being
irritated, but the average was a trifle under half a degree for ten
minutes of exasperation.

By activity, and consequent heat-production, all fish, amphibia
and reptiles seem able to keep themselves a little warmer than the
air or water in which they dwell. Dutroche tells us (Ann. des
Sciences Nat., xiii., p. 20) that the newt can keep itself from 2°
to 5t?° above the temperature of its medium, the turtle 1^° to 34°,
and the common green lizard of France {Lacerta viridis) from 4°
to 7°. Max Furbinger asserts that species of blind-worm rise as
much as 8° above the temperature of the air. Fish at rest
appear to take almost absolutely the temperature of the water
wherein they live, but after a struggle, or any other form of
energy, they may warm themselves two or three degrees.

This, however, has no real affinity with a warm-blooded
habit. And yet these creatures approach in a remote way the

Temperatures of Reptiles, etc

59

warm-blooded condition by sometimes developing a capacity for
heat-production in the action of their viscera. Dumeril has
shown that snakes by mere digestion can warm themselves from
2° to 4°, the maximum temperature occurring about twenty-four
hours after a meal. Moulting may warm a snake nearly a
degree, and frogs, lizards and serpents all warm up with amatory
emotion.

Thus it constantly happens that these animals, though essen-
tially cold-blooded, may be observed at temperatures somewhat
above that of their environment. But in general that excess is
not great, and it leaves the distinction between the warm-blooded
and the cold-blooded type quite unaffected.

The true criterion of the difference is of course the concomi-
tance of the temperature of the animal and its medium. An
animal of the warm-blooded type may vary a trifle in its general
body temperature when the climate alters, but it maintains an
almost constant degree of heat. The reptile, though it may
maintain itself a few degrees above the surrounding temperature,
always varies with it, rising and falling so as to keep always the
same number of degrees in excess.

In two experiments I conducted to see how far this concomi-
tancy held, I placed two specimens of the large lizard already
mentioned into a small tank of water, so that only their noses
were above water. I then warmed up the water at various rates
of speed by means of one or more lamps. The following tables
will show how closely the lizards followed the temperature of the
enclosing water : —

Lizards, Average Weight, 3o0 G-rams.

Time.

Temp, of

Water.

C.

Temp, of

Lizard.

C.

Time.

Temp, of

Water.

C.

Temp, of

Lizard.

C.

2-30 .

.. 18-4 .

. 18-0

4-15

.. 25-2 .

. 24-1

2-45 .

.. 19-8 .

.. 18-9

4-30

.. 260 .

. 24-7

3-0 .

.. 20-6 .

.. 19-9

6-15

.. 29-2 .

. 28-9

3-15 .

.. 21-8 .

.. 20 7

8-0

.. 32-8 .

. 31-4

3-30 .

.. 22-8 .

.. 21-7

9 0

.. 31-0 .

. 29-4

3-45 .

.. 23-1

.. 22-5

11-0

.. 24-0 .

. 23-5

4-0 .

.. 24-4 .

.. 22-9

60

Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Lizards, Average Weight, 330 Grams.

Time.

Temp, of

Water.

0.

Temp, of

Lizard.

C.

Time.

Temp, of

Water.

C.

Temp, of

Lizard.

C.

4-20 ..

.. 11-5 .

. 12-0

5-10 .

. 21-0 .

. 19-5

4-25 .

14-4

13-6

5-15 .

. 21-6 .

. 19-8

4-30 .

.. 16-0 .

. 14-6

5-20 .

. 22-4 .

. 20-4

4 35 .

.. 16-7 .

. 15-2

5-25 .

. 23-0 .

. 20-9

4-40 .

.. 17-2 .

. 16-0

5-30 .

. 23-6 .

. 21-4

4-45 .

.. 17-8 .

. 16-8

5-40 .

. 24-6 .

22*1

4 50 .

.. 183 .

. 17-0

70

. 30-1 .

. 28-6

4-55 .

.. 190 .

. 17-8

8-0 .

. 35-0 .

. 33-6

5 0

.. 19-6 .

. 18-2

9-30 .

. 29-5 .

. 28-0

5-5

20-2 .

. 19-2

11-0

. 24-0 .

. 23-0

Similar tables might be made out for fish, for turtles, for
snakes, and all the cold-blooded animals, showing that they take
their temperature absolutely from the media in which they exist,
and when it is found that they do not exactly coincide with it,
the cause is generally to be found in the fact that for a rising or
falling temperature of the medium the animal will not at once
respond to the change ; it lags behind and will in a cooling
medium be warmer, in a warming medium cooler than its sur-
roundings. Occasionally, however, a slight excess of heat is due
to the animal's activity.

Cyclodus gigas is a very sluggish creature, and if left alone never
warms himself by any exertion, yet if one takes his temperature
in the early part of the day it will almost always be found to be
below that of the air. After sunset, it is generally higher.
During two years I kept specimens of this species in a box, some-
times six or eight, sometimes only two or three. I took their
temperatures morning and evening, not altogether continuously,
but throughout the larger portion of that time. The average of
all these observations gave for lizards 181°, for the air 18"4°.
This is a very close approximation considering that the tempera-
tures had the wide range that lies between 12° and 32°. The
lizards appear to be colder a little than the air. This I believe to
be clue only to the fact that, taking temperatures before eight
o'clock in the morning, the lizards were still considerably in the

Temperatures of Reptiles, etc. 61

rear of the air temperature, while between five and six o'clock in
the evening, though they were above the air temperature, the
excess then did not wholly balance the morning deficiency.

I am convinced that if one took the temperature of a quiet
lizard every hour for a month, the average would correspond
almost exactly with the average temperature of the air. The
morning and evening observations which I took would give a less
exact result, though from them the difference is only three-tenths
of a degree.

A cold-blooded animal is therefore one which when at rest takes
its temperature almost absolutely from its environment. When
a snake is asleep, the slow beat of its heart, eight or ten times in
a minute, will generally, so far as I have noticed, keep the muscles
of the heart itself about six or eight tenths of a degree warmer
than the rest of the body. This, diffused through the whole body,
must have a tendency to slightly increase its temperature, but
only to a minute extent. The same snake, however, after a time
of activity may be two or three degrees above the heat of the
surrounding air. Yet even that is inconsiderable compared with
the extreme rise and fall of the creature's temperature with the
alternations of day and night, of hot or cold weather.

The steps whereby the more active and intelligent warm-
blooded types have arisen from this lethargic level would form a
fascinating subject for enquiry, but I purpose here only the much
easier and more prosaic one of recording that such steps, however
caused, do actually present themselves, and that these are in the
most perfect accordance with the existing classification, which is
based on anatomical considerations alone.

The monotremes are, in consideration solely of their more
reptilian anatomy, placed lowest in the scale of mammals. Their
low temperature would entirely justify, were justification in any-
way needed, the position thus assigned them next to the reptiles.
The temperature of the duck-billed platypus has been determined
by Baron Miklouho-Maclay to be, as the average of three observa-
tions, 24-8° when the water in which the animals were kept
averaged 22-2°. (Journ. of Linnrean Soc. of N.S.W., VIII., p.
425, and IX., 1204.)

Now, the average of forty-five specimens of the ten higher orders
of the mammalia, excluding the monotremes and marsupials, is

62 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

38-9", as calculated from Dr. John Davy's lists (Edin. Phil. Journ.
1825, p. 300), while the average of a similar but shorter list
supplied by Max Fiirbinger is 39°. We may take this as fairly
indicative of the general mammal temperature, which does not,
except in constitutional disturbances, vary so much as two degrees
on either side of this limit. No mammal indeed seems in good
health to be warmer than 40° ; scarcely any descend lower than
37°.

The platypus, therefore, at only 24*8J is almost a cold-blooded
animal. The only other genus of monotremes, the echidna,
carries us a step upwards. Baron Miklouho-Maclay's average of
live observations is 28°, while the air was 20°. I have kept at
different times fourteen specimens of Echidna hystrix and made
twenty-seven observations on the temperatures of all I happened
to have at any particular time. I found the average to be
29--T, or nearly a degree and a half above that of the Baron.
But these animals show their affinity with the reptiles by a
temperature so variable with the weather that we may readily
expect the average of one series of experiments to differ very
considerably from that of another.

An echidna one cold morning was so low as 22° ; another,
brought in from the forest in a sack exposed to a tierce midday
heat, registered so high as 36-6J. The following table will
represent the general character of the variations, the temperatures
in each case being the average of from three to six individuals,
which never varied from one another at the same time more than
a fifth of a degree : —

Echidna.

Air.

22u

14-4°

27-5"

14°

27-7"

14°

27-7'J

18°

28-2°

19^

28-3°

16-6"

28-7°

16°

29u

22-7°

29u

23u

Echidna.

Air.

29°

25"

29-5°

22-2"

29-5"

24u

30-3"

18u

311'

23-3°

31-4°

22*4"

32-2°

31-2"

32-9°

18-6°

36-6°

45°

Temperatures of Reptiles, etc. 63

This is an immense range for a mammal, and suggests a
reptilian want of capacity for temperature regulation. Moreover,
though the concomitancy between the air and the body tempera-
tures is by no means strict, there is enough to show that the one
in a large measure follows the other. It is to be remembered
that while a monotreme may rise and fall with the air, yet the one
change will follow the other after a dehnite period of time, and
an hour after sunset, though the air in a box may have grown
much cooler, the echidme in that box may have only begun to
cool.

The temperatures given by Dr. Richard Semon in the recent
number of his important work, Forschungsreisen in Austmlien,
run as follows : —

Echidna.

Air.

26-5-

21-5°

29-5°

22°

30-5"

18"

31"

24"

Echidna.

Air.

31-5"

18"

34"

31-5"

34-2°

22-5°

Here also the generally low temperature, combined with the
wide range, even though it is not strictly concomitant with
changes in air-temperatures, seems to suggest affinities with rep-
tiles.

The next stage in the anatomical classification brings us into
the order of the marsupials, and here again we make an upward
step in view of a temperature higher, but not so high as that of
mammals in general ; steadier, but not so steady as is usual in all
the remaining orders. I have observed the temperatures of
sixteen different species of marsupials, and they average 36°
exactly, as the result of 126 observations. They are thus 3°
below the average of other mammals.

The marsupial whose temperature, so far as I have observed,
comes next above the monotremes is the wombat, which stands
at 34-1°, as the average of single observations made on two speci-
mens (Phascolomys lasiorhinus, 3 4 -3°, and P. platyrhinus, 34°).
Next seems to stand the genus Petaurus, or flying squirrel. Mr.
Ernest Le Souef was good enough to observe for me the tempera-
tures of five specimens in the Zoological Gardens of Melbourne.
The average is 35 -7 °.

64 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

After that comes the genus Phascolarctos, our little native
bears or koalas. I have kept numerous specimens of this animal
(P. cinereus) on his native gum trees, with nothing artificial about
him save a strap and rope whereby he could be pulled down from
time to time to have his temperature observed. Thus I made
eighty-three observations, the average of which amounts to 36-4°.
Females at the breeding time are always very decidedly above
the ordinary degree of warmth. If such cases be excluded, the
average is exactly 36°. But the average for males alone is only
35"2°. The range of variation may be seen in the following nine
observations taken at intervals upon the same female : —

Koala.

Air.

35-0

7-7

35-2

11-.-)

35-6

10-0

35-7

19-0

36-0

22-0

Koala.

Air.

360

13-1

36-1

22-0

36-5

24-5

36-8

16-0

The range is here seen to be not very wide, yet I have often
known healthy specimens that had been for a while in the sun
stand as high as 37 "9°, while on a cool day or in a very shady
place the same individuals would be only 35 '3°, a range greater
than we would find under the same circumstances in any of the
higher mammals. The highest register I ever obtained for a
thoroughly healthy koala was 38-4°, which is a degree and a half
above the normal temperature of man; the lowest was 34 '9°, or
nearly two degrees below man's normal. The former temperature
would in man imply some constitutional derangement, a distinct
case of feverishness ; in the koala it denotes only that it has been
out in the sun. The lower temperature, though common in the
koala, is never met with in man except in rare pathological
conditions. It is below the range of our ordinary clinical
thermometers.

I found that a big male specimen of this species, kept in a cool
shady place and registering 34-9°, could, by being brought into a
bright sun, be raised a tenth of a degree for every five minutes
he was kept in it. I regret that when I had abundant opportu-
nities I did not determine how far this warming process would
go ; but I have seen it continue for more than two hours at a
time.

Temper atwres of Reptiles, etc. 65

Females were, with only one exception, of higher temperature
than males when under the same conditions ; and the divergence
was always greatest when the females were suckling their young,
the average of tweiny-nve observations giving an excess of 1'2°.
The koala has only one young one at a time, but she has two
teats, one on each side of her pouch ; of these only one would be
functional at a time. That side of the pouch whereon was the
functional teat was invaribiy warmer than the other. The
average of twenty-six observations gave 36-G° for the one side as
against 3QQ for the other.

According to observations taken for me by Mr. Ernest Le Souef
the Dasyures come next at an average of 36°.

Phalangers stand next in order. The average of twenty two
observations on from two to four specimens of the ring-tailed
opossums (Phalangista) gave 36-6°, which is only a little below the
normal human temperature. But again the range was much
greater than one finds in any of the higher mammals. In cool
weather, with the thermometer at 16 8°, a male would register
about 35°, a female about one-tenth of a degree higher ; but in
warmer weather, though still in the shade, where the thermometer
registered 31" to 35°, the opossums would be about 37°; I once
observed two of them, the only ones I then had, for nearly a fort-
night together, which averaged about 39°, but as they died soon
after, I fear they had not been in good health when these records
were made.

Mr. Ernest Le Souef took for me the temperatures of three
of these Australian opossums in the Melbourne Zoological
Gardens. Phalangista vulpina gave 36-l°, Phalangista fuliginosa
37 -3 °. This corresponds with Selenka's observations of the true
opossums (Didelphys), which ranged about 37°.

I have made only four observations on the temperatures of the
kangaroo family. They are a little under the human standard.
Macropns giganteus gave SG'G0, Halmaturus bennettii gave 37T°,
Petrogale xanthopus 35-9°, while the tree kangaroo {Dendrogalus
grayi) was exactly at the human standard, 37°.

From the few recorded temperatui'es of rodents and insectivores,
I should think it most probable that they came next in order,
with perhaps the cetacea and sirenia, judging from occasional
records, as almost on the same level. All the other orders of
mammalia stand uniformly much above the human temperature.

66 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

It is clear, therefore, that there are grades of temperature, and
that the mammals which are classed lowest on anatomical
grounds are not only of the lowest temperature, but also of the
greatest range, and they are likewise, of all mammals, those
which are under the strongest and most direct influence of the
temperature of the environment.

Similar, though much less complete connecting links may be
seen in the case of birds. The lowest of birds are the Ratitae,
or Cursores, and these appear to have the lowest temperature.
Mr. Ernest Le Souef, with an amount of obliging trouble
which may be conceived, took for me in the Melbourne Zoological
Gardens observations on the temperature of the emu. These are
the lowest records of bird temperatures of which I know. They
averaged 39*5°, while all the birds above the Rati tee are invariably
over 40\ The temperature of thirty-six fowls, taken quietly by
night from their perches, averaged 41° exactly, while that of
twelve, lifted from the nests in which they were brooding, was
4T4". Numbers of fowls caught while roaming about averaged
41 -3U, but these of course were always warmed up previously by
a little violent exercise. Turkeys stand about the same level ;
ducks are stated, on good authority, to be lower ; but I have
found for these birds, from a fairly large number of observations,
an average of 42T". The temperatures ot birds of the more
intelligent orders is generally somewhat higher. If we exclude
the birds of prey, we might say that in all orders above the
anseres, grallse and gallinse the temperature ranges over 42". It
would be a matter of interest to secure some observations of the
temperature of the apteryx, in order to determine whether the
lowest of birds shows by its body warmth in some degree the
same reptilian affinity which the monotremes exhibit. In that
case there would be reason to believe that the rest of the Ratitse
would correspond closely to the Marsupials, being a connecting
link, but much closer to the higher forms than to the lower.

In a very general way, and not forgetting numerous limitations
and contradictions, it may be said that bodily activity depends on
body temperatures, that creatures such as insects, and reptiles are
active only when warmed up from without, but become torpid
with decreasing temperature. The type in which activity is
generally habitual, maintains its own body temperature. This is

Proc R S Victoria 1896 Plate 6.

>••

*

•-

^

■

\

■ 1

1

■ /

^

^VN

To show concomitance of temperatures of Lizards and Water
Upper Line Temperature of Water (dea. Cent)
tower Line Temperature of Lizards

To show want of concomitance in Temperatures

of Echidna and air

Upper Line. Echidna

Lower Line , Air.

i5*

19'

27«

:3"

\

19!

is:

with more rapid heating

To show want of concomitance in Tern
i i and 1/r
Upper Line Koala
LowcrLine Air.

Temperatures of Reptiles, etc. 67

seen in the mammals, but more still in the birds. But this warm-
blooded active condition was produced by no sudden emergence ;
the monotremes and marsupials form a gentle gradation between
the reptile and the carnivore or ungulate ; while, so far as
indications point, there is reason to believe that the lower birds
still are reminiscent of a once existent chain of links which
equally joined the cold-blooded lizards to those warmest-blooded
of all creatures, the passeriformes and fringilliformes.

Art. IX. — A Locality List of all the Minerals hitherto
recorded front Victoria.

By John A. Atkinson.

[Read 13th August, 1896.]

Introduction.

In offering this list of minerals found in Victoria, I do not
claim to have made any fresh records ; but rather to have
collected into one paper the records that are spread over a great
many different publications. New South Wales has its list in
Professor Liversidge's " Minerals of New South Wales," and a
supplementary list in the " Report of the Second Meeting of the
Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science, 1890."
Queensland, South Australia, and New Zealand, have their lists
also in the last-named work, and Tasmania has a list published by
Mr. W. F. Petterd in 1893, while the most recent list of Victorian
minerals was many years old, and, in consequence, incomplete,
inasmuch as it did not contain the records of the last twenty years
or more.

Having felt the want of such a list, and having time to spare,
I acted on the advice of gentlemen interested in mineralogy, and
undertook to search for all the published records and include them
in one catalogue. The object was not only to enumerate all the
minerals, but, as far as possible, also all the localities where they
were found, either in large or small quantities, and to give the
reference to the original record. The work demanded much more
time and labour than I anticipated, but I have derived much
pleasure and not a little profit from it, and the number of books
and papers I had to go through to find the records shows how
badly the work needed doing. It is a pity that some professional
mineralogist had not taken the work up, or, being left to an
amateur, that a more able man had not undertaken it. I feel
this the more when I contrast it with the list published in 1866
by Professor Ulrich, who seems to have clone most of the work of
this kind in Victoria.

Locality List of Miiberals front Victoria. 69

Very many interesting particulars were given in connection
with some of the records, and I should have liked much to include
them in this paper, but space would not admit of it, and thus, in
some respects, it may be looked upon as but an index to the
mineral records.

I have had a difficulty in fixing the mineralogical names for
some of the records, and in some cases I have not been able to
decide the correct species at all, as the composition alone was
given, e.g., " carbonate of copper," " oxide of iron," " lead ore,"
etc. This prevents me from being able to state accurately the
number of distinct mineral species recorded from Victoria, but I
calculate it to be somewhat over 200. Mr. W. F. Petterd in the
introduction to his " Catalogue of the Minerals of Tasmania,
1893," calculates that New South Wales has about 185 species,
New Zealand about 172, Queensland about 101, and South
Australia about 100; so that Victoria seems to rank highest of
the colonies in the number of its mineral species.

I have to thank Mr. G. B. Pritchard, and Mr. T. S. Hall, M.A.,
for much valuable assistance in connection with this paper ; also
Messrs. A. W. Howitt, F.G.S., O. R. Rule, late of the Techno-
logical Museum, A. Purdie, of Ballai'at School of Mines, and
D. Clark, of Bairnsdale School of Mines, for advice, suggestions,
records, etc., which they kindly gave me.

List op Abbreviations.

Bl. 1866 - - Rev. Dr. Bleasdale, in Official Record of
Melbourne Intercolonial Exhibition, 1866.

B.S. 1866 - - R. Brough Smyth, in Official Record of Mel-
bourne Intercolonial Exhibition, 1866.

B.S. 1872 - - R. Brough Smyth, in Official Record of
London International Exhibition, 1873, Mel.
bourne, 1872-3.

B.S. 1861 - - R. Brough Smyth, in Catalogue of Victorian
Exhibition, 1861, with prefatory essays.

CI. - - Donald Clark, B.C.E., of North Gippsland

School of Mines, in Report of Australasian
Association for the Advancement of Science,
1892.

70 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Chem. News - Chemical News.

Geo.Sur. \ sheet. Geological Survey of Victoria, quarter sheet.
G.S.N.S.W. - Records of the Geological Survey of New-
South Wales.
H. - - - - A. W. Ho witt, F.G.S.

H. 1896. - - Notes on Diabase and Adjacent Formations
of the Heathcote District, by A. W. Howitt,
published as a Special Report by the Depart-
ment of Mines, Victoria, 1896.
L. 1873. - - Official Record of the Victorian Court of the

London International Exhibition, 1873.
M. 1866. - - G. H. F. Ulrich, in Official Catalogue of the

Melbourne Intercolonial Exhibition, 1866.

M. 1870. - - G. H. F. Ulrich's " Contributions to the

Mineralogy of Victoria," in Papers presented

to Parliament, 1870, Second Session, Vol. 2 ;

also published separately.

M.R. - - - Reports of the Department of Mines, Victoria.

M.H. - - - Miners' Handbook, issued by the Department

of Mines, Victoria, 1894.
M.S. - - - Mineral Statistics published by the Depart-
ment of Mines, Victoria.
M.R.F. - - - Catalogue of Minerals, Rocks and Fossils,
collected in the Colony by the Mining Depart-
ment, 1866.
N.M. - - - Catalogue of the National Museum, Melbourne,

1868.
P. - - - - Papers presented to Parliament, Victoria.
P.R. - - - Progress Reports of the Geological Survey of

Victoria.
Pr. R.S. Vic. - Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.
Pd. - Mr. A. Purdie, M.A., of Ballarat School of

Mines, in private correspondence.
R.A.M.S. - - Records of Australian Museum, Sydney.
Sel. 1861. - - Dr. A. R. Selwyn, in Catalogue of Victorian

Exhibition, 1861, with prefatory essays.
T.M. - - - The cases in the Technological Museum Mel-
bourne, or in the Catalogue of the same, 1894.

Locality L,ist of Mine rots from Victoria. 71

T.S.H. - - - T. S. Hall, M.A., in Proceedings of the Royal
Society, Victoria, 1895.

Trs. R.S. Vic. - Transactions of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Trs. R.S.S.A. - Transactions of the Royal Society of South
Australia.

V. 1873. - - Official Catalogue of the Victorian Exhibits at
the Vienna Exhibition, 1873, bound with
Official Record of the London International
Exhibition, 1S73, Melbourne, 1872-3.

Actinolitk. — Near Heathcote, in diabase rocks (H. 1896).

Adamantine Spar (Hair-brown Sapphire). — Blue Mountain and
Beechworth districts, washed grains in the gold-drifts.
(M. 1866). Mornington (T. M.).

Adularia. — Reid's Creek, Beechworth, small pieces in druses
(M. 1866).

Agalmatolitk. — Keilor Plains, nodules in basalt. (Sel. 1861).
Keilor and Gisborne, in basalt (M. 1866).

Agate. — -Beechworth creeks ; Yarra basin ; several parts of
Gippsland ; Murray River near Wodonga, very frequent.
Banded varieties, "Fortification Aga'e," "Landscape"
and " Moss Agate" are not rare. Cape Otway Coast
(M. 1866). Near Berwick ; near Dandenong (M. 1870).
Yarra Ranges (B.S. 1866). Beenak (P. 1883). War-
burton (P. 1891). Boggy Creek; Baldhill, with crystals
of quartz interlaced (CI. ). Koroit Creek (T.M.). Avoca ;
Chiltern ; Mouth of Gellibrand River ; Lake Cooper ;
Sassafras Creek (P.R. Vol. 3). Woori Yaloak Creek
(V. 1873). Near Kilmore (Geo. Sur. fsheet 4 N.W.).

Albin (variety of apophyllite). — Harcourt granite quarries, in
druses (T.S.H.).

Albite. — Blacksmith's Gully Reef, Fryerstown, in veins and
druses of fine crystals (analysis of this felspar by C. S.
Wood in National Museum Catalogue, 1868); Eaglehawk
Reef, Maldon ; Tarilta, in a syenitic rock (M. 1866).
Kyneton (Sel. 1861). Cape Woolomai (P. 1878).
Francis Ormond ; Garfield ; Crown Nimrod ; Coomb's

72 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria..

Gully ; and other mines in the Castlemaine District
(T.S. H). " The felspar of a very silicious granite, with
a vein of cassiterite, near Beechworth, appears to be
albite" (P. 1870). Bendigo (P.R. Vol. 3). Near Heath-
.. cote, in diabase rocks (H. 1896).

Almandite. — Ovens ; Ballarat (Bl. Trs. R.S. Vic, 1865-6).

Allophane.- — " The partly decomposed basalts and the clays of
the gold-drifts, and the fossiliferous tertiaries around the
coast, are generally very rich in nodules and veins of
amorphous silicates of alumina and magnesia, of un-
certain, i.e., variable, composition ; specimens resembling
allophane, halloysite, meerschaum, etc., have been found
at many places (M. 1866). Hampshire Reef, Golden
Point, forms kernels in a loose sugary mineral in the
caps of the reef. The loose sugary mineral is probably
a variety of allophane (M. 1870). Pleasant Creek ;
Strathloddon (P.R. Vol. 3).

Alunite. — Near Magnet Hill, Gisborne, nodules and crusts in a
basalt quarry (M. 1866). Sunbury in black pyritous
shales (N.M.). Gisborne and elsewhere on thegoldfields
(B.8. 1872).

Alunogen. — Barker's Creek slate quarries near Castlemaine, as
a thick efflorescence (T.S.H.).

Amethyst, ok Amethystine Quartz. — Beechworth district, in
the drifts, or in the veins traversing granite ; Bradford
Lead, Maldon, in the drifts. " The light colour of the
Maldon specimens makes the designation ' Rose Quartz '
more applicable" (M. 1866). Chiltern, druse cavities
in granite (T.M.). Bendigo ; Linton ; LTpper Yarra ;
Yackandandah (P.R. Vol. 3).

Amethyst, or Oriental Amethyst (Corundum). — Pakenham
(M. 1870). This specimen was a hexagonal prism with
rhombohedral planes (N.M.). Beechworth; Dandenong;
Stockyard Creek (P.R. Vol. 3). White amethyst at
Beechworth (Bl. Trs. R.S. Vict. 1865-6).

Amphibole. — See hornblende.

Analcite. — Phillip Island, in amygdaloidal basalt (M. 1866).
Phillip Island, in regular trapezohedrons in older basalt
(N.M.). Chambers' quarry, Richmond, as trapezohe-
drons (M. 1870). Flinders (T.M.).

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 73

Anatase. — Latrobe River, Gippsland, in the tin sand (P. 1874).
Beechworth (L. 1873, p. 199).

Andalusite. — Tongio West, Swift's Creek, Gippsland, the first
discovered in Victoria (P. 1878). Upper Murray;
Maldon, crystals in granite (T.M.) Ararat; Inglewood;
Pyrenees (P.R. Vol. 3). Chiastolite is recorded from
near Geelong (T.M.) Silicate of alumina, Amherst
(V 1873).

Andesine. — Near Heathcote, in diabase rocks (H. 1896).

Anglesite. — Wilson's Reef, St. Arnaud; Glen Dim Reef, Lands-
borough, sparingly in small, rather imperfect crystals
in cavities (M. 1866). In the mineral veins throughout
the colony (B.S. 1866). Buehan, from oxidised galena
(CI.). Dargo High Plains (P. 1872).

Ankerite. — Phillip Island, in older basalt. In this rock there
occur narrow veins and irregular patches of a dense,
light, greenish-yellow mineral, which proved on analysis
closely related to "ankerite" (M. 1866).

Antimony (Native). — Maldon, in a metamorphosed vein in
Silurian sandstone (P. 1873). Dunolly (M.R. 1889).
Near Mansfield (P.R. Vol. 7). Cashel, near Shepparton
(T.M.).

Apatite. — Dunolly, light greenish grains in quartz ; Bass Strait,
an impure variety in nodular concretions is sometimes
found in the guano deposits of several small islands
(M. 1866). Phillip Island, crystals in older basalt
(T.M.). Bruthen Creek; Dargo basalts ; Taberraberra
(CI.). Eaglehawk Reef, Maldon (P. 1875-6). Maldon,
with calcite, dolomite, etc. (P. 1875-6). Near Heath-
cote, in diorite and diabase rocks (EL 1896). Phosphate
of lime occurs at Beechworth and Dunolly (P.R. Vol. 3).
Phosphate of lime with silica and alumina occurs coating
cavities in decomposed basalt at Bruthen Creek, Gipps-
land (N.M.).

Aragonite. — In druses of radiating acicular crystals in the newer
pliocene basalts ; near Talbot ; Taradale ; Daylesford,
itc. ; in hollows of the older pliocene gold-drifts ; well
developed crystals in hollows of the freshwater limestone,
at Muckleford Creek, near its junction with the Loddon

74 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

River ; nodules in the basalt of Kyneton, Malmsbury,
and Taradale, often with a thin glassy coating of hyalite
(M. 1866). Sunbury, in basalt ; Kilmore, in basalt ;
Richmond, in basalt ; Ballan ; Lisle's Reef, Maldon, on
metamorphic sandstone (N.M.). Collingwood, basalt
quarries (P. 1880). Flinders (T.M.). Riddell's Creek
(R 1883). Hustler's Reef, Bendigo (P. 1878). Phillip
Island, in older basalts (P. 1877-8). Ballarat, in basalt ;
Bendigo ; nearNewstead ; Smythesdale (T.M.). Ararat ;
Dunolly ; Guildford; Keilor ; Majorca (P.R. Vol. 3).
Maude, Moorabool Valley (Pr. R.S. Vic, 1895, p. 187.
See also 1-sheet 19 S.W.).

Argentine (lamellar calcite). — German Reef, Maldon (T.M.).

Argentite. — Ebenezer Reef, Morse's Creek, with galena, blende,
arsenical pyrites, and gold (M. 1866). St. Arnaud, with
galena, blende, native silver, copper, anglesite, mimetite,
sulphur, ores of iron and of manganese (B.S. 1866).
In P. 1870, Mr. Newbery reported, "No pure sulphide
of silver, as a distinct mineral, has yet been found in
Victoria.''

Arseniate of Iron. — See Pharmacosideritc.

Arsenolite. — Bethanga (P. 1880).

Asbolite (earthy cobalt). — Cape Patterson, in shrinkage cracks
of older volcanic rocks ; Thomson River Copper Mine ;
Yea (B.S. 1872). McKenzie's diggings ; Goulburn
River (T.M). Alexandra; GlenDhu; Merton ; Strath-
loddon ; Tarrengower ; Gippsland (P. 1868). Little
Dorrit Reef, Grant (P. 1871). Upper Yarra (P. 1876).
Boggy Creek ; Mount Taylor ; Dargo (CI.). Costertield ;
Crooked River ; Dunolly ; Griffith's Point ; Maldon ;
Snowy River (P.R. Vol. 3). A repot t on this mineral
by Mr. J. C. Newbery is in the Catalogue of the National
Museum, Melbourne, 1868. See also Wad.

Asphalt. — See Bitumen.

Asteria. — Beechworth, grey or bluish-grey, with six-rayed stars
well developed (M. 1866). Eldorado; Ovens (Trs. R.S.
Vic, 1865«-6, pp. 80 and 81). A green star sapphire
from Ovens (Trs. R.S. Vic, 1865-6, p. 79).

Locality List of Minerals from. Victoria. 75

Augite. — One of the principal constitutents of our basalts ;
Malmsbury, small, black, acicular crystals in dolerite ;
near Black Hill, Kyneton, imperfect crystals in scoria-
ceous lava. " From its appearance, cleavage, ifcc, and
the result of a quantitative analysis by Mr. J. C.
Newbery, there is good reason to suppose that the dark
green component of the greenstone (diabase) of the
Barrabool Hills, near Geelong, is augite " (M. 1866).
Foot of Mount Wallan ; near Steglitz, crystals ; Mount
Hepburn, in basaltic ash ; west side of Mount Moorakyle
(M. 1870). Magnet Hill; Mount William ; Dargo High
Plain ; Turton's Creek (P.R. Vol. 3). Dargo, in dyke
rock (H. in Trs. R.S. Vic, 1887). Near Heathcote, in
diabase (H. 1896).

Automolite (Variety of Spinel). — Ballarat ; Ovens (Trs. R.S.
Vic, 1865-6).

Axinite.— Dookie (T.M.).

Azurite. — Thompson River Copper Mine, Walhalla ; Steiglitz ;
Pyreeth Creek ; St. Arnaud ; Glen Dhu Reef, Lands-
borough ; Nicholson's Reef, Castlemaine (M. 1866). Blue
Mountain; Bendigo ; Inglewood ; Dunolly (B S, 1866).
Dedduck, in quartz vein (P. 1873). Between Koetong
and Bright (P. 1875-6). Bethanga (P. 1886). Buchan ;
"Wombat Creek (CI.). Mount Korong; Lerderdeig River,
in slate (T.M.). Crooked River (P.R. Vol. 3). Car-
bonate of copper, without stating which kind, has been
recorded from the following places :— Bruthen Creek ;
Maldon ; Broken River; North Gippsland (P. 1868).
Buchan ; Livingstone Creek ; Snowy River ; Snowy
Creek, near Omeo ; Nicholson River ; Murindal River
(B.S. 1872). Rodney's mine, near Ballarat (P. 1873).
Beaufort ; Blackwood ; Grampians ; Kingower ; Upper
Murray ; Smythesdale ; Taradale ; Wongungarra River
(P.R. Vol. 3).

Balas Ruby. — See Spinel Ruby.

Barite. — Swiper's Reef, Maldon, very rare, in cracks and crevices
of the quartz, partly in crystals, and partly in drusy
coatings (M. 1866). Devonshire Mine, Castlemaine,
rare, platy crystals in quartz (T.S.H.). Maldon, with

76 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

heulandite. A spectrum analysis by Mr. Ellery showed
a faint trace of strontia (M. 1870). Dedduck, vein in
granite (P. 1873 . Richmond, in basalt (P. 1877-8).
Woods Point (P. 1881). Gibbo River, containing
- galena and silver; Mitta Mitta (M.R. 1884). Omeo
(M.R. 1887). Boggy Creek, Gippsland, in vesicular
ferro-manganese ore ; Buchan (CI.). Back Creek ;
Ring wood ; Dookie ; Upper Murray ; Phillip Island, in
older basalt (T.M.). Alexandra; Beechworth ; Fitzroy
Range; Murindal River; Snowy River; Tubbut (P.R.
Vol 3). Geelong (L. 1873). St. Arnaud? (M.R.F.).

Barklyite. — Beechworth district (M. 1866).

Baryta Carbonate. — See witherite.

Basanite. — Beechworth Creeks, in drifts ; Cape Otway coast.
near Gellibrand River, a pebble deposit ; Joyce's Creek,
near Newstead ; near Wickliffe, veins in Silurian rocks
(M. 1866). Mansfield (P. 18S7). Heathcote ; Mount
Stavely ; Ararat ; Loddon River, near Maldon (T.M.).
Turton's Creek (P.R. Vol. 3). Walhalla (P.R. Vol. 4).

Bastite. — Near Heathcote, in diabase rocks (H. 1896).

Beryl.— Pilot Creek (P. 1878). Dargo River; Dry Creek;
Mansfield (P.R. Vol. 3).

Beudaxtite. — Port Phillip Company's Mine, Clunes (P. R.
Vol. 3).

Bindheimite. — Murindal, Gippsland (Pr. R.S. Vic, Vol. 16,
1880, p. 145).

Binnite. — Wombat Creek (CI.).

Biotite. — Eureka Reef, Castlemaiue, large hexagonal plates in a
basaltic dyke ; Castle Reef, silvery white in diorite
porphyry ; the mica at Raspberry Creek, Woods Point,
may also belong to this species (M. 1866). Harcourt,
in a dyke ; Burn's Reef, near Castlemaiue, in a dyke ;
Mount Alexander, in granite (T.S.H.). Mount Taylor,
in quartz porphyries ; Marengo Creek (CI.) Fiddler's
Reef, Forest Creek, in a decomposed basalt dyke (N.M.).
Phillip Island, in older basalt (T.M.). Sultan Mine,
Blackwood (P.R. Vol. 3). Near Heathcote, in granite
(H. 1896).

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 11

Bismite. — Maldon ; Wombat Creek (P. 1868). Omeo district,
rolled fragments (P. 1874). A mixture of the oxide and
carbonate of bismuth is found in the Beechworth creeks,
associated with tin sand (P. 1872). Snowy Creek
P. P. Vol. 3).

Bismuth. — Wombat Creek, Omeo ; Upper Yarra ; Ramshorn
Gully, in irregularly-shaped pieces of a few dwts. to 1 lb.
in weight; Kingower (M. 1866). Linton's, quite pure,
from quartz reef (B.S. 1872). Crossover, Gippsland
(T.M.). Beds of streams in Omeo district (P. 1874).
Beechworth (M. 1870). Snowy Creek, a specimen
coated with oxide and carbonate of bismuth, and
ferruginous clay (P. 1875-6). Wilson's Reef, St.
Arnaud (P. 1884). Maldon (P. 1877-8). Dandenong ;
Costertield (P.P. Vol. 3).

Bismuthinite (Bismuth glance). — Linton's, with native bismuth,
etc., in scaly, slender, prismatic crystals of fibrous or
foliated structure (M. 1870). Wombat Creek ; Baldhill
Creek, Gippsland (CI.). Beechworth (T.M.). Maldon,
in quartz, with gold and malclonite (P 1875-6). Near
Linton's, in a quartz reef (P. 1870).

Bismuthite (carbonate of bismuth). — Tin-Kettle Lead, Ramshorn
Gully ; Sandy Creek, Maldon ; also reported from
Kingower (M. 1866). Linton's ; Beechworth (M. 1870).
Clunes; Maldon (KM.). Wombat Creek (P. 1868).
Bern River (Combying Creek), Gippsland (P. 1874).
Bismuth carbonate also recorded from Omeo district
(P. 1874). Snowy Creek (M.H.). An analysis by Mr.
J. C. Newbery is in the Catalogue of the National
Museum, 1868.

Bitter Spar. — See dolomite.

Bitumen. — Specimens found in Western Port and Portland
districts ; Grampians, and Pyrenees, a peculiar kind in
small caverns and on ledges of rock (M. 1866). See
note on this in Catalogue National Museum, 1868, p. 90.
Cowwarr (M.R, 1890). Near Bridgewater (M.R. 1889).
Traralgon (P.R. Vol. 7). Coal Creek (N.M.).

Bleischweif (See galena). Buchan (P.R., Vol. 3).

Bog iron ore. — See limonite.

78 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Bornite. — Thompson River Copper Mine, distributed through
the copper pyrites (M. 1866). Buchan, with chalco-
pyrite (CI.). Ballarat gold-drifts; Mclvor gold-drifts;
Steiglitz; Bethanga ; Costerfield (M. H.).

Boulangerite. — Ballarat, in quartz reef, with chalcopyrite and
gold (M. 1866). Blackwood, with pyrite, galena, and
antimony (P. 1870). Swift's Creek, with pyrites (P.
1879-80). Snowy Creek ; Steiglitz (P. K, Vol. 3).

Bournonite. — Ballarat ; St. Arnaud ; Steiglitz, etc., finely im-
pregnated in some of the quartz reefs ; Costerfield anti-
mony reef, in crystalline grains, apparently very rare (M.
1866). Walhalla (P. 1873). Heathcote, at the head
of Golden Gully (T.M.). North Gippsland, with gold
(P. 1873). Wallan (P.R, Vol 3).

Brookite. — Baw Baw diggings, in quartz (M. 1866). Steiglitz ;
Mount Greenock lead (M. 1870). Latrobe River, in
tin sand (P. 1874). Yarra Flats (T.M.). Broadford
(M.R. 1889). Beechworth (P.R, Vol. 3).

P>ROWN HEMATITE, BROWN IRON ORE, OR BROWN OCHRE. — Til

tertiary rocks around the coast, and occasionally in
hollows of quartz reefs (M. 1866). See limonite.

Brown Spar (ferruginous dolomite). — Bendigo and Walhalla, in
quartz (B.S. 1872). Woods Point (M. 1870). Beech-
worth ; dunes ; Mount Timbertop (P.R. Vol. 3).
Gaffney's Creek ; Jameson (L. 1873). See dolomite.

Brushite. — Skipton Caves, near Ballarat, in guano deposits
(P. 1878).

Bucholzite. — Moroka Valley, Gippsland, in granite (M. 1866).
Swift's Creek (P. 1878). See fibrolite.

Cacholong.— Stawell (P.R. Vol. 3).

Cadmium. — St. Arnaud, with silver and sphalerite (P. 1873).
Bruthen Creek ; Costertield (P.R. Vol. 3).

Cairngorm. — Beechworth ; Tarrer.gower ; Upper Yarra ; in
quartz veins traversing granite, and in the drifts
(M. 1866). Ovens (Sel. 1861). Maldon (M. 1870).
County Evelyn (P. 1877-8). Gibraltar diggings, near
Berlin (P. 1878). Castlemaine (T.M.). Gippsland
(P.R. Vol. 3). Smoky quartz is also recorded from
Harcourt granite quarries (T.S. H.).

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 79

Calcite. — On the goklfields of Victoria; Maldon, crystals in
druses in quartz ; Malmsbury, in basalt with chabazite ;
Phillip Island, in basalt ; Muckleford Creek, in fresh-
water limestone ; Barrabool Hills ; Cape Otway ;
Western Port ; Traralgon ; Geelong, in drift beds
(M. 1866). Ararat; Richmond; and dunes, in basalt ;
Moe's Swamp (M. 1870). Buchan, in limestone; Wom-
bat Creek with galena ; Bindi, in limestone, and as
marble ; Tambo ; Nicholson River ; Bairnsdale (CI.).
Ajax Mine, Castlemaine, rhombohedral and massive ;
Wattle Gully, crystals (T.8.H.). Geelong, in limestone ;
Guildford and Keilor, in basalt ; Preston Vale, in
granite; Kyneton (KM.). Walhalla (B.S. 1872).
Maldon (P. 1875-6). Collingwood, in basalt; Riddell's
Ci'eek (ferro-ca kite) ; Pentridge (T.M.). Jan Juc ;
Curdie's River (P. 1881). Bendigo (PR. Vol. 7).
Ballarat (M.R, 1889). Near Lome (M.R. 1890).
Warrnambool (Pr. R.S. 1891, p. 95). Charlotte Plains
(P. 1891) Chetwynd, in older basalt; Collingwood, as
rock milk; Maldon, as Argentine; Western Port;
Flinders, in basalt ; Mornington ; Campaspe River ;
Gippsland Lakes ; Dookie ; Hey wood ; Lilydale (T.M.).
Generally distributed (Sel. 1861). Running Creek
(PR, Vol. 5). Brunswick quarries (P.R. Vol. 6).
Clunes ; Moyston ; Bendigo ; Woods Point ; Tyers
River; Waratah Bay (P.R. Vol. 3). Near Heathcote,
in diabase rocks (H. 1896). Calc-sinter is recorded
from Gippsland (P. 1887), and Collingwood, in basalt
(T.M.).

Carbonate of Soda (anhydrous). — Lai Lai (P. 1885).

Carnelian. — Sparingly as small pebbles in drifts of the Beech-
worth creeks; Yarra Basin; several parts of Gippsland;
Murray River, near Wodonga (M. 1866). Woori
Yaloak Creek (V. 1873).

Cassiterite.— Omeo district, in the creeks ; tributaries of the
Yarra River ; Latrobe River ; Thompson River ;
Gullies in the Strathbogie Ranges ; Taradale ; many
places in Gippsland (M. 1866). Eldorado ; Woolshed ;
Sebastopol ; and other places in the Beechworth district;

SO Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Ovens ; Little Yarra basin, with titaniferous iron sand ;
Cape Otway district ; Tarwin River ; Crossover Creek,
Gippsland ; near Daylesford ; near Colac ; Chiltern ;
Cudgewa Creek ; other creeks running into the Murray
- River (B.S. 1872). Indigo Creek, as black sand
(P. 1869). Koetong Creek ; other creeks rising in the
same ranges ; Tarwin Creek ; Upper Murray ; many
districts in North-Eastern Victoria and Gippsland (P.
1873). Mount Fatigue; Manstield ; Burrawa Creek ;
Muddy Creek, South Gippsland ; Bright (P. 1874).
Franklin River; Stockyard Creek (P. 1875-6). Traral-
gon Creek (P. 1876). McCrae's Creek; Slaty Creek,
Gippsland (P. 1877-8). Morwell River (P. 1878).
Bass River district (P. 1881). Benambra (T.M.).
Talangatta Creek ; Pioneer Creek ; Acheron River ;
Malmsbury, with metallic tin; Bunyip Creek (P. 1882-3).
Between Bruthen and Buchan ; Gembrook (P. 1883).
Mount Bulla; Neerim (P. 1884). Wendouree (M.R,
1889). Agnes River; Snowy Creek (M.R, 1890).
Mount Taylor Creek ; Mount Wills, in porphyritic
dykes; creeks flowing into Mitchell River (CI.).
Islands in Bass Straits ; Berwick ; Dry Forest Creek ;
Lerderderg River ; Mount Gowar ; Myrtleford Creek ;
Steiglitz; Tangil River (P.R. Vol. 3). Pakenham ;
Possum Hill (P.R. Vol. 4). Kiewa River (P.R. Vol. 5).
Beenak ; Bishop's Creek ; Jingellic ; Black Mountains
(PR. Vol. 7).

Cat's Eye. — (?) Beechworth and Yarra basin (M. 1866).

Cerium phosphate. — Strathbogie Ranges; Bethanga ; Gippsland
(T.M.).

Cerussite. — In mineral veins throughout the colony (B.S. 1866).
St. A maud, tolerably abundant in the silver reefs ;
Nicholson's Reef, Castlemaine ; Glen Dhu Reef, Lands-
borough (M. 1866). Linton's; Maryborough; Pleasant
Creek; Gippsland (P. 1870). Between Koetong and
Bright, with carbonates of copper (P. 1875-6). Harriet-
ville, with galena (P. 1876). Bethanga (P. 1878).
Swift's Creek (P. 1880-1). Murrindal (T.M.). Omeo,
with silver and phosphate of lead (P.R. Vol. 7).

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria, 81

Wombat Creek ; Dargo ; Buchan ; Snowy River (CL).
Ararat; Dargo High Plains; Murray River (M.H.).
Dry Gully, near Mount Livingstone (Stirling in Trs.
R.S. S.A., 1883-4).

Cervantite. — Costerrield (M. 18G6). Heathcote; Whroo ;
Anderson's Creek ; Rutherglen ; Maryborough, and
other places (B.S. 1866). Bacchus Marsh (P. 1873).
Comadai Creek, Ballan (P. 1878). Queenstown ;
Dunolly ; Maldon (T.M.). Ringwood ; Costertield,
with acicular crystals (M. 1870). Beechworth (P.R.
Vol. 3). See also Valentinite and Stiblite.

Chabasite. — Pent-land Hills, in older basalt ; . near Clunes, in
basalt ; Malmsbury (M. 1866). Phillip Island, in
older basalt; near Frankston, on granitite (P. 1868).
Gippsland (P. 18S0). Maldon (P. 1882-3). Yarragon,
in coal (P. 1886). Flinders (T.M.). Beechworth (P.R.
Vol. 3). Brunswick quarries (P.R. Vol. 6). Ballan
(M.R.F.).

Chalcanthite (Blue Vitriol). — Thompson River Copper Mine,
sparingly in thin seams and crystallizations (M. 1866).
Bethanga ; Ringwood (T.M.).

Chalcedony. — Near Keilor and Sunbury, coating cavities in
basalt, tolerably frequent ; Phillip Island, nodules and
pebbles on the shore ; Moroka Valley, Gippsland, as
geodes ; Spring Creek, Beechworth (M. 1866). Creeks
of Beechworth district (Bl. 1866). Waratah Bay (P.
1878). Buchan (CI.). Heathcote, near Police Camp ;
Phillip Island, sometimes with cavities containing yellow
carbonate of lime, sometimes with empty cavities, some-
times with a vein of quartz running through it (N.M.).
Chiltern ; "Wallace's Creek ; Landsborough ; Mitchell
River ; Richmond ; Tarra Range ; Turton's Creek ;
Waterhouse Island in Bass Strait; Bird Rock (P.R.
Vol. 3). Near Berwick ; Avoca (M.R.F.).

Chalcocite (Redruthite). — Thompson River Copper Mine,
small veins and patches, scales and grains in copper
pyrites; Steiglitz, impregnated in the rocks (M. 1866).
Wombat Creek, Gippsland (CI.). Livingstone Creek ;
Buchan ; Snowy Creek ; Snowy River ; Nicholson

82 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

River; Murrindal River (B.S. 1872). Bendigo ; Castle-
maine (Sel. 1861). Cathcart (M. H.). Copper sul-
phides, without stating which sort, are recorded from
Omeo (P. 1870)- Maldon ; Bruthen Creek ; Broken
River; North Gippsland (P. 1868). Beaufort; Beech-
worth; Blue Mountain; Bright; Crossover Creek;
Heathcote (P.R. Vol. 3).

Chalcopyrite. — Thompson River Copper Mine, massive, in veins
and patches ; In most of the auriferous reefs at Castle-
maine ; Maldon ; Steiglitz ; Bendigo ; Ballarat ; St.
Arnaud, etc. (M. 1866). Blue Mountain; Inglewood ;
Dunolly ; Gippsland, etc. (B.S. I860). Howqua River
with galena (N.M.). Dargo High Plains (P. 1872).
Gaftney's Creek ; Dedduck, in quartz (P. 1873). Charl-
ton (P. 1875-6). Bethanga, with carbonate of copper (P.
1877-8), Harcourt, on granite (P. 1882-3). Thomas-
town; Budgee, Gippsland; Yarrawonga (P.R. Vol. 7).
Bruthen ; Buchan ; Deptford ; Wombat Creek ; Omeo
(CI.). Snowy Creek (P.R. Vol. 6). Majorca; Cath-
cart ; Linton's (M.H.). Burke's Flat ; Murrindal
River (P.R. Vol. 3). Tongio West (M.R. 1896).

Chalk. — South-west corner of Victoria (Pr. R.S. Vic, 1891,
p. 98).

Chalybite. — In some of the reefs at Maldon and St. Arnaud
(M. 1866). Corinella, in coal shaft (N.M.). Hawthorn
Creek, Tangil, earthy (P. 188-4). Mirboo, impure ;
Fryerstown, coated with oxide of iron and pyrites
(M.R. 1884). Jindivik (P. 1887). Mitta Mitta River;
Ballarat (M.R. 1889). Daylesford (P. 1889). Warren-
heip, concretionary (P. 1891). In satin-coloured masses
with patches of manganese at Bruthen ; Gelantipy ; and
Mount Taylor (CI.). Barfold ; South Clunes ; Tourists'
Creek (T.M.). Carbonate of iron is recorded from
Beechworth ; Buckland River ; Gibbo River ; Heath-
cote ; Port Albert : Bendigo (P.R. Vol. 3). A carbon-
ate of iron and manganese from Moe (P. 1880). Clay,
iron ores from Avoca (P. 1874). See also Sphcerosiderite.

Chert. — Lancefield District, along the boundary of the diorite
greenstone (M. 1866). Near Heathcote ; Beechworth;

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 83

Murrindal ; near Melbourne (T.M.). Dandenong
Ranges ; Kingower ; Mount Disappointment ; Upper
Wannon Falls ; Bendigo (P.R. Vol. 3). Mount Useful
(M.R.F.).

Chiastolite. — See Andalusite.

Chloride op Silver. — St. Arnaud (P. 1874). Gift Reef,
Bethanga (P. 1877-8). Landsborough (P.R. Vol. 3).

Chlorite. — Lady Gully Reef, and Wattle Flat, near Castlemaine ;
Fryerstown ; near Yandoit, on the top of a high range
(M. 1866). Long Gully, Bendigo (P. 1884). Mount
Taylor, in porphyries (CI.). Upper Loddon, coating
imperfect quartz crystals (T.S.H.). Beechworth ;
Chiltern, in granite (E. J. Dunn in Trs. R.S. Vic,
1874). Snowy River; Talbot (P.R. Vol. 3). Near
Heathcote, in diabase rocks (H. 1896). See Lencoxine.

Chloropal (Hyd. Sil. of iron). — Sunbury, nodular masses, in
decomposed basalt (N.M.). Deep Creek, in basalt ;
Mount Bullangarook, in basalt (Sel. 1861). Maldon
(P.R. Vol. 3).

Chrome Ochre. — In several reefs at Heathcote ; Strathloddon,
etc. (M. 1866). Pleasant Creek (M. 1870). Gram-
pians, near Stawell (P. 1874). Buchan (CI.). Beech-
worth; Benalla; Wangaratta (T.M.).

Chromic iron. — -Heathcote, in quartz reefs and quartzose rocks ;
Heathcote Creek ; Argyle Gully, as fine black sand ;
Strathloddon ; Riddell's Creek (M. 1866). Stockyard
Creek, crystals (B.S. 1872). Franklin River, crystals ;
Creek beds at Heathcote, crystals (P. 1871). Near
Corner Inlet ; tributaries of Latrobe River, dull crystals
(P. 1874). North Gippsland, massive (P. 1875-6).
Bairnsdale, as sand (P. 1877-8). Mansfield (P.R. Vol. 7).
Walhalla ; Stawell (T.M.) Beechworth ; Benalla ;
Mount Macedon ; Mount Wellington (P.R. Vol. 3).
Delatite River; Howqua River; Turton's Creek ; Snowy
River (P.R. Vol. 4).

Chromium. — Costerfield (P.R. Vol. 3).

Chrysocolla. — Bloomfield's Gully, Omeo, impure, in vein stuff
(B.S. 1872). Snowy Creek (P.R. Vol. 3). Silicate of
copper is recorded from Dry Creek, near Mount Living-
ston (Stirling, in Trs. R.S.S.A. Vol. 7, 1883-4).

6a

84 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Chrysolite. — See Olivine.

Chrysoprase. — Beechworth district (Bl. 1866). Woolshed Creek ;
Sebastopol (Bl. in Trs. R.S. Vic, 1865-6).

Chrysotile. — Mount Timbertop (P.R. Vol. 3).

Cinnabar. — See Mercury.

Clays. — Deep Creek, Bulla, from decomposition of granite (B.S.
1861). Dunolly ; near Kyneton ; other places (M.
1866). Lai Lai, bed three feet thick overlying lignite
(N.M.). Preston ; Boroondara ; other places near
Melbourne, suitable for bricks and pottery ; Lilydale
(B.S. 1872). Sutton Range (Grange ? J. A. A.) (T.M.).
Stawell, suitable for bricks (M.R. 1890). Morwell ;
Darlimeura, suitable for earthenware ; Korkuperrimul,
suitable for pottery ; Boolara (M.R. 1889). Huntly,
suitable for terra-eotta (M.S. 1885). Beaufort, suitable
for Staffordshire ware ; Jackson's Creek, near Sunbury,
infusible clay ; near Smeaton (P. 1870). Bendigo ;
Geelong (P. 1871). Nuna wading, stands the fire well
(P. 187'J). Stawell ; Hawthorn, suitable for bricks ;
Moorabool River, suitable for white ware (P. 1873).
Moe ; Western Port, suitable for bricks (P. 1874).
Strangways, suitable for crockery ; Fyansford ; Lauris-
ton, suitable for pottery ; Daylesford, suitable for bricks
and tiles ; Gaftney's Creek, could be made into paint
(P. 1876). Gippsland, suitable for bath-brick and fire-
brick (P. 1879-80). Bethanga, fire-clay (P. 1882-3).
Tarwin River, suitable for tiles, earthenware, and white
bricks (P. 1883). Ringwood, fire-clay; Stawell, fire-
clay; Malvern; Orrong Road, Prahran (P. 1884).
Maldon; Epsom (P. 1885). Frankston (P. 1886).
Yapeen (P. 1887). Rushworth (P. 1889). Foster,
fire-clay (P. 1890). Ballan ; Narracan Valley, fire-clay;
Gordons, fire-clay (P. 1891). Redesdale (T.M.). Foots-
cray ; Western Port ; Cape Patterson ; Bass River ;
Bruthen Creek ; Phillip Island ; Wangaratta ; Mary-
borough (P. 1868). Baringhup ; Inglewood ; Moe;
Warburton ; Woori Yaloak Creek ; Upper Yarra ;
Brighton ; Korthcote (P.R. Vol. 3). See also fullers'
earth, lithomarge, kalloysite, and other varieties of clay.

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 85

Clay iron ore. — See chalybite and spluerosiderite.

Coal, brown coal, and lignite. — .Special reports on the coal-
fields of Victoria, containing very much useful informa-
tion, are issued from time to time by the Mines
Department. For a list of the principal localities see
M.H., p. 34.

Cobalt. — See asbolite.

Coccolite (var. of augite). — In basaltic rocks (Sel. 1S61).
Camperdown ; Daylesford ; Mount Franklin (P.R.
Vol. 3).

Colophonite (Wine-yellow garnet). — Ovens (Bl. in TVs. R.S
Vic, 1865-6).

Columbite.— Maldon (P.R. Vol. 3).

Comptonite. — See Thomsoniie.

Copaline. — Bass River, in lignite beds ; Coal Creek, not in situ

(KM.).

Copiapite. — Near Point Addis, in tertiary beds (M. 1866).
Spring Creek, near Geelong, probably results from the
decomposition of iron pyrites (N.M.), analysis by Mr.
R. Daintree in Catalogue of National Museum, Mel-
bourne, 1868. Mornington (T.M.). Castlemaine (1),
brownish crusts and stains on spoil and pyrites heaps
(T.S.H.). Basic sulphate of iron is also recorded from
Buninyong with iron-alum (T.M.). Angahook (B.S.
1872). See Melanterite.

Copperas. — See Melanterite.

Copper (native). — Thompson River, rounded pieces in the wash ;
Thompson River Copper Mine ; Wilson's Reef, St.
Arnaud ; Specimen Gully, Castlemaine, thin small
scales ; Steiglitz ; Louisa Ranges, Crooked River (M.
1866). Rodney Mine, near Ballarat, filamentous;
Malmsbury, basalt quarries, small grains in sphserosi-
derite (B.S. 1872). Thompson River, with moss copper
(N.M.). Climes, in tertiary drifts (M. 1870). Sebas-
topol and Egerton, thin strings and arborescent forms
in silurian shales (P. 1870), see note by Mr. J. C.
Newbery in the same volume. Bethanga, in quartz ;
Richmond, specks on basalt (P. 1877-8). Stawell ;
Blackwood ; Ballarat, in bed-rock under the deep leads

86 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

(P. 1871). Footscray, a mass several pounds weight in
a basalt quarry (P. 1873). Creswick ; Mitta Mitta ;
Cooper's Creek (31. H.). Avoca, deep lead ; Beech-
worth ; Landsborough (P.R. Vol. 3). Magpie, near
- Ballarat, small specks throughout the quartz (Pd.).
Copper ores, without naming which kind, are recorded
from between Snowy River and Bendoc ; Granite Flat,
Snowy River (P. 1871). County Millewa ; Spring-
Creek, near Buchan (P. 1884). You Yangs (P.R.
Vol. 7). On a branch of the Wentworth River (CI.).
Costerfield and Heathcote, antimonial ; Beaufort ;
Bonang ; Bright ; Mount Wellington (P.R. Vol. 3).

Corundum (black). — Nearly all our gold fields, in semi-angular or
rounded pieces (M. 18G6). Colac (P. 1871). Phillip
Island, in older basalt (P. 1877-8). Analysis in Cata-
logue National Museum, Melbourne, 1868 ; Daylesford ;
Benalla; Mount Blackwood (T.M.). Mansfield; Dande-
nong (P.R. Vol. 3).

Covelltne. — Steiglitz and Dunolly, in the reefs ; Specimen Gully
Reef, Castlemaine ; Glen Dhu Reef, Landsboixmgh :
Crooked River, thin scaly coatings (M. 1866). Scotch-
man's Gully Reef, Castlemaine ; Harcourt, coating
chalcopyrite (T.S.H.). Bendigo (Sel. 1861). Maldon
(T.M.). See note to Chalcocite.

Cuprite. — Thompson River Copper Mine (M. 1866). Steiglitz
(Sel. 1861). Bethanga (P.R, Vol. 6).

Cuproplumbite. — Costerfield antimony reef, small, scale-like
crystals, very rare (M. 1866). Mclvor (Sel. 1861).

Damourite. — "A mineral whose characters accord well with
damourite was found in crystals of cairngorm at Brad-
ford Lead, Maldon" (M. 1870). See untscovite.

Darlingite (species of lydianite). — Ovens district (Bl. in Trs.
R.S. Vic. 1866).

Diallogite. — Port Phillip Company's Mine, Clunes, in crevices
and cavities of the reefs, forming crusts over quartz and
psilomelane (M. 1866). See Rlwdochrosite.

DiatomaceoCs earth. — See Infusorial earth.

Diamond. — In the creeks of the Beechworth district, from \ to
21 carats (M. 1866). One of 17 "64 carats was reported

Locality List of Minerals from Victorio. 87

in 1864 (B.S. 1866). North-East Gippsland 1 (Bl.
1866). Near Bendigo? (P. 1870). Mansfield (P.R.
Vol. 3). Toombullup, 25 miles from Benalla ("Argus,"
5th May, 1896).

Dittmarite. — Skipton Caves, a mineral new to science was
recorded under this name by Mr. Mclvor, in "Chemical
News," 13th May, 1889.

Dolomite. — Maldon, drusy coatings in joints of metamorphic
sandstone ; Howqua district, massive in some reefs
(M. 1866). Broadmeadows, with brown hematite,
under the basalt (M. 1870). For analysis see M. 1870.
Near Ballan (N.M.). Ajax and Wattle Gully reefs,
Castlemaine ; a white, earthy soft substance, con-
sisting of carbonates of lime and magnesia, at Barker's
Creek quarries ; Castlemaine, a magnesian-liine cement
in some of the old gravels (T.S.H.). Maldon, with
calcite, vivianite, apatite, scheelite, etc. (P 1875-6).
Phillip Island, in older basalt, pseudomorphs after
aragonite ; Mansfield (P. 1877-8). Waratah Bay (P.
1878). Toongabbie (P. 1882-3). Geelong (P. 1885).
Daylesford (P. 1889). Ballarat (M.R. 1889). Bendigo
(P. 1888). Gatfney's Creek; Buchan; Walhalla (T.M.).
Woods Point ; Beechworth ; Clunes ; Harrow ; Mount
Timbertop (P.R. Vol. 3). Loyola (P.R. Vol. 4). Blue
dolomite at Woodford (Bradford1? J. A. A.), Victoria, on
vitreous quartz (G.S. N.S.W. Vol. 4, p. 141). Maldon
(P. 1875-6). See also Brown Spar.

Electrum. — Swift's Creek, Omeo (CL).

Embolite. — The silver mines at St. Arnaud, in cracks and
cavities of the quartz (M. 1866).

Exiivdros. — Beechworth (P. 1875-6). Read the following papers
on enhydros : — A. Liversidge, in R.A.M.S Vol. 2, No.
3, p. 35 ; T. Cooksey, in R.A.MS. Vol. 2, No. 6, p. 92 ;
E. J. Dunn, in Trs. R.S. Vic, 1874; and G. Foord, in
the same volume.

Exstatite. — Buchan, in diabase rock (Hosvitt in Trs. R.S. Vic,
Vol. 18). Heathcote, in diabase rock (Catalogue T.M.
1894, p. 33).

88 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Epidotb — Nuggetty Gully, Talbot, with quartz and flesh-coloured
orthoclase ; south-east of Tarilta, dense crystalline rock,
rare form (M. 1870). Analysis in the same book.
Near Buchan (M.R. 1889). Dividing Range, Gipps-
land ; Omeo Road, Gippsland, vein in syenite (T.M.).
- Snowy River; Dry Hills, Gippsland (P.R, Vol. 3).
Near Heathcote, in granite, and in altered diabase
rocks (H. 1896). Snowy Bluff (M.R.F.).

Epsom ite. — In tertiary, mesozoic, and Silurian rocks near Geelong;
Bacchus Marsh ; Cape Otway, etc.; Snow-flake efflores-
cences in quartz reefs as at Clunes ; Maldon, etc.
(M. 1866). Argus Hill Mine, near Castlemaine,
thick incrustation in old drives (T.S.H.). Bendigo ;
Growler's Creek Ranges; Stawell (P.R. Vol. 3).

Erubescite. — See Bornite.

Erythrite. — Dargo, peach-coloured crystals in quartz (CI.).

Essoxite (Cinnamon Stone). — Ovens (Trs. R.S. Vic, 1866).

Fahlerz. — See Tetrahedrite.

Felspar. — No species named. Swift's Creek, in a dyke (M.S.
1884). Lai Lai (P. 1885). Beech worth (M.R. 1889).
Glassy felspar, Daylesford, in basalt (M.S. 1887). See
also orthoclase, oligoclase, Labrador ite, ami other species
of felspar.

Ferro-calcite. — Barfold Falls, Campaspe River, in basalt,
(M. 1866). Saltwater River ; Mitchell's Falls (N.M.).
Analysis in Catalogue (N.M. 1868). Collingwood (Trs.
R.S. Vic, Vol. 16, 1880, p. 144).

Fibrolite. — Moroka Valley, Gippsland ; near Beechworth, in
granite (M. 1870). Dandenong Ranges; Northeim
Gippsland (B.S. 1872). Crooked River (CI.). Swift's
Creek (P. 1878). Geelong; Gippsland; Yackandandah
(T.M.). Dargo River (P.R. Vol. 3). For analysis see
P. 1872.

Flint. — Cape Otway coast ; Warrnambool coast ; Phillip Island
(N.M.) Near Dandenong (M. 1870). Portland Bay;
Flinders ; Emerald diggings ; Bed of Yarra (T.M.),
Griffith's Point (P.R. Vol. 3).

Flos-ferri. — Richmond quarries, lining cavities in basalt (N.M.).

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 89

Fluor-spar. — Near Beechworth, crystals hi narrow veins and
small patches in brecciated dyke (M. 1870). Eaglehawk
Reef, Maiden (P. 1880-1). Chiltern, in granite;
Beechworth, in granite (T.M.).

Fossil-wood. — See silicified wood.

Franklinite. — Tambo River and Nicholson River, in black sand
(CI.).

Fuller's Earth. — Clifton Springs, near Drysdale, a large deposit
(B.S. 1S72). Redesdale, seams of silicate of alumina
and magnesia under stiff clay, might be used as fuller's
earth (KM.). Lilydale (B.S. 1872).

Galena. — Steiglitz ; Castlemaine ; Bendigo ; Maryborough, in
quartz reefs (Sel. 1861). Wilson's Reef and Silver
Reef, St. Arnaud, veins and patches ; impregnated in
most, perhaps all, auriferous quartz reefs (M. 18G6). In
the mineral veins throughout the colony (B.S. 1866).
Dargo High Plains, with cerussite, chalcopyrite, etc. ;
Dedduck River ; Snowy River ; Chinaman's Flat,
Maryborough, alloy of lead and gold ; Eastern Gipps-
land, auriferous (B.S. 1872). Scotchman's Gully,
Castlemaine, in grains (T.S.H.). Wombat Creek,
crystals and massive ; Buchan, crystals and granular ;
Swift's Creek; Haunted Stream; Dargo (CI.). Rush-
worth (P.R Vol. 7). Moyston ; Pleasant Creek ; Morse's
Creek; Yackandandah ; Maldon ; Glen Dim (P. 1868).
Landsborough, argentiferous ; Blackwood ; Linton's,
said to be near a bismuth reef (P. 1870). Near Percy-
dale (P. 1871). Buchan and Corner Inlet, antimonial ;
Dargo River (P. 1872). Murrindal, antimonial ; Back
Creek (P. 1873). Maldon (P. 1874). Harrietville,
with cerussite ; Stockyard Creek (P. 1876). Bethanga,
argentiferous (P. 1878). Champion Bay (P. 1879-80).
Bendoc (P. 1884). You Yangs ; Zulu Creek (M.R.
1889). Ararat; Avoca ; Beechworth; Berlin; Chil-
tern ; Crooked River ; Gordons ; Kingower ; Mount
Useful ; Omeo ; Stawell ; Tarnagulla ; Murrindal River;
Corner Inlet (M.H.). Blue Mountain ; Daylesford ;
Dunolly ; Gibbo River ; Pyrenees ; Reedy Creek ;
Anderson's Creek; Donovan's Creek; Kilmore; Bendigo;

90 ProceediTigs of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Snowy Creek ; Sunbury ; Thirty-mile Creek ; Coster-
field, antimonial (P.R. Vol. 3). Casterton, argentiferous;
Buchan, argentiferous (M.R. 1896).

Garnet. — Reicl's Creek ; Woolshed ; Sebastopol ; Eldorado ; in
the gold-drifts ; Longwood, in diorite dyke ; Lady
Franklin Mountain, in euritic dyke ; Barnawartha
Creek (M. 1 866). Near Lilydale ; head of Woori Yaloak
Creek (B.S. 1872). Eaglehawk Reef, Maldon, in a
di;dlage dyke (J. Hornsby, teste T.S.H.). Maldon, in
granite (J. Dennatit, teste T.S.H.). Harcourt, in
granite (T.S.H.). Livingstone Creek; Mount Taylor;
Creeks of Eastern Gippsland from Mount Taylor, with
menaccanite (CI.). Bradford Lead, Maldon, in quartz ;
Hill's Corner, Baynton (N.M.) North-east of Berwick,
in the creeks ; Mount Timbertop (M. 1870). Barker's
Creek, Castleniaine, in a mica-sehistlike rock, in the
gold-drift (M. 1866). Blackwood : Dry Creek ; near
.Mansfield ; Ballarat (P. 1870). Bethanga (P. 1881).
Corner Inlet (P. 1876). Mount Buller (P. 1877-8).
Swift's Creek, in granite (P. 1878). Buxton (M.R.
1889). Benalla, crystals of green garnet in felspathic
rock (P. 1874). Chiltern ; Euroa ; Mount Korong ;
Rockpoint ; Alexandra ; Kingower ; Lilydale ; Long-
wood ; Sassafras Creek (P.R. Vol. 3). Howqua River
(P.R. Vol. 4). See also Essonite, Pyrope, Colophonite,
etc. "The Victorian garnets seem all to be almandine "
(Bl. 1866).

Glauconite. — Bruthen (CI.). Snowy River Bluff" (H., teste CI.).
Spring Creek, south of Geelong (G. B. Pritchard in
" Remarks on the Tertiaries of Australia," South
Australian School of Mines). Green earth forms a
constituent of some of the basalts (Catalogue T.M.
189 b p. 44).

GMELINITE. — Phillip Island, in basalt (M. 1866). Richmond, in
basalt (Sel. 1861). Flinders (T.M.).

Gold. — For a list of localities, and fur modes of occurrence, see
the following works, which furnish full particulars: —
" Goldfields of Victoria," by R, Brough Symth. Essay
on " Mining and Mineral Statistics of Victoria," in the

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 91

Official Record of the Intercolonial Exhibition, Mel-
bourne, 1866. "Miners' Handbook," issued by the
Mines Department, Melbourne. A tabular record
of the most remarkable specimens will be found in the
Catalogue of the Victorian Exhibition, 1861, and lists
of other specimens, found since that date, are in the
" Progress Reports " of the Geological Survey. A list
of nuggets and large masses of gold found in situ in
reefs, by W. Nicholas, is in the Report and Statistics of
the Mining Department for the quarter ending 30th
September, 1890, pp. 24-27.

Grammatite. — Eaglehawk Reef, Maldon (T.M.). See tremolite.

Graphite. — Ovens gold fields (Sel. 1861). Blackwood (?) ; Reefs
of St. Arnaud and Mount Pleasant districts, shaly sub-
stance impregnated with carbonaceous matter, in lumps
and casings ; Golden Point Gutter, Ballarat, true
graphite, inferior quality (M. 1866). Beech worth (Bl.
in Trs. R.S. Vic. 1866). For report by Mr. J. C.
Newbery on sample from Ballarat, see M.S. 1875-6.
Omeo (M.S. 1885). Mallee (PR. Vol. 7). Mount
Wills (CI.). Castlemaine district, impure, coating slates
in vicinity of quartz reefs (T.S.H.). Daylesford (T.M.).
Upper Murray (P.R. Vol. 3). Dargo, in dyke rock
(H. in Trs. R.S. Vic, 1887).

Guano. — Caves at Cape Otway (P. 1876). For analysis by Mr.
Newbery see M.S. 1876. Skipton Caves; Hamilton:
Portland; Warrnambool ("Chem. News," 13th May,
1887).

Gcmbelite (?). ■ — Castlemaine district, replacing graptolites
(T.S.H.).

Gypsum. — Abundant in thin veins, patches, and concretionary
masses in the tertiary sandstones and clays along the
coast from Jan Juc to Point Addis ; Cape Otway
district ; tertiary beds all over the Murray basin ; in
the saline deposits of lakes and lagoons ; raised beaches
and swamps near the sea, as Batman's Swamp ; Mount
Consultation, Castlemaine, in clays overlying the gravels ;
Sandy Creek, Tarrengower ; Ballarat deep leads ; in the
Western district and in the banks of the Murray River

92 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

casts of shells occur consisting of selenite (M. 1866).
Mornington, in blue clay ; Spring Plains, in bluish
surface clay (M. 1870). Daylesford (B.S. 1872). Lake
Tyers (P. 1876). Kerang (P. 1878). Geelong (P.
1879-80). Carisbrook (P. 1882-3). Lake Hindmarsh
, (M.S. 1885). Elwood Swamp, St. Kilda (P. 1889).
Lake Boga (M.R. 1890). Mount Emu Creek (T.M.).
Maryborough (P.R. Vol. 7). Barvvon Heads; Korong ;
QueensclifF; Collingwood basalt quarries; near Port-
land (T.M.). Alexandra; Bacchus Marsh; Beech-
worth; Growler's Creek; Inglewood; Lake Connewarre ;
Moonee Ponds ; Salt Lakes ; St. Arnaud ; Stawell ;
Bendigo (P.R. Vol. 3). Korong district (M.R.F.).

Halite. — See Common Salt.

Halloysite. — The partly-decomposed basalts and the clays of
the gold-drifts, and the fossiliferous tertiaries around
the coast generally, contain nodules of amorphous sili-
cates, some of them resembling halloysite (M. 1866).
Star Hill, AVoods Point, in quartz veins ; Energetic
Reef, Lauriston ; Alexandra, in quartz reefs (M. 1870).
Crossover, Gippsland (P. 1880). Beechworth ; North
Melbourne, from older basalt ; Wandin Yaloak (T.M.).
Western Port Bay, a mineral resembling halloysite
(Catalogue T.M., 1894).

Hannayite. — Skipton Caves and near Warrnambool, in guano
deposits (Chem. News, 13th May, 1887). For analysis,
see the same journal.

Hematite. — Stony Creek, Western Port; Bennison's Flat (P.
1S74). Wilson's Promontory (M.S. 1875-6). Snowy
River (P. 1876). Mount Willi, Gippsland (P. 1888).
Mansfield (M.R. 1889). Gippsland (T.M.). Nowa
Nowa; Mount Taylor; Livingstone Creek (CI.). Dargo,
in dyke rock (H. in Trs. R.S. Vic, 1887). Red oxide of
iron is recorded from Bald Hills; Brighton; Bruthen
Creek ; Campaspe River ; Cape Roadknight ; Colac ;
Godfrey's Creek ; Mac's Creek ; McDonald's track ;
Pearl Point ; Woods Point ; Plenty River ; Ringwood ;
SnOwy Creek ; Swan Island ; Bonang (P.R. Vol. 3).
See also specular iron and red ochre.

Locality List of Mine rah from Victoria. 93

Hersciiellite. — Richmond basalt quarries, double hexagonal
pyramids, or druses, or macles, or groups (N.M.) For
analysis see M. 1870. See also Mr. Newbery's report
in Catalogue T.M. 1894. Clunes (P.R. Vol. 3).

Heterosite (phosphate of iron and manganese). — Mount Wills
(T.M.).

Heulandite. — Tiverton Reef, Maldon, drusy coatings in joints of
the quartz (M. 1870). Lisle's Reef and Lennon's Reef,
Tarrengower, in crevices and joints of metamorphic
sandstone (M. 1866). All the specimens examined
show tabular crystals of heavy spar (M. 1870). Phillip
Island, in older basalt ; Frankston, on granite (P.
1877-8).

Hornblende.— Anakies, crystals in scoriaceous basalt ; Castle-
maine, in basic dyke ; Mount Alexander ; Lancetield ;
Mclvor, etc., in granite (M. 1866). Beechwortli, in the
tin sands (B.S. 1866). Fiddler's Reef, Forest Creek
(N.M.). Phillip Island, in older basalt; Eaglehawk
Reef, Maldon (P. 1877-8). Camperdown ; Gippsland
(T.M.). Howqua River; Jameson (M.R. 1884). Dargo,
in igneous rocks (H. in Trs. R.S. Vic, 1887). Wattle
Gully ; Burn's Reef, in basic dykes ; Eaglehawk Reef,
Maldon, a green variety (T.S.H.). Mount Franklin
(P.R. Vol. 3). Mount Buller (P.R. Vol. 4). For
analysis of the Anakies specimen see Catalogue N.M.,
1868. Near Heathcote, in granite, diorite, and diabase
rocks (H. 1896).

Hornstone. — See Chert.

Hyacinth. — Ballarat ; near Daylesford ; Crooked River ; abund-
ant on nearly all the gold-fields (Bl. 1866). Dandenong;
Campaspe River near Redesdale, in black sand in the
drift resting on basalt (N.M.). See Zircon.

Hyalite.— Cavities in basalt of various localities (Sel. 1861).
Malmsbury ; Kyneton ; Gisborne ; Baringhup, etc.,
drop-like incrustations in basalt cavities (M. 1866).
Kilmore, coating basalt (KM.). Moe (P. 1880).
Collingwood (P. 1889). Gelantipy ; Omeo ; Mitchell
River (CI.). Near Geelong ; Mount Hepburn ; basalt
cavities at Learmonth (T.M.). Beechworth ; Magnet

94 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Hill, Baynton's ; Mount Franklin ; Redesdale ; Stawell
(P.R. Vol. 3).

Hydrate of Alumina. — Coleraine (P.R. Vol. 4). Analysis on
page 163 of same volume.

HYDROMAGNESITE. — Collingwood basalt quarries (T.M.).

Hydrophane. — Stawell (P.R. Vol. 3).

Ilmenite. — Yarra basin, with stream tin (El. 1S66). Near
Castlemaine, as black sand in the alluvial deposits
draining from the basalt (T.S.H). Near Heathcote, in
diabase rocks (H. 1896). See titaniferous iron.

Infusorial Earth. — (Tripolite, Randanite, Diatomaceous earth).
Talbot, found in all stages, from the pure, soft, snow-
white silica containing the well-known infusorial forms,
to masses resembling opal and chalcedony (P. 1873).
For analysis see P. 1872 and M.S. 1875-6. West
Melbourne Swamp, impure, clayey (P. 1878). Middle
Creek, Radborough (P. 188-1). Brunswick (P. 1885).
Lillicur (M.S. 1885). Maryborough (M.S. 1886).
Gippsland (M.R. 1886). Campaspe River, near Redes-
dale, in clay in the gold-drift ; Lancetield ; Sebastopol ;
Amherst (T.M.). Alexandra ; Daylesford (P.R. Vol. 3).
See paper by F. M. Krause in Trs. R.S. Vic, 1887.

Iolite. — Traawool, grains and crystals in granite; Maldon, in
pegmatite (T.M.).

Iridosmine. — Reported from Yarra goldtields, tine steel-grey
particles in "heavy sand" (M. 1866).

Iron (native). — Western Port district, with nickel, in masses (B.S.
1861). Two large masses, one of half a ton, and the
other about four tons in weight, and several smaller
pieces were found in the neighbourhood of Cranbourne
(M. 1866). Langwarrin, near Frankston (P. 1887).
Smythesdale (P.R. Vol. 7). Near Daylesford (M.R.
1889). In the basalts of Ballarat (Liversidge, in
Minerals of New South Wales).

Iron ores. — Iron ores, without naming the species, are recorded
from Castlemaine and Bendigo (B.S. 1861). Thompson
River (P. 1878). Near Bairnsdale (P. 1881). Good-
man's Creek ; Jan Juc (M.S. 1884). Grantville (M.S.
1885). Grampians (M.S. 1886). Ironstone is recorded

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 95

from Glassy Creek, Western Port (P. 1878). Brighton
Beach (P. 1880). Mount Egerton ; Otway Forest;
Junction of Bendigo Creek and Back Creek (P. 1877-8).
Clayey and arenaceous ironstone occurs at Avoca ;
Ballarat ; Buninyong ; Campaspe River ; Cape Road-
knight ; Eddington ; Frankston ; Guildford ; Little
River ; Loddon Valley ; Malmsbury ; Mooroolbavk
River; Mordialloc ; Murray River; Bendigo; St.
Arnaud ; Steiglitz ; Sunbury ; Traralgon ; Werribee
River (P.R. Vol. 3). Much information on the occur-
rence of iron ores will be found in M.H. See limonite, etc.

Iserine. — "Generally distributed " (Sel. 1861). See titaniferous
iron.

Jamesonite. — Maldon, bunches of crystals with molybdenum
in quartz, a considerable distance from the antimony
deposits (P. 1878). Buchan, argentiferous (P. 1883).
Dargo ; Murrindal (CI.).

Jargon. — See Zircon.

Jasper. — Cape Otway Coast, near Gellibrand River, common as
pebbles ; in drifts of Yarra basin and at Beechworth
(M. 1866). Common along the western sea coast and
in some of the drifts ; Moroka Valley (N.M.). Tarwin
River (P. 1878). Briagolong ; Manstield (P. 1887).
Buchan ; Goulburn River ; Koroit Creek ; Murrindal ;
Malmsbury; banded variety at Beechworth (T.M.).
Lake Tyers ; Snowy River ; Tarra Range ; Swan
Island (P.R. Vol. 3). Opal jasper from the basalt at
Riddell's Creek ; Sunbury ; Gelantipy ; Bullengarook
(N.M.). For description of Sunbury specimens see
KM. Near Melbourne, in basalt (Sel. 1861).

Jet.— Lai Lai (P.R. Vol. 3).

Kaolin. — See Clays.

Kermesite.— Morning Star Reef, Woods Point, in powdery
coatings and crystals, very rare (M. 1866). Ringwood
(T.M.).

Labradorite. — Malmsbury, in porphyritic dolerite ; Table Hill,
near Guildford ; Loddon basaltic outliers generally (M.
1866). Barrabool Hills (P.R. Vol. 3). In all our
labradorite rocks, diabase and gabbro (Catalogue T.M.,

96 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

p. 32). In nearly all our newer and older basalts
(Catalogue T.M., pp. 3-4 and 40). Near Heathcote, in
diabase rocks (H. 1896).

Lampadite. — Wombat Creek, black earthy masses (CI.).

Lead and Gold Alloy. — Landsborough ; Maryborough (P.R.
Vol. 3).

Lead (native). — Mount Greenock, in drifts ; Avoca, in deep
lead, small quantities (M. 1866). Talbot, in the
auriferous tertiaries (B.S. 1866). Anderson's Creek, in
quartz; Linton's, with copper and zinc (P.R. Vol. 7).
Majorca (P.R. Vol. 3).

Lead Ochre. — Majorca (P.R. Vol. 3).

Ledererite. — Richmond, in basalt (Sel. 1861). See Gmelinite.

Leucopyrite. — Deptford ; Mount Baldhead ; Dargo ; Omeo ;
Wombat Creek (CI.).

Leucoxixe. — Near Heathcote, in diabase rocks (H. 1896).

Lignite. — See note under Coal.

LlMONITE. — Veins and concretions in the silurian rocks of all the
gold-fields generally ; in the tertiary rocks round the
sea coast ; in veins of quartz reefs ; as a cement in
auriferous conglomerates ; Bacchus Marsh ; Lake Con-
newarre ; Batman's Swamp ; basaltic plain and hill
slopes of the Loddon Valley, pea-like, or shot-like ;
margin of the Murray basin ; valleys of Werribee,
Loddon, Little, and Campaspe Rivers (M. 1866). St.
Arnaud (B.S. 1866). "Wattle Gully, pseudomorphs
after pyrites ; Bolivia Hill, iridescent him on rocks
(T.S.H.). Nicholson River; Clifton Creek; Boggy
Creek ; Bairnsdale ; Buchan ; Omeo (CI.). Pascoe
Vale; near Lancetield ; Home Creek; Queensferry ;.
Western Port; South Muckleford (N.M.). Moonee
Ponds; Mordialloc ; Bruthen Creek (P. 1868). Lai
Lai ; wherever decomposed basalt exists ; Seymour ;
Steiglitz (P. 1873). Bendigo ; Sebastopol ; Crossover
Creek ; Stockyard Creek ; Barwon River and Heads
(P. 187-1). Near Newstead, lode 150 feet wide ; Dayles-
ford ; Traralgon ; Lake Tyers ; Wilson's Promontory
(M.S. 1875-6). Snowy River; Whisky Creek; Fryer's
Creek ; north-east of Victoria ; Blackwood ; Dande-

locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 97

nong ; Strath Creek (P. 1878). Near Glenmaggie (P.
1880-1). Colac (P. 1880). Creswick (P. 1881).
Granya; Yarrawonga (P. 1882-3;. Near Queenstown
(P. 1884). Jan Juc (P. 1885). Wombat Creek (P.
L886). Mount Bulla (P. 1889). Byaduc ; Western
District; Alexandria (M.S. 1885). Heathcote (M.S.
188G). Omeo, iridescent (M.S. 1887). Bulla Bulla
(T. M.). Mansfield ; Myrtleford ; Warracknabeal ;
Nagambie ; Merton ; Neereman ; Barrabool : Gem-
brook ; Warrnambool ; Murroon ; Puebla, iridescent ;
Drouin (M.R. 1889). Yellow ochre from Snowy Creek :
Blackwood ; Anderson's Inlet ; Tarwin River ; Bacchus
Marsh; Maldon (P. 1874). Gafthey's Creek (P.R.
Vol. 4). Oxide of iron from South Wandin (M.S.
1887). Rushworth ; Howqua ; Darlingford ; Moles-
worth (P.R. Vol. 7). Brozvn iron ore from Axedale ;
Ballarat ; Beechworth ; Benalla ; Beauman's Flat ;
Berwick ; Charlton ; Clunes ; Coal Creek ; Coleraine ;
Prankston ; Geelong ; Goulburn River ; Grampians ;
Huntly ; Indigo ; Lake Lonsdale ; Lintons ; Malms-
bury ; Mclntyre's diggings ; Royal Park, Melbourne ;
Saltwater River; Mount Black; Mount William:
Myer's Creek ; Porcupine Flat ; Swan Island ; Tarwin
River; Wahgunyah ; Warrandyte ; Tarra Range (P.R.
Vol. 3). See iron ores.

Lithomarge. — Beechworth (B.S. 1872). Anderson's Creek;
Mirboo (P.R. Vol. 7). Stawell (P.R, Vol. 3).

Lollingite. — Nuggety Reef, Maldon (P.R. Vol. 3).

Lydianstoxe, Lydiaxite, Lydite. — See Basanite.

Magnesite. — Bulla Bulla, in Kaolin deposits ; Heathcote ; near
Geelong, in tertiary clays ; Bacchus Marsh ; Western
Port and other places ; banks of Loddon River, near
Newstead, pure ; Hard Hills, near junction of Loddon
River and Jim Crow Creek ; near Heathcote, in a vein
with Selwynite (X.M.). Many places in the Bendigo
district (P. 1871). Strangways and other places
where Kaolin occurs (B.S. 1872). Steiglitz and
Fryerstown, with Kaolin (P. 1874). Collingwood
quarries (P. 1880). Tarnagulla (P. 1885). Campbell's

7

98 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Creek; Castlemaine ; Beechworth (P. 1886). Rush-
worth ; Glenroy, in hasalt (P. 1889). Charlotte Plains ;
Baynton ; Dunolty ; Majorca ; Richmond ; Gippsland
(T.M.). Kampf's Gully, Castlemaine (T.S.H.) Maldon
(J. Hornsby, teste T.S.H.). Stawell (P.R. Vol. 3).
Magnesium carbonate near Heathcote, in diabase rocks
(H. 1896).

Magnetite. — In the washing stuff of the gold-drifts, abundant,
grains and crystals (M. 1866). Horse Hill, in drift
from basalt ; Baynton, near Maldon, octahedra in
basalt, exhibits polarity (N.M.). Near Daylesford ;
Ballarat; Buchan (M.R. 1889). Nowa Nowa (CI.).
Dargo, in basalt (H, teste CI.). Castlemaine, in
deposits draining from basalt (T.S.H. ). Magnetic iron
sand from Yarra basin (N.M.). Beechworth ; Gipps-
land (P. 1870). Gisborne ; Lock wood ; Kangaroo
Flat ; Flemington ; many creeks in the colony (P.
1872). Tarwin Creek (P. 1873). Mansfield (M.S.
1875-6). Bruthen(P. 1884). Crossover Creek ; Western
branch of Yarra River (M.S. 1884). Bonang; Brighton ;
Campaspe River ; Cudgewa Creek ; Colac ; Dandenong ;
Dargo High Plain ; Koetong ; Snowy Creek ; Stony
Creek ; Tarra Tarra (M.H.). Bendigo (P.R. Vol 3).
Near Heathcote, in granite and diabase rocks (H.
1896).

Malachite.— Thompson River Copper Mine ; Steiglitz and Pen-
rith Creek, in cavities of the reefs ; St. Arnaud, in the
silver reefs ; Landsborough ; Nicholson Reef, Castle;
maine (M. 1866). Blue Mountain; Bendigo; Inglewood;
Dunolly ; Gippsland (B.S.. 1866). Dedduck, in quartz
vein; Crooked River (P. 1873). Between Koetong and
Bright ; Granite Flat ; Snowy Creek, in quartz (M.S.
1875-6). Snowy River; Percydale (M.S. 1886). Mount
Korong (T.M.). Dargo; Buchan (C.L.). Scotchman's
Gully, near Castlemaine, small earthy patches (T.S.H.).
Bethanga (M.H.).

Maldonite.— Nuggetty Reef, Maldon (M. 1870). Eaglehawk
Reef, Maldon, in the quartz lodes (M.S. 1875-6). For
description see M. 1870.

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 99

Manganese. — Violet Town, in quartz ; Sunday Creek (P.R.
Vol. 7). Manganese oxides, without stating which
kind, are recorded from Bairnsdale (P. 1872). Merton ;
Yea; Alexandra; Ararat; (P. 1868). Golton Golton,
in the Grampians (P. 1874). Manganese ores from St.
Arnaud, with silver ores (K.S. 1866). Clunes ; many
parts of the colony (P. 1871). Avoca, with tourmaline
and quartz (P. 1876). See Mr. Newbery's report in
the same volume. Costerfield (P. 1878). Jan Juc ;
Wallan ; Eltham (P. 1885). Sale (M.R. 1887). Moles-
worth ; Walhalla ; Mansfield (M.R. 1890). Little
Yarra River; Acheron River (P.R. Vol. 7). Kangaroo
Ground, a vein eighteen inches thick (P. 1884).
Mount Brown (M.R. 1889). Manganese conglomerate
from Majorca (T.M.). Black manganese ore from Beau-
fort ; Benalla ; Cathcart ; Chiltern ; Daylesford ; God-
frey's Creek ; Griffith's Point ; Linton's ; Mitchell
River ; Mount Useful ; Plenty River ; Bendigo ;
Seymour ; Skipton ; Strangways ; Stawell ; Sunbury ;
Talbot ; Lower Tangil ; Tarilta ; Tarra Range ; Wan-
dilligong ; Warrandyte (P.R. Vol. 3).

Manganite. — Mount Taylor, Gippsland (CI.).

Marcasite. — Generally distributed (Sel. 1861). Woodside, Gipps-
land (P.R. Vol. 7). Omeo ; Wombat Creek, Gippsland
(CI.). Lome (T.M.).

Meerschaum. — See Allophane.

Melaconite. — Thompson River Copper Mine (M. 1866). Wom-
bat Creek, Gippsland (CI.). Bethanga (M.H.). Beech-
worth ; Tapper Murray (P.R. Vol. 3).

Melanterite. — Beehive Reef, Maldon, crystals (M. 1866). Bria-
golong (P. 1887). Ringwood (T.M.). Durham Lead;
Leigh River, efflorescence on lignite (N.M.). Sulphate
of iron from Cape Road knight ; Daylesford ; Point
Addis (P.R. Vol. 3).

Menaccanite. — In the gold-drifts of perhaps all our gold fields
(M. 1866). Creeks flowing from Mount Taylor; allu-
vial beds of Tambo and Nicholson Rivers (CI.). Yarra
River (T.M.). See titaniferous iron.

7a

100 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria,.

Mercury.- — Swamp Creek, a tributary of the "VYentworth River,
Gippsland, in alluvial (Jorgensen, teste CI.). The
"Age," 12th March, 1895, reported the finding of
cinnabar and free mercury in considerable quantities
at Jameson River. The "Argus," 21st January, 189C,
imported ores of mercury in the neighbourhood of
Beaconsfield.

Mesitite (carbonate of iron and magnesia). — Bendigo (T.M.).

Mesolite. — Clunes, in basalt from a shaft, with calcite, etc. (M.
1870). Richmond quarries (P. 1877-8). South Clunes
(P. 1879-80). Near Melbourne; Collingwood (T.M.).
Preston Yale (PR. Vol. 3).

Mesotvpe. — See Natrolite.

Mica (no species named). — Loddon Plain ; Muckleford Creek ;
Castlemaine ; Bendigo; Stawell (T.M.). Near Harrow ;
Glenelg ; various localities (Sel. 1861). Bethanga (P.
1889). Phillip Island in older basalt (P. 1877-8).
Inglewood (P. 1891). Dargo, in dyke rock (H. in Trs.
R.S. Vic, 1887). Green mica, Beechworth, in granite
(Trs. R.S. Vic, 1874). Colourless mica, near Heathcote,
in granite (H. 1896). See biotite and muscovite.

Micaceous iron. — Grampians, in veins of metamorphic rocks ;
Lake Tyers ; other places in Gippsland (M. 1866).
Northern parts of the colony (B.S. 1872). Boggy
Creek (P.R. Vol. 7). Dunolly ; Snowy River ; Loddon
River; Flemington (P. 1873). Dargo River; Nowa
Nowa; Fernbank (M.R. 1889). Omeo ; Dookie ;
Mitchell River (M.H.). Bairnsdale ; Beechworth ;
Snowy Creek ; Twofold Bay (P.R. Vol. 3). See hema-
tite and specular iron.

Microcline. — Dargo, specks in aplite (H. in Trs. R.S. Vic, 1887,
p. 136).

Middletonite. — See mineral resin.

Mimetesite. — St. Arnaud, in the silver reefs (M. 1866). In
the mineral veins throughout the colony (B.S. 1866).
Corner Inlet (M.H.).

Mineral charcoal.— South Clunes (P. 1879-80). Durham
Lead, Ballarat, at the junction of a basaltic lava and
overlying the gold-drift (T.M.).

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 101

Mineral resin. — Two kinds occur in the Lai Lai lignite deposits,
one resembling middletonite, and the other resembling
retinite from the Bovey coal. Another occurs at Cape
Patterson (M. 1866).

Mirabilite. — Efflorescences on the walls of Prospector's Tunnel
at Mitchell's diggings, Campaspe River (N.M.). (Geo.
Sur. I Sheet 13 S.E.). Stawell (P.R. Vol. 3).

Mispickel. — Generally distributed (Sel. 1861). Except pyrites,
the most frequent ore in auriferous reefs ; occurs in
veins, patches, or impregnated ; crystals in the slate
and sandstone walls ; Whip Reef, Bendigo ; Lisle's and
Manton's Reefs, Tarrengower ; Wilson's Reef, St.
Arnaud ; Nimrod and Wattle Gully Reefs, Castle-
maine, etc. (M. 1866). Barf old Ranges, with scorodite
in quartz (KM.). St. Arnaud ; Glen Dim (P. 1868).
Maldon ; Blackwood ; Omeo ; Donnelly's Creek ; Bright ;
Landsborough (P. 1870). Enoch's Point (P. 1873).
Stockyard Creek (P. 1876). Bethanga (P. 1878).
Band and Albion Mine, Ballarat (P. 1880). Beech-
worth (P. 1882-3). Ajax Mine, Castlemaine (P. 1885).
Chiltern, in granite (P. 1889). Swift's Creek, in a dyke
(M.S. 1884). Grant, argentiferous ; Upper Mitchell
River; Ballarat; Granya (M.S. 1886). Walhalla ;
Doon (M.R. 1889). Alexandra (M.R. 1890). Upper
Yarra (T.M.). Boggy Creek; Deptford ; Baldhill
Creek ; Dargo ; Wombat Creek ; Haunted Stream
(CI.). Nearly all auriferous reefs below the water line ;
Amherst ; Ararat ; Blue Mountain ; Bonang ; Buchan ;
Cathcart ; Egerton ; Lauriston; Majorca; Maryborough ;
Steiglitz ; Stawell ; Woods Point (P.R, Vol. 3).
Bethanga (M.R. 1896). See note after iron ores.

Molybdenite. — Yackandandah and Reedy Creek, fine hexagonal
plates in quartz veins traversing granite ; the Breweries,
near Maldon (M. 1866). Latrobe River (B.S. 1872).
Yea, in granite ; Bradford Lead, Maldon, in rock
crystal and cairngorm ; Nuggetty Reef, Maldon ;
Mount Moliagul (M. 1870). Wattle Gully Reef,
Castlemaine, in quartz (P. 1876). Near Berlin, in
quartz (P. 1878). Bulgoback, Gippsland (P. 1879-80).

102 Proceedings of tJte Royal Society of Victoria.

Harcourt, in granite (P. 1882-3). Beechworth ; Lee's
Creek (M.R. 1889). Ballarat ; Buffalo River (T.M.).
Myrtleford (M.H.). Barwidgee ; Mount Buffalo ; Little
River (P.R. Vol. 3). Cape Woolamai, in granite ;
Victoria Valley, veins in syenite (Pol.). Molybdenum
. (Molybdenite? J.A.A.), from Wattle Gully, plates
several inches in width, also tabular crystals in elvanite,
etc. (P. 1876).

Molybdic ochre. — Yea, in hollows of molybenite ; Mount
Moliagul, coating joints of quartz (M. 1870). See note
in the same volume.

Monazite. — Bethanga (P. 1881). Strathbogie Ranges 1 (P.
1880).

Moonstone. — See Adularia.

Mountain leather. — Kangaroo Hill and Table Hill, near
Tarilta, thin, paper-like laminae in the joints of white
silurian mud-slate at the bottom of gold-drifts (M.
1866). Maldon, at the 690ft. level (T.M.). South
German Reef, Maldon, at the 900ft. level, with calcite
in quartz (T.S. H.).

Muellerite. — Skipton Caves ("Chem. News," 13th May, 1887).
Mr. Macivor, in this journal, says this is a mineral new
to science, and he promises to describe it in a future
paper.

Muscovite. — One of the principal constituents of our granites
and grey felspar porphyries ; Beechworth, light green
crystals in sandstone ; near Harrow ; near Anakies,
in granite hills; Reid's Creek, etc (M. 1866). Dayles-
ford (B.S. 1872). Mount Wills, in dykes ; North
Gippsland, in granite (CI.). Hill's Corner, Baynton,
in granite, along its junction with the lower silurian
(N.M.). Maldon, with garnets and orthoclase, at a
depth of 1120 feet (P. 1882-3). Station Peak ; Gram-
pians ; Beechworth ; Inglewood ; Yackandandah ; Cob-
ban River (T.M.). Glenelg (P.R. Vol. 3). Near
Heathcote, in sandstone (H. 1896).

Nacrite. — A specimen from Maldon is shown in the Technological
Museum.

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 103

Natrolite. — Phillip Island, ill basalt (M. 1866). Flinders (T.M.).
Chetwynd, in older basalt (T.M. Catalogue, 1894).

Nepheline. — Phillip Island, in older basalt (P. 1877-8). (Record
apparently altered to Apatite without comment. See
T.M. Catalogue, 1894, p. 43).

Nickel. — Western Port district, in native iron (B.S. 1861).
Thompson River Copper Mine, sparingly (P.R. Vol. 6).

Newberyite. — Near Warrnambool, in guano deposits ; Skipton
Caves, in guano deposits (" Chem. News," 13th May,
1887). For analysis see the same journal.

Nontronite. — (variety of chloropal). Maldon, small seams and
patches in reefs (M. 1866). New Chum Reef, Bendigo
(P. 1874). Mount Steiglitz (T.M.). Granya (P. 1882-3).

Obsidian. — The following have been recorded as occurrences of
obsidian (see note below). In pieces on basaltic plains
round Mount Elephant and Mount Eeles (1 Mount
Eccles, J. A. A.) ; also, strange enough, over the tertiary
mud plains of the Wimmera, far removed from any
basaltic craters or points of eruption ; near Geelong,
in basaltic quarry ; Broadford, in basalt ; Spring Creek,
near Daylesford, pieces in tertiary drift (M. 1866).
Ballarat, from western deep leads (P. 1874). Buttons
from the lava floors of Western District ; Geelong and
Ballarat, buttons and hollows bombs (T.M. Catalogue,
1824). Barwon River (T.M. ). Ararat ; Ingleby (P.R.
Vol. 3). For analyses see Catalogue N.M. 1868).
Note— Mr. A. W. Howitt, F.G.S., tells me that he
has analysed a number of specimens of the so-called
obsidians, and has found them in every case to be basic,
and that we have no obsidian as we now know it ; but
that our volcanic glass is really tachylite. Mr. Rule,
late of the Technological Museum, expressed the same
opinion to me on another occasion.

Odoktolite (Bone turquoise). — Bairnsdale, a fossil tooth of a
kangaroo (T.M.).

Oligoclase.- — Mount Franklin and the Anakies, in scoriaceous
basalt; Lake Purrumbete; Black Hill, near Kyneton,
in granite ; Tarrengower, in granite ; Harcourt, in
granite (M. 1866). Kyneton (Sel. 1861). Anakies,

104 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

with olivine and hornblende (N.M.). For analysis see
N.M. Garden Gully Reef, Bendigo, in a basalt dyke
(P. 1876). Phillip Island, in older basalt (P. 1877-8).
Tangil (P. 1-881). Mount Elephant; Mount Shadwell;
Learmonth ; etc. (T.M. Catalogue, 1894). Mount Look-
out, Gippsland (T.M.). Dargo, in aplite (H. in Trs. R.
S. Vic, 1887, p. 137).

Olivine. — Common in the newer basalts, except where they occur
as true dolerite; irregular shaped masses near craters
and points of eruption, as at Mount Franklin; Anakies;
Gisborne Hill; Warrion Hills; etc. (M. 1866). Garden
Gully Eeef, Bendigo, in a dyke (P. 1876). Basin Bank
Lakes, massive (P. 1875-6). Camperdown, bombs (P.
1877-8). Mount Gambier ; Mount Leu ra ; Learmonth
(P. 1878). Tangil (P. 1881). Sunbury (P. 1885).
Daylesford (P. 1887). Mount Shadwell (P. 1884).
Mitchell River (CI.) Snowy Bluff (H. teste CI.).
Western Port, in older basalt ; Mount Lookout, Gipps-
land (T.M.). Cape Schanck ; Coal Creek ; Coimadai
Creek; Dargo High Plain ; Kilmore; Melton; Water-
house Island, in Bass Strait (P.R. Vol. 3). Dargo, in
igneous dyke (H. in Trs. R.S. Vict., 1877).

Olivenite. — Wilson's Reef, St. Arnaud, reniform coatings in
hollows (M. 1866).

Onyx. — Reported from Beechworth and Yarra basin, very scarce
(M. 1S66).

Opal. — Common opal. Sunbury, in basalt; Gelantipy, large
deposit, mostly yellowish or dark brown (CI.). Phillip
Island ; Moe (P. 1880). Near Morwell (P. 1882-3).
Woodend (M.S. 1886). Buchan (P. 1888). King
River, with chalcedony ; Moolort: Gisborne; Kyneton;
Talbot ; Blackwood ; near Bairnsdale ; Joyce's Creek
(T.M.). Precious opal. Beechworth, rare (M. 1866).
Gelantipy ; Sassafras Creek ; Woori Yaloak (P.R. Vol.
3). Fire. opal. Ovens (Bl. in Trs. R.S. Vic, 1866).
Beechworth (Bl. 1866). Head of Woori Yaloak River
(B.S. 1872). Pitch opal. Gippsland (T.M.). Semi-opal.
Maldon (T.M.). Near Melbourne, in basalt; Gisborne;
Bacchus Marsh ; Riddell's Creek (M. 1866). Opaline

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 105

quartz. Heathcote, in tertiary drift (N.M. Beech-
worth ; Essendon ; Keilor ; Mount Duneed; Shady
Creek (P.R. Vol. 3).

Opalized wood. — See Silicified wood.

Opal jasper. — See Jasper.

Oriental emerald (Green sapphire). — Pakenham (M. 1870)..
Near Cooma (Bl. in Trs. R.S. Vic, 1866). Jim Crow
Ranges; Donnelly's Creek; Ovens River; near Dayles-
ford (Bl. 1866). (Dr. Bleasdale called this "the rarest
of all gems "). Beech worth ; Dry Creek ; Stockyard
Creek; Upper Yarra (P.R. Vol. 3). A green star
sapphire from Ovens (Bl. in Trs. R.S. Vic, 1865-6).

Oriental topaz (var. sapphire). — Pakenham (M. 1870). Ovens
(Bl. in Trs. R.S. Vic, 1865 6).

Orpiment. — Deptford; Mount Baldhead, Gippsland, in cavities of
pyritic quartz (CI.). Sulphide of arsenic at Stawell
(P.R. Vol. 3).

Ortiioclase.— The principal component in all our granites ;
veins in the neighbourhood of the granite and silurian
boundaries at Maldon ; Elphinstone ; Harcourt ; etc. ;
in detritus at Timbillica Valley, Gippsland ; and near
Kangaroo Flat, Talbot; Bradford, pink crystals; Reid's
Creek, Beech worth (M. 1866). Mount Barker and
Expedition Pass, Castlemaine, large crystals (T.S.H.).
Mount Taylor and the same series of rocks throughout
North Gippsland (CI.). Kyneton; Amherst (Sel. 1861).
Back Creek, Baynton (N.M. 1868). Cape Woolomai,
with albite (P. 1878). Beechworth (P. 1879-80).
Maldon, with garnets and muscovite (P. 1882-3). Lai
Lai; Phillip Island (T.M.). Dargo, in aplite (H. in
Trs. R.S. Vic, 1887, p. 137).

Osmiridium. — Stockyard Creek, a few grains (P. 1873). Turton's
Creek, South Gippsland, small quantities in the alluvial
workings (P. 1880-1). vVaratah Bay (T.M.).

Palagonite tufa. — Collingwood (P. 1889).

Phacolite. — Richmond basalt quarries (P. 1876). South
Clunes (P. 1879-80). Collingwood, in basalt (P. 1880).
Brunswick quarries (P.R. Vol. 6).

106 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Pharmacosiderite. — Castlemaine (Sel. 1861). Port Phillip
Company's Mine, Chines, small crystals ; Beehive Reef
and German Reef. Maldon ; Armenian Reef, St.
Arnaucl ; Maryborough ; Bendigo ; Crooked River (M.
1866). Boggy Creek, near Mount Taylor, cubic green
crystals, in crevices of greenish-stained quartz (CI.).
Arseniate of iron from Gippsland (B.S. 1872). St.
Arnaud (B.S. 1866). Beechworth (P.R. Vol. 3).

Phillipsite. — Richmond, in basalt (X.M. 1868). Kyneton, in
basalt (M. 1870). Malmsbury, in basalt (P. 1878).
Collingwood, in basalt (P. 1880), Phillip Island, rare
(T.M.). Brunswick quarries (P.R. Vol. 6). For
analysis see M. 1870.

Pholerite. — Blacksmith's Gully, Fryerstown, in kaolin (N.M.
1868). Albion Company's Reef, Steiglitz, with bourn-
onite, tetrahedrite, gold, etc. (M. 1870). Eaglehawk
Reef, Maldon (P. 1877-8). Bendigo (P. 1885). Rasp-
berry Creek, in decomposed diorite dyke (T.M). Ajax
Reef and Garfield Reef, Castlemaine (T.S.H.) Snowy
Creek (P.R. Vol. 4).

Phosphate of ammonia. — Skipton Caves, in guano deposit
("Chem. News," 13th May, 1887).

Phosphate of iron*. — See Vivianite.

Phosphate of magnesium. — Skipton Caves, in guano deposit
("Chem. News," 14th May, 1887).

Phosphorite. — Bruthen Creek, Gippsland, in decomposed basalt
(M. 1870). For analysis see the same work.

Phosphorus. — In brown iron ore at Blackwood ; Strath Creek ;
Ghost Creek (P. 1878).

Pinite.— Maldon (P. 1882-3). Beechworth, in granite (L. 1873,
p. 199).

Plagioclase. — Omeo, in granite ; near Heathcote, in granite and
sandstone (H. 1896).

PLAruoNiTK. — Buchan (P. 1871).

Platinum. — Stockyard Creek, Gippsland, in alluvial workings
(P. 1874).

Pleonaste. — Upper Yarra, in gold-drift, with sapphire, zircon,
etc. ; Blue Mountain; Ballan (M. 1866). Yarra Basin,
with stream tin (B.S. 1866). Colac (P. 1871). Bass

Locality Lint of Minerals from Victoria. 107

River, Western Port, in sand (P. 1883). Haskett ;
Woodend (M.S. 1886). Eaglehawk (M.S. 1887).
Daylesford; Glenlyon (P. 1889). Granya (M.R. 1889).
Benalla ; Bullarook (T.M.). Corindhap ; Jindivik
(P.R. Vol. 7). Ballarat ; Beechworth ; Mansfield
(P.R. Vol. 3).

Plumbago. — See graphite.

Prase. — Rather rare. Specimen Gully Reef, Castlemaine ;
Heathcote, in some of the reefs (M. 1866). Lady
Gully Reef, Castlemaine (Sel. 1861). Blacksmith's
Gully Reef and Ajax Reef, Castlemaine (T.S.H.).
Maldon (T.M.). Blackwood ; Clunes ; Bendigo ; Stawell
(P.R, Vol. 3).

Prehnite. — Snowy BlufF, Gippsland (H. teste CI.).

Prochlorite (chlorite peach). — Grampians ; Ballarat ; German
Reef, Maldon (T.M.). Heathcote, in diabase rocks (H.
1896).

Psilomelane. — In the quartz reefs of all the gold fields, as mam-
millary crusts, concretions, cementing material, coatings
over gold, quartz, pyrites, etc. (M. 1866). Upper
Yarra, in quartz (B.S. 1872). Mount Taylor district ;
Bruthen ; Boggy Creek ; Omeo ; Gelantipy (CI.).
Molesworth ; Wallialla ; Jan Juc (P.R. Vol. 7). Sey-
mour (P. 1873). Near Kilmore (P. 1885). Jameson
River; Mount Buller ; near Avoca, with brown tour-
maline (P. 1877-8). Near Seaton, Gippsland (P.
1879-80). Molesworth, with cobalt and copper (P.
1880-1). Gippsland; Dunolly (T.M.). Bendigo (P.R,
Vol. 3). Riversdale (P.R. Vol. 4). Tangil (P.R.
Arol. 6;.

Pyrites. — The most common ore in auriferous quartz reefs.
Occurs in narrow veins or impregnated. Crystals and
druses frequent, Always more or less auriferous. Ovens
district ; Mount Blackwood ; Crooked River ; Tarren-
gower ; St. Arnaud ; Landsborougl) ; perfect crystals at
Wattle Gully, Castlemaine ; Malmsbury ; Maryborough ;
Tarilta, etc. ; crystals at Muckleford ; Woods Point,
etc. (M. 1866). Many localities in the Castlemaine
district, as Wattle Gully, cubes in sandstone ; South

108 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Wattle Gully Mine, octahedra ; Devonshire Mine,
pentagonal dodecahedra (T.S.H.). Haunted Stream ;
Oraeo ; Dargo ; Nicholson River, one-inch cubes ; nearly
all the gold-bearing reefs of East Gippsland ; Mount
Lookout, in lignite; Clifton Morass, pseudomorph after
wood (CI.). Bendigo ; Howqua River ; Lancefield ;
Moyston (N.M. 1868). Woodside, Gippsland (P.R.
Vol. 7). Maldon (P. 1884). Pleasant Creek, secondary
(P. 1876). Bethanga, mixed with mispickel and copper
pyrites (P. 1877-8). Moe, secondary (P. 1880).
Daylesford ; Clunes (P. 1879-80). Jan Juc, secondary
(M.S. 1884). Golden Point Lead, Ballarat, wood con-
verted into pyrite ; Fryers town (T.M.). Burke's Flat;
Dunolly ; Alexandra ; Ararat ; Beechworth ; Blakeville ;
Bright ; Buchan ; Crossover Creek ; Deptford ; Diamond
Creek ; Frankston ; Hoddle Range ; Gaffhey's Creek ;
Jameson ; Majorca ; Myrtle Creek ; Panton Hill ; Red-
l>ank ; Snowy Creek ; Stockyard Creek ; Stringer's
Creek ; Tarnagulla ; Woods Point ; Yackandandah ;
Steiglitz ; Tangil ; Daylesford ; Stawell ; stalactite at
Ballarat (P.R. Vol. 3). Near Heathcote, in diabase
rocks (H. 1896). Dandenong Ranges; Queenstown ;
Mount Useful (M.R.F.).

Pyrolusite.— Near Kilmore (M.R. 1885). Drouin (P. 1881).
Upper Yarra (N.M.). Mount Taylor (CI.). Indented
Heads (Sel. 1861). Pleasant Creek district; Ararat
(M. 1866). Fifteen miles from Moe, cementing medium
in brecciated quartz (Pr. R.S. Vic, 1880, p. 145).

Pyromorphite.- — Small, light-green prisms at Nicholson's Reef,
Castlemaine ; Chrysolite Beef, St. Arnaud ; Avoca ;
Maryborough ; Bendigo (M. 1866). In the mineral
veins throughout the colony (B.S. 1866). Fone's Reef,
Burke's Flat (P. 1874) Dry Gully, near Mount
Livingstone (Trs. R.S.S.A. Vol. 7, 1883-4). Phosphate
of lead from Dargo High Plain (P. 1872). St. Arnaud,
with silver ores (P. 1874). Ararat (P.R. Vol. 3).

Pyrope (garnet).— Ovens (Bl. in Trs. R.S. Vic. Vol. 8, 1866).

Pyrophyllite. — A mineral answering to this in appearance and
behaviour before the blow-pipe was found in a euritic

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 109

granite dyke at Beechworth (M. 1870). Maldon, with

calcite, dolomite, etc. (M.S. 1875-6).

Pykrhotite. — Howqua district, in the reefs ; Maldon, in several
reefs ; Specimen Gully Reef, Castlemaine, etc. (M.
1866). Green Gully, near Newstead (P. 1874). Beth-
anga (P. 1886). Near Stawell (T.M.). Lancetield ;
Mount Timbertop ; Waratah Bay (P.R. Vol. 3).

Quartz (common vein quartz). — The massive variety, the most
common of colonial minerals, is represented by the
thousands of reefs that traverse the silurian rocks, and
also as extensive beds of quartz rock, sometimes nearly
forty feet thick, in the tertiary formations. Druses
occur in all the reefs (M. 1866). In veins on all the
gold fields in East Gippsland (CI.). Granular quartz
at Mount Franklin, in basalt ; stalagmitic at Back
Creek, near Baynton, in a cave in granite ; mammillated
quartz at Phillip Island (N.M.). Cavernous quartz
from Gippsland (P. 1883). Quartz enclosed in basalt
from Anakies ; Phillip Island ; Mount Franklin (T.M.).
Iridescent quartz at Mount Taylor (CI.). See limonite
for other occurrences of this iridescent film.

Quartz crystals. — See Rock crystal.

Quicksilver. — See Mercury.

Randanite. — See Infusorial earth.

Realgar. — Deptford and Mount Baldhead, in quartz cavities
(CI.) Sulphide of arsenic occurs at Stawell (P.R. Vol. 3).

Red ochre. — Generally distributed in tertiary rocks (Sel. 1861).
Frequent in the tertiary rocks round the coast (M.
1866). All parts of the colony ; extensive deposits in
connection with the older basalt of Phillip Island ;
also at Ballan ; Blackwood ; Daylesford ; Bacchus
Marsh ; Tarwin River ; Anderson's Inlet (P. 1876).
White Hills, Bendigo (P. 1877-8). Boggy Creek ;
Wombat Creek ; Omeo (CI.). Near Bendigo (M.S.
1875-6). See also hematite.

Redruthite. — Sec chalcocite.

Retinite. — Bruthen Creek, Gippsland (P. 1880-1). Woodside,
Gippsland (P.R. Vol. 7). Near Cape Bridgewater
(P.R. Vol. 3). See also mineral resin and copaline.

110 Proceedings of the Royal >>'.«■<'. f// of Victoria.

Rhodochrosite. — Port Phillip Mine, Clones (T.M.).

Riebeckits. — Near Heatheote, in diabase rooks (H. 1896).

Ripidolite. — Near Heathcote. in diabase rocks (H. 1896). See
rite.

Rock crystal. — -On all the gold fields (Sel. 1861). Druses of
crystals occur in nearly all the reefs (X.M.). For
figures of crystals see M. 1870.

Rock-milk. — Collingwoodj in basalt (T.M.). See also ca

Rose-quartz. — See note to amethyst.

EtUBELLANE. — Footscray and Vaughan, in decomposed basalt,
small brownish-red tables (M. 1866).

Rubellite.- — Bradford Lead, Tarrengower, in quartz crystals
(P. 1868

RUBV (oriental). — .Mount Eliza, very rare (M. 1866). Pakenham
(M. 1870). Sebastopolj near Beech worth : Studley
Park. Melbourne : several localities where sapphire is
found (P. 1870). Stockyard Creek, Gippsland (P.
1878). Rubies are also recorded from Traralgon Creek
(P. 1877-8). Berwick: Daylesford; Mount Martha
(P.P. Vol. 3).

RuTILE. — Blue Mountain and Upper Yarra. in the wash-dirt
(M. 1866). Bass River : Omeo : head of Mitta Mitta
River (T.M.). Gippsland; Epsom Flat: Bendigo, in
quartz crystal (P. 1874). Near Pakenham (P. 1878).
Benak (P. 1880 I). Broadford (Ml 1889). Maldon,
in granite (T.M. Catalogue 1894). Beechworth ; Dayles-
ford : Stockyard Creek (P.R. Vol. 3). Kingower (P.R.
Vol. 5). Dry Gully, near Livingstone (Stirling in Trs.
RS.S.A., >^3-4).

Salt (common). Saline lakes in the Western district, crusts up
to two inches thick (M. 1866). Lake Cundare (M.R.
1890). Stawell : Lakes St. Mary : Parupa : Williams-
chase : lakes in the Avoca district (P.R. Vol. 3).

Sanidixe. — Coleraine, in volcanic rock (J. Dennant in Report
of Australasian Association for the Advancement of
Science, 1893).

Sapphire. — Castlemakie. etc. (B.S. 1861). In the gold-drifts of
Beechworth : Daylesford : Vaughan : Blue Mountain :
Upper Yarra : Mount Eliza : Inglewood, etc. (M.
1866). Tubba-Rubba Creek, Morningtou ; Trentham :

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. Ill

Yarra Ranges (B.8. 1866). Dandenong Creek (Bl.
lvii<)). Ovens, white, yellow, blue, and green varieties ;
Fryer's Creek; Gippsland (Trs. R.S. Vic, 1866). Near
Redesdale ; near Cape Otway (N.M.). Pakenham ;
Mount Greenock Lead (31. 1870). Blackwood; Mans-
field; Dry Creek; Ballarat (P. 1870). Axedale ;
Campaspe River; Dry Diggings; Colac (P. 1871).
Head of Woori Yaloak River ; basin of Little Yarra
River; Dandenong Ranges (B.S. 1872). Fryerstown,
in drift (P. 1878). Garlick's Lead (P.R. Vol. 7).
Glenlyon (P. 1889). Gembrook (M.R. 1890). Bairns-
dale ; Upper Boggy Creek, Gippsland (CI.). Stockyard
Creek ; Benalla ; Yarragon ; Bass River ; Benanibra
(T.M.). Alexandra; Berwick; Bunyip River; Bunin-
yong ; Crossover Creek ; Franklin River ; Jim Crow
diggings ; Latrobe River ; Lintons ; Sassafras Creek ;
Su-iglitz ; Tarwin River (P.R. Vol. 3). See also Ada-
mantine Spar, oriental emerald, oriental topaz.

Sardonyx. — Beech worth and Yarra basin, very rare (M. 1866).

Scheelite. — Nuggety Reef, Maldon (M. 1870). Maldon, in
considerable quantities, with calcite (M.S. 1875-6).

Schorl.- — See tourmaline.

Scolecite. — Preston Vale, on decomposed granite ; Yackan-
dandah, on a dense greenstone (M. 1870).

Scorodite. — Crooked River, crystals ; Blucher's Reef, Mary-
borough ; Beehive Reef, Maldon (M. 1866). Poverty
Reef, Dunolly, green crystals in quartz (N.M.) TVent-
worth River (P.R. Vol. 7. Bethanga (P. 1879-80).
Strathbogie Ranges (P. 1880). Monument Creek
(M.S. 1885). Doon (M.R. 1889). Broadford (T.M.).
Arseniate of iron from Gippsland (B.S. 1872). St.
Arnaud (B.S. 1866). Beechworth (P.R. Vol. 3).

Seebachite. — See phacolite.

Selemte. — See gypsum.

Sklwynite. — Near Heathcote, a vein in upper silurian rocks,
traversed by thin seams of talc and accompanied by two
other undetermined minerals (N.M.). For analysis see
N.M. and M. 1870. A mineral closely allied was
recorded from Benalla (M.R. 1889).

112 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Senarmontite. — Costerfield (P. 1876). .See note under valentinite.

Sericite. — Near Heathcote, flakes in silurian and metamorphic
rocks (H. 1896).

.Serpentine. — Mount Timbertop (M. 1870). Analysis in the
same work. Mirboo (M.S. 1881). Gippsland ; Wannon
■ Falls (P.K. Vol. 7). Beechworth ; Mount Wellington ;
Waratah Bay, produced by the decomposition of gabbro
(T.M. Catalogue 1891) Benalla (P.R. Vol. 3). Mount
Bulla ; Howqua River (P.R Vol. 4). Dargo, pseudo-
morphs after olivene (H. in Trs. R.S. Vic, 1887).

Siderite. — See Chalybite.

Silicate of iron. — Maldon ; Snowy River (P.R. Vol. 3).

Silicified wood. — Barrabool Hills ; banks of the Barwon River,
near Geelong ; Sutherland's Creek, near Maude ; Bac-
chus Marsh district ; several places in Gippsland (M.
1866). Bulla Bulla Creek (M.R.F.). Large blocks in
some of the tertiary formations ; parish of Durdid-
warrah, in hard silicious rock underlying older basalt
and tertiary beds ; Glenmaggie, in pebble drift (N.M.).
Swift's Creek (P. 1878). Near Morwell ; Sloan's Punt,
on the Goulburn River (P. 1882-3). Western Port
(P. 1884). Macalister River (P. 1891). Glenelg
River; Coleraine (T.M.). As wood opal it is recorded
from Bass River ; Grampians ; the gold-drifts of Dayles-
ford ; Ballarat, etc. (M. 1866). Between Moe and
Morwell (P. 1883). As fossil wood, from Footscray ;
Lai Lai (P. 1880). Laanecoorie (M.R. 1889). Waratah
Bay ; Stawell (PR, Vol. 3). Hepburn ; Omeo (M.R.F.).

Silver (native). — St. Arnaud, in the silver reefs (M. 1866).
Landsborough, in thin veins of quartz, with gold, copper
and lead ; Stawell (P. 1871). Dry Gully, near Mount
Livingstone (Stirling in Trs. R.S.S.A., 1883-4). Silver
is recorded from Howqua Hills, in quartz ; junction of
Delatite and Goulburn Rivers, in quartz ; Tangil, in
earthy siderite (P.R. Vol. 7). Omeo (CI.). Silver ores
from Pleasant Creek (B.S. 1866). Woods Point;
Landsborough (P. 1869). Ringwood, in quartz, one
sample (B.S. 1872). Bairnsdale ; Mount Wills ; Glen
Wills ; Gelantipy ; Mansfield ; Bemm River (M.R.
1896). See under the names of the different silver ores.

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 113

Smoky quartz. — See cairngorm.

.Specular iron. — Sandy Creek, Tarrengower, tabular crystals,
sparingly ; Mahnsbury, in dole rite and dolerite por-
phyry (M. 1866). Grampian Mounts (KM.). Bonang,
with magnetic iron (P. 1876). Bairnsdale (M.R. 1889).
Dookie ; Mia Mia ; Riversdale ; Snowy Creek ; Yarra
River (M.H.). Footscray ; Bedesdale (P.R. Vol. 3).
Moyston (P.R. Vol. 4). Iron glance from Western
Port (P.R. Vol. 7). Beechworth (M.S. 1886). Mount
Korong, in granite (KM ). County Millewa (P. 1884).
Lake Tyers (M.R.F.). See also hematite, red ochre,
micaceous iron.

Sph^rosiderite. — In the basalt of many localities, as Loddon
outliers ; Sunbury ; Campaspe Falls ; Ballan, etc.
Nodular masses in the mesozoic coal measures near
Geelong (M. 1866). Essendon (KM.). Carbonate of
iron occurs at Steep-bank Creek, Wannon district ;
Italians' diggings, Barf old, junction of basalt and
sandstone (KM.). Mahnsbury, in basalt (P. 1871).
Sarsfield ; Pleasant Creek (T.M.). Clay iron ore at
Avoca (P. 1874). See also chalybite.

Sphalerite. — Specimen Cully, Castlemaine (Sel. 1861). In the
auriferous reefs of perhaps all our gold fields, but more
frequently in Russell's Reef, near Mahnsbury ; Nuggety
Reef, Maldon ; Wilson's Reef, St. Arnaud ; Morse's
Creek ; Ovens district, etc. (M. 1866). Francis Ormond
Reef ; Crown Nimrod Reef ; Mopoke Gully ; Scotch-
man's Gully, all near Castlemaine (T.S.H.). St. AiTiaud,
in the silver mines (N.M.). Buchan, in lead mine;
Back Creek ; Swift's Creek ; many reefs at Bendigo ;
Steiglitz ; Inglewood ; Rushworth (P. 1873). Victoria
Reef, Maldon (P. 1874). Foster (P. 1876). Bethanga
(M.S. 1884). Stuart Mill, from core of diamond drill ;
Ballarat; Percydale (M.S. 1886). Maldon (T.M.).
Wombat Creek (M.R. 1890). Boggy Creek ; Buchan;
Haunted Stream; Omeo (CI.). Murrindall ; Wanga-
ratta (T.M.). Amherst; Blackwood; Clunes ; Dayles-
ford ; Gordons ; Llanelly ; Stawell (P.R, Vol. 3).

Sphene. — Near Heathcote, in diabase rocks (H. 1896).

8

114 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Spinel ruby (Balas ruby). — In the auriferous drifts of the
colony (B.S. 1866). Beechworth (Bl. 1866).

Stanntte. — Australian Alps, near Pilot Creek, in a quartz matrix
(Stirling in Trs. R.S.S.A., 1883-4).

Steatite. — Strathloddon, in silurian rocks (M. 1866). Dunolly
P.R. Vol. 3). Pseudo-steatite from Alexandra; Lau-
riston ; Woods Point (P.R. Vol. 3). See also allophame
and talc.

Steinmanite (var. galena). — Murrindall (Pr. R.S. Vic, 1880, p.
145).

Stiblite (antimony ochre). — Heathcote ; Templestowe ; Mary-
borough ; Upper Yarra (Sel. 1861).

Stibnite. — Costertield, massive ; Reedy Creek ; Whroo ; Maldon ;
Templestowe ; Woods Point ; several reefs at Ballarat ;
Daylesford ; Maryborough ; Blackwood ; Caledonian
diggings; Anderson's Creek (M. 1866). Sunday Creek,
near Ivilmore ; Tooborac (B.S. 1866). Jameson (P.R.
Vol. 7). Munster Cully, Dunolly; Upper Yarra (M.
1870). Bacchus Marsh (P. 1873). Bendoc ; Dargo ;
Swamp Creek ; Buchan (CI.). Mount Bullen, near
Mansfield (P. 1883). Gippsland ; Ararat (P. 1870).
Alexandra; Port Albert; Yea; Northcote (P. 1868).
Box Hill ; Nunawading ; Wapautaki Creek, near
Mclvor ; Bendigo ; Murchison (P. 1874). Broadford ;
Queenstown ; Redcastle ; Mclvor (T.M.). Big River,
fifteen miles from Enoch's Point (M.R. 1887). Mor-
well ; Merton ; Delatite district ; Wombat Creek (M.R.
1889). Heathcote; Rutherglen (B.S. 1866). Bulla;
Coy's diggings ; Clunes ; Donovan's Creek ; Doogalook ;
Mount Useful ; Snowball Hill ; Sunbury (P.R, Vol. 3).
Steiglitz ; Bethanga ; Warrandyte ; Tallarook (M.H.).
Near Chiltern (M.R.F.). For analysis see B.S. 1866.

Stilbite. — Barrabool Hills (P. 1880). Harcourt, druses in
granite (T.S.H.).

Strontia. — See note to barite from Maldon.

Struvjte.— Skipton Caves, in guano deposit, light yellow, sub-
transparent, crystalline particles, and perfect crystals
(M. 1870). For analyses see M. 1870, and " Cheru.
News," 13th May, 1887.

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 115

Sulphur (native). — Costertield antimony reef, in crevices; Fen-
timan's Reef, Maldon ; St. Arnaud ; Specimen Gully
Reef, Castlemaine (M. 1866). Woods Point (P. 1876).
Clifton Morass, East Gippsland ; Sarsrield, where
mounds six feet high have been thrown up and free
sulphur deposited in the crater-like basin (CI.). Mallee
(P.R. Vol. 7). Dandenong (P. 1878). Eendigo ;
Beechworth (P.R. Vol. 3).

Tachylite. — Near Geelong, in basalt (P. 1877-8). Collingwood
(P. 1880), Richmond, in basalt; Phillip Island, in
basalt (T.M. Catalogue 189-4). Saltwater River ;
Talbot (T.M.). All the records of the occurrence of
obsidian should probably be under tachylite. See note
after obsidian.

Talc. — Near Heathcote, thin veins in selwynite (M. 1866).
Beechworth (P.R. Vol. 3).

Talcosite. — Near Heathcote, in the selwynite (M. 1870). For
analysis and description see M. 1870.

Telluric Iron (?) — Magnet Hill, near Baynton's, minute particles
and small octahedra in basalt (P. 1873).

Tetrahedrite. — Albion Company's Mine, Steiglitz (M. 1870).
Jameson (T.M.). Maryborough (P.R. Vol. 6). For
description see M. 1870.

Thomsonite (comptonite). — Near Frankston, on granite (P.
1877-8). Heathcote, in diabase rocks (H. 1896).

Tin (Metallic). — Malmsbury, associated with tin-sand (P.
1882-3). Latrobe River (M.R.F.).

Tin-sand. — See cassiterite.

Titaniferous Iron Sand. — Abundant in the gold-drifts of perhaps
all the gold fields ; in the drainage channels from, and
in the detritus of, basalt escarpments. As far as can
be made out, it consists of two species, iserine and
menaccanite (M. 1866). Samples have been received
by the Mines Department from all parts of the colony.
It usually contains garnets, sapphires, zircons, topazes,
and, in some cases, cassiterite (M.S. 1875-6).

Topaz. — Ararat ; Castlemaine ; near Pleasant Creek (B.S. 1861).
French Island and Flinders Island, crystals and rolled
pebbles in tolerable abundance ; Dunolly, blue and

116 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

white, in gold-drift ; Woolshed ; Sebastopol ; Eldorado ;
Reid's Creek;' Beechworth ; Bendigo (M. 1866).
Moonambel ; Mountain Creek ; Gippsland (Bl. 1866).
Dr. Bleasdale says — " Wherever the blue topaz is found,
there also the diamond may be looked for." Redesdale
(N.M.). Mount Greenock, near Talbot (M. 1870). For
an account of an interesting occurrence at Bradford
Lead, Maldon, see M. 1870. Blackwood; Dry Creek ;
near Mansfield; Ballarat (P. 1870). Near Lilydale ;
Dandenong Ranges (B.S. 1872). Near Pakenham, in
drift (P. 1878). Strathbogie Ranges (P. 1880). Gem-
brook (M.R, 1890). Crooked River (CI.). Colac ;
Yackandandah ; Myrtleford Creek (P. 1871). Coburg;
Daylesford ; Franklin River ; Majorca ; Sassafras
Creek ; Stawell ; Upper Yarra ; Stockyard Creek (P.R.
Vol. 3). Smoky topaz at Beechworth ; Maldon ; Upper
Yarra (P.R. Vol. 3).

Torbanite. — Tver's Creek, near Traralgon (P. 1874). For
analysis see P. 1874.

Touchstone. — See basanite.

Tourmaline. — Maldon ; Beechworth ; Dandenong ; St. Arnaud ;
Mount Alexander, etc. ; a common accessory of granite.
Abundant in some of the gold-drifts. Dandenong
Ranges ; Baynton's, in a granite vein ; Ovens district ;
Wilson's Promontory ; Berwick ; etc. ; crystals of
transparent green tourmaline at Beechworth and bed of
the Yarra River (M. 1866). Yarra Basin, with stream
tin (B.S. 1866). Maryville Company, Dalhousie, in
quartz ; Specimen Gully, Barker's Creek (N.M.).
Chiltern ; Bright (P.R. Vol. 7). Myrtleford Creek ;
Yackandandah; Gippsland (P. 1871). Near Pakenham,
green (P. 1878). Euroa (P. 1883). Yea, in pebbles
(P. 1885). Bethanga (P. 1886). Neerim (M.S. 1884).
Molesworth ; near Franklin River (M.S. 1887). Gem-
brook; Agnes River (M.R. 1890). Expedition Pass,
Castlemaine (T.S.H.). Omeo ; Beenak ; Upper Murray;
Seymour (T.M.). Bruthen; Bemru River; Mount Wills
(CI.). Stawell (P.R, Vol. 6). Alexandra; Barna-
wartha ; Belvoir ; Campaspe ; Fanwick ; Linton's ;

Locality List of Minerals from Victoria. 117

Majorca; Mount Koorong; Mount Singapore; Bendigo;
Snowy River; Mount Tarrengower ; Lilyclale (P.R.
Vol. 3).

Travertine. — Limestone Creek, near Castlemaine ; (T.S.H.).

Tremolite. — Maldon, with calcite, dolomite, etc. (M.S. 1875-6).

Tri polite. — See infusiorial earth.

Tungstite.— Maldon (Pr. Rs. Vic. 1880, P. 145).

Turquoise. — King River, Omeo (P. 1890).

Uralite. — VVaratah Bay, in gabbro (T.M.). Near Heathcote, in
diabase (H. 1896).

Valentintte. — Costerfield ; Morning Star Reef, Woods Point,
sparingly (M. 1866). Minister Gully, Dunolly, 62^ to
64 per cent, of antimony (P. 1874). Ringwood (P.
1878). Cashel (T.M.). Dargo ; Heathcote; Whroo
(M.H.). Upper Bendoc ; Blackwood ; Caledonia ; Coy's
diggings ; Warrandyte ; Yea (P.R. Vol. 3). Antimony
oxides, without stating which kind, at Box Hill ; Ben-
digo (P. 1874). Gippsland (P. 1870). Blackwood ;
Upper Yarra (P. 1872). Near Yea; Warrandyte;
Upper Bendoc (P. 1873). Yangardook (P. 1876).
Merton (M.R. 1889). Big River (M.R. 1890). Ring-
wood, a mineral which looks like hydrous brown oxide
of iron, but has up to 45 per cent, of antimony oxide
(P. 1872). Antimony ores, without stating which ore,
at Anderson's Creek ; Steiglitz ; near Maryborough
(B.S. 1861). Buchan (P. 1871). Thomastown, near
Merri Creek (P. 1877-8). Sunday Creek, near Kilmore
(P. 1883). Coy's diggings (P. 1884). Kanambra
(M.R. 1896).

Viviaxjte. — Nicholson's River, near Bairnsdale, crystals in
silurian sandstone ; Phillip Island, earthy, in older
basalt; Bruthen Creek, in older basalt; Ballarat, in
shales and mudstones (N.M.). Ballarat, in basalt;
Port Addis ; Geelong ; Guano islands of Bass Straits ;
Buckland River (M. 1870). Richmond (P. 1868).
Johnson's Creek, Alexandra (P. 1873). Maldon, with
calcite and dolomite (M.S. 1S75-6). Wannon River,
near Hamilton (P. 1884). Princetown (M.R. 1889).
Charlotte Plains (P. 1891). Dunolly; Mount Alex-

118 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

ander (T.M.). Sarsfield (H. teste CI.). Port Albert
(M.H.). Traralgon (P.R. Vol. 3). Woods Point
(M.R.F.). Phosphate of iron at Ouieo ; .Snowy Creek ;
Smythesdale ; Tarwin Creek (P.R. Vol. 3).

Wad. — Near Merton, in Goulburn Valley (M. 1866). Boggy
Creek; Merrigig Creek, with quartz (CI.). Clifton
Creek, in soft, slaty rock ; some of the gold fields (B.S.
1872). Near Walhalla, in joints of a decomposed
diorite dyke ; Little Dorrit Mine, Crooked River (P.
1880-1). Goulburn River (P. 1882-3). Bethanga
(M.R. 18S7). Upper Yarra ; Hoddle's Creek (M.R.
1890). Beechworth (P. 1889). Rushworth (P. 1890).
Near Yea; Molesworth ; Warburton (P.R. Vol. 7).
Landsborough ; Clune.s ; Dunolly ; Strathloddon ; Mal-
don; Caledonian diggings (T.M.). Snowy River; near
Black Mountain (P. 1874). See also asbolite.

Wavellite. — Two miles north of Lancefield, in lower silurian
graptolite shales, yellowish or greenish disc-like plates
(M. 1*70). Beechworth (T.M.).

Witherite. — Gippsland ; Omeo, with pyrites, lead ores, etc. ;
Buchan; Corner Inlet (P. 1870).

Wolfram. — Near railway cutting at Big Hill ; Bendigo line, in
quartz ; Sandy Creek, Maldon, in quartz ; Dandenong ;
Upper Yarra; Ramshorn Gully, in gold-drifts (M. 1866).
Between Sandy Creek and Loddon River, eight miles
fn.m Maldon, with schorl, etc. (N.M.). Near Ballarat,
in quartz ; Nuggetty Reef, Maldon, with scheelite, etc.
(M. 1870). Linton's (P.R. Vol 7). North Gippsland
(P. 1880). Granya; Swift's Creek ; Chiltern (T.M.).

Wolfsbergite. — (Antimonial copper). Costerfield antimony
reef, scale-like crystals (M. 1866).

Wood-opal. — See silicified wood.

Yellow Ochre. —See limoiiitc.

Zeolites.— Gelantipy (CI.). Ararat; Ballan ; Smythesdale (PP.
Vol. 3). Broken River (PR. Vol. 4). Near Heath-
cote, in diabase rocks ; (H. 1896). See also each
zeolite under its own name.

Zinc (Native). — Collingwood, in a cavity in basalt, one specimen
only, about 19 ounces in weight ; small nodules from

Locality List of Mineral* front Victoria. 119

Creswick Creek and Daylesford (M. 1866). Chrysolite
Hill, St. Arnaud (P. 1873). Bendigo ; St. Arnaud ;
Maldon ; Gippsland (P. 1868). Mitta Mitta River, in
auriferous sands (Rutley's Mineralogy, p. 173). Snowy
River (P.R, Vol. 3).

Zixc ore from Wombat Creek (M.R. 1896).

Zircon. — Daylesford, crystals ; in gold drifts of vaiuous localities
(Sel. 1861). Generally abundant in the gold-drifts,
especially Blue Mountain ; Kangaroo ; Tarilta ; Guild-
ford ; Daylesford ; Ballan ; Upper Yarra ; Beechworth.
Transparent colourless grains at Hard Hills, Campbell's
Creek, near Castlemaine ; Yandoit ; and Taradale, etc.
(M. 1806). Yarra Basin, in stream tin; Tubba-Rubba
Creek (B.S. 1866). Gippsland ; Jim Crow Ranges (Bl.
1866). Near Lilydale (B.S. 1872). Mount Greenock
Lead (M. 1870). Ampitheatre ; Jindivic (P.R. Yol. 7).
Blackwood ; Dry Creek ; Ballarat ; near Mansfield
(P. 1870). Axedale ; Campaspe River ; Dry Diggings;
Colac ; Steiglitz ; Yackandandah ; Myrtleford Creek
(P. 1871). Snowy Creek, in iron sand (P. 1874). Wal-
halla, in creeks (P. 1876). Possum Hill, Orville ; near
Pakenham (P. 1877-8). Fryerstown; Stockyard Creek
(P. 1878). North of Lake Learmonth, in its basalt
matrix (T.M.). Castlemaine district (B.S. 1861). Bass
River and Western Port, in sand ; Bullarook, in iron
sand (P. 1883). Moondara (P. 1887). Glenlyon
(P. 1889). Mount Bulla ; head of western branch of
Yarra River (M.S. 1884). Haskett (M.S. 1886). Eagle-
hawk (M.S. 1887.) Tallarook; Gembrook (M.R, 1889).
Toongabbie ; Benalla ; Werribee Gorge, near Ballan ;
Mornington (T.M.). Kiewa River (P.R, Yol. 6).
Berwick ; Bunyip River ; Buninyong ; Chiltern ;
Clunes ; Cudgewa Creek ; Euroa, Dandenong Ranges ;
Franklin River ; Latrobe River ; Loddon River ;
Upper Murray River ; Rosedale ; Bendigo ; Sassafras
Creek ; Linton's ; Woori Yaloak River (P.R. Yol. 3).
See also hyacinth.

Art. X. — The Burbung of the New England Tribes,
New So a tli Wales.

By R. H. Mathews,

Licensed Surveyor.

(Communicated by Professor Baldwin Spencer).

[Read 9th July, 1896.]

In pursuing my professional duties as a surveyor in various
parts of the New England district of New South Wales during a
number of years past, I frequently met and was intimately
acquainted with many of the head men of the native tribes
scattered over that portion of the country, and took advantage of
these opportunities to collect all the available details respecting
their initiation ceremonies. As the result of my own observa-
tions, and from information obtained from the natives, I have
prepared what it is hoped will be found a correct and tolerably
full account of the ceremonies carried out amongst the tribes who
occupied a strip of elevated country along the main dividing
range, from about Moonbi to Ben Lomond, comprising what
is called the " Table Land " of New England. The territory of
these tribes extended down the eastern side of this range perhaps
as far as Walcha, Hillgrove and Oban. On the west of the
main range they included Bendemeer, and reached almost to
Bundarra and Inverell, adjoining the Kamilaroi tribes all the
way. The principal dialects spoken by them are the Noivan and
Yunggai. They have the Kamilaroi organisation, being divided
into four classes, with uterine descent, but the class names are
different from those of the Kamilaroi tribes.* This part of the
subject will be dealt with by me in another paper.

Generally speaking, the reader is invited to remember that,
although the main features of the initiation ceremonies obtaining
over a wide area may be essentially the same, there are several
local variations in some of the details in different parts of it.

* See my paper on " The Kamilaroi Class System of the Australian Aborigines." Proc.
Roy. Geog. Soc. Aust. (Q.), x., 18-34, Plate I.

Burbung of the New England Tribes, X.S.W. 121

This is more especially true of the Kamilaroi and Wiradthuri
tribes, occupying extensive tracts in the interior of New South
Wales, whose ceremonies of initiation have been described by me
elsewhere.* Even in the small strip of country occupied by the
New England tribes, it is found that the Burbung of the southern
half of the district is somewhat different in a few of the details
to that of the northern half.

The Main Camp and Burbung Ground. — The locality selected
for the main encampment is generally situated on a moderately
level piece of ground, not far from water, and where plenty of
wood for fuel is obtainable. It is also chosen in a part of the
tribal territory where game is sufficiently abundant to afford a
food supply for the people who are in attendance while the cere-
monies last. The local tribe are the first to erect their quarters,
and the other contingents who have been invited encamp around
this as a datum point, each in the direction of the country from
which they have come.

Every evening after dusk, and every morning at or before day-
light, a bullroarer is sounded by one of the single men in the
vicinity of the camp, and when this is heard, the men raise a
shout in unison, and the elderly women commence to sing and
beat their rugs as an accompaniment to their chants.

Adjacent to the main camp, a slightly oval or circular space,
called urfanlmng, about thirty feet in diameter, is cleared of all
timber and grass, and the loose soil scraped off the surface in
making it level is used to form the raised earthen embankment
which surrounds it. This embankment is about a foot high, and
is about eighteen inches wide at the base, tapering upwards to a
narrow ridge along the top.

A narrow pathway (indyoona) leads from this circle to another
cleared space of somewhat smaller dimensions, about a quarter of
a mile distant, in a secluded part of the forest. This circle is
likewise bounded by a raised earthen wall like the other one, and
within it are two heaps of earth about a foot high, on the top of

* "The Bora, or Initiation Ceremonies of the Kamilaroi Tribe," Journ. Anthrop. Inst.,
xxiv., 411-427; Ibid., xxv., 31S-339. "The Burbling of the Wiradthuri Tribes,'' Joum.
Anthrop. Inst., xxv., -295-318.

122 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

each of which a fire, called tobmeeobroo, is kept burning.* Whei*e
the pathway meets each of these circles, there is an opening about
two or three feet wide left in the embankment as an entrance to
the space within.

On approaching the farther ring, on either side of the path
above' described are some tracks of an emu's foot cut in the
ground, the outline of an iguana formed of raised earth, and some
other figures The bark on the boles of a number of trees around
this ring are marked with various wavy, zig-zag and oval patterns
cut with a tomahawk. This marking is called moombeera or ma-
kendee. ISTot far from the pathway, and in close proximity to the
marked trees, is the horizontal figure of a man, larger than life
size, lying prone on the ground. He is formed of raised earth,
with a layer of mud or clay on the upper surface, and is called
Goign or Baiamai.

Mustering /lie Tribes. — The messengers who are sent out to
gather the tribes cany a bullroarer, some tails, boomerangs, and
white stones. When a messenger gets near the camp of a tribe
he has been instructed to summon, he waits till it is evening, and
then approaches it quietly and swings his bullroarer. When the
old men hear this they commence to sing "Birr! birr !" and go
to the messenger and conduct him to the men's camp. He briefly
tells them where he has come from, and postpones the rest of
his message till the following morning.

• Next morning he goes with the chief men to the Ibata, or
private meeting-place of the men, and there he produces his
emblems of authority and hands them to the head men. If, as
is generally the case, they are all agreeable to join the Burbung
gathering, they accept the emblems, and the messenger goes back
to the head man who sent him and reports the result of his mission.
When the time arrives to start for the appointed meeting -place,
all the men, women and children are mustered up, and the
journey is commenced towards the Burbung ground, dances
and songs being indulged in at the various camping-places along
the route. When this concourse arrives almost in sight of the
main camp, a stoppage is made, to give them an opportunity for
preparing to meet the people already assembled there. Their

* In some parts of the district there is only one heap of earth in this circle, with a fire
burning on top.

Burbung of the New England Tribes, N.8.W. 123

baggage is laid down, and the men approach the small ring in
single tile, their bodies being painted in squares and ovals in
white and red colours. They generally arrive in the evening,
but sometimes early in the morning. They enter the ring and
go round in single file till they are all within it, and sit down on
the embankment, with their faces towards the country from
which they have come. One of them now sounds a bull roarer,*
and the men belonging to the ground, who may be called the
" hosts," then come along the track from the camp and also enter
the ring and walk round, keeping inside the strange men who
are sitting on the bank. Here they come to a stand, each man
looking towards the big ring. The hosts know what district the
new mob are from by the direction in which their faces are
turned, and the new mob know the hosts are the people belonging
to the ground, because they stand looking in that direction —
but neither party speak a word.

The new men then get up and walk round the hosts, and start
away along the track towards the urfanbang. Each man breaks
two small boughs, one of which he carries in each hand, and
sways them in the air at intervals as he walks along. Some of
them may carry a boomerang in one hand, and a bush in the
other. On arriving at the ring, they find the women of the hosts
dancing within it, and the new men enter it and dance round the
women. Everybody, men and women, then come out of the ring.

The women of the strangers, who had walked on to the larger
ring when their men went to the small one, are sitting down
outside the embankment, waiting. When the hosts' women come
out, these new women, accompanied by the novices of their tribe,
enter the ring. The men of the hosts, who have followed the
other men from the small ring, and also carrying boughs in their
hands, then march in round them. The strange women then
come out, and their men go in. The men of both tribes, being
now all in the ring, pull the leaves off" their green boughs and
throw them in the air, letting them fall on the ground, at the
same time calling out the names of the principal places, Burbung
grounds, etc., in their country. After this, all the men come out

* Sometimes the arrivals take place in the very early morning, at or before daylight,
and the hosts are roused out by the sound of the bullroarer at the farther ring.

124 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

of the ring, and the new mob of men and women go and pitch
their camp. If they had left any baggage behind when they
came in sight, they would go back and bring it up. The novices,
if any, in the new mob go with the women. The fathers of the
novices have a mark of red paint on their foreheads or faces, so
that the men at the camp may see them, and by this means learn
at a glance how many new boys have been brought in this
contingent. If a man have two sons to be initiated, he will have
two marks on his face.

Taking away the Boys. — Early in the morning which has been
decided upon for taking the boys away, the head men proceed to
the sacred ring and hold a discussion as to the most convenient
place to remove the main camp to. The place proposed by the
tribe which has brought the greatest number of boys is generally
agreed upon, provided it is otherwise suitable. When this point
is settled, they all go back along the track in single tile to the
large ring, from which they disperse to their several camps. All
the women and children are then gathered up close to the ring,
and the painting of the novices is proceeded with.

The men who are to take charge of the ceremonies in the bush
go away again to the small ring and paint their bodies jet black
with powdered charcoal, or the bark of certain trees charred in
the tire. The two men who are to use the bullroarers also see
that the strings of these instruments are in good order.

The painting of the novices is done by the mothers and sisters
of each boy. He is painted all over with red ochre and grease ;
even the hair of his head, and also his rug, are painted red. One
of the novice's male relatives then comes forward and fastens a
belt around his waist, to which are attached two tails or kilts,
one before and one behind. He is then conducted into the ring,
and is placed sitting down on the embankment — the boys of each
tribe being placed by themselves on that side of the ring which
is nearest their own country. The mother and sisters of each
novice are just outside the embankment, sitting in such a
position as just to be able to touch him with their feet. All the
women and children are told to lie down and keep still, and are-
then covered over with rugs and bushes, which had been cut and
placed in readiness for the purpose.

Bv.vhii ng of the Neiv England Tribes, N.S.W. 125

One of the head men now goes along the group of boys, bend-
ing their heads down, and throws a rug over each boy, so that
they can only see the ground at their feet. The sound of the
bullroarer is then heard in the direction of the smaller ring, and
it quickly gets nearer. Two men are engaged in this duty, one
on each side of the pathway connecting the two circles.

The guardians now step forward and lead the boys away out
of the ring, and away along the track to the beginning of the
marked trees, where they are placed lying on the ground, the
group of boys belonging to each tribe having their heads pointing
in the direction of their own country. In some instances the
heads of all the novices are in the direction of sun-set. Here
they are covered over with rugs, and are kept about a quarter or
half an hour, till the women depart from the lai'ge ring, as will
be described presently.

The boys are then helped to rise, and the rugs are adjusted over
their heads in such a manner that a small opening is left at the
face, the rug projecting at each side like a hood. This is done in
order to prevent the boys from seeing anything except what is
straight in front of them. One of the men then pretends to see
a locust or bird, or something of the kind, in the air in the direc-
tion of the sun, and requests the boys to try if they can see it.
Having looked intently for some time, their eyes are so much
dazzled by the glare of the sun that they cannot see anything
distinctly for a s>-ood while afterwards, and everything around
them has a strange appearance.

While their eyes are suffering from the effects of the sun's rays,
the guardians take them along the track and show them every-
thing marked on the ground and on the trees. When they come
to each marked tree, the men stoop down and scratch the loose
leaves away from its base, and rub their hands upon it, at the
same time inviting the novices to take particular notice of the
moombeera cut upon it.

Removal of tlie Main Camp. — I must now return to the women
who were left at the large ring. As soon as the novices were out
of sight, the rugs and other coverings were taken off" the women
and children by some old men who remained in charge of them,
and they were told to rise to their feet. On looking at the

126 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

deserted ring, the mothers and sisters of the novices generally
feel very tristful, and vent their feelings by crying.

All the women and children, and such of the men as have
remained with them, pack up all their moveables, and prepare for
a start to another camp, the site of which had previously been
fixed' by the head men after discussion among themselves. Before
leaving the camp, they tix a mark as a guide to any other tribes
who may not have yet arrived. This is done by inserting a pole,
eight or ten feet long, upright in the ground inside of the ring,
the top of it being ornamented by having a bunch of leaves tied
to it. On the shaft of this vertical pole, about four or five feet
from the ground, another pole or stick about three or four feet
long is lashed to it at right angles, pointing in the direction of
the new camp. If there be a turn in the way leading to the
latter, a stick having a corresponding bend in it would be used
for the horizontal pule ; and if the way to the new camp passed
over creeks, their position would be indicated on the horizontal
pole by means of pieces of stick tied across it, equal in number
and in relative positions to the creeks to be passed over.

A somewhat similar guide is left by the men at the small ring.
They cut a pole, which may consist of a tall sapling growing near
about twenty feet long, and lean it in the low fork of another
sapling, perhaps six feet high, in such a way that the elevated
end points in the direction in which the boys were taken into the
bush, the other end of the pole resting on the ground. Close by
this slanting pole they also make marks on the surface of the
ground, by means of small poles or sticks laid horizontally round
a centre, representing all the tribes who are present — one of these
sticks pointing in the direction of the country from which each
tribe has come. Those tribes which have not yet arrived are not
represented, but a space or opening is left where their pole ought
to be. This index is called aradna.

Having made these preparations, the men, women and children
proceed to the site chosen for the new camp, which is called
Ahrowang. The people of the local tribe are the first to select
their quarters, around which the other tribes take up their
respective positions, each in the direction of the country they
have come from.

Burbung of the New England Tribes, JST.S.W. 127

A short distance from this main camp a piece of level ground
is selected and cleared of sticks and loose rubbish, and in the
middle of it two tires are lit, about twenty yards apart. This
place is called Aychowal. Around these tires the mothers and
sisters of the novices dance every evening accompanied by all
the women and children of the tribes present. None of the
men participate in these dances at the Aychowal. The last
night before the boys are brought back the women dance and
sing around these tires nearly all night.

The morning following the establishment of this new camp,
one of the old men, accompanied by one or two of the elder
women, pay a visit to the original camp. The man goes to the
small ring and cuts a nick in the long slanting pole already
described, to show that all the people have been gone away one
clay. One of the women also marks the upright pole at the
large ring with one nick, conveying the same meaning. The
nick cut by the man is horizontal, that cut by the woman in the
other pole is vertical, the women not being allowed to mark their
pole in the same way as the men mark theirs. This marking of
the poles would be continued for some days, until the tribes
expected had either arrived, or it was thought they did not
intend to be present.

I will now endeavour to explain the use and meaning of these
poles : — It sometimes happens that a tribe may be delayed on
the road by rain or floods, or other causes, and arrive a day or
two after the boys have been taken away. On arriving at the
main camp and finding it deserted, the initiated men would all
proceed to the small ring, and the women, novices, and
children to the large one, where they would see the poles
erected, letting them know how many days previously the
main mob had left. The sticks laid upon the ground,
radiating round a common centre, would let the men see what
tribes were present, and also what tribes, if any, are still
missing. They would then add another stick, pointing in the
direction of the country they had themselves come from. The
men would then go from the small ring along the track, looking
at everything as they went, and join their women and boys at
the other ring. All of them would then start in the direction
indicated by the poles, and on coming up to the new camp they

12S Proceedings of tht Royal Society of Victoria.

would march into the side nearest their own country and erect
their quarters. The men who had remained with the women at
the new camp would go over to the new mob of men and tell
them all the particulars of the Burbung, and the women of the
new tribe would also enter into conservation with the other
women. After awhile some of the men of the new mob would
perhaps wish to start out to the bush for the purpose of joining
the mob who had charge of the novices, and if they did not know
the country one or more of the other men would go out with
them. If the new men are well acquainted with the country, a
number of them might start into the bush from the small ring, in
the first instance, in the direction indicated by the pole, and let
their women and the rest of the men go on to the new camp as
just stated. In either case these men would join the people in
the bush as described at page 123.

Ceremonies in the Bush. — When the boys have been shown all
the moombeera, they are conducted to the small ring, and march
once round it, and then a start is made for the bush. All the
men who go with them are painted black all over with powdered
charcoal as already stated.

On the journey into the bush, the boys walk with their heads
down alongside of their guardians. By the way the endahmaran
play, for the amusement of the boys, is gone through. It consists
of a number of men climbing into the branches of a tree and
catching on with their legs, hang head downwards, in imitation
of flying foxes. The first night they form a camp in the bush
consisting of a yard in the shape of a horseshoe, made of boughs
or bark, with two tires in front of it, and beyond these a space
is cleared. They remain here about three nights, games being
played on the cleared space on the other side of the tire every
night. Bullroarers are occasionally sounded during the evenings
by one of the men. These games consist of imitating the
opossum — making a noise like that animal — the wombat, rooting
the ground and turning logs and sticks over — the bandicoot —
the wallaby. During the day the men go out hunting, the boys
remaining in the camp with their guardians.

At this camp a small quantity of human excrement is given to
the boys, and occasionally they have to drink urine out of a
coolamin. If a boy wants to micturate the first night, he must

Burhing of the New England Tribes, N.8.W. 129

do it in the rug he is lying in ; next night he is allowed to
micturate in one of the tires ; and the third and last night he
does it in the other tire. He must communicate his wish by
touching his guardian, who then helps him to his feet and leads
him to the tire.

Having remained here the required time a shift is made early
in the afternoon to another camp, the boys being conducted by
their guardians in the same manner as before. This new camp
is formed in the shape of the letter V, the apex pointing in the
direction of the women's camp. It is formed of bark or bushes
according as to whether the weather is wet or tine. There are
two tires in front of it, like the last camp, and a clear space
beyond the tires for a corroboree ground. Besides the two
tires for corroborees, the men and boys may have several other
tires close to where they are lying, to keep them warm during
the night or clay. This camp is called Rooingat or "playing
place." The plays represent pheasants scratching the rubbish
into heaps, wonga pigeons, wild turkeys, kangaroos, fish, bears,
iguanas, bees.

The men and boys camp round inside the V-shaped wall, and
when the play is going on at the other side of the fire the boys
are placed sitting in front of it, so that they can look at the men
playing. During the day, the men go out hunting to obtain
food, the boys remaining lying or sitting in the camp, some of
their guardians being present all the time. In the evening the
guardians and other men prepare food for the novices by remov-
ing all bone and sinew from the flesh while it is being cooked.
If a boy wants to micturate he does it in one of the tires the first
time, and in the other tire the next time, alternating between the
two tires. If he wants to evacuate, he is taken out by his
guardian a few yards from the camp, and the matter covered
over when he is done. During every night of the sojourn of the
boys in the bush, the bullroarer is sounded by one of the men
somewhere out of sight.

When the men have been at this camping place a few days.
some men, goomat, meaning dingo, come from the women's camp
(Ahrowcifig). When these men get near the Rooingat camp,
they commence cooeeing in imitation of the dingo, or native
dog, and are answered by a shout from the camp. When

130 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

they get in sight they form into single tile and advance in
a line. Each man has a bush which he holds in front of him,
so as to hide the upper part of his body. The boys are helped
to get up and are stood in a row between their camp and the
tires. When the goomat men reach the camp, they come round
one end of it, and form a row on the opposite side of the fire to
that on which the boys are standing. They then throw down
their bushes and dance for a brief time before the novices, and
then go into the rooingat camp and sit down. The rooingat men
then go out, and, picking up the bushes brought by the goomat,
strip all the leaves off them, dancing and making a great noise
by shouting " Wall ! wan ! " all the time they are breaking off the
leaves.

Some of the goomat men remain with the men in the bush, the
others return to the women's camp. Those who intended remain-
ing had painted themselves jet black on the way out, but those
who intended to return were not painted. These goomat men
reach the bush camp about the middle of the day. More than
one lot of goomat men may visit the camp in the bush, and the
formalities observed on each occasion are the same.

When it is determined to remove from the x'ooingat camp, the
wall at the apex of the V-shaped enclosure is thrown down, and
the men and boys march out through the breach and proceed in
the direction of the women's camp to another place, where they
erect a camp all in one line. Only one night is spent in this
camp, and the men remain up nearly all the night, playing diffe-
rent animals and singing. Next morning the men form a semi-
circle, dancing in front of the boys, who are put standing in a
row, and two men step into the clear space and swing bullroarers.
The blankets are then lifted off" the heads of the novices, and they
are told to look. The chief men then advance, and, stepping up
quite close to the boys in a menacing attitude, threaten them
that if ever they divulge anything which they have seen or heard
in the bush, they will lose their lives either by the hands of their
fellows or by supernatural agency.

After this all hands remove from that place, still going towards
the women's camp, till they come to a water-hole, where a halt is
made. On the way from the last camp to this place, the novices
have been allowed to carry their heads erect and look about
them.

Burbung of the New England Tribes, N.8.W. 131

The men play the crow, imitating that bird, and then play the
dingo, scratching back dirt with their feet. After this all the
"black" men go into the water and wash the black paint off
themselves ; the guardians also go in, but the novices sit on the
bank watching them. When the men come out of the water,
they singe the hair short on the boys' heads, and also off other
parts of their bodies ; the hair of the men is not singed. Every-
body, including the boys, then paint themselves white with
pipeclay, which is diluted with a small quantity of water in a
coolamin. The men and boys assist each other in this painting,
which must extend all over their bodies, including the hair of
their heads. The whole party being now painted with pipeclay,
may for distinction be called " the white mob." If there are any
dogs in the party, they have a white streak of pipeclay marked
down their forehead to the point of the nose. The men and boys
now catch hands and form a ring, to see what space they will
occupy, being a kind of drill so that they may know their work
when they reach the women's camp presently.

The shrill, cooeeying sound of the goomat men coming from
the women's camp is now heard, and one of the white men swing
a bullroarer in reply. The novices are placed standing in a row
in a clear piece of ground facing in the direction of the women's
camp. The goomat now advance in single file, each man carrying
a bough hi front of him as before described, and form a line
facing the novices. The goomat men now throw down their
bushes and go through a short dance. The " white " men step
forward and pick up the bushes which the others have thrown
down and pull the leaves off them, scattering them about, making
a great noise, as previously described.

The head man of the goomat mob now asks the " white men "
to form into a ring by joining their hands, in order that he may
see the size of the ring, for the purpose of assisting him in
placing the women round the tires. The goomat men now take
their departure and return to the women's camp at the Aychowal.

When the mob started out to the bush to meet the men and
boys at the water-hole, the women replenished the fires and cut a
number of green boughs, which they laid in a line between one
fire and another. On the return of the goomat all the women
and children are mustered by the men and are placed lying down

132 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

outside the fires, and are then covered over with rugs, blankets
and bushes. A few of the head men of the camp mob remain
standing round the fires watching the women.

Return of the Boys. — When all is ready the " white mob "
make their appearance in single file, the boys and their guardians
being in the lead — a guardian being in front with his novice
behind him, then another guardian followed by his novice, and
so on. Before coming in sight of the camp they laid down
everything they were carrying, and now have nothing in their
hands. A large bull roarer, Boolpee, would be sounded in the
rear by one of the goomat men as this mob approached. This
would be about the middle of the day.

"When the front man gets within such a distance of the point
midway between the two fires as he estimates to be the radius of
the circle, he turns to one side and the others follow him. When
about half the mob have gone to this side, the men who are
still coming turn the contrary way, going round to meet the
first man. When all the men and boys are in their places, they
catch each others hands and form a complete circle which may be
called the "white ring," round the women and the fires. They
do all this as quietly as possible, so that the women may not hear
them coming in. .Some of the goomat men are standing outside
the "white ring" directing the proceedings, having estimated the
size of the ring by having seen it formed at the water-hole in the
bush.

The head men now give orders for the women to get up, and
each mother then looks around for her son. Having his hair cut
off, and being painted white, sometimes so alters his appearance
that his mother cannot readily recognise him. >Some of the
goomat men perhaps indicate the son's position. Each boy has
a nose peg made of kangaroo bone through the septum of his
nose, or carried in his mouth, to further assist in distinguishing
them from the other men. Each mother goes close to her son,
and catching one of her breasts in her hand raises it towards him,
and he bends his head and pretends to suck it. The sisters of
the novice also approach him, and rub their feet on his feet and
ankles. The mothers then rub their hands on their sons, and on
all their male relations, pretending to rub the white paint off".
Every man in the " white ring " will be rubbed in this way, after

Burbung of the New England Tribes, X.S.W. 133

which the mothers and all the women pass out of the ring under
the men's arms, and stand a few paces away to witness the
remainder of the performance.

The men forming the "white ring"' now close in, and commence
throwing the bushes on the tires. They commence midway
between the two tires and take the bushes each way, some being
thrown on one fire and some on the other.* The boys do nothing.
Each guardian, assisted by the men near him, then lifts his
novice in his arms, and holds him in the smoke arising from the
smouldering of the green bushes. Half the boys are smoked at
one tire and half at the other. "While the men are holding
the boys up in the smoke, the former keep repeating " Birr !
birr!" and the women exclaim " Heh ! heh !" The guardians
and other men stand on the bushes and the smoke ascends
around them and the boys. As each novice is held up by his
guardian, he shakes his breast.

As soon as the novices are smoked they catch each other's
hands and run away to the place where the swags were left when
approaching the camp shortly before. The signal for them to
run away in this manner is when they hear the men clapping
their hands. When the women hear this clapping they turn
their backs so that they will not see the boys running away.

The guardians go after the boys, and some of the other " white"'
men follow them a short distance and return to the tires. The
smoking ceremony is then completed, and the " white " men go
back to the place where they left their swags, and bring them
into the main camp. The guardians and boys remain where the
swags were left all night. It is only the men and boys who
were out in the bush, whom I have called the " white mob," who
are smoked ; the Gooinat and other men belonging to the
women's camp are not smoked, but are standing around assisting
the head men in carrying out the various formalities.

Next day a lot of rugs, equal in number to the novices, are
laid in a line on the ground, and two coolamins of water are
placed alongside. The mothers of the boys and all the women
are close by this, and as the guardians approach with the boys
the women commence shouting, " Heh ! heh !" and throw pieces

*<>ne fire only is used at the Aychowal in some parts of New England.

134 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

of bark at them, which the guardians ward off". The boys are
conducted to the rugs and sit down upon them, and the guardians
give them a drink out of a coolamin. The guardians and novices
then go back to their own camp, and the women return to theirs.
Any of the men who were present also go back to their respective
camps.

Final Ceremonies. — On the following morning, the strange
tribes who are present make preparations for taking their
departure, and in the course of a few days they are all on their
way back to their own hunting grounds. The remainder of the
initiatory rites are completed by each tribe upon their own boys
when they get back to their respective districts. On their way
thither, they are not permitted to come near the women or
children, but are kept by themselves in the custody of their
guardians. As these final ceremonies are the same for each
tribe, the details relating to the local mob only will now be
stated.

In about a week's time after the meeting at the Aychowal fire,
the boys are brought, all marching abreast, to a place where the
men have lit two fires similar to those at the "white ring," but
in a different place, and none of the men are painted, except the
boys, who are adorned with white and red stripes classing each
other, forming squares. Rugs are spread upon the ground, and
the boys are brought in and seat themselves upon them. The
men then form a ring round the boys and join hands, as at the
Aychowal ring. Food is then placed before the boys, and the
guardians remain standing by while they eat. When they have
had enough they are again smoked, but on this occasion they
stand on the ground on the leeward side of the fires, after which
they go away to their camp accompanied by the guardians. The
ring of men then breaks up. If there is any remaining food, the
guardians take it with them to the boys' quarters. When these
proceedings are over, the women return to their own camp,
which is not far away. The men then put bushes on the fires
and jump upon them, the smoke ascending round them as at the
former ring.

From the time the boys started away from the Aychowal ring
till their return to the present meeting place, they were obliged
to carry a firestick in their hand when travelling from one place

Burbling of the New England Tribes, N.8.W. 135

to another ; but from this time forth they are freed from carrying
the fire. They are, however, kept under the surveillance of their
guardians for some time yet, during which they must abstain
from certain kinds of food enumerated by the old men of their
tribe. The novices must not let a woman's shadow fall upon
them, or on their weapons, or anything worn by them. This
shadow is called tawanba, and is superstitiously avoided.

Co7iclusion. — In the preparation of this article I have been
obliged to deal only with the most important parts of the cere-
monies, and to abridge my descriptions of them as much as
possible, in order to keep the paper within reasonable limits
for publication ; but it is hoped that the details will be found
sufficiently full for ordinary purposes of comparison with similar
rites celebrated in other parts of Australia.

The extraction of a front tooth has not been practised by the
New England tribes for many years, and as there appear to be
grounds for doubt as to whether the custom was ever in force in
some districts of New South Wales, any further remarks on
this part of the subject will be deferred until additional investi-
gations have been made. It may be stated, however, that the
whole of the interesting ceremonial in connection with the
knocking out of a tooth, as practised by several native tribes
with which I am acquainted, has been particularised by me in
other publications.

Lying between the eastern margin of the Tableland of New
England and the Pacific Ocean is a large tract of country,
extending from about the Hunter River northerly along the
coast as far as the Clarence, peopled by a number of tribes
differing more or less in their dialects, but having substantially
the same class system. The initiation ceremony of these tribes
is known as the Keeparra, which is of the same type as the
Burbung herein described, all the essential points being almost
identical in both, although many of their details differ considerably.
It may, therefore, be said that practically the ceremonies described
in this paper represent those in force in the whole of the country
between New England and the sea coast.

As before stated, the New England tribes are bounded on the
west by the Kamilaroi, whose taurat, or country, extends down
the Severn, Macintyre, Gwydir, Namoi, and other rivers to their

136 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

junction with the Barwon, and still farther to the westward.
The Bora, or initiation ceremonies of the Kamilaroi tribes, is
described in a paper contributed by me to the Royal Society of
Victoria.* Although the extent of country occupied by the
tribes of New England is comparatively small, their ceremonies
are of great importance, as affording a connecting link between
the Keeparra on the one side, and the Bora on the other ; a
modification of portions of both these ceremonies being observable
in some parts of the Burbung described in this article.

* Proc. Roy. Soc, Victoria, vol. 'vs.., (M.S.), p. 137.

Art. XI. — The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribes.
By R. H. Mathews,

Licensed Surveyor.

(Communicated by Professor Baldwin Spencer).

[Read 10th September, 189G.]

The Bora at Tallwood.— \tl March, 1895, I heard that
the aborigines were mustering near Tall wood Station, on
the Weir River, Queensland, for the purpose of holding
a Bora. By corresponding with residents of the district,
I learnt that, owing to the very dry weather, great delays
arose in gathering the various tribes who intended to be
present. In June, fearing to put off my visit any longer, lest the
ceremonies should be commenced before I got there, I started for
the scene of the Bora. This journey was accomplished by going
350 miles by railway to Narrabri, and thence by stage coach 150
miles to Mungindi, a small town on the boundary between New
South Wales and Queensland. At Mungindi I obtained a horse
and sulky and drove an additional distance of 55 miles to the
aboriginal camp on the Tallwood run, making a total distance of
upwards of 550 miles. The only people then assembled at the
Bora ground were the local Tallwood tribe and the contingents
from Kunopia and Welltown respectively.

After I had pitched my camp, I entered into conversation with
the head men, some of whom were known to me, having been
acquainted with them when surveying Crown lands in that part
of the country in 1875 and 1876. I had been kind to them in
those days, while listening to their legends and their songs, and
studying their wonderful class system* ; and when I met them
now I found their friendship of the greatest value to me. On
my showing them that I knew their Bora secrets, they received
me as one of the initiated, and admitted me to all their secret
meetings.

* See "The Kamilaroi Class System of the Australian Aborigines," Proc. Roy. Geog. Soo.
Australas., Qld. Bch., x., 18-34.

138 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

I was disappointed on learning from these natives that some of
the most distant tribes had not yet arrived, although weekly
expected, and that the final ceremony could not take place until
they came. I then determined to wait at the camp a few weeks
in the hope of their arriving within that time, and at once set
about taking measurements and drawings of the circles and the
pathway connecting them, the warrengahlee, and as much of the
yammunyamun on the trees and on the ground as I considered
necessary. The position of the main camp and its surroundings
were also noted.

I spent the greater part of my time with the head men, asking
them to fully describe every part of the ceremonies, which I took
down in detail in a note-book which I carried for the purpose.
On several occasions I took about a dozen of the initiated men,
and one or two of the chiefs, with me into secluded parts of the
forest, a mile or two from the camp, where I got them to repro-
duce most of the several parts — mimic performances, spectacular
exhibitions, and tableaux, which are enacted in the daytime,
while the novices are away in the bush with the kooringal. They
also performed the greater part of the dances and plays which
take place at the camp fires at night on those occasions described
farther on in this paper, when the novices are brought out of
their own yard for the purpose of being present at them. All
the performances which were gone through in my presence agreed
exactly with the descriptions of them which I had previously
obtained from other blackfellows at the camp, and elsewhere in
the district.

I remained at Tallwood between two and three weeks, and
during this time the tribe from Goondiwindi and that from St.
George, severally put in an appearance, and were welcomed in
the usual manner* ; but the Mogil Mogil, Gundabloui and Mun-
gindi tribes had not yet arrived ; and from letters which I had
received from correspondents at the last-named place, there was
no probability of their coming for another month or more, owing
to the arid state of the country, and the consequent difficulty of
obtaining food and water.

As I could not possibly spare the time to wait so long as that,

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxw, 321-325.

The Bora of the Ka/nvilaroi Tribes. 139

I returned to Mungiiidi, where I learnt that the local tribe were
gathered on the Barwan River, not far away, and that the Gun-
dabloui and adjacent tribes were camped at Gnoolama, on the
Moonie River, about eighteen miles distant, waiting for rain to
enable them to proceed to Tall wood. I therefore visited these
tribes, and spent another fortnight gathering all the details I
could regarding their initiation ceremonies and other customs.
There I met Moogan Billy, Jack Bagot,* and other head men with
whom I had become acquainted when I was camped at Mungindi
in 1880, surveying that township for the Queensland Govern-
ment. They welcomed me as an old friend, and cordially gave
me all the assistance they could.

It was now the end of July, and there being still no rain, or
any probability of the tribes referred to making an early start for
the Bora camp at Tallwood, I decided to leave the district.
Before starting away, I arranged with a gentleman living in the
district to furnish me with the date of the arrival of the last
contingent at Tallwood, and of the breaking up of the Bora
camp. I also asked one of the old blackfellows, as a personal
favour to me, to tell my correspondent the place where the
novices were taken during their sojourn in the bush, as well as
the location of the Thurrawanga camp, to which the kooringal
and their charge returned. This was all the additional informa-
tion I required, because I had already collected complete details
of the secret ceremonies which would be conducted in the bush.
My sable friend faithfully kept his promise, and from the
information which he subsequently supplied to my correspondent,
I have been enabled to add particulars respecting the date of the
commencement of the principal ceremonies, and the position of
the secret camp in the bush.

On the 1st of September a small detachment of men and
women belonging to the Gundabloui, Mogil Mogil, and Mungindi
tribes arrived at the Bora camp, and were accorded the usual
reception. These blacks had been sent to represent the tribes to
which they l^espectively belonged, the rest of their people remain-
ing at Gnoolama, before referred to, as they did not care to
undertake the journey to the Bora ground owing to the severe

#Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxiv., 411.

140 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

drought then prevailing throughout the district. A few natives
from Meroe also arrived at Tall wood on the same day as the
Gundabloui contingent.

As the water in Redbank Creek, on which the main camp was
situated, was rapidly drying up, no time was lost in proceeding
with the ceremonies after the detachments referred to had arrived.
Accordingly, on the 3rd of September the novices were taken
away from the large ring in the manner subsequently described.
The men and novices then proceeded to Gurardera Lagoon, about
nine or ten miles in a west-south-westerly direction from the
Bora ground. This lagoon is on Gurardera Creek, about two
miles above its junction with Warrandine Creek, and was the
only place for several miles around where there was water. Here
a camp was formed, and a bougl.yard erected for the boys about
eighty yards from the men's camp. A description of the shape
and structure of this yard, and the general arrangement of the
men's quarters, will be found in subsequent pages.

The boys were kept at this camp for nine or ten days, during
which the various performances, described under the head of
Ceremonies in t/ie Bush, were enacted at the camp tire, and while
out hunting during the day. At the end of the time mentioned,
the Kooringal met the Beegay in the bush, and after the boys had
been shown the bullroarer, they all proceeded to a water-hole in
Warril Creek, where the kooringal and guardians washed them-
selves and camped for the night. The following morning the
boys were taken to the thurrawanga. Details of all the matters
briefly referred to in this paragraph will be given farther on.
My correspondent, under directions from me, also gave me very
full measurements and sketches of the thurrawanga camp, from
which I have been enabled to prepare the description of that
camp given elsewhere in this paper.

The tribes who attended the Tall wood Bora were for the most
part the same people who had assembled at Gundabloui* a little
more than a year before, and all belonged to the Kamilaroi
community and had the same class system. The tribes from
Goondiwindi and Welltown spoke Pickumbil, the St. George

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxiv., 411-427 ; Ibid., xxv., 318-339; and Journ. Roy. Soo.

N. S. Wales, xxviii., 98-129.

The Bora of the Ka/nvilaroi Tribes. 141

people spoke Kogai, and the Kamilaroi language was spoken by
all the rest ; but these three dialects appeared to be mutually
understood by most of the people present. There were twenty-
four novices initiated, five of whom were half-castes.

Gathering the Tribes. — Messengers were despatched by the
headman of the Tallwood tribe to all the people whom he wished
to be present at the ceremonies. These messengers were of the
Kupathin class, and totem emu, the same as their chief, and were
sent to men of the same totem in the other tribes. Each
messenger carried with him a bullroarer, several kilts, and other
articles, and was accompanied by a novice painted red from
head to foot. There was also another man with them, who
acted as guardian to the novice. The formalities observed
on the arrival of the messengers at a strange camp, and also
on the arrival of a tribe at the Bora ground, were practically
the same as previously described by me.* I was at Tall-
wood when some of the contingents arrived, and was present at
the reception at the large ring to which the men, women and
novices proceeded on their first arrival. I was also permitted
to accompany the men over the sacred ground, visiting the figures
of Baiamai and his female consort, the yammunyamun, and the
imposing spectacular display at the goonaba, where the two old
head men, having their bodies smeared all over with human blood,
stood upon the warrengahlee while the men approached them
swaying pieces of burning bark wrapped in green bushes, from
which the smoke curled upwards into the air.

The General Encampment. — The camp was situated on level
ground in some heavily timbered forest country on the left bank
of Redbank Creek, a small tributary of the Weir River, in the
Parish of Tallwood, County of Carnarvon, Queensland. This
place is about four miles northerly from Tallwood, an old head
station on the main road from Goondiwindi to Mungindi. The
camp of the local tribe, which was the first to occupy the ground,
was about seventy yards from the creek, and formed the datum
point around which each of the other tribes pitched their camps
on arrival. The Goondiwindi and Welltown people camped to
the eastward of the local Tallwood tribe ; those from St. George on

* See Jolirn. Anthrop. Inst., xxv., 319-325.

142 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

the north- west ; the people from Kunopia and Meroe on the south ;
whilst the Moogan, Mungindi and Gundabloui tribe encamped
on the south-west. Water for camp use was obtained from a
waterhole in Redbank Creek, and game of various kinds was
sufficiently abundant in the extensive scrubs to the north and
west of the camp, to provide sufficient food for the people while
the ceremonies lasted. From the camp to the nearest part of the
Weir River was about two miles.

The total number of people of all ages and sexes assembled at
the Bora camp was about 150, the greater part of whom belonged
to Queensland ; but the New South Wales boundary, the Barwan
River, being so near, a number of the natives of the latter colony
were also present.

An unusual event happened at this camp which adds to its
interest. The local tribe first selected the site of the camp on
the southern side of Redbank Creek, and the Kunopia contingent
afterwards came and pitched to the southward of them. Before
any of the other tribes arrived one of the young men of the local
tribe died from some pulmonary complaint, and according to
custom this necessitated a removal of the camp. As the Bora
ground had then been formed, the choice of a new site for the
camp was restricted to the other side of Redbank Creek in order
to be near the water-hole.

The Bora Ground. — -The site selected fur the performance of
the ancestral rites, or " Baimai's Ground," was situated in a
forest of box, sandal- wood and undergrowth, about fifteen chains
in a south-westerly direction from the general camp, on the other
side of Redbank Creek. The soil consisted of reddish sandy
loam, known among bushmen as " umah country." This kind of
ground is very suitable for the purpose of forming either carved
or raised figures on its surface.

In a small, naturally open space on the edge of the scrub, a
large ring, 77 feet 6 inches across one diameter and 72 feet across
another at right angles to it — which would give an average of
very nearly 75 feet — was formed by scraping away the surface
soil, which was used to form an annular mound or embankment,
about eight or nine inches high, and a foot wide at the base,
around the space thus cleared. An opening about two feet wide
was left on one side of this bank, from which ran a narrow track

The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribes. 143

called thunburran, made by scraping the surface of the ground
smooth and throwing the loose earth on either side. The bearing
of this track was N. 62° W., and in following it in this direction
for 270 yards, it was found to terminate at another and smaller
circle, called goonaba, 47 feet in diameter, bounded by a circular
bank, composed of loose earth, about five or six inches high.
The track, thunburran, entered this enclosure through an open-
ins in its wall similar to that in the other circle. Within
this ring, and near the farther side of it, were two stumps
of trees, which had been prepared in the following manner.
Two small trees had been dug out of the ground by the roots,
and their stems then cut through between six and seven feet
from the base, all the bark being stripped from the stem and
roots. These stumps were then carried to the goonaba, and holes
were dug, into which the stems were inserted and the earth tilled
in tightly around them, leaving the roots at the top, some of
which extended outwards about four feet, and were ornamented
with narrow strips of bark twisted round them. These stumps,
called zvarrengahlee, one of which was belar and the other coola-
bar, were twelve feet apart and five feet five inches out of the
ground, the stems and roots of both being smeared with human
blood. The blood for this purpose is obtained by making small
incisions, with a piece of sharp flint or shell, in the arms of
several men, and collecting the blood in vessels as it drips from
the wounds.

Scattered over the floor of the goonaba, between the warren-
gahlee and the entrance of the thunburran (track), were a
considerable number of small heaps of loose earth, each having a
short stick inserted perpendicularly in the top. When welcoming
a new contingent of natives, these heaps are flattened down
during the ceremonies, as described by me elsewhere,* but are
restored for use on all similar occasions. After the arrival of the
last mob of natives who have been invited, the heaps are not again
erected.

I will now endeavour to give a full description of the imagery
displayed upon the ground and on the trees throughout this
sylvan temple. Starting from the larger circle, which i-

Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxv., 324-3:

144 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

called boora, and proceeding along the track it was found to
enter the scrub almost at once ; and at the distance of eighty-
seven yards on the right hand side there was the representation
of a bower bird's " playhouse," consisting of a collection of small
pebbles, fragments of bone, and the seeds of some wild fruits.*
Three yards farther on, also on the right, there was an effigy
made by tilling an old pair of trousers and a coat with grass so
as to resemble a man, a bundle of something being used for the
head. This figure was then propped up against a small tree and
represented a white fellow.

The carvings on the soil, yammunyamun, commenced at the
distance of ninety-six yards from the large circle, and thirty-four
yards farther, close by the right side of the track, was an imita-
tion of a bullock lying down, formed by pieces of bark covered
with loose earth, having the dry bony skeleton of a bullock's
head laid on one end of it, and a bent stick stuck in the other end
for a tail.

At a distance of 143 yards from the starting point, on the
right side, was a horizontal figure of Baiamai, outlined by
heaping up the loose earth, which was one foot two inches
high at the chest. The length of the tigure was nine feet
six inches, and the width from hand to hand nine feet. On
the opposite side of the track was an image of Gooberangal,
the wife of Baiamai, formed in the same way, but with the
addition of a coat of kneaded clay on top in which were moulded
the features of the face, the mamma? and the pubes. The length
of this tigure was ten feet nine inches, with a distance of eight
feet between the hands.

Twenty yards farther on than the preceding, on the left, was
the representation of an emu with its head towards the large
ring, outlined by a nick, or groove, between one and two inches
deep, and about two inches wide, cut in the soil by means
of tomahawks and sharpened sticks ; its length from the bill to
the tail being twelve feet six inches, and its height from the feet
to the top of the back seven feet nine inches. The legs are short
in proportion to the body, being only two feet six inches long —
perhaps to indicate that the bird is sitting or crouching down.

* The bower-bird builds its nest in a tree, but forms these " bowers " or " playhouses," as
they are called by bushmen, on the ground in the way described.

The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribe*. 145

Three yards farther on than the emu, on the opposite side of
the track, was the Goomee or Baiarnai's tire. The loose earth had
been heaped up about a foot high like a large ant-hill, on the top
of which the tire was lighted. Around this heap there was a
clear space about thirty feet in diameter, which was used by the
men as a place of assembly when they wished to deliberate upon
matters of tribal concern, as well as on the occasion of the arrival
of other tribes.

Eighteen yards beyond the Goomee, on the same side, parallel
with the track, a codfish nine feet long and three feet eight inches
across the body was outlined by a nick in the soil, its head
being towards the goomee. This drawing has a characteristic
resemblance to some of the figures of fish which I have seen
carved on rocks* on the Hawkesbury River, New South Wales.

A little farther on the same side as the pi'eceding was the
carving of a large snake, representing the Currea, a fabulous
monster inhabiting lagoons and other sheets of water. This
animal was lying parallel with the track, with its head towards
the larger ring ; its length was thirty -nine feet, and its greatest
width about a foot.

On the other side of the track and parallel with it, opposite
the last figure were two death adders formed of raised earth,
their heads and tails being together, the former in the direction of
the large ring. The length of each was a little over sixteen feet.

About fifteen yards farther on, on the same side, were two
other figures of death adders, also formed of raised earth, with
their heads in the same direction, one being nine feet long, the
other ten feet six inches.

Opposite to the last two figures was a good representation of a
scrub turkey's nest composed of sticks, leaves, and dirt scraped
into a heap near the butt of a tree.

Ten yards farther on than the turkey's nest, or 215 yards from
the large ring, near the right side of the track, was the skin of a
porcupine filled with sand, having some of the loose soil piled
around its feet, leaving the back exposed, a very good representa-
tion of the animal as found in the bush.

* " Rock Pictures of the Australian Aborigines," Proc. Roy. Geog\ Soc. Aust. (Q.), xi.,
104-105, plate ii., fig-. 13.

10

146 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Fourteen yai'ds beyond the porcupine, on the same side, was
an imitation of a kangaroo rat's nest, formed of grass. After
another interval of fourteen yards, also on the same side, there
was carved on the ground the figure of a man with a boomerang
in each hand and a belt around the waist. The object, two
feet five inches long, rising from the top of his head, was, the
artist told me, intended to represent a feather stuck in his hair.
This figure, which was at right angles to the track, with the feet
towards it, bears a striking resemblance to some of the rock
pictures of the aborigines of other districts, large numbers of
which have been described by me in different publications.

On the other side of the track, and at right angles to it,
opposite the last described figure, was the representation of a
woman, cut out in the ground in a similar manner. The eyes
and mouth were delineated, but the feet were omitted. The
height was seven feet four inches, but would have been more if
the legs had been straight.

The imitative faculties of the natives were displayed in a few
drawings, copied from scenes in the life of the white man, which
were intermixed with the others. At one place an attempt had
been made to represent a railway train, the carriages with their
windows, the numerous wheels, and the two rails on which they
were running. At another place a native artist had drawn a
chain like those used when working bullocks in a dray. The
links of the chain were on a colossal scale, being four feet nine
inches long, and one foot three inches wide. This carving was
close to the raised figure of the bullock previously described.
Another draftsman, apparently a poker player, had succeeded in
representing the four aces. Four rectangular spaces, about two
feet long and eighteen inches wide, were hrst made side by side to
indicate four cards, and on the middle of each of these one of the
aces was delineated. All the drawing referred to in this para-
graph was cut out in the soil.

Besides the foregoing figures of men, animals, and other objects,
there were a large number of curious designs, which the Kamilaroi
smd'Wir&dth.VLritribescallyammunyamun,* cut into the turf. These
devices commenced at ninety-six yards from the larger circle, and

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst, xxv., 302-323.

The Bora of the Kani'darol Tribes. 147

terminated about five yards from the smaller one \ thus covering,
together with the first figures described, a linear distance of 169
yards, and extending back about six or eight feet from either
side of the track. The yamtnunyamun filled up all the spaces
between the other figures, the continuity being of course inter-
rupted by the numerous forest trees and bushes growing within
the space mentioned. The largest of these designs was thirty-
seven feet in length, by seven feet in width ; another was
twenty -nine feet by five feet. Some of the smallest of these
carvings were only two or three feet in length, filling out spaces
between the trees. All the grass, rubbish and loose surface soil
had been removed, and piled into heaps ; and the earth cut out
in carving, the outlines had been disposed of in a similar manner.
A guod deal of the surface soil thus obtained was used in building
the images of Baiamai and Gooberangal already described.
Owing to the great extent of ground covered by the yammun-
yamitn, and the time and labour which would have been required
in copying the whole of it, I selected as much as I thought would
fairly represent the different patterns of native drawing as
displayed on this Bora ground.

Scattered here and there along the track for a distance of
about 175 yards from the goonaba were a number of trees marked
with a tomahawk, the designs on most of which consisted of
yammunyamun, somewhat similar in character to that carved
upon the ground. Some of these trees were quite close to the
track ; others were eight or ten feet back from it on either side,
and three of them were around outside the goonaba embankment.

On a forked box tree between the goomee and the goonaba,
eighty yards from the latter, the crescent figure of the moon was
cut through the bark, and a short distance below it were four
zig-zag lines. About eighteen feet from the ground, in the same
tree, was a fairly good imitation of an eagle-hawk's nest.

In another tree close by was a large bunch of boughs similar to
those fixed in trees by the natives near water-holes for the pur-
pose of concealing themselves to spear emus when the latter come
to drink. This represented Baimai's hiding place when he
speared the emu.

Close to the track, sixty-five yards from the goonaba, was a
small box tree, along the bole of which a wavy band about two

148 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

inches wide had been cut with a tomahawk through the bark,
and extending from the ground to the height of about twenty-
live feet, representing a tree which had been struck by lightning.*

On a box tree twenty yards from the goonaba a carpet snake,
nine-feet four inches long, with its head towards the ground, was
cut through the bark ; and on a forked box tree near the
porcupine, an iguana five feet two inches long was formed in
the same way. Between the iguana tree and the goomee, a
centipede three feet one inch long, with eighteen legs, was
chopped through the bark into the wood of a box tree near the
track. Below it were some diamond-shaped devices cut in the
same manner.

This Bora ground, although containing all the principal figures
necessary, was neither so extensive nor so richly ornamented as
others I have seen. From circle to circle was only 270 yards,
and the space containing the ground carving and marked trees was
about 175 yards by a width of from fifteen to twenty feet. The
old men explained to me that this was owing to their having been
shorthanded when preparing the ground, which was an entirely
new site. At the Gundabloui Bora described by me in the
Journal of the Anthropological Institute of Great Britain, Vol.
XXIV., pp. 411-427, the distance between the circles was twenty-
three chains, the length of the carved ground being 320 yards, and
its width forty feet.

Old blackfellows have told me that when they were boys Bora
grounds were much larger and more elaborately embellished than
they are at the present time. I once inspected an old disused
Kamilaroi Bora ground on the Moogan Run, Queensland, where
the distance from circle to circle was more than a mile. The
large ring was thirty-five yards in diameter, and was still easily
traceable on the ground ; my guide, who was an old blackfellow,
stating that when he was a young man the height of the wall was
"up to his knee." The base of the wall was about eighteen
inches when new. There were, of course, then no traces of the
figures which had been raised or graven upon the turf, but
judging by appearances, and what my guide told me, they must
have extended about a mile, and their width would probably be

* A tree struck by lightning is represented in plate xxvi., fig. 13, Journ. Anthrop.
Inst., xxv., 300.

The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribes. 149

about fifty feet. In those clays there were plenty of men able
and willing to do the work, which was renewed and added to
every time a Bora was held there.

Mr. J. Henderson, in his book, " Observations on the Colonies
of New South Wales and Van Dieman's Land," published in
1832, pp. 145-147, thus refers to a Bora ground near Wellington,
New South Wales : — " A long straight avenue of trees extended
for about a mile, and these were carved on each side with various
devices, most of which were intended to represent serpents in all
their different attitudes. On the upper extremity of this the
earth had been heaped up so as to resemble the gigantic figure of
a human being extended on his breast, while through the whole
length of this sylvan temple a variety of other characters were
observed rudely imprinted on the turf. The devices on the
ground bore a strong similitude to the lingen of the Hindoos.

The devices on the trees represented snakes,

the opossum, the emu, the kangaroo, the cockchafer, etc., while
others were stated to indicate the forked lightning, warlike
instruments, and falling meteors. The evil spirit seemed to be
described under the form of an eagle-hawk ; an imitation of his
eyrie formed a conspicuous object at the upper end of the grove.
At the lower extremity of the avenue, a narrow pathway turned
off to the left, and soon terminated in a circle, which was enclosed
by a wall composed merely of the loose earth." In a plate
appended to his work, Mr. Henderson gives drawings of some of
the devices on the trees and on the ground.

The Thurrawonga Camp. — It is imperative according to
ancient tribal custom, to remove the entire camp to another place
after the boys have been taken away for initiation purposes.*
This new camp, which may appropriately be designated the
"Thurrawonga Camp," because the boughyard known as the
thurrawonga is erected there, may be only a short distance away,
or it may be several miles from the original main encampment,
according to the exigencies of the case as regards food and water,
or general convenience. As soon as possible after the novices
have been taken away by the head men from the large ring
known as the " boora,"in the manner described farther on in this

* Jonrn. Anthrop. Inst., x.xv., 330.

150 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

paper, the women, assisted by the men who remain with them,
start away to the locality which has been agreed upon.

On the present occasion, the site chosen for the new camp was
on the right bank of Warril Creek, about ten or eleven miles in a
south-westerly direction from the main Bora encampment, and
about seven or eight miles south-south-easterly from the camp of
the kooringal on Gurardera Lagoon, already referred to.

On arriving at the new site, each tribe selected their quarters
on the side nearest their own country, the camp of the local
Tallwood tribe being the initial point. The people obtained
water from a dam in Warril Creek, about a hundred yards above
the camp. Every night, by the camp fires, the mothers of the
boys sang bobbarubwar songs, and the relatives and other women
danced.

Down the same side of Warril Creek, 496 yards from the camp,
and about two chains from the right bank of the creek, the
thurrawonga was erected. Forked saplings were inserted in the
ground, and rails consisting of long poles extended from one fork
to another, and boughs were then piled up against the rails, to
form a dense fence. The shape of this partial enclosure resembled
that of a horse-shoe or segment of a circle, being twenty-seven
yards across the open end — the distance from there to the back
of the fence being sixteen yards. The height of the fence was
about four feet, and the convex end faced in the direction from
which the novices were expected to approach — the open end being
towards the new camp erected by the women.

Takitig away the Boys. — As soon as convenient after the
arrival of the last mob of natives who are expected to join in the
proceedings, the head men discuss among themselves as to the date
on which the assemblage shall be broken up, and the initiation
ceremonies commenced. There are several matters which have to
be arranged among all the head men present before this date can
be definitely settled, therefore these important deliberations,
which may occupy two or three days, or may perhaps be disposed
of in one, are conducted at the Goo/nee, where there will be no
chance of interruption. All the people proceed to the large ring
in the afternoon, and go through the ordinary daily performances,*

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxw, 326.

The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribes. 151

after which the women and novices return to the camp as usual,
and the men proceed to the goomee.

One of the most important matters to be disposed of is the
selection of a suitable and convenient place for the establishment
of the new camp, which may be called the Thurrawonga, after
the tribes remove from the Bora ground. One or more of the
head men of each tribe stand out in their turn and harangue the
rest of the men on the subject, giving their opinions as to the
situation which would be the fairest for all. As soon as the
locality is decided upon, one of the men who advocate that place
advances to the fire which is burning on the goomee, and lifts a
firestick, which he throws in the direction in which the new camp
is to be erected, at the same time calling out the name of the
locality, which is then repeated by all present, and that matter is
finally disposed of.*

The hunting grounds into which the novices will be taken
during the principal ceremonies of their initiation have also to be
selected. As this point is so intimately connected with the
situation of the new camp, the two subjects are frecpuently argued
and decided at the same time.

Another very important matter which engages the attention of
the old men is the selection of the Kooringal, the chosen band of
athletes, who have the custody of the guardians and novices
whilst the latter are going through the secret ceremonies in the
bush. The old men choose the Kooringal from amongst all the
tribes, each man selected being asked if he is willing to go ;
single men are generally asked, but it is not uncommon for
manned men to be chosen.

All these arrangements having been made, and the date fixed
for the commencement of the ceremonies, some of the young men
strip bark, and shape it into pieces about two feet and a half in
length,! and about four inches wide at the broadest end, and two
inches at the other, called Mungawan, which they place on the
ground near the goomee, with logs of wood laid upon them to keep

* The Kamilaroi tribes on the Lower Moonie River decide the position of the Thurra-
wonga Camp in a different manner, and with greater formalities. Journ. Anthrop.
Inst., xxv., 327-8.

t Pieces of bark similar to these were used for the same purpose at the " Burbling of
the Wiradthuri Tribes." Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxv., 308, plate xxvi., fig. 40.

152 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

them flat, ready for use. All the men then return to the large
ring and dance round within it, calling out the names of places
in their country, each name being received with shouts, after
which they start lor the camp in single tile, eacli class of men
keeping by themselves, and shouting as they go. On nearing the
camp, the novices and women join them, going into their proper
class positions, and all of them dance round on the cleared space
near the camp, the men of each tribe again calling out the names
of a few principal places in their country. The women dance
outside the men, having green bushes in their hands, from which
they pluck handfuls of leaves and cast them at the men as they
dance past. One or more of the young men, before leaving the
fire at the goomee, smear their bodies with ashes, and the other
men tell the women that the Evil Spirit rolled those fellows in
the ashes because they did not play right.

On the day preceding that on which the assemblage breaks up,
soon after the return of the men to the camp in this way, two or
three of them pretend to quarrel about something,* uttering loud
recriminations in order to attract attention, and stand out with
boomerangs and other weapons in their hands. Some of the men
and women run from all parts of the camp to see what the dispute
is about with the intention uf preventing quarreling at the Bora
meeting. This is a well-known signal to such of the women who
have attended similar gatherings that the boys will be taken
away the next morning. The dispute suddenly ceases and the
men run through the camp repeating Pir-r! pir-r! and the women
call out Yah-ow ! in response. These shouts are kept up for a
short time, until the whole camp becomes aware of the order to
break-up. The women raise a lamentation, because they are
sorry that the corroborees and daily performances are all over.

Then everybody commences to pack up, and shortly before
sunset they all start for the large ring, carrying sufficient water
to last them for the night and next morning, because the ring is
generally some distance from the creek, river, or water-hole where
the camp is situated. They camp near the ring for the night,
each tribe locating themselves in the direction of their country,
and the mothers of the novices sing bobbarubwar, and beat their

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxv., 327.

The Bora of the Kamllaroi Tribes. 153

rugs at their camp tires. The men go on to the goo/nee, and
select the young fellows who are to use the mungawans next
morning, and then return to the large ring. At night the men
dance a corroboree as usual, after which the boys lie down to rest.
During the evening a bullroarer is sounded at intervals in the
direction of the goomee. Great sexual license* is permitted
between the men and women, whether married or single, on this
occasion, but this liberty is restricted to those parties who would
be permitted to marry each other in conformity with the class
laws of the tribe. This license is not extended to the novices.
Some time before daylight a number of the men leave the camp,
unknown to the women, and go and remain at Baiamai's fire till
the morning. These are the men who have been chosen for the
kooringal, and it is generally some of them who are selected to
use the mungawans in the large ring.

At daylight, or shortly before it, next morning the sound of
the bullroarer is heard from the direction of the sacred ground,
upon which the women commence to sing bobbaritbwar, and the
men at the ring raise the customary shout. Some of the men
now commence to cut forks and bushes with which they put up a
bough screen round outside the ring, about two feet from it, on
the side opposite the track. This is done by inserting forked
sticks in the ground, and laying rails from one to the other ;
against the rails bushes are laid, one end of the bushes resting on
the ground, the other on the rails, and forming a thick screen or
fence. The painting of the novices is going on at the same time
at any convenient place about the camp. Each tribe paint their
own boys. Say, for example, one of the novices belongs to the
class Kubbi ; a guardian is chosen for him from among the young
men of the class Ippai. This man and his sister Ippatha then
paint the boy Kubbi. He is first painted red all over with raddle
and grease, and then a few white stripes are added about the
face and chest, according to the pattern common to his tribe.
He is also decorated with bird's feathers in his hair. A Kumbo
and his sister Butha paint a Murri boy ; a Kubbi and Kubbitha
paint an Ippai ; and a Murri and his sister Matha paint a
Kumbo novice. As soon as all the boys are painted, they are

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxv., 328.

154 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

taken and placed sitting on the bank with their feet outside — the
group of boys of each tribe sitting on that side of the bank which
is nearest their own country, their heads being covered with rugs.
The mothers of the boys ai'e now taken and placed lying clown on
the ground on the other side of the bough screen — each mother
being opposite to her son, with her head towards him. The other
women and the children are a little farther back. Each woman
lies on her side with her head resting on her hand and elbow, and
her eyes looking towards the ground. When the women and
children are all placed lying down, they are covered over with
rugs and bushes, and a few men appointed to watch them.*

During the time that these preparations have been going on at
the large ring, the kooringal have also been at work at the
goomee. They have been painting the whole of their bodies with
powdered charcoal or burnt grass mixed with grease, which gives
them an intense black colour. The binnialowee are likewise pre-
paring for their share of the work by disguising their faces and
bodies with strips of bark. The warrengahlee are pulled up out
of the goonaba and burnt.

As soon as these arrangements have been completed at the
goomee and at the camp, the men at the latter form a circle out-
side of the ring, and each man beats together two nullas, a boom-
erang and a nulla, a throwing stick and a spear, a nulla and a
hielaman, or any other two weapons he may happen to have at
hand. The distant sound of the bullroarer, the voice of Dhurra-
moolun is then heard, and one of the old men sings out : " Here
he comes ;" others shout out Yooah yananga (" go away ") as if
addressing Dhurramoolun, and the fathers of the boys pretend to
be in great grief. The women and children begin to cry. A
number of men from the goomee now quickly approach along the
track and enter the ring through the opening in its wall, and run
round in single file just outside the bank, all the time beating the
ground with pieces of bark, mungawan, before described. Some
of the men have two such pieces of bark — one in each hand —
others have only one larger piece which they use in both hands.
While these men are running round and beating the ground, but
not shouting, the other men who are standing outside are beating

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxv., 329.

The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribes. 155

their weapons together and yelling hideously to make the women
believe they ai'e endeavouring to scare Dhurramoolun away.
After the men have gone once round within the ring, beating the
ground at every jump, they run away noiselessly along the track
to the goomee and burn the pieces of bark in the fire there. Two
men, one on each side of the circle, are sounding the bullroarers
all this time. The guardians then advance and each one catches
hold of his novice by the arm above the elbow, and bids him
stand up, with his face bent towards the ground and his arms
close to his side. The rug is now thrown off, and the boy is
marched away by his guardian along the track. During all this
time the men around the ring continue to shout and beat their
weapons together to prevent the gins hearing the boys going
away. These men then enter the circle and run round beating
their nullas together, and at the same time obliterating with
their feet, any impression which may have been left on the ground
by the mungawans, so that the women may not see them when
they get up. It frequently happens that small fragments of the
bark used in beating the ground break off and remain in the
ring. Some of the young men standing around carefully watch
for these fragments, and carry them away immediately and put
them on the fire. As soon as the jnufigawan men have gone
away, some of the men standing round pick up firesticks fi*om
the camp fire and throw them into the ring, scattering the embers
about.* Perhaps a few large stones are placed in the circle, dilly
bags and other things belonging to the women are hung upon
trees or scattered about. The men take up one or two of the
little children who cannot talk yet, and put a few marks of paint
on their faces or bodies. The women are told that the Evil Spirit
indulged in these playful freaks when he came for the boys.

As soon as the guardians and novices are out of sight, the rugs
and bushes are removed off the women and children, and they are
allowed to rise. On looking round, half stupified by supernatural
terror and the unexampled din caused by the men, seeing the fire
scattered about and their boys gone, they give vent to bitter
lamentations for a few minutes. The fathers and relations of the

* The same thing is done at The Burbling of the Wiradthuri Tribes. Journ. Anthrop.
Inst., xxv., 30S and 329.

156 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

novices, and, perhaps, other men not connected with the cere-
monies, now pack up their things and start away after the boys,
who have perhaps by this time gone about half-an-hour. The
women, and such of the men who remain to assist them, now pack
up and proceed to the place decided upon for the erection of the
Thurrawonga camp, described in previous pages.

Ceremonies in the Bush. — In the meantime the guardians,
bumboon, have taken the novices, who are now called wundha-
murrin, away along the track, the boys heads being bowed upon
their breasts, and are followed by the men with the bullroarers.
On reaching a clear space near the commencement of the yamun-
yaniun, all the boys are made to lie flat on the ground, face down-
wards, with their arms close by their sides, and their feet towards
the circle they have just left. If the ground is damp, opossum
rugs are spread out for the boys to lie upon. While the boys are
lying here, the men who used the mungawans have had time to
put on disguises in the shape of strips of bark tied across their
bodies like shoulder belts, as well as around their arms and legs,
and also across their faces. Being disguised in this grotesque
manner they come up quietly and stand two or three yards from
the feet of the boys ; the guardians are standing by the boys'
heads all the time, and clap their hands on their thighs to prevent
the boys hearing the men approaching. The novices are then
helped to rise, and on getting to their feet they are told to turn
round and look at the grotesque figures before them. These men,
called binnialowee* now step up quite close to the boys and com-
mence to dance and wave their ; rms (Irrumburrunga), and
shouting birr-r-r ! The boys now turn their backs upon the
binnialowee, who go away to the goomee leaving the boys
standing where they were. Two or three men are now seen
approaching from a direction about at right angles to the path
connecting the circles. Each of these men carries in his left hand
a smoking stick, and in his right a boomerang, and are shouting
Ah-h-h-ow ! and other sounds. On coming within say thirty or
forty yards they rush towards the boys and throw, each, a boome-
rang over their heads. They do not come up to get the boome-
rangs again, but immediately go away in the direction from which

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxv., 331.

The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribes. 157

they came. These are the men, buddenbelat; who go to fetch the
beegay, and are the same who subsequently appear in the ring of
fire {Dhurramoolungoivee), details of which will be given later on.
The guardians now conduct the boys along the track as far as the
goomee, showing them the yammunyamun from the commence-
ment to that point. On reaching the goomee the boys are made
to turn their backs to the fire, and their eyes are cast on the
ground at their feet. One of the guardians then pretends to see
something in the air in the direction of the sun, and says to the
novices, " Look up at that bird, you can just distinguish it in the
distance." The boys all turn their eyes in the direction indicated
endeavouring to see the object, until they are told to look down
at some men on the other side of the goomee fire. These men,
millunga* are crouching down with their buttocks resting on their
heels, and their elbows on their knees ; they are pulling down
their lower eyelids with their hands, and staring at the boys.
The guardians say, " Those are Dhurramoolun's men ; they will
come and burn you on a fire like that." The sun having momen-
tarily impaired the vision of the boys, when looking towards the
sky, they cannot see very clearly, which causes the millunga to
appear all the more unearthly and demoniacal. Having looked
at these men for a minute or two, the boys are taken about a
quarter of a mile farther on than the Goonaba, and placed sitting
on the ground with their eyes cast down. This delay is made for
the purpose of allowing the kooringal to go ahead and get ready
for the next performance, which consists of each man cutting a
leafy bough, and then all crouching down close together in rank
and file fashion ; each man holds his bough in such a manner
that none of the men are seen, nothing but a heap of bushes being-
visible. The novices are then brought on with their heads down,
and placed standing in a row in front of the bushes, which the men
keep shaking as if blown about by a gale, but no other sound
is heard. The two head men who accompany the novices and
their guardians then stand one on each side of the heap of bushes
and one says to the other, " Can you tell me what this is ?" The
other man will answer, " You are older than I am ; you ought to
be able to tell us what it is." Perhaps a few ridiculous guesses

* hoc. cit., 331.

158 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

are made. The first man then hits the ground with his nulla
nulla, and calls out " Dhurraboolbool."* The kooringal then
throw down the bushes and spring to their feet shouting and
jumping, and swinging their arms up and down in front of the
boys.

The boys are then told to hold their heads down, and are
taken away to the place appointed for them to camp that night.
Here the guardians make a yard of boughs, in which they place
the boys. This yard consists of a partial enclosure resembling a
semi-circle or a horse- shoe in shape, the width across the open
and being about fifty feet, and the depth from there to the back
wall about thirty-five feet, but varying in size according to the
number of novices and guardians to be accommodated. Fires are
lit at the entrance to afford warmth to the occupants when in it.
The fence or wall is about four feet high, and is composed of
forked sticks driven into the ground, with small saplings reaching
from one fork to the other, and the open space between them
filled up with boughs so as to form a dense fence which would
serve the twofold purpose of preventing the boys from seeing
what is done at the men's camp, and also to protect the boys and
their guardians from cold winds. About fifty yards from the
convex end of this enclosure is the camp of the guardians, and
about an ecmal distance farther still the kooringal make their
camp. Such a camp would always be near a water-hole, or close
to the bank of a creek or river. About an hour before sundown
a small space is cleared on the ground between the camp of the
guardians and that of the kooringal. The novices are brought
out of their yard, and placed standing in a row on the side of
this cleared space. The kooringal now emerge from one side,
and go along on their hands and feet one after the other in close
succession, imitating the shape and action of grasshoppers as
nearly as they can. When all the men have passed by to the
other side, they turn and pass along again in front of the boys in
the same manner. The two old men then interrogate each other
as to what animal is meant, and one of them hits the ground with
his nulla nulla and shouts " Grasshopper" (Boonboon) whereupon
the men all get to their feet and jump and shout and wave their

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst., x.w., 331.

The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribes. 159

arms as before described. The novices are then taken back to
their own yard, and a few of the guardians left with them.
About sundown preparations are made for the evening meal.
During the day some game has been caught, which is roasted by
the guardians at their own camp, and a fair share of the best
parts of the meat, from which all the bones and sinews have been
removed, is taken to the boys at the yard. Some of the old men
go round at "feeding time" to see that the food given to the
novices is prepared in accordance with tribal custom. The object
of keeping and feeding the boys in a yard away from the men
appears to be to prevent the former hearing any of the discus-
sions which take place among the kooringal and guardians as to
the programme of performance for each day, or any other matters
which it is thought proper to keep secret from the boys. At bed-
time every night the murrawan is sounded, and the boys are
brought out of this yard and sleep with the guardians at the
camp of the latter. The boys are not allowed to speak, and can-
not go anywhere without making signs to their guardians, who
must go with them.

After supper the guardians bring the boys to the men's camp,
and place them lying down with rugs thrown over them. The
men then raise a peculiar shout at intervals, which is continued
for an hour or two. This shouting, which is called Bungaroo* is
kept up for the purpose of inviting and guiding to this camp in
the bush, any strange men who may have arrived at the main
camp that day. Supposing that a contingent having a few
novices to be initiated were a day too late, and, on their arrival,
had found that the camp had broken up that morning, and that
the old men had taken the novices away into the bush. The
women and children of this contingent would go to the new camp
and join the other tribes, but some of the men would take the
novices and start out after the others. They would not come up
to the camp, but would stop for the night somewhere out of sight,
perhaps a mile away, at some place where there was water, and
on hearing the bungaroo shout they would reply to it. Early
next morning a few of them would approach the camp, carrying
in one hand a smoky stick, and in the other a boomerang, and

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst., x.w., 332-3.

160 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria..

uttering a series of short shouts. The kooringal, guardians and
novices at the camp would then stand in a row, and the new
comers would rush up near them and then retire and go away to
their comrades. In a short time they would return bringing with
them their novices, who are brought to the yard and put amongst
the novices belonging to the kooringal, who have in the meantime
been taken back from the men's camp, and know nothing of the
other novices until the latter are placed amongst them. The
guardians of the new boys are with them and join the other
guardians, and the men who accompany them attach themselves
to the kooringal.

After breakfast the men and boys start out hunting for the
day. The novices are taken out of the yard, and walk beside
their guardians with their eyes cast upon the ground in front of
them, and their hands down close by their sides. After they
have got out of sight of the camp, they come up to the kooringal,
who have started before them and unknown to them. The boys
are placed in a row near the edge of a thick patch of scrub, and
when all is ready they are told to raise their heads and look.
The kooringal come out of the scrub one after the other,
imitating the appearance of flying foxes (gahmon). The old men
make the usual enquiries of each other as to what animal is
intended, and then one of them hits the ground with his nulla
nulla and calls out " Gahmon." The boys backs are now turned
towards the kooringal for a short time, when they are again told
to turn round and look. They now see all the kooringal lying
on top of each other in a heap called Boballai,* which 1 will
endeavour to describe. Supposing there are twenty men in the
kooringal, first about nine or ten of them would get down on the
ground on their knees and elbows, as close together as they could
lie ; then about half-a-dozen more would lie on top of these, and
the remainder on top of the second lot. A groaning noise is kept
up by all the men during the time they are in the heap. Most
of the positions assumed are very obscene, and some of them dis-
gusting, but judging from the frequency with which this part is
enacted, one would think that it must be of more than ordinary
importance. It is perhaps intended as a moral lesson to the boys

* Joiirn. Anthrop. Inst., xxv., 333.

The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribe*. 161

to deter them from unnatural offences and masturbation ; or it
may be that its obscenity adds to its fascination for the savage
mind. After the usual enquiries as to what this is, one of the
old men hits the ground and calls out, " Boballai babiabbi.''
The men then get up and jump and swing their arms. The boys
backs are now turned, and accompanied by their guardians they
walk away with their eyes on the ground for a short distance,
where they are brought to a stand. The guardians then clap
their hands and tell the boys to run for about twenty yards,*
and stand again. The guardians now give each boy three or four
nulla nullas, and they are allowed to raise their heads, and can
look in any direction except behind them. Men and boys then
go on looking for game, the boys being allowed to join in the
sport, but if they chase a wallaby or any other animal, and it
runs into the rear, they cannot follow it, even if wounded, but
must let it escape. About mid-day, perhaps, they come to a water-
hole where they rest and have dinner, cooking the game they
have caught during the morning, after which they go in quest of
game on their way back to their camp of the previous night. At
some suitable place, the boys will be placed standing in a row
with their heads down, and in a little while will be ordered to
look up, when they see the kooringal jumping past in single file,
imitating kangaroos, f Each man has a tail made of grass and
reeds, or it may be of small bushes, tied up in a roll and stuck
under the hinder part of his girdle, so as to represent the tail of
the kangaroo. I They also have their hair tied into two bunches,
to represent the kangaroo's ears. When the kooringal have all
jumped past once, or it may be several times, the two head men
ask each other what this performance means, and then one of
them hits the ground as usual and calls out, " Bundar" (kangaroo).
The boys are ordered to turn their backs with their heads down
for a few minutes, and when they look again they see the koor-
ingal lying on top of each other in a heap, boballai babiabbi.

* This ceremony of giving the boys a short run always precedes their liberation for the
purpose of joining in the work of hunting.

t Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxiv., 423.

i Lieut. -Col. Collins, in his "Account of the English Colony in New South Wales,"
published in 179S, vol. i., p. 571, plate ill, describes a similar performance which took
place at the Bora witnessed by him in 1795, at the head of Farm Cove, Sydney.

11

162 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Having given their attention to this for the necessary time, the
old men interrogate each other and hit the ground, calling out the
name of the performance, as described previously. The men then
get up and jump and swing their arms as usual. The boys are
again ordered to look down and are marched away. After going
a short distance they are halted, then ordered to run about
twenty yards, when they are stopped again, and given three or
four nulla nullas each. They are now at liberty to join in the
hunting occupations of the guardians, but must not look behind
them. Chasing padamelons, looking for snakes, etc., climbing
trees for wild bees' nests, are now indulged in all the way back to
the camp, which is reached a short time before sunset. On
getting within sight of the camp the boys are ordered to hold
their heads down, looking at the ground straight in front of their
feet only, and are conducted in this way into the yard, where
they are left in the care of a few of their guardians, while the
others go to the camp and prepare their evening repast, which is
brought by-and-bye to the yard. Even in the yard they must
not look towards the camp of the men. After the kooringal and
guardians have also had their supper and a rest, at their own camp,
two or three small fires are lit, near the cleared space previously
mentioned, for the purpose of giving light for the performance
about to take place. The guardians now bring the novices from
the yard, and place them standing in a row close by this space.
The kooringal then appear with boomerangs, nullas, etc., stuck
in their belts and in strings tied round their legs and round their
shoulders for the purpose of holding these weapons. Some of
them pretend to be lame, others are each carrying a man on
their back ; they catch hold of his legs and his head hangs down
their back. All the men are following in a line stamping their
feet, and each man has hold of the one in front of him. The
rear consists of a man dressed to represent a woman, who carries
a yam-stick and has a blackfellow alongside. The other men
pretend to want to take the woman from him, and indulge in
obscene gestures. Having asked the customary questions of
each other, one of the old men hits the ground and shouts :
" Goolangarra." The novices now turn their backs, and on
looking round again the men are all in a heap, boballai, and
the usual formula is gone through by the old men. The boys

The Bora of the Kam'darol Tribes. 163

are now taken away to their yard, where they remain with a
few of their guardians till bed-time. The procedure for to-morrow
is now discussed by the head men, thekooringaland the guardians.
When this matter has been disposed of, the boys are brought back,
and put in the place appointed for them to sleep, their guardians
being with them, and all hands retire to rest.

The next morning at day-light the boys are taken back to their
yard, where food is subsequently taken to them. When all have
breakfasted, a start is made out into the bush for the purpose of
hunting. It may be that it has been decided to shift their camp
to a fresh place, and in that case their things would be carried
with them. The boys carry nothing — their things being carried
by their guaixlians. The boys walk with their heads down and
their arms close by their sides, and when out of sight of the camp
are liberated by giving them a short run and handing them nulla
nullas, as before described, and hunting or fishing is carried
on all day as usual. During either the fore or afternoon, the
pantomimic performance of the Curlew (Graybai) is gone through
by ranging the boys in a row with their heads down, their nulla
nullas having been taken from them. The kooringal then run
along past in front of them, imitating the action and whistling
of the curlew. The old men hit the ground and the men
go in Boballai in the usual way. On getting into camp that
evening an hour or so before sundown, the play is Native Bees
(Oongomurra). Around the butt of a tree a number of bushes
are placed with their ends leaning against it. The kooringal are
standing round the base of the tree, hidden by the bushes and are
humming like bees. The boys are brought up with their heads
down, and are ranged in a row and told to look up. When an
old man hits the ground with his nulla nulla, the men come out
on all fours one after the other humming and imitating the walk
of bees. The boys backs being now turned, the men go into
Boballai as usual. If it is a fresh camping ground, a yard
is made for the boys and the camp arranged as previously
described. After supper a couple of small fires are lighted
beside a cleared space, between the camp of the guardians and
that of the kooringal, and the boys are brought out of their
yard and placed standing on one side. The men now pass alotig
in a crouching attitude, jumping and shaking their arms; the

llA

164 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

front man and the last have each a piece of string one end of
which is held in each hand, and the middle of the string is held
between the teeth. This string is drawn from side to side,
the men making a low noise with their mouth, which noise is
repeated by all the other men who have no string. As soon as
all the actors have passed by into the darkness on the other side,
they return repeating the performance. This is done several
times and when the old men think it has been continued long
enough, they bring it to an end by hitting the ground and
naming it Warringun.* The usual course of turning away the
boys' heads for the preparation of Boballai, concludes this act,
and the boys are taken back to their yard till bed-time, and are
then again brought to the men's camp for the night.

Next morning the usual routine is gone through, and a start
made into the bush in search of food. During the forenoon the
boys are brought to a stand at one end of a heap of earth or sand,
into which a number of pieces of stout grass or reeds about four
or five inches in length have been inserted closely together like
the quills on a porcupine. The old men make the usual interro-
gations as to what it is, when one of them says : "It must be a
porcupine " (Wiroyla) and inserts the end of his nulla nulla under
one side of the heap as if to turn it over. A man who was con-
cealed under this covering now rolls over on his back with his
legs and arms gathered up in the same way as a porcupine does
when it is turned over. The men and boys then resume their
hunting. On reaching the camp a short time before nightfall
the pantomime of Wonga Wonga Pigeon (Googan Googan) is
performed. The kooringal paint white patches on their bodies
in the position on which they appear on the bird, and then walk
past imitating the note of this kind of pigeon. The usual form-
alities ensue, and the performance ends by the men going into
Boballai. That night after supper the boys are brought to the
clear space at the camp, and a fire lighted. One man beats two
boomerangs together. The others then dance around with sticks
in their mouths ; these sticks are merely dry pieces of wood, and
are from eighteen inches to two feet six inches long, about the

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxv., 334.

The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribes. 165

thickness of a whip-handle, picked up around the camp. After
dancing a few minutes the men throw the sticks out of their
mouths into the fire, and go and get other similar sticks. This
is repeated for some time, after which all the men dance round
the fire for a little while without anything in their mouths. The
fire having now burnt clown to cinders, the men jump upon it
with their naked feet and scatter the embers in all directions and
put it out. This dance is called Boodell Boodellyinga.

Next morning a start is made as usual, and when a short
distance from the camp, the Kangaroo-Rat (Noolooboonya) is
represented. The boys are placed as usual and the kooringal
are seen gathering bunches of grass, which they carry in their
arms and build a nest like the kangaroo-rat, only much larger.
"When the nest is completed, the men, one after another, go and
put their heads in it, and then hop past the boys, imitating the
shape and action of the animal. The men then go into Boballai,
after which a fresh start is made. The boys are made to run
several yards, and nulla nullas given them as before described,
and all hands go on hunting. It may be that the novices are not
kept together. One lot of guardians and their novices may go in
one direction, and another lot may go into a different hunting
ground, and these detachments may not meet again until their
return to the camp perhaps an hour or so before sundown. One
lot on approaching the other would whistle. "When they all get
together near the camp, the game of Locusts (Ngaddalla) is
performed.* The boys stand with their heads clown while the
kooringal climb trees, and catch hold of the branches imitating
the position and noise of locusts. The boys are then told to
look, and in a short time the men come down from the trees and
crawl along the ground past the boys, and conclude the perform-
ance by going into Boballai. The novices having been taken to
their yard, and all hands having had supper, a fire or fires are lit
alongside of the cleared space at the camp, and the boys brought
to see the performance. The kooringal are painted in white
stripes extending from the feet to the neck, with a central line
from the forehead down the nose, chin and body, terminating at
the end of the penis. WTiite circles are also drawn around the

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxv., 333.

166 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria,.

eyes. They dance along past the fire in pairs, having hold of each
others hands, the outside hand of each man resting on his hip,
uttering monotonous exclamations all the time. Some of the
conjurers then perform tricks of pulling things out of their bodies,
and running after the other men, the whole concluding with the
kooringal going into the heap, Boballai. After this, men and
boys retire to rest for the night.

The following morning, after getting away from the camp, the
pantomime is Wood-Ducks. The kooringal come out from one
side and run with a waddling gait past the boys, quacking and
falling over each other as they go. The backs of the boys are
turned for a few minutes, and the men are seen in a heap,
Boballai. The boys are marched a short distance away and
liberated in the usual manner, and join the men in hunting.
Some time during the day the kooringal go away to a place
where the soil is soft, or to a sand ridge, and make a hole in the
ground about two feet deep. A man with his head hideously
disguised, and an opossum rug wrapped around him, is placed in
the hole. The others then withdraw, and the novices are brought
within twenty or thirty yards, when their attention is drawn
to the strange figure, and are told that it is a man rising up out
of the ground, perhaps some of their ancestors. They are then
marched away, and resume their hunting.

The following appears to be a variation of the above : Two
men are disguised with white stripes of brigalow bark tied across
their bodies and limbs and a piece of bark strapped to the penis
to give it the appearance of almust touching the ground. These
men have their feet in holes about a foot deep, dug in the ground
to give them the appearance of coming up out of it, and each has
an opossum rug loosely thrown round him. The boys are
brought within a. short distance, but not too near, and are shown
these figures, who are waving their arms about, and who are
called Dhandarroogan (or Dhungully).

Having returned to the camp and the evening meal over, the
novices are brought to the cleared space. Some of the wizards
will take a stick out of the fire and will apparently bite a piece
of the burning coal off one end of it. They run about clapping
their hands on their hips and going through obscene gestures.
During this time they will apparently bring different substances,

The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribes. 167

such as white stones, pieces of string, etc., out of their bodies.
When this kind of amusement has been indulged in for some
time, such of the men as are good singers commence chanting
Baiamai's song.*

After breakfast next morning, two of the wizards go away
into the bush adjacent and smear their faces, arms and bodies
with human blood, taken from the arms of some of the men, and
come out to where a large tire has been lit, accompanied by about
half-a-dozen or more young men beating the ground with pieces
of bark and shouting "Barri-barri" repeatedly as they walk. The
two wizards referred to then chase the kooringal and guardians,
but not the novices, round the tire several times — the bullroarer
being sounded out of sight in the bush close by. The men with
the bark now sit down a short distance off, and continue beating
the ground ; and one of the wizards stands beside them having in
his hand a coolamin, out of which he drinks human blood. At
the finish, all hands, except the boys, dance and shout and close
in round the fire. After this the boys heads are turned away,
and the kooringal go into Boballai.

When the head men consider that the novices (Wudhamurrin)
have gone through a sufficient course of instruction and discipline in
the bush, a number of strange men who have arrived at the women's
camp since the boys were taken away are despatched to liberate
them. These men are called the Beegay, and a messenger is
sent out to the kooringal to let them know they are coming.
The Beegay then start away from the main camp and proceed to
a water-hole in the bush, which has been decided upon by the
head men as the place where the kooringal and guardians are to
wash the black paint off their bodies. At this water-hole the
Beegay leave their personal effects in charge of a few of their
own men, and go into the bush in search of the kooringal
and novices. They know where to go, because the locality has
previously been determined upon.

On the day which has been arranged to meet the Beegay, the
kooringal, bumboon and boys start out as usual and carry all
their things with them, as if shifting camp. When they reach
the appointed place, which is in a piece of open country, their

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxv., 334.

168 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

swags are laid down and a fire lit, at which the old men remain.
The boys are then taken away on the pretence of accompanying
the men hunting, and one or more of the kooringal go ahead
unseen by the boys, in order to see where the Beegay are. On
sighting the latter and exchanging signals that all is ready, the
kooringal scouts return and inform their comrades. The boys
( Wundhamurrin) are placed sitting on the ground in a row with
their heads down, and their backs towards the direction from
which the Beegav are to approach. The kooringal are standing
in a row behind the boys. The guardians then tell them to
listen, that Dhurramoolun is coming to burn them. The Beegay,
painted with white stripes, are by this time quite near, carrying
in the right hand a boomerang, and in the left a smoking stick.
One of them raises a low continuous whistle, on hearing which
the guardians tell the boys to get up and run back to the place
where they left their swags, looking only at the ground in front
of them. The boys then run as hard as they can in company
with the guardians for about 200 yards, when the guardians
command them to lie face downwards on the ground with their
hands by their sides for a minute or two. They are then ordered
to get up and run again. These spells of running and resting
are continued until the temporary camp is reached, when the
boys fall face downwards on rugs ready spread for them. The
whistling of the Beegay has been heard close behind them all the
way. The i*eason for making the boys lie down at intervals is
to prevent their getting too excited and frightened, and becoming
unmanageable, and also to enable the Beegay to keep pace with
them. As soon as the boys lie down the old men, who remained
there, say, "We will now give you a drink before you are burnt."
After this some of the men will clap their hands whilst others
take fire-sticks and touch the boys on the legs to make them
believe that Dhurramoolun is commencing to burn them. The
kooringal say, " Don't be in a hurry to burn the boys ! go
away !" The fathers of the novices are there, and pretend to be
in great grief, lamenting and hitting themselves on the head ;
the boys are in a great state of fear, but do not attempt to move.
During this time the Beegay are renewing their fire-sticks, in
order that they may make a good smoke. Then the boys are
helped to their feet and are placed standing in a row, the fathers

The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribes. 169

of each boy saying to the guardians, " Hold my boy ; he is going
to be taken away and burnt." The kooringal are standing in
a semi-circle behind the boys. The boys faces are now turned
towards the Beegay, who are swaying their smoky sticks, and the
guardians say, "There they are; they have a big fire over there,"
pointing in a certain direction. The Beegay then run up towards
the boys dancing and shouting and swaying their smoky sticks
and boomerangs. The guardians then turn the boys backs
towards the Beegay, who come up and pass along the row of
boys, each man catching the back hair of each boy in succession,
and pulling his head up straight. The class distinctions are so
interwoven with the ceremonial that, even in this matter, they
are not lost sight of. A Dilbi* Beegay would shake the hair of a
Kubbi or Murri boy heartily, because he belongs to the same
class, but would only lightly shake the back hair of a Kumbo or
Ippai ; the Kupathin men would show a similar preference for
the boys belonging to their own class. This pulling of the back
hair is done for the purpose of freeing the novices from the
stooping position in which they have had to walk during the time
they have been out with the kooringal. After this, the Beegay
retire several yards, shouting as before, the boys remaining with
their backs towards them.

The Beegay then form into a semi-circle, and join the semi-
circle formed by the kooringal, making a complete ring of men
around the boys. Two men now step out into the open space
within the circle and commence swinging bullroarers, and the
kooringal beat their weapons together and call out, " Don't burn
the boys yet." When the men with the bullroarers get giddy,
they are replaced by others, who keep the instruments sounding
continually. Amidst this tumultuous clamour of human voices,
clashing of weapons and roar of murrawans, the boys faces are
turned round and they are told to look. The guardians tell them
that these instruments represent the voice of Dhurramoolun,
and that all the similar sounds which they have yet heard have
been made in this way. The men now caution the boys not to
reveal what they have seen to the women, or the uninitiated, or

* " Kamilaroi Class System of the Australian Aborigines," Proc. Roy. Geog. Sop. Aust.
(Q.)x., 19.

170 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

they will be punished with death. The Dilbi men caution the
Dilbi boys, and the Kupathin men caution the Kupathin boys,
and while doing so hold up tomahawks or spears in a threatening
attitude. The guardians now put the full dress of a man on
each of the novices, consisting of a belt with four barrunggals,
a broad and a narrow head-band. They are now called tugga-
billas* and are freed from any further restraint. Some of the
wizards perform feats of juggling, and this part of the ceremony
is over. Up to this point the guardians have been carrying the
rugs and other things belonging to the boys, but now they
will have to carry them themselves. The Beegay now start for
the water-hole where they left their swags, and the kooringal,
bumboon and tuggabillas follow them at a distance. A. few men
who had been left here have made a ring (Buddhamoor) about
fifteen or twenty yards in circumference, its boundary being
formed by a continuous wood fire. In the middle of this ring
of fire are two men swinging a big nulla nulla in each hand,
dancing about and imitating different animals. These are the
two men (Iwddeiibelar), who threw the boomerangs at the boys
the first morning on which they were taken away. The Beegay
are the first to reach this place, and they lie down on the
opposite side of the ring to that in which they have just come.
Presently the kooringal, guardians and neophytes arrive at the
other side of the ring and commence stamping their feet, swaying
their hands, in which they carry weapons, up and clown, and
uttering low monotonous shouts. Then the Beegay, who are, as
before stated, lying down on the opposite side of the ring of fire,
rise to their feet, and act in a similar manner. During this time
the two men have been in the ring, but now they retire, and the
Beegay enter it, dancing round and shouting. Some of their
wizards go through various feats of pulling things out of various
parts of their bodies, and chasing the other men, who clap their
hands on their hips and shout. These ceremonies being concluded,
the Beegay drive the kooringal and the guardians into the
water-hole close by, where they wash the black paint off them-
selves, the Beegay and the novices sitting on the bank watching
them. After this the kooringal and their contingent camp at

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxv., 336.

The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribes. 171

the water-hole for the night, but the Beegay go away back to
the camp of the women, perhaps a mile or two distant.

A few of the oldest women then muster all the women and
girls in the camp, not including the children, and drive them
into a water-hole or creek close by, and make them swim about
and wash themselves. When they come out of the water, they
go and select a suitable level place near the camp, which they
clear of grass and rubbish, ready for enclosing by the thurra-
wonga, or bough yard, the next day. The distance from the
camp to the thurrawonga may vary from about 200 yards to
500 yards, according to the suitability of the ground, and other
considerations.

When the kooringal and their companions have had supper,
some of them take the neophytes, and proceed towards the camp
of the women.* On coming within hearing, they break up into
sections according to their respective tribes, each section of
novices approaching that side of the main camp occupied by the
tribe to which they belong. Each lot of boys is accompanied by
one or more of the men, who climb up into a tree, just outside
the camp, and shout, and the women know the men's voices.
Then each boy shouts out in succession, and is answered by
his mother. During this time one of the boys is swinging a
murrawan at the butt of a tree. The women then pick up
fire-sticks and hold them in their hands, or wave them in the
air, or perhaps throw them up. The boys of each section act in
the same way adjacent to the quarters of their mothers. The
men and boys now return to their comrades at the camp out in
the bush. The ceremony of giving the boys a new name is now
proceeded with. This is done by the old men and the fathers
of the novices. The Ippais give names to the Murri boys, the
Kubbis name the Kumbos, the Murris name the Ippais, and the
Kumbos name the Kubbi boys. While the boys were away at
the women's camp, two men had climbed each a tree, and as each
boy was named by the old men, one of these would shake the
branches and shout out from his tree, imitating the noise of some
animal. Sometimes they micturate in imitation of opossums and
squirrels. When all the boys are named, the men who have been

* Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxv., 336.

172 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

up in the trees come clown, and raise a lamentation that the. bora
ceremonies are over. Such of the young men present who had
been initiated at previous boras now ask the old men to release
them from certain prohibitions which had been imposed upon
them as to food. Food restrictions are now imposed upon the
neophytes.* After this all hands go to sleep at the camp fires
for the night.

Return of the Boys. — Early next morning the men and boys
have their hair cut, and the men are shaved, face and pubes,
after which the boys are painted red all over, with white stripes
drawn diagonally across their bodies from the direction of each
shoulder, and also on the arms and legs. Belts, kilts, etc., are
also worn. The men are painted with red stripes from the waist
down to the feet, and from the elbows to the hands. Feathers
of the eagle-hawk or swan are put in the hair. A messenger is
sent on ahead to the gin's camp to tell them that the men and
boys will shortly arrive.

The women, assisted by the Beegay, have in the early morning
cut saplings and bushes, and made a yard around the cleared
space before referred to. This yard is similar in shape to those
made in the bush, but larger, because intended to accommodate a
greater number of men. Its convex end is in the direction from
which the boys are expected to approach. In this yard the
mothers of the guardians and kooringal have placed their yam-
sticks around, about two or thi-ee feet from the fence, each stick
having some article belonging to the owner attached to it, in
order that the men may recognise them. Around the outside of
the convex end of this yard logs of wood are laid. The Beegay
now cause the women to lie down round the outside of the yard,
the mothers of the boys occupying the space nearest to the fence
with their feet touching the logs just mentioned. The men
and women who have charge of the thurrawonga are called
mooemalla. The women are then covered over with rugs and
bushes. On a signal being given that all is ready, the neophytes
and their guardians now approach in single file, and the latter
conduct each boy to his mother on the outside of the enclosure
and place him sitting down on the log which her feet are

* Forbidden food is called wannal.

The Bora of the Kamilaroi Tribes. 173

touching. The guardians and kooringal then enter the yard, and
each man sits down facing his mother's yam-stick. Each novice
then shakes the log to let his mother know he is there, but does
not speak, and then runs away, not looking behind him, to a camp
two or three hundred yards away, provided for the novices and
their guardians. During this time the bull-roarer is heard in
some place adjacent, but out of sight.

As soon as the boys run away, the women are allowed to get
up. They then pull down the bushes forming the yard and find
the men sitting there — the latter now get up and dance and
make a buzzing or humming noise on the cleared space inside
the thurrawonga — the women standing around. The women
then take the men to some convenient place close by, where
they place them in four groups, the men of each class being
together, and light fires to the windward of them. Green
bushes are placed on the tires to make a thick smoke. The
Dilbi women smoke the Dilbi men, and the Kupathin women
smoke the Kupathin men. After this the men disperse to their
usual quarters. In the meantime all the neophytes have gone
into their own camp accompanied by some of the men. That
night the novices, accompanied by some of the men go round
the women's camp, out of sight, and walking quietly so that
their movements may not be heard, sounding bullroarers.

Next day the boys, carrying a smoky stick and bushes, are
hrought up to the women's camp, a man sounding a bullroarer
behind them in some secluded spot. Several men walk behind
the boys, throwing pieces of bark at them, sometimes hitting
them. On reaching the women's camp the boys are placed sitting
on a log in groups according to their classes. The women then
light tires on which they burn green bushes on the windward side
of the boys, so as to envelope them in a cloud of smoke. The
Dilbi women smoke the Dilbi boys and the Kupathin women the
Kupathin boys. The mothers hold the boys in the smoke.

After this ceremony, the various tribes who have attended as
visitors make preparations for returning to their several districts,
and in the course of a few days all have gone away. The novices
of each tribe ai-e kept under the control of their guardians for
some time, and have to conform to certain rules laid down by the
old men.

Art. XII. — Probable Miocene Age of a Conglomerate at

Shelford.

(With Plate VII.).

By J. Dennant, F.G.S., aud J. F. Mulder.

[Read 13th August, 1896.]

For some years boulders of gritty ironstone containing casts
of fossils have been reported by various observers as occurring
on a hill adjoining the Shelford Cemetery, but the material
appeared so unpromising that geologists have hitherto abstained
from undertaking a detailed examination of it. The position of
the boulders on the basalt precludes their being classed as a
portion of the eocene, which underlies this rock not only in
sections close at hand but also in those of neighbouring areas,
and the opinion has indeed been hazarded that they might be
pliocene, mainly perhaps, because that age had been previously
assigned to the lava flows around.

We first saw blocks of the conglomerate placed amongst
basaltic boulders along a portion of the fence bordering an
unformed road up the western slope of the Leigh River Gorge.
It was too late when we arrived in Shelford to seek for them in
situ that clay, and we were, in fact, told that our search would
be fruitless, as the oldest inhabitant could give no information
as to where the stones came from. This mystery, however, was,
as we anticipated, easily cleared up the next morning, since they
were found in abundance just below the surface in the adjoining
paddock, from which, of course, the loose stones had been picked
up, and then piled against the fence. This paddock lies south of
the road and adjoins the cemetery, in which also embedded blocks
of the conglomerate are common. The same material also crops
out in a shallow gully, just over the fence on the opposite or
southern side of the paddock, but ceases on the rising ground
beyond. To the north of the road, we could find no trace of the
fossiliferous strata, nor indeed in any other part of the gorge,
though we searched at about the same level in several places.
"We should certainly expect similar boulders to occur elsewhere
on the river bank, and possibly a more thorough search may

Probable Miocene Age of Conglomerate, Shdford. 175

yet reveal them. Going up the road by the side of the fence,
the conglomerate commences near the cemetery gate and dis-
appears about 140 yards from the top of the hill. Further
details concerning the elevation and horizontal measurements
of the outcrop will be more conveniently given later on.

The matrix of the boulders consists of ironstone with numerous
small, rounded, quartz pebbles irregularly scattered throughout
the mass. There is no creek or cutting where they occur, and
we noticed them merely as slight protrusions here and there in
the surface soil, much in the same way as blocks of lava appear
on the plains and hill slopes of ordinary basaltic country. They
are crowded with fossils, but all as casts only, the lime of the
shell being entirely replaced by iron oxide. When the cast is an
internal one, the fossil is not, as a rule, easily identified, but
with an external cast, or rather mould, where, as is often
the case, the ornament of the formerly enclosed shell is clearly
delineated, there is less difficulty ; and besides, the opportunity
is afforded of reproducing its outline and exterior markings in
some plastic material. Our own attempts at this were only
moderately successful, and we were very glad to avail ourselves
of the generous offer made by Mr. G. Sweet, F.G.S., to prepare
models from the fossil casts obtained. Our heartiest thanks are
due to this gentleman, as he has enabled us to determine with
certainty many of the forms represented.

One of the commonest casts is that of Pecleti anti-australis,
the exterior ornament of which is often beautifully preserved.
Amongst other easily identifiable casts may be mentioned,
Zenatiopsis angustata, of large size, Pelicaria coronata, Chiotie
propinqua (mioc. var.), Myodora corrugata, Leda woods it.
Models of all of these have been prepared, as well as of the
majority of the other species catalogued.

In the following table of fossils from the conglomerate, the
asterisk before the name signifies that the species is represented
by many examples. The dagger indicates that fossils from this
bed were also so identified by Professor Tate from casts sent to
him some years ago by Mr. Sweet. Having been allowed to
examine the same collection, we are able with the additional
material on hand and by the aid of the models pi'epared to omit
the query then placed against some of the names.

176 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

o

o

K

a
<
Eh

£

■rH

CD

S-

CD

A

-P

KJ

on

s
s

■a

3

P C •

0~

s .2

9

o

6 S3

'2

o

ce M

hi

—

o
O

o

o .3

.5 s- §

o

CO

Sod

► of

■-^ CD

• CD _o

X 5 ^ ^
O **2 -4 i-i

J=

,!£ bC o =*:

• £h '"C ^3

O

c • v

"5 &-

■S <H £-

>

43 "U 3

d

o

21

6s

09

X XX

c

0)

o
o

•pa^isddig

XX XX

X X

X X

§

A'ppnK

X X X <*~ X

XXX

X X

' '

*

, , I

■Si ce

51

, , ,

"o

K ■ , -2} ■ ■ P. J» ■

, si'** I

1 1 ^

~ -1— "Si

V,

1 -£^

o
fa

2* ^ K CT """£

o jk

"S

09

3

1 i |l - 1

5 cs i £ o , cs ^ ,

| § &§£ £ 1 p

^ i- CO O -)— _, ■ 'X T

1^1

O O -

■*» Si cs

i'o p

.5o« . "^ co cd •£ P-c

o 3 dJ2

ji .3 g g d?.2 5 « * 03

J g-2 1

c3 'd o

cd ce ~

-t— * -i—

H— * *

-t—

'

* *

*

Probable Miocene Age of Conglomerate, Shelford. 177

^

G

o

<

•Bipujsn y

•pcrapcldig

A'ppnK

• CM 43

of o O
Dog

'■go

eh 3

as |

d ©

g 1
2" o

Eoc.

A ch

r beds

n the la

ocalitie

QJ .m —

U rr

© ce g- © 5

a r 5 © -

J~ g

£ I

d.

"3 ,2 £ £ 3

o o

© ©

o © ©

-© o

£ <
^ »

K

S*s "58 ^

Ci 43

43

43 .- M

g'S 3

CO

©

o o S

1 ' £fj

,© -£ £

t* © ~

P-

sp.
sis an

m -->g

ce ^=- p_

<D.Sl!

=S eS .c

Chion
Dosin

Soleci

Mact
Mact
Zena

*

-i—

X X

fl

©IK

3 .22

K

&i

.a P-,

© "

e3

O =3 M4 ©_

-S "S 3 5-3s^

OS© ^K^ © ©

* * -t — i — i-

«-=. ci .©

„ M ©

c3 o „©

2 °
©-, ©,

12

178 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

That the above list of fossils is a short one, as compared with
those usually supplied for the tertiary deposits of the province
must be attributed to the difficult nature of the material in
which they are embedded rather than to the scarcity of the
forms present. Many of these, from their small size, or indefi-
niteness of the preserved outlines are quite unrecognisable, while
for others models have to be prepared. Even with the aid of
these, the species, and occasionally the genus also, may still
remain doubtful, especially in the case of bivalves, where the
hinge characters can rarely be made out.

In discussing the horizon of the strata we propose to take
account only of those fossils the distribution of which is definitely
given in the table. Eighteen species are thus available, of which
eight are confined to the miocene division of the tertiaries at
Muddy Creek, Jemmy's Point, Aldinga Bay, or the Murray
River ; while many of the remainder though present also in the
eocene, are in reality specially characteristic of the miocene.
With only eighteen species as a basis for calculation, the
percentage of living forms represented would of course be an
unreliable test of geological age. As a fact, no undoubted
recent species appears in the list, though it may be mentioned,
that one of them, viz., Nucula tenisoni, formerly known as
N. tumida, T. Woods, is regarded by Mr. Pritchard as both
recent and fossil.* Under these circumstances reliance is placed
upon the correlation of the fauna with that in other deposits,
which, if correctly given in the above columns, indicates a
miocene horizon for the Shelford Conglomerate. On strati-
graphical as well as on palseontological grounds, the deposit
must be separated from the neighbourhing eocene, while to be
even late pliocene, it should show a large proportion of recent
shells. Its relation to the accompanying igneous rock has next
to be considered, and with reference to this our hesitation in at
once classing the strata as miocene, when first met with, was
chiefly due, since previous conclusions concerning the age of the
basalt are thereby called in question.

The position of the outcrop, as well as our theory of the
sequence of the rocks is illustrated in the appended sketch,

* Roy. Soc. Vic, vol. viii., p. 128.

Probable Miocene Age of Conglomi rate, Shelford. 179

which is approximately to scale. The elevations are from
aneroid observations of our own, and the distances of the stations
on the hillside have been measured for us by Mr. Swan.

At the particular portion of the river bank where the conglom-
erate appears, the eocene beds are not visible, but we consider
ourselves justified, from evidence obtained at other portions of
the gorge, in assuming their existence here, and at no great depth
beneath the basalt ; at the base of the section they may indeed
be somewhat more deeply seated than the drawing indicates,
while the outline of their surface farther in the hill is of course
uncertain. North of Shelford, outcrops of the strata also occur,
but generally reaching a higher level on the banks, and an uneven
surface is thus indicated, which points to erosion before the out-
flow of the lava took place. In the section figured, the basalt
appears first at a height of fifty feet above the water's edge, and
our conclusion that it is there in situ is confirmed by the fact
that the eocene strata of the Red Bluff, a mile and a half down
the stream, are covered by lava at about the same elevation.
Going still farther up the hill, a moderately deep quarry in solid
basalt is 110 feet above the same datum line. Beyond this
quarry and at a height of 145 feet above the river level, the first
block of the conglomerate in situ was observed. A few scattered
pieces were found on the surface a little lower down, but they
have probably come from above. The fossiliferous boulders can
be traced up the hill from this point for a distance of about 150
yards, and for thirty-five feet in vertical elevation, or to a height
above datum line of 180 feet, when they cease, and the only
stones cropping out higher up belong to the prevailing lava flow.
By a farther i*ise of forty feet in a distance of 137 yards, the
summit of the western bank of the river gorge is reached, its
total height being thus 220 feet. The distance from the water's
edge to the level country bounding the gorge is 766 yards, so
that the slope, like that on basaltic banks generally, is a gentle
one. On the east of the river there is an extensive flat before
the corresponding rise commences, but the aneroid recorded
almost exactly the same elevation for the top of the bank on
that side, and we may therefore conclude that the lava once
spread as a level sheet right aci'oss the present gorge, which has
been since excavated to the depth mentioned.

180 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

The measurements just quoted show that the boulder bed is
separated from the underlying eocene clays and limestones by not
less than ninety-five feet of basalt, that is, from the outcrop of
the latter at the base of the section to the first appearance of the
conglomerate up the' hill ; moreover, from the fact that the
quarry alluded to is situated at a lower level than the boulders,
we may fairly infer the continuance of the igneous rock beneath
them for their whole extent. If, in excavating the quarry, the
fossiliferous boulders had been revealed, a different conclusion
would be possible, as in that case they might simply represent
a miocene inlier, surrounded and partially covered by a subse-
quent flow of lava. Such an explanation is, however, inadmissible,
as they are not only absent there, but, as we have before said, do
not show in any cutting or natural section along the river bank :
and we are therefore driven to seek some other interpretation of
the facts.

At Muddy Creek, as is well known, miocene strata are covered
by a lava flow, usually regarded as of pliocene age, but that this
was contemporaneous with the basalt overlying the eocene of
the Leigh River, is, independently of the fossil evidence now
presented, open to doubt. It is generally admitted that in the
eocene, pliocene, and perhaps also the pleistocene periods, out-
pourings of lava took place over various portions of Southern
Australia, but with one exception, the authors of recent memoirs
on our tertiaries refrain from classing any of the basalts as
miocene. If, howevei', the fossiliferous boulders of the Shelford
section are miocene, the lava upon which they rest, may, provi-
sionally at least, be referred to the same period — certainly it
cannot be younger. Our theory, in fact, is that the Shelford
basalt is a miocene flow covering the wide spread eocene strata
of the region. Then, after the channel of the river had been
partially excavated, the miocene conglomerate was deposited
either in a slight depression hollowed out of the basalt, or upon
its gently sloping surface. It is not unlikely that this portion of
the Leigh River represents an old estuary connected with the
former sea-channel, which, as pointed out by Mr. Murray, existed
in tertiary times between the Cape Otway Ranges and the main-
land to the north.* As the deposition of the boulders commences

* Geology and Physical Geography of Victoria, p. 122.

Probable Miocene Age of Conglomerate, Shelford. 181

at about forty feet from the top of the bank, and continues for
thirty-five feet lower down the hill, it follows that the estuary
or inlet was invaded by the niiocene sea until about one-third
of the present depth of the gorge had been excavated. The
conglomerate for the whole of the thirty-five feet of vertical
extent in which it is traceable is intermingled with blocks of
lava, and is therefore probably nothing more than a collection
of scattered boulders resting on the basalt and not reaching far
below the surface. The iron oxide in them is of course derived
from the basalt, while the quartz pebbles plentifully intermixed
with it were doubtless washed down from silurian country higher
up the river.

The southern portion of the Leigh River has not been geologi-
cally surveyed, but in a report upon its upper course by Messrs.
Etheridge and Murray, written in 18.68, but not published till
1874,* it is incidentally remarked that the basalt around Shelford
was derived from Mount Mercer, an extinct crater seventeen
miles to the north. In describing the results of their detailed
work, which was confined to the more northern area mentioned,
the further statement is made that certain drifts and gravels,
classed by them as pliocene underlie the same basalt. Such a
position for pliocene strata is manifestly opposed to our theory
that the igneous rock is not younger than miocene. It is possible
that the basalt they refer to may belong to a different flow, more
than one being mentioned in their report, but as we did not visit
the sections in the surveyed area, we can offer no opinion upon
the point. We may remark, however, that the geological ages
of the various drifts and gravels of Victoria are not precisely
known, the descriptive terms applied to them by the geological
survey being admittedly, to some extent provisional. The best
of all evidence is, of course, that afforded by marine fossils, but
from the nature of the case, it is seldom available. Moreover,
the revised nomenclature of the tertiaries adopted by the
majority of recent writers has to be considered — if, as they
contend, the former miocene of the survey has to be read as
eocene, possibly also the term pliocene may, in some cases at
least, need to be interpreted as miocene.

* Progress Report, No. II., p. 101, et seq.

182 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

The late Mr. Wilkinson, when a member of the Victorian
Survey Staff, traced an old gravel from Steiglitz down the
Moorabool, and in accordance with the classification of the
tertiaries then current called it miocene, but which, as Mr.
Pritchard has pointed out, should be altered to eocene or even
pre-eocene.* In a similar manner, some of the so-called pliocene
drifts and gravels may, when re-examined in the light of know-
ledge now possessed, prove to be of miocene age. In regard to
those of the Leigh River Valley, reliable data for determining
their geological horizon within narrow limits are, as we have seen,
furnished by the marine beds with which they are associated.
Further discussion of this subject would, however, be out of place
in the present paper, and it is therefore postponed for some
future occasion.

* Aust. Ass. Adv. Sci., Brisbane Meeting.

Pror Jl S Victoria 18% Plate 7.

cq

ui

£

^

^

^

&

v V i, P

Riven LEIGH

hq

fi W-na>/ ////> *//•

Art. XIII. — On the Occurrence of Graptolites in North-
Eastem Victoria.

By T. S. Hall, M.A.,

Demonstrator and Assistant Lecturer in Biology in the
University of Melbourne.

[Read 3rd September, 1896.]

Some two years ago Mr. W. H. Ferguson gave me a small
collection of graptolites, some of which he had obtained at
Wombat Creek near Mount Wills, and the rest near Tungamah.
The presence of Dicranograptida. showed at a glance that the
rocks belonged to the upper portion of the Ordovician series, but
the smallness of the collection and the imperfect nature of many
of the specimens caused me to lay them aside in the hope that a
larger and better series would be forthcoming. Mr. Ferguson
has not, however, had an opportunity of re-visiting the localities,
but during an examination of the country in the north-east of
the county of Benambra lie was fortunate enough to find a fresh
fossiliferous locality on the banks of Walwal Creek. The
specimens which he found on this last occasion were placed
at my disposal, through the courtesy of Mr. J. Travis, the
Acting-Secretary for Mines, with the request that I would
identify the specimens. I wrote a short report which was
handed in to the Department, but its publication is delayed
for the present.

Wombat Creek.

The locality from which the specimens were obtained is well
within the area shown as metamorphic on the present geological
map of the colony. Most of the specimens are a mere glaze on
the surface of the rock, and are quite invisible except when held
in a certain position with regard to the light. The two species
identified, however, are sufficiently well preserved to enable
enlarged drawings to be made under the camera. These are
Dicellograptus elegans, Carr., and Climacograptus Incornis, J. Hall.
Besides these there are two, or perhaps three, species of Diplo-

184 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

graptidce, the characters of which are too obscure to permit of
identification.

Tungamah.

No older rocks are mapped in the locality from which these
specimens came. They are more conspicuous than those from
the former locality, but the finer characters are in great part
obscured through weathering. There are several which appear
to be new, one perhaps generically, but they are too obscure to
speak of with any definiteness. I query some of the species, as
they are identified from the form and dimensions of the polypary
only, the hydrothecae not being visible. The following forms
occur: ? Dicellograptus sextans, J. Hall; Dicellograptus sp. ;
? Dicra>iograptiis ramosus, J. Hall; Diplograptus pristis, Hisinger,
and Glossograptus, sp.

Walwal Creek.

The district from which these specimens come is coloured as
granite on the map. They are preserved merely as a glaze on
the rock and, though unable to make camera drawings of them,
I made careful sketches and measurements of those I have
identified. Several forms of Diplograptida were too badly pre-
served to speak of definitely, but 1 have made out the characters
of the following : Dicellograptus anceps, Nich. ; Diplograptus
pristis, His. ; Diplograptus truncatus, Lapw. ; Climacograpius
bicornis, J. Hall.

It has of course long been known that the boundaries of the
geological formations as laid down on the present Victorian map
needed revision, especially in the area under notice, and the com-
pilation of a new map by Mr. Arthur Everett from recent surveys
is practically completed.

The age of the Lower Palaeozoic rocks of North-eastern Victoria
has, in the absence of fossils, been a matter of considerable doubt.
Mr. A. W. Howitt in his earlier papers considered the balance of
evidence in favour of Lower Silurian (Ordovician). The rocks
show, according to Mr. Howitt, great structural and lithological
resemblances to those to the east of the Snowy River, and from

Ghraptolites in JSTorth-Eastern Victoria. 185

this latter area he quotes, on the authority of Sir Frederick
McCoy, Diplograptits rectangularis, McCoy, from Deddick ;
Diplograptus foliaceus, Murch., and Didymograptus caduceus,
Salter from Guttaniurrh Creek.* From the Gibbo River he
quotes Palaopora sp., from the limestones and states that Sir
Frederick McCoy regards this form to be indicative of the Upper
Silurian age of the limestone. In a later paperf the same
author, in speaking of the slates and sandstones of the Upper
Dargo, says that they "have hitherto been provisionally regarded
as Lower Silurian, but may possibly be found ultimately to be
Cambrian." Although, from the nature of the case, Mr. Howitt
speaks guardedly of the age of the strata, he has shown that part,
at any rate, of the metamorphic schists are representatives of the
unaltered sediments, t

The three localities which have yielded the graptolites treated
of in this paper are widely separated, but are, as far as can be
judged, of nearly the same age, and may be referred to the higher
part of the Ordovician. Till more evidence be available it would
be rash to push the analogy to the succession in British rocks any
further. ,

As far as I am aware there are no published records of any
(Upper) Silurian fossils, other than the Pakeopora referred to by
Mr. Howitt, having been found in the area under consideration.
Mr. Ferguson, however, informs me that he has a large suite of
fossils from Wombat Creek which he considers to be (Upper)
Silurian. The publication of his report will be looked for with
interest.

It is of course possible that, in such a wide area as the one
treated of, rocks older than these may occur, but of their occur-
rence we have no evidence whatever. Mr. A. W. Howitt in his
long series of papers on the rocks of Eastern Victoria has shown
that a gradual passage takes place from the unaltered rocks into
the crystalline schists, and this fact taken in conjunction with
the evidence here brought forward as to the geological age of the

* Progress Report, Geol. Survey of Victoria, vol. iii., p. ISO.

t " Xotes on the Contact of the Metamorphic and Sedimentary Formations of the Upper
Dargo River." Department of Mines, Special Reports, 1892, p. 3.

X A ust. Ass. for Adv. Science, vol. L, Sydney, p. 2C0.

186 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

unaltered sediments gives us sufficient grounds for considering
the metamorphic rocks of North-eastern Victoria to be not older
than Ordovician.

My thanks are due to Sir Frederick McCoy for allowing me
access to several papers on graptolites, which are not to be
found in any of our Victorian libraries ; and also to Mr. W. H.
Ferguson of the Geological Branch of the Mines Department,
who collected the fossils I have examined.

Art. XIV. — A Contribution to our Knowledge of the
Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne.

By T. S. Hall, M.A.,

Demonstrator and Assistant Lecturer in Biology in the University
of Melbourne,

G. B. Pritchard,

Lecturer in Geology in the Working Men's College, Melbourne.

(Plate VIII.)

(Bead 10th September, 1896).

Numerous scattered references have been made to the Melbourne
Tertiaries in our Geological Literature, but hitherto no attempt
has been made to describe them in any detail in the light of the
more recent paheontological work that has been published. The
lithological character of the sedimentary rocks of the period,
consisting as they do, for the most part, of ferruginous sands and
gravels, is not suited to the good preservation of fossils which are
represented as a rule by casts, and to a lesser extent by usually
very friable remains of the fossils themselves. As we have been
collecting material and studying the beds in all parts of the area
for some years, we feel that we are now in a position to make
some substantial additions to the knowledge of the series and to
clear away some misconceptions which prevail in reference to
their age.

Historical.

We mention in chronological order the more important
references to the deposits and the titles of a few additional
papers will be found in the Literature at the end of the present
article.

In 1855 Mr. A. R. C. Selwyn, (1) under the head of Tertiary,
described the lithological character of the beds, indicating four
divisions. He says that the blue clays with limestone bands
appear to be the lowest portion of the tertiary series exposed in

188 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

the district ; that they are rich in fossils, and that on the whole
they bear a striking resemblance to the beds of the London clay
and Hampshire basins. He says that in a well sinking at
Prahran fossil shells were found in ferruginous sandstone, and
also near Flemington overlying -basalt. The beds were stated
to bear a strong resemblance to the Crag of Suffolk, but the
relation between the Flemington beds and those of Brighton was
still uncertain. In dealing with the recent estuary beds, he
says : — " Between Sandridge and Melbourne these beds have been
proved to a depth of fifty feet, by a series of borings recently
executed by Mr. Christie. In all the bores he has obtained
recent shells, at various depths from the surface to about thirty
feet ; the accompanying section along the line of borings I have
drawn from the data furnished by Mr. Christie, and on examina-
tion which he has kindly permitted me to make of the specimens
obtained from each bore, at every one or two feet." The section
shows tertiary beds under the estuarine series.

In the following year Mr. Wm, Blandowski (2) referred to
what are apparently the ferruginous beds of Flemington as
belonging to the ''uppermost tertiary formation," and stated that
the fossils are living species.

In the following year Mr. Selwyn (3) briefly described the
localities and lithological character of the tertiary beds of the
area indicated by the title of his paper, but made no subdivisions,
classing together the consolidated sand dunes of Point Nepean,
the ferruginous sands and gravels which are so widely spread, and
the blue clays of Mornington. The succession of the beds was
shown, the richest fossil localities were indicated and a list of
some of the genera was given.

The four geological quarter-sheets, showing the boundaries of
the different formations in the neighbourhood of Melbourne, were
issued apparently early in 1860, and are indispensable to any one
examining the district. The country round Brighton has not yet
been surveyed in detail.

In 1872 Mr. R. Brough Smyth (I) summarised the work of
the Geological Survey, and gave a table showing the accepted
classification of the Victorian tertiaries as they had been from
time to time interpreted by Sir Frederick McCoy. The Marine
beds of Flemington were referred to the Pliocene, and the white

Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbowmie. 189

clays underlying the Older Volcanic at Flemington and Ken-
sington to the Miocene, while the Schnapper Point beds were
called Oligocene. He gave a section, showing the relations of
the beds, from the Royal Park to the escarpment on the left
bank of the Saltwater River. The volcanic rock at South
Melbourne and West Melbourne is coloured on the quarter-
sheets as Lower Volcanic — that is, Lower Newer Volcanic — and
is so lettered except on Quarter-sheet 1, N.W., where the
lettering is V.O., i.e., Older Volcanic. Mr. Smyth showed that
the volcanic rocks of these areas are of the same age as those on
the west of the Moonee Ponds Creek, and are all " Older
Volcanic." He then clearly described the basin of Port Phillip,
pointing out the sequence of the beds accurately ; but it must be
borne in mind that the nomenclature is entirely different from
that adopted by the authors of the present paper. Another
point on which we differ from him is in the interpretation of
the sandy beds capping the hill along the south-west front of
Royal Park. Mr. Smyth regarded these as sand dunes, but they
are, in our opinion, an integral part of the upper series of marine
tertiary beds displayed in the railway cutting in Royal Park.

In 1875 Mr. R. Etheridge, jun. (5), incidentally described a
cliff section near Mordialloc which had been visited by Aplin
and himself some years previously. As to the age of the beds,
he simply says that they had been " mapped by Mr. A. R. C.
Selwyn as of Pliocene age."

In 1876, and during some succeeding years, Sir Frederick
McCoy (6) repeatedly referred to the fossil if erous beds of the
Brighton to Mordialloc coast and of Flemington. They were
classed together as of Older Pliocene Age.

Some nine years later, Mr. Reginald A. F. Murray consolidated
the work of previous observers in Victorian Geology and referred
the Flemington and Brighton beds and the gravel of Flagstaff
Hill to the Pliocene Age. (7 p. 13).

In 1888, Professor Ralph Tate (8) doubtfully classed the
Cheltenham beds as Miocene.

In 1892, one of the present authors (11), acting on the advice
Professor Tate, classed the Cheltenham beds as Eocene.

Early in the following year, Mr. T. S. Hart (12) gave the
results of prolonged, careful examination of the ix>cks of the

190 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Brighton coast. The reference to Pliocene age and identity with
the Flemington beds was unquestioningly adopted. The rocks
were divided lithologically into a fourfold series. The author
stated that there is an unconformity in the beds. We have had
the pleasure of going over the coast sections in company with Mr.
Hart, and have examined some of these unconformities, which
undoubtedly exist. The best we have seen exposed is at Red
Bluff, Sandringham. We are not, however, inclined to attach
much importance to these small local irregularities. The rapid
alternations of sediment, the current bedding, and the occurrence
of fossil trees, pointed out by Mr. Hart, imply conditions favour-
able to the deposition and removal of strata, which would produce
unconformities, but would not indicate any difference in age. In
most places the beds succeed one another with no appreciable
break.

In the same year the authors (13) indicated that the Flemington
beds were probably Eocene, and definitely referred the blue clays
found by sinking and boring at Newport and Altona Bay to the
Eocene.

Messrs. Tate andDennant(15) definitely classed the Cheltenham
beds as Eocene, and a few months later Professor Tate (16) again
expressed the same view.

Localities.

1. Beaumaris (east of the Hotel).

This is the richest fossil locality that is exposed, and is
probably the source of most of the fossils recorded from " Chel-
tenham " and " Mordialloc." A slight anticlinal brings up the
deeper beds in which the fossils are most plentiful, the sti'ike
being parallel to the coast line. In the northern corner of the
bay the eastern limb of the arch suddenly plunges at an angle of
from 20° to 25° in the direction E. 25° S. A little further to
the south-west the dip decreases somewhat and swings a little
more to the southward, being E. 40° S. at 17°, so that the
anticline has a slight pitch in a south-westerly direction. The
beach floor has long been a favourite collecting ground, and
sharks' teeth, cetotolites and fragments of bone were formerly
very commonly found. Many years ago it was noticed that

Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 191

these could be obtained in situ by sinking a couple of feet at low
tide, but the band containing them is not exposed. Loose
nodules of limestone occur on the beach mingled with ironstone
pebbles, which form a coarse shingle. Many of the limestone
nodules contain perfect casts of fossils, which are, as our list
shows, all typical Eocene species. We have not spent much
time in collecting these forms, and have not recorded any
collected from holes sunk on the beach floor, but have confined
our attention to the strata which crop out along the base of the
cliff. An examination of the fossils obtained from the cliff
justifies us in referring the exposed beds to Miocene age. There
are a few species of which the range will be thus extended into
the Miocene ; but if, on the other hand, the beds were regarded
as Eocene, a very large number of the most characteristic
Miocene fossils would have to be considered as common to both
Miocene and Eocene on the evidence of this section alone. The
band yielding teeth, bones and ironstone concretions will probably
be found to mark the junction of the two formations, the
Eocene beds occurring below it.

Some of the fossil bands are fairly rich in mollusca, but they
are much decomposed as a rule, and the greatest care is requisite
to obtain whole specimens. Still, we have obtained a fair
number of species, and quite enough to determine the age of
the beds.

The character of the beds, seen in cliff section, has been so
carefully described by Mr. Hart (12) that further comment is
almost unneccessary. Taken as a whole, they consist of quartzose
sand, with a varying amount of argillaceous material, and,
excepting near the top of the cliffs, are strongly ferruginous.

The following fossils have been obtained from the cliffs at this
locality : —
Crustacea (Cirripedia).

1 Balanus sp.
Echinodermata.

Lovenia forbesi, Woods and Duncan.

Cidaroid spines.
Zoantharia.

Placotrochus deltoideus, Duncan.

Placotrochus elongatus, Duncan.

192 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victorii

Brachiopoda.

Terebratulina catinuliformis 1, Tate.
Magasella compta, G. B. Sowerby.
Lamellibranchiata.

Ostrea avenicola, Tate. -

Placunanomia ione, Gray.

Pecten antiaustralis, Tate.

Modiola, n. sp.

Nucula tenisoni, Pritchard.

Nucula, n. sp. aff. N. morundiana, Tate.

Nucula, n. sp.

Leda woodsii, Tate.

Leda vagans, Tate.

Leda acinaciformis, Tate.

Leda, n. sp. afi". L. huttoni, T. Woods.

Leda, n. sp.

Limopsis belcheri, Adams and Reeve.

Pectunculus cainozoicus, T. "Woods.

„ laticostatus, Quoy and Gaimard.

Cucullsea corioensis, McCoy.
Trigonia acuticostata, McCoy.
Crassatella, n. sp. aff'. C. oblonga, T. Woods.
Crassatella, n. sp. aff". C. abbreviata, Tate.
Carditella polita, Tate.
Cardita calva, Tate.

,, solida, Tate.

,, com pacta, Tate.

,, delicatula ?, Tate.
n. sp.
n. sp.
Lucina ara?a 1, Tate.

„ sp.
Diplodonta sp.
Chione subroborata, Tate.

,, n. sp. aft". C. propinqua, T. Woods.

,, n. sp. aff. C. dimorjDhophylla, Tate.
Dosinia johnstoni, Tate.
Tellina ajquilatera, Tate.

,, albinelloides, Tate.

Tqrtiaries vn the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 193

Tellina, n. sp. aft'. T. stirlingi, Tate.
Psammobia hamiltonensis, Tate.
Semele krauseana % Tate.
Mactra hamiltonensis, Tate.
Zenatiopsis angustata, Tate.
Myaclora corrugata, Tate.
Myadora praelonga, Tate.
Corbula ephamilla, Tate.
Barnea tiara, Tate.
Brechites sp.
Gastropoda.

Triton, n. sp.
Voluta, n. sp.
Ancillaria orycta, Tate.

n. sp. ?
Harpa, n. sp. aff. H. abbreviata, Tate.
Cassis, n. sp.*
Pelicaria coronata, Tate.
Terebra additoides 1, T. Woods.
Cypraea leptorhyncha, McCoy.

n. sp.
Natica varians, Tate.

,, substolida, Tate.

,, subinfundibulum, Tate.

,, hamiltonensis, T. Woods.
Calyptraga crassa. Tate.
Crepidula unguiformis, Lamarck.
Turritella tristira, Tate.
,, acricula, Tate.
,, pagodula, Tate.
Rissoa, sp.

Bankivia maxima, Tate, m.s.
Leiopyrga sayceana, Tate.
Calliostoma, sp.
Cylichna, sp.

* This species may possibly be the same as that recorded b}- Professor R. Tate, from
Cheltenham, under the name of Cassis textilis, Tate. M3- examination of the shells has,
however, inclined my opinion towards regarding- the present fossil as specifically distinct
from the Murray Cliffs shell.

13

194 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

.\ iphopoda.

Entalis mantelli, Zittel.
„ subtissura, Tate.

Dentalium bifrons, Tate.
Pisces,

Carcharodon niegalodon, Agassiz.
,, angustidens, Agassis.

Oxyrhina. sp.

Notidanus, sp.

Lamna. sp.

Myliobates, sp.

Strophodus eocenicus, Tate.

Palate, aff. Diodon.

Vertebrae.

Otoliths.
Mammalia.

Whale, vertebrae, etc

Cetotolites.

Summary (Charman's Road End).

Crustacea - - 1

Echinodermata - 2

Zoantharia - - - - "J

Brachiopoda - - - 2

Lamellibranchiata - - 45

Gastropoda - - 24

Scaphopoda - - 3

Pisces - - 10

Mammalia - - '1

91

In addition to the above, Professor Tate records the following
species from Cheltenham : —

Xatica subvarians. Tate.

polita, T. Woods, forma typica, Tate.
„ perspective, Tate.
Peliearia clathrata, Tate.

Tertiarie* in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne, 195

Sir Frederick McCoy (G) has recorded the following species
from Mordialloc in addition to those above mentioned : —
Pecten yahlensis, T. Woods.
Spondylus pseudoradula, McCoy.
Aturia australis, McCoy.
Physetodon baileyana, McCoy.
These probably came from the neighbourhood of Charman's
Road.

2. Beaumaris (West of Hotel;.

As at the previous locality, the rocks are mainly ferruginous
earthy sandstones. In places where the beds are hard, beau-
tifully sharp impressions of shells occur in profusion, while in
others calcareous bands full of shells run for long distances.
Unfortunately the fossils are very rotten, and it is difficult to
obtain specimens which will bear removal. The commonest
fossil in the ferruginous beds is Lovenia forbesi, which occurs in
enurmous numbers in a beautiful state of preservation.
Foraminifera.
Echinodermata.

t Orthoiophus lineatus, Duncan (Temnechinus).

t Clypeaster gippslandicus, McCoy.

+ Monostychia australis, Laube, forma loveni, Duncan.

Lovenia forbesi, Woods and Duncan.
+ Pericosmus sp.*
Cidaroid spines.
Crustacea.

Crab chelse.
] Balanus 2 spp.
Polyzoa.
Brachiopoda.

Terebratulina catinuliformis ?, Tate.
Magasella compta, G. B. Sowerby.
Lamellibranchiata.

+ Ostrea manubriata, Tate.

,, arenicola, Tate,
t „ sp.

* Identified by Sir Frederick McCoy.

196 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Placunanomia ione, Gray.
Pec ten antiaustralis, Tate.
t ,, polymorphoides, Zittel.

t ,, Zitteli, Hutton.

Modiola, n. sp.
Kucula tenisoni, Pritcharcl.

,, n. sp., aff. N. morundiana, Tate.
Leda wood si i, Tate.
t ,, crassa, Hinds.
t „ n. sp. 1.
t „ n. sp. 2.
Limopsis belcheri, Adams and Reeve.
Pectunculus cainozoicus, T. Woods.
Trigonia acuticostata, McCoy.
Crassatella, n. sp., aff. C. oblonga, T. Woods.

„ n. sp., aff. C. abbreviata, Tate.

Cardita calva, Tate.
,, solida, Tate.
,, compacta, Tate.
t ,, spinulosa, Tate.

„ n. sp.
t Diplodonta suborbicularis, Tate.
t ,, crepidula^fonnis, Tate,

t „ n. sp.

t Montacuta sericea, Tate.
t „ n. sp.

Chione subroborata, Tate.

„ n. sp., aff. C. propinqua, T. Woods.
,, n. sp., aft'. C. dimorphophylla, Tate.
t Meretrix paucirugata, Tate.
Dosinia johnstoni, Tate.
Tellina albinelloides, Tate.
,, requilatera, Tate.
,, n. sp. aft*. T. stirlingi.
t Donax, n. sp. aff. D. epidermia.
Mactra hamiltonensis, Tate.
Zenatiopsis angustata, Tate.
Myadora corrugata, Tate.
t ,, brevis, Sowerby.

Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 197

Corbula ephamilla, Tate.

Barnea tiara, Tate.
Gastropoda.

t Trophon, n. sp.

t Pleurotoma, n. sp. 1

Pelicaria coronata, Tate.

Cassis, n. sp.

Natica varians, Tate.

Calyptrpea crassa, Tate.
t Scalaria triplicata, Tate.

Turritella pagodula, Tate.
t Turbo, sp.

Bankivia maxima, Tate, m.s.

Leiopyrga sayceana, Tate.
t „ quadricingulata, Tate.

Scctphopoda.

Entalis subfissura, Tate.
Pisces.

Shark's teeth.

Mammalia.

Whale bones.

Summary.

Echinodermata

- 6

Crustacea

- 3

Brachiopoda -

2

Lamellibranchiata -

- 44

Gastropoda

- 12

Scaphopoda

- 1

Pisces

- 1

Mammalia

- 1

70
In the foregoing list the species marked by a dagger (f) are
additional to those collected at the Charman's Road end of the
section. They are as follows : —

Echinodermata - - 4

Lamellibranchiata - 16

Gastropoda - - 5

198 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Total from Charman's Road (not
including Tate's and McCoy's
records - 19

116

In the above 116 records there ai'e fifty-nine described
molluscan species of which there are four recorded with a query
until better material is obtained. So that for careful and
critical comparison with specimens from our other fossil localities
we can take into consideration fifty-five species.

x

Miocene.

Cheltenham Fossils.

11

S "5?
en a

<

Gastropoda.

Ancillaria orycta, Tate

X

X

X

Pelicaria coronata, Tate

-

X

X

-

Cypraea leptorhyncha, McCoy
Natica varians, Tate -

X

X

X

-

,, substolida, Tate

X

-

X

-

M subinfundibulum, Tate

X

X

X

-

,, hamiltonensis, Tate -

X

-

X

-

Calyptraea crassa, Tate
*Crepidula unguiformis, Lamk.

X

X

X
X

X

X

Scalaria triplicata, Tate

-

-

X

X

Turritella tristira, Tate

X

-

X

-

,, acricula, Tate

X

-

X

X?

,, pagodula, Tate
Leiopyrga sayceana, Tate -

,, quadricingulata, Tate -
Scaphopoda.

Entalis mantelli, Zittel

X

X
X

X

X

X?
X

X

-

,, subfissura, Tate

X

X

X

-

Dentalium bifrons, Tate

X

X

-

-

Lamellibranchiata.

Ostrea arenicola, Tate

-

-

X

X

,, manubriata, Tate

-

X

-

-

*Placunanqmia ione, Gray -

X

X

X

X

Pecten antiaustralis, Tate -

-

X

X

X

,, polymorphoides, Zittel
,, zitteli, Hutton

X
X

X

-

-

Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 199

Miocene.

n

ci

Cheltenham Fossils.

a
a
o
H

So

s -

>-5

*Nucula tenisoni, Pritchard -

X

X

X

X

Leda woodsii, Tate ...

X

X

.

_

* ,, crassa, Hinds

-

X

X

-

„ acinacifonnis, Tate

-

X

-

_

,, vagans, Tate

X

-

X

-

*Lirnopsis belcheri, Ad. & R.

X

X

X

X

Pectunculus cainozoicus, T. Woods

X

X

X

-

* ,, laticostatus, Quoy & Gaiin.

X

X

X

-

Cucullrea corioensis, McCoy

X

X

X

X

*Trigonia acuticostata, McCoy

-

X

X

X

Carditella polita, Tate

-

X

-

-

Cardita calva, Tate

X

X

-

-

,, solida, Tate -

-

X

X

-

,, compacta, Tate

X

-

-

-

,, spinulosa, Tate

-

-

X

-

Diplodonta suborbiculavis, Tate -

X

X

-

X

,, crepidula?forniis, Tate

X

-

-

-

Montacuta sericea, Tate

X

X

.

-

Chione subroborata, Tate -

-

X

X

X

Meretrix paucirugata, Tate

-

X

X

-

Dosinia johnstoni, Tate

-

X

-

-

Tellina albinelloides, Tate -

-

X

X

-

,, requilatera, Tate

X?

X

X

-

Psammobia hamiltonensis, Tate -

-

X

X

-

Mactra hamiltonensis, Tate

-

X

X

-

Zenatiopsis angustata, Tate

-

X

X

-

Myadora corrugata, Tate -

-

X

X

X

,, pra?longa, Tate

-

X

X

-

* ,, brevis, Sowerby -

X

X

X

X

Corbula ephamilla, Tate

X

X

X

X

Barnea tiara, Tate

-

X

X

-

Note. — Those marked with an asterisk are living species.

200 Proceedings of the. Royal Society of Victoria.

Summary of vertical distribution of described mollusca from
the Cheltenham cliffs.

Number of species in above list - 55

Number of these in Eocene elsewhere 29 (1 doubtful)

Number of these in Miocene —

Muddy Creek . . . 40

Jemmy's Point - - 41 (1 doubtful)

South Australia - - 17 (1 doubtful)

Number hitherto regarded as Eocene

only .... 4*

Number of species common to Eocene

and Miocene - - - 25 (1 doubtful)

Number of species found only in

Miocene and younger beds - 26

Beaumaris.

Eocene Fossils (from Limestone Shingle).

Zoantharia.

Placotrochus deltoideus, Duncan.
Notocyathus excisus, Duncan.
Polyzoa.
Brachiopoda.

Waldheimia insolita, Tate.
Lamellibranchiata.

Spondylus pseudoradula, McCoy.
Gastropoda.

Triton cyphus, Tate.
,, gibbus, Tate.
„ textilis 1, Tate.
Peristernia murrayana, 1, Tate.
Voluta hannafordi, McCoy.
,, antiscalaris, McCoy.
,, strophodon, McCoy.

sp. 1.
„ - sp. 2.

* i.e. except those recorded as Eocene on the strength of their occurrence at Cheltenham
only.

Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 201

Semicassis sufflata, T. Woods.

Cypraea leptorhynoha, Tate.

Conus ligatus, Tate.
,, cuspidatus, Tate.

Genotia angustifrons, Tate

Natica, sp.

Turritella murrayana, Tate.

Cerithium apheles, T. Woods.

Trochoid casts.
Cephalopoda.

Nautilus, sp.
One of the authors lias elsewhere recorded thirty -two species of
fossils from Cheltenham (11). As uncertainty exists as to the
exact horizon from which the greater number were obtained, and
as there is evidence that some species, hitherto regarded as
Eocene, transgress at Cheltenham into the Miocene, it would, we
think, be injudicious to attempt to correct the list there given.
The only safe plan is to erase the record by striking out the word
"Cheltenham" wherever it occurs in the catalogue. The locality
is correct, the horizon may be surmised for most of the forms,
but is not absolutely certain.

3. Ricketts Point.

Mr. J. A. Atkinson first drew our attention to the fossils
occurring in ferruginous beds here. They are not common and
as is usually the case are mere casts.

We have found the following : — Lovenia forbesii, Wds. and
Dune; Leda crassa, Hinds; Chione subroborata, Tate; Dosinia
jo/iusto/ii,T&te; Tellina albineHoides, Tate; Mactra hamiltonensis,
Tate; Donax, sp.; Zenatiopsis august at a, Tate; Barnea tiara,
Tate ; Scalaria triplicata, Tate ; Leiopyrga quadricingulata, Tate ;
L. sayceana, Tate.

4. Red Bluff, Sandringham.

The clifi' is about eighty feet in height. The upper portion
consists of about sixty feet of mottled sandy clay, which overlies
the denuded surface of strongly ferruginous sandstones full of
concretionary nodules. We have already mentioned that we do

202 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

not think that this unconformity indicates any appreciable lapse
of time and that the whole cliff belongs to the same period of
deposition. The ferruginous beds are well jointed and after
keeping fairly horizontal for about 150 yards they slowly sink
with a dip of about 7D and pass out of sight, the mottled upper
beds coming down to sea-level. In the ferruginous beds there
occur small lenticular sheets of a hard grey limestone. In our
searches for fossils at this locality we have been kindly assisted
by Mr. T. S. Hart and Mr. W. H. F. Hill, who have placed their
material at our disposal.

We obtained the following fossils -.—Lovenia forbesii, Wds.
and Dune: Leda crassa, Hinds; Chione subroborata, Tate;
Dosinia johnstoni, Tate ; Tellina albinelloides, Tate ; Mactra
ha/ni/tonensis, Tate; Modio/a, sp. now; Meretrix paucirugata,
Tate ; M. submultistriata, Tate ; Zenatiopsis angustata, Tate ;
Entalis subfissura, Tate ; Leiopyrga quadricingulata, Tate ; L.
sayceana, Tate; Bankivia maxima^ Tate, m.s.; Potamides, sp.,
Calyptraa crassa, Tate.

5. Hampton (Picnic Point).

On the point south of the pier the hard ironstone is brought
up by a slight roll in the strata, the strike of which is S.25DE.,
the dip being about 5°. Some of the bands are fairly rich in
fossils.

G. Brighton Beach.

Casts of fossils occur in ferruginous beds at the mouth of a
gully about half-way between Picnic Point and Brighton Beach.

7. Brighton Beach.

The point north of the pier at Brighton is formed by an
outcrop of brown jointed sandstone passing up into mottled
sandy clays. The rocks are slightly current bedded, and though
fossils occur they are scarce. The dip as plotted from two
observed apparent dips is X.11CE. at 13°.

8. Brighton Beach.

The locality is on the same low bluff as seven and on the
north side of the point.

Tcrtiaric* in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 203

9. Park Street, Brighton.

Casts are common in ferruginous beds on the beach at the
end of a point south of the North Brighton Baths. Mr. T. S.
Hart drew our attention to this locality, which he records in
his paper (12). Leda crassa, Hinds; Dosinia johnstoni, Tate;
Mactra hamiltonensis, Tate ; Leiopyrga sayceana, Tate ; etc.

10. Bay Street, Brighton.
Casts in ferruginous sandstones on the beach.

11. Park Street, Elstemwick.

This is the most northerly locality in which we have found
fossil casts in the beach exposures.

The rocks of Point Ormond (Red Bluff, St. Kilda) do not
seem to contain any organic remains which seem to be confined
to the deeper seated deposits of the series. A small outlier at
the entrance to Kenney's Baths at the end of Fitzroy Street
composed of a quartz conglomerate cemented with Hmonite seems
similarly barren. The only sign of the beds to the north of this
on the beach is a small patch of shingle near the Middle Park
Baths.

12. Asling Street.

We found numerous casts in a heap of rock removed during
the making of a road which runs from Asling Street towards
the beach just before the latter crosses the small creek which
runs into the Elwood Swamp. Mr. Hart kindly made enquiries
and found that the material all came from the excavation beside
which it lay.

Dosinia johnstoni, Tate; Leda crassa, Hinds; Mactra hamilton-
ensis, Tate ; Leiopyrga sayceana, Tate ; etc.

13. North Road.

Mr. G. Cuming gave us some blocks of fossiliferous ironstone
which he obtained from a quarry near the Brighton Cemetery.
We have not visited this locality.

Fossils. — Leda crassa, Hinds; Leda, sp.; Mactra hamiltonensis,
Tate ; Myadora corrugata, Tate ; Chione, sp. % af. C. propinqiia,
T. Wds.j Leiopyrga sayceana, Tate; Bankivia maxima, Tate, m.s.

204 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

14. Windsor.

We carefully examined the Tertiary grits overlying the .Silurian
in the railway cutting under the Dandenong Road at Windsor,
but were not successful in finding any fossils. However, in a
collection presented by the Mining Department to the Working
Men's College are some samples of a ferruginous sandstone
containing a few fossil casts and labelled " Railway Cutting,
Windsor." We have no reason to doubt the correctness of the
label, as a part of the cutting is now inaccessible owing to a
retaining wall having been built.

Fossils obtained : — Polyzoa ; Spondylus pscudoradula, M'Coy ;
Cardita poiynema, Tate; Barbatia simnlans, Tate; B. cei/eporacea,
Tate ; Lima linguliformis, Tate ; L. bassit, T. Woods ; Phos
tardicrescens % Tate.

15. South Yarra.

The low platform of rock left in the angle formed by the
junction of the Gippsland and Brighton Railways is in parts
very full of casts and we were fortunate in obtaining some large
blocks which were very rich and which we carried home bodily
for careful examination. Although the fossils are so different
from those hitherto dealt with, with the exception of those from
Windsor, the lithological character of the matrix is similar to
that of the previous sections. We have not found any fossils in
the rocks overlying the platform nor have we been able to detect
any physical break between them. The upper beds are usually
mottled sands, but in places are as strongly cemented by iron as
are the lower ones. An examination of the sections along the
line towards Hawksburn and towards Prahran does not ajjpear to
throw any light on the difficulty. We are inclined, in view of
the section in Royal Park, described below, to think that a
distinct palseontological break will be yet found and that the
upper beds are really a part of the series exposed along the
Brighton coast.
Zoantharia.

Coral casts.
Crustacea.

Crab carapace.

TeHiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 205

Polyzoa.
Brachiopoda.

Waldheimia garibaldiana, Davidson.
Lamellibranchiata.

Placunanomia, sp.

Pecten hochstefcteri, Zittel.
„ polymorphoides, Zittel.

Lima bassii, T. Woods.
,, lingulifonnis, Tate.

Spondylus pseudoradula, McCoy.

Modiola, sp.

Leda vagans ?, Tate.

Pectunculus laticostatus, Quoy and Gaimard.
,, cainozoicus, T. Woods.

Barbatia simulans, Tate.
,, celleporacea, Tate.

Plagiarca cainzoica, Tate.

Limopsis belcheri, Adams and Reeve.

Chione cainozoica, T. Woods.

Cardita polynema Tate.

Chama lamellifera ?, T. Woods.
Gastropoda.

Fusus craspedotus 1, Tate.

Nassa tatei % T. Woods.

Lyria harpularia, Tate.

Ancillaria pseudaustralis, Tate.

Conus heterospira, Tate.

Cyprtea, sp.

Trivia avellanoides, McCoy.

Semicassis sufflata, T. Woods.

Natica hamiltonensis % T. Woods.

Calyptropsis turbinata, T. Woods.

Cerithium flemingtonensis, McCoy.

Liotia roblini, Johnston.

Astralium (Imperator) johnstoni, Pritcliard.

Haliotis nrevosoides, McCoy.
Scaphopoda.

Entalis mantelli, Zittel.
,, subtissura, Tate.

206 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

16. Domain Boad, South Yarra.

A shaft sunk during the progress of the sewerage works near
the Grammar School Chapel, yielded casts of a few gastropods,
a small bivalve, some polyzoa and foraminifera. We were unable
to determine any of the specimens. The depth at which they
were struck was about twenty feet below the level of the South
Yarra Railway line, judging by the plans kindly shown us by
the overseer of the works. A drab tenacious clay occurred
below the ferruginous beds, but did not appear to contain fossils.
The sewer itself was driven in Silurian.

17. Royal Park.

The Railway Cutting in Royal Park, close to Flemington
Bridge, is, from a geological point of view, one of the most
interesting and instructive spots in the neighbourhood of
Melbourne. At the south-western end beneath the semaphore
at the level of the rails is a small exposure of the lowest rocks
to be seen in the district, the Upper Silurian. When the
cutting was new and the exposure fresh, the bedding planes
were distinctly visible, although at the present time the nature
of the rock is not so manifest. Flanking this ridge on its
south-western side is the older volcanic rock. This is deeply
eroded and two or three other exposures of it weathered to a
soft, wackenitic clay, are visible in the cutting. In the hollows
of its upper surface are pockets of sand and clay. The largest
exposure of these rests in its lower part on the north-eastern
flank of the Silurian ridge just mentioned and thins out on the
volcanic rock. Immediately over the thin sheets of white sand
and clay there is a bed about a foot in thickness of similar
material cemented with oxide of iron mainly in the form of red
ochre, which in places passes into hard hematite.

This band is not separable from the clays and sands on which
it rests. The cement penetrates the lower layers irregularly
so that at first sight an unconformity suggests itself. This
appearance is, however, entirely due to the irregular occurrence
of the cementing material. The absence of the cement from the
underlying beds may be due to one of two causes. If the iron
were ever in the beds it may have been removed by the percola-
tion of meteoric water slowing draining along the old channel

Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 207

in the volcanic rock which affords an impervious bottom. If
this were the case we should expect the base of the ferruginous
beds to contain limonite and the more hydrated forms of iron
oxide. This is, however, not what we do find. The hematite
stops suddenly, though in places somewhat irregularly, and is
immediately succeeded in depth by the white sands. The other
explanation, and the one which we are inclined to accept is that
the iron has all come from the beds above and has been prevented
from reaching the lower beds by a band of clay through which
the water with iron in solution could not percolate.

The presence of the hematite cement which marks off the highly
fossiliferous band from the limonite bearing beds above, together
with the fact that the characteristic fossils which it contains do
not rise over the bosses of volcanic rock, but lie in its eroded
hollows, would in themselves afford some slight evidence of its
distinctness from the overlying beds. That there is a real break
the fossil evidence clearly shows. The fossils of this lower band
are Eocene while those of the beds above it are Miocene.

The uppermost beds displayed in the cutting form the table-
land of Royal Park. They have been removed by subsequent
denudation at the south-westerly end of the cutting where the
surface of the ground drops rapidly. The material of which
they consist varies from quartz gravel to line sand with a large
proportion of clay. The lower beds of this upper series, as a rule,
are more strongly cemented by limonite than are the upper ones, in
which the ferruginous material occurs very irregularly. Towards
the top of the cutting the beds are in places almost free from
iron which has been irregularly removed. Fossils are very scarce,
but we have gathered a few forms which are so characteristic
that there cannot, to our minds, be any doubt of the horizon to
which the beds should be referred. The quarter-sheet records
" fossil leaves and fruit in tertiary ferruginous sandstone " from
this locality. We have not found any traces of these at this spot
but believe them to have come from the upper beds.

Lower Beds (Eocene).
Echinodermata.

Psammechinus woodsi, Laube.
? Toxobrissus sp. (also at Schnapper Point, Moorabool
Valley and Waurn Ponds).
Cidaroid spines.

208 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Crustacea.

Crab carapace and chela?.
Polyzoa.
Brachiopoda.

Waldheimia garibaldiana, Davidson.
,, insolita, Tate.

Lamellibranchiata.

*Placunanomia, sp.
Lima bassii, T. Woods.

* „ linguliformis, Tate.

,, (Lirnatula) jeffreysiana, Tate.
Spondylus pseudoradula, McCoy.
Nucuia tenisoni ?, Pritchard.
*Barbatia celleporacea, Tate.
,, simulans, Tate.
Cucullaea corioensis, McCoy.
Cardita polynema ?, Tate.

* „ delicatula ?, Tate.
Mytilicardia, sp.

Chione dimorphophylla, Tate.
,, cainozoica, T. "Woods.
*Corbula ephaiuilla, Tate.
Gastropoda.
*Triton, sp.
Fasciolaria rugata, Tate.
Voluta ancilloides, Tate.

sp. (? McCoyii, T. Woods).
Pleurotoma paracantha, T. Woods.
Drillia, sp.

Genotia angustifrons, Tate.
Conus ligatus, Tate.

,, heterospira ?, Tate.
Cyprsea subsidua, Tate.

„ brachypyga, Tate.
„ sp.
Trivia avellanoides, McCoy.
*Harpa tenuis, Tate
n. sp.
Cassis exigua, T. Woods.

TertiaHes in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 209

*Calyptrsea, sp.

Natiea, sp.
Solarium, sp.
Scalaria, sp.

Tenagodes occlusus, T. Wds.
*Thylacodes conohelix, T. Woods.

Cerithium flemingtonensis, McCoy.
*Triforis, sp.
Astralium (Tmperator) johnstoni, Pritchard.
Turbo flindersi ?, T. Woods.
Opercula of Turbo.
Calliostoma, sp.
Haliotis naevosoides, McCoy.
,, mooraboolensis, McCoy.
*Emarginula, sp. aft". E. Candida, A. Adams.
* „ n. sp. 1.

n. sp. 2.
Acmjea, sp. aft'. A. costata.
Scaphopoda.

Entalis mantelli, Zittel.
Cephalopoda.

Aturia australis, McCoy.
Note. — The species marked by an asterisk were collected by
Mr. A. W. Craig, M.A.

Upper Beds {Miocene).
Leda acinaciformis, Tate.
Limopsis belcheri, Adams & Reeve.
Dosinia johnstoni, Tate.
Myadora corrugata, Tate.
Tritonidea brevis, Tate.
Terebra geniculata, Tate.
,, catenifera, Tate.
Turritella, sp.
Pyramidella, sp.

Leiopyrga cpuadricingulata, Tate.
Liotia, sp.

Entalis sublissura, Tate.
And other indeterminate univalve and bivalve casts.

14

210 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

18. Sutton Street.

At the west end of Sutton Street, North Melbourne, an outcrop
of white clay is visible along the bank of the swampy land. This
is marked on the quarter-sheet and is perhaps one of the localities
from which Brough Smyth obtained fossil leaves, as he only gives
his locality in a general way. We were unable to find any fossils
in the deposit. The beds are well stratified and consist for the
most part of white clays which are however very sandy in places,
the sand being very coarse. It contains large ferruginous
concretions and irregular masses of fine dark coloured trans-
lucent flint. Its eroded surface is covered by the older volcanic
rock. These clays represent the Miocene of Brough Smyth's
section (1).

19. Flemington.

At the top of the opposite escarpment across the Moonee Ponds
Valley a small excavation yielded a few forms similar to those of
the lower beds of the Royal Park cutting.

20. Brunswick Road.

The ferruginous grits overlying decomposed volcanic rock in
the road cutting to the west of the Moonee Ponds Creek are
fossiliferous, though the variety of forms does not seem to be very
great. Mr. G. Sweet drew our attention to the occurrence of
fossil leaves in some of the upper beds in the cutting, and on
visit in his company we were able to secure evidence of their
occurrence.

Placunanomia, sp.

Leda acinaciformis, Tate.
„ sp.

Modiola, sp.

Chione, n. sp. aff. C. propinqua, T. Woods.

Cytherea paucirugata, Tate.

Mactra hamiltonensis, Tate.

Zenatiopsis angustata, Tate.

Corbula ephamilla, Tate.

Peristernia approximans, Tate.

Ancillaria pseudaustralis, Tate.

a

Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 211

Natica varians, Tate.

Hipponyx antiquatus '?, Lamarck.

Pyrainidella, sp.

Leiopyrga quadricingulata, Tate.

,, sayceana % Tate.

Emarginula, sp.
Haliotis, n. sp. aff. H. nsevosoides, McCoy.

21. Spring Creek.

This small creek enters the Saltwater River between Braybrook
and Maribyrnong. It flows through plains capped by newer
volcanic rock, and has cut through this to the underlying form-
ations. On the quarter-sheet a fault is marked crossing it and
lowering the newer to the level of the old volcanic rock in the
creek bed. The upper volcanic, wherever it is visible in clitf
section in the neighbourhood, is seen to be formed by a very thin
flow, and to assume that after faulting the surface had been
planed down to its present level contour is hardly, we think,
justified. An examination of the locality induced us to form the
opinion that the appearance is due, not to faulting, but to the
presence of an old valley crossing the present one obliquely.
This old valley subsequently became filled with lava which
formed the plain. The fossils found were indeterminate.

22. Green Gully, Keilor.

The beds in this pretty little glen are indicated on the quarter-
sheet and have been briefly alluded to by Mr. Graham Officer
(14). Anex'oid measurement shows that the depth of the valley
where the road crosses it is about 130ft. The section here is
approximately as follows, the thickness of the individual beds
being estimated :—

Newer volcanic rock - - - 20 feet.

Quartzites and grits - - 25 ,,

Ferruginous grits (fossiliferous) - 20 ,,

Older volcanic - - - - 65 „

130 feet.

212 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

A few yards above the road on the right bank the ferruginous
grits are in their lower part replaced by a band of cream coloured,
earthy, polyzoal limestone about live feet thick. It is full of
foraminifera, echini spines and polyzoa, though, as is usually the
case in such rocks, other fossils are scarce. In patches the lime-
stone is altered to a tine grained, hard, reddish rock with a
conchoidal fracture. The limestone is immediately succeeded in
depth by decomposed volcanic rock seamed with sheets of
secondary ironstone. The limestone is very quartzose in places
and passes up gradually into ferruginous grit, in which we have
not been able as yet to find any fossils.

The alteration of the limestone overlying the volcanic rock
here is of interest when taken into consideration with similar
developments elsewhere. At Maude the alteration is so pro-
nounced in places that the officers of the survey were led to
ascribe it to the effect of an overlying thin sheet of volcanic-
rock. We have shown in a previous paper (17) that there is no
intercalated basalt, and that the appearances which suggest its
presence are really due to the deposition of the limestone in the
clefts and crannies of a denuded basalt surface. The alteration
cannot then have been produced as suggested. In fact the same
section shows similar polyzoal limestones overlain by 100 feet of
basalt, but no marked changes have been brought about by the
flow. We noticed that at Maude the alteration of the rock was
most pronounced where it lay on the denuded basalt surface, and
became less marked at higher levels, but were quite at a loss to
account for it.

Since then we have examined similar altered polyzoal lime-
stones at Airey's Inlet where it lies on the denuded surface of
the great basaltic dykes which seam the ash beds and on the ash
beds themselves. Again at Point Addis we have the pink finely
crystallised limestone passing up into the usual loose-textured
polyzoal rock. The limestone rests on a great thickness of
remarkable black clays. In the Grange Burn, near Hamilton,
we find a similar limestone highly altered and plastered down
into the joints and irregularities of the porphyry where the latter
crosses the stream. Further removed from the junction of the
two formations the alteration is less pronounced. Similar altera-
tion is found in the polyzoal rock overlying ash beds at Curlewis

Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 213

and near Batesford where the granite probably underlies at no
great depth.

There is one feature in common to all these cases, and that is
the comparative imperviousness of the bed rock, whether it be
porphyry, basalt, decomposed ash or sedimentary clay. The
typical polyzoal limestone is very open and porous, and it
consequently offers a free channel to the passage of underground
waters, which would accumulate in them in such localities and
thus bring about the solution and redeposition of the calcareous
matter and so destroy in places all evidence of organic contents.
Mr. A. \V. Howitt (18, p. 209), mentions a similar alteration in
Devonian limestone, which a previous writer had explained as
due to the intrusion of an igneous rock. Mr. Howitt shows that
the limestone in question was laid down on a shingly bottom and
ascribes the alteration to the infiltration of silica set free during
the decomposition of the porphyry beneath.

In the road cutting on the opposite side of the valley the
junction of the tertiary beds with the underlying volcanic rock
is well displayed. The upper surface of the latter is very uneven
and the rock is quite wackenitic. Immediately resting on it is
a bed of chocolate-coloured grit about five feet in thickness
which yielded us a few fossil casts.

We found Haliotis ncevosoides, M'Coy, and a shark's tooth,
possibly Lainna.

This bed is overlain by about four feet of fine grained yellow
sandstones which are current-bedded. Over this again come thin
beds of water-worn gravel. Over a wide area in this locality
overlying the fossiliferous beds we have a bed of sandstone
and gravel, which in some places is loose and incoherent, and in
others is cemented so as to be a hard white quartzite. The finer
varieties look like porcelain. Of the equivalents of the beds
over the fossiliferous grits we are uncertain, as we have not been
able to get a junction between the two sets. We, however, class
them, provisionally, with the Miocene series till further evidence
be forthcoming.
Foraminfera.

Echinodermata. Spines and cidaroid plates.
Polyzoa.

214 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Brachiopoda.

Waldheimia garibaldiana, Dav.

Rhynchonella squamosa, Hutton.

Terebratulina scoulari, Tate.
Lamellibra7ichiata.

Limea linguliformis, Tate.

Pecten foulcheri, T. Woods.

Chione cainozoica, T. Wds.

Chama lamellifera, T. Wds.

Spondylus pseudoradula, M'Coy.
Gastropoda.

Haliotis nsevosoides, M'Coy.

Cerithium flemingtonensis, M'Coy.

Conus ralphii, T. Wds.

Trivia avellanoides, M'Coy.

Mitra alokiza, T. Wds.

Turritella murrayana?, Tate.

Potamides, sp.

Yoluta ancilloides, Tate.

Aneillaria pseudaustralis, Tate.

Astralium johnstoni, Prifcchard.

Turbo, sp.

Semicassis sufflata T. Wds.

Tenagodes occlusus 1, T. Wds.
Scaphopoda.

Dentalium bifrons, Tate.
Pisces.

Shark's teeth.
Mammalia.

Bones of, 1 Whale.

23. Newport.

Several bores have been put down and a shaft sunk in search
of coal. Particulars of the shaft and one bore, together with
samples of the cores, have kindly been placed at our disposal by
Mr. G. D. Barker. Details of another bore will be found,
together with a locality plan, in the Report of the Secretary for

Tertiaries In the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 215

Mines for 1894. The beds of course vary in thickness in the
different localities. The series may be taken as follows : —

1. Newer Volcanic - - - - - 60 feet

2. Marine Tertiaries. The upper part ferrugi-

nous sands and yellow clays, which are
unfossiliferous. The lower part yellow and
gray clays with hard limestone bands
(Eocene fossils) - - - - - 120 feet

3. Estuarine and freshwater beds, composed of

sands, clays, fine and coarse conglomerates,

with seams of brown coal - - 190 feet

4. Silurian (bored into for over 70 ft.).

Most of the fossils recorded were obtained from the spoil heap
of the shaft.
Foraminifera.

Very common.
Porifera.

Spicules abundant.
Zoantharia.

Notocyathus, sp.
Flabellum victoria?, Duncan.

,, candeanum, Edwards & Haime.

Placotrochus deltoideus, Duncan.
Polyzoa.

Very common.
Brachiopoda.

Terebratulina scoulari, Davidson.
Terebratula vitreoides, Tate.
Lamellibranchiata.
Ostrea, sp.

Dimya dissimilis, Tate.
Lima bassii, T. Wds.
Spondylus pseudoradula, McCoy.
* Nucula atkinsoni, Johnston.
,, tenisoni, Pritchard.
Leda huttoni, Tate.
,, obolella, Tate.
,, woodsii 1, Tate.
,, vagans, Tate.

216 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Led a, n. sp.

Limopsis belcheri, Ad. & R.
Area, n. sp.

Barbatia celleporacea, Tate.
Cucullfea corioensis, McCoy.
Trigonia tubulifera, Tate.
Cardita polyneina, Tate.
Chione cainozoica, T. Wds.
Cytherea eburnea, Tate.
Seniele krauseana, Tate.
„ vesiculosa, Tate.
Myadora tenuilirata, Tate.
Corbula ephamilla, Tate.
,, pixidata, Tate.
tj Capistrocardia fragilis, Tate.
Gastropoda.

Typhis acanthopterus, Tate.
Murex lophoessus, Tate.
Triton textilis, Tate.
,, tortirostris, Tate.
,, woodsii, Tate.
Fusus craspedotus, Tate.
,, acanthostephes, Tate.
X „ senticosus, Tate.
t ,, hexagonalis, Tate.
Latirofusus, sp.
Clavella bulbodes, Tate.
Fasciolaria exilis, Tate,
t Siphonalia, sp., aff. longirostris, Tate.
Phos, ? variciferus, Tate.
Nassa tatei, T. Wds.
Voluta antiscalaiis, M'Coy.
,, pseudolirata, Tate.
,, hannafordi, M'Coy.
,, sarissa, Tate.
t ,, strophodon, M'Coy.
Mitra alokiza, T. Wds.

,, ligata, Tate.
Marginella propinqua, Tate.

Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 217

Marginella wentwortbi, T. Wds.

„ niicula, Tate.

Ancillaria pseudaustralis, Tate.

,, semilsevis, T. Wds.

n. sp.
Columbella clathrata, Tate, m.s.

3 spp.
Cancellaria varicifera, T. Wds.
Pleurotomidse, 19 spp.
Genotia angustifrons, Tate.
Pleurotoma saumeli, T. AVds.
Conus dennanti, Tate.
Cypnea leptorhyncba, M'Coy.
Semieassis sufflata, T. Wds.

* Cassidaria gradata, Tate.
Natica haniiltonensis, T. Wds.

,, substoHda, Tate.
Xenophora tatei, Cossmann.
Solarium acutum, T. Wds.
Turritella platyspira, T. Wds.
,, in ur ray ana, Tate.

,, acricula, Tate,
sp.
Thylacodes conohelix, T. Wds.
Niso psila, T. Wds.

* Odostomia, n. spp. (2).
Cerithium apheles, T. Wds.

,, cribarioides, T. Wds.

X „ 1 n. sp.

X Cerithiopsis, 2 spp.
Triforis wilkinsoni, T. AVds.
n. sp.
t „ n. sp.

* Actteon, sp.
Ringicula, sp.
Cylichna, 2 spp.

Scaphopoda.

Entalis mantelli, Zittel.
,, subtissura, Tate.
Dentalium aratum, Tate.

218 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.
Pteropoda.

Styliola rangiana, Tate.

Pisces.

Otoliths.

Summary.

Zoantharia

- 4

Brachiopoda -

. . 2

Lamellibranchiata -

- 25

Gastropoda

- 82

Scaphopoda

- 3

Pteropoda

- 1

Pisces

- 1

118

* Species collected by Mr. E. J. Robertson,
f Species collected by Mr. A. E. Kitson.
J Species collected by Mr. Graham Officer.

24. Altona Bay.

A bore was put down, some particulars of which, with locality
plan, are published in the Report of the Secretary for Mines for
1894. Practically the same series of rocks was exposed as at
Newport. The thin sheet of volcanic rock however was overlain
by about twenty feet of post tertiary rocks, containing an abund-
ance of recent shells. The Marine tertiaries were about 160ft.
in thickness. Beneath the freshwater beds, the Government
report states that "45ft. lOin. fine white quartz-drift mixed with
shells " occurred. Unfortunately no sample of this interesting
deposit was sent to the department nor could we find any trace
of it when visiting the locality. It was probably too incoherent
for a core to be drawn, so that the interesting question as to
what the fossils were will probably remain unknown as the bed
lies more than twenty feet below the brown coal seam. Silurian
was struck at 422 feet.

The small amount of material, which consisted merely of drill
cores, which we had to work on prevents the list of fossils from
being larger. Some of the beds were very rich, and in some
places the core was quite full of siliceous sponge spicules.

Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 219

Foraminifera.

Excessively abundant.
Porifera.

Spicules very common. The siliceous forms comprise

highly compound varieties.
Zoantharia.

Notocyathus excisus, Dune.
,, australis, Dune.

Balanophyllia australiense, Dune.
Echinodermata.

Cidaroid spines.
Annelida.

Ditrupa, sp.
Polyzoa.

Very common.

Brachiopoda.

Waldheimia garibaldiana, Dav.

Terebratula vitreoides, Tate.

Terebratulina scoulari, Tate.
Liwiellibra nchiata .

Pecten zitteli, Hutton.
,, dichotomalis, Tate.

Lima (Limatula) jeflreysiana, Tate.

Modiolaria singularis, Tate.

Leda vagans, Tate.
,, huttoni, T. Wds.
,, obolella, Tate.

Limopsis belcheri, Ad. & R.

Cucullrea corioensis, M'Coy.

Chione cainozoica, T. Wds.

Cardita delicatula, Tate.

Carditella lamellata ? Tate.

Semele vesiculosa, Tate.

Corbula pixidata, Tate.

Cuspidaria subrostrata, 1 Tate.
Gastropoda.

Murex trochispira, Tate.

Triton woodsii, Tate.
„ textilis, 1 Tate.

Epidromus tenuicostatus, T. Wds.

Fusus foliaceus, Tate.

220 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Fusus craspedotus, Tate.
Nassa tatei, T. Wds.
Marginella micula, Tate.
,, propinqua, Tate.

,, wen th worth i, T. Wds.

n. sp.
Ancillaria semilsevis, T. "Wds.
Columbella, sp.
Conus heterospira, Tate.
Pleurotoma murndaliana, T. Wds.
Pleurotoma, 3 spp.
Drillia, 3 spp.
Genotia angustifrons, Tate.
Cypra?a leptorhyncha, M'Coy.
Cassidaria gradata, Tate.
Turritella platyspira, T. Wds.
,, conspicabilis, Tate.
,, acricula var., Tate,
sp.
Tenagodes occlusus, T. Wds.
Eulima, 2 spp.

Cerithium crebariodes, T. Wds.
1 Cerithiopsis, sp.

Triforis, sp.
1 Astele, sp.
Tinostoma parvula, T. Wds.
Scaphander fragilis, Tate, m.s.
Cylichna, 3 spp.
Ringicula, sp.
Action, sp.
Scaphopoda.

Entalis mantelli, Zittel.
,, subfissura, Tate.
Den tali um aratuni, Tate.
Pteropoda.

Vaginella eligniostoma, Tate.
Styliola rangiana, Tate.
Spiralis tertiaria, Tate.
Pisces.

Otoliths.

Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 221

Summary.

Zoantharia ----- 3

Echinodermata - - - 1

Annelida ... 1

Brachiopoda - - 3

Lamellibranchiata - - 15

Gastropoda - - 42

Scaphopoda - - 3

Pteropoda - - - 3

Pisces - - - 1

72

The Geological Structure of the District.

Having now considered the fossiliferous localities of the
Tertiary Rocks we shall make a few remarks on the structure
of the area.

Upper Silurian.

The bed rock wherever exposed is Upper Silurian. There has
been no attempt to work out in the field the stratigraphical
relationships of the different fossiliferous outcrops of these rocks,
and very little, comparatively, has been published on the organic
remains. There is evidence, as will be shown below, that these
rocks are intruded by granitoid rocks, and that extensive outcrops
of the latter formerly occurred.

The Loiver Leaf Beds, and Brown- Coals.

An outcrop of these from under the Older Volcanic Rock at
North Melbourne has been noticed above, though, so far, we have
found no fossils in it. Brough Smyth records another outcrop at
Footscray, and the beds are indicated as occurring near the
Industrial Schools in Royal Park.

These beds thicken very much to the south-west where they
are represented by the brown-coal deposits of Newport and
Altona Bay. The age indicated for the northern members of
these beds on the quarter-sheet is Pliocene. Brough Smyth (4)
gave reasons for considering them to be Miocene, and his classiti-

222 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

cation is adopted by Murray (7). We have elsewhere (19)
given reasons for considering them to be very early Eocene or
Cretaceous.

The Older- Volcanic.

We have elsewhere shown that the age of these rocks is Eocene
(17). The area covered can be seen on referring to the quarter-
sheets, the outcrops being confined to the central and north-
western part of the district under consideration.

At Mentone a bore for water was put down which is stated to
have reached Silurian at a depth of 5<S3ft. No basalt was found
in the bore. Fossils occurred at 86ft.; 150ft.; 235ft.; 253ft.;
but none were preserved. We have to thank Mr. G. D. Barker,
for the particulars.

At Mordialloc another bore put down for the same purpose in
1887 reached basalt at 223ft., and it was bored into for a
distance of 17ft. when operations were suspended.

At Frankston again the Volcanic Rock was struck under
tertiaries at a depth of 250ft. (4). It covers a large part of the
Mornington Peninsula, and the country to the eastward.

Marine Eocene.

The evidence put forward in the present paper shows that we
may consider the following beds as Eocene — the grey clays and
limestone of Altona Bay and Newport, the polyzoal limestone
and the ferruginous beds indicated at Keilor, the lower beds at
Royal Park and those facing them at Flemington, lower beds at
South Yarra, ? Windsor, and the unknown beds from which the
limestone shingle of the Beaumaris Beach is derived. The
deposits at Altona Bay and Newport were unknown to the old
survey, while the others were, with perhaps the exception of the
polyzoal rock at Keilor, which was merely classed as Tertiary,
grouped with the other ferruginous beds as Pliocene. The
Eocene beds of Royal Park, Flemington and Green Gully are
evidently littoral, while the liner nature of the sediment, and the
great abundance of sponge spicules in the deposits at Altona Bay
suggest deposition in deeper water.

Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 223

Miocene.

An examination of the list of fossils from Cheltenham leaves
little room for doubt that the deposit must be regarded as of the
same age as the upper beds of Muddy Creek and Jemmy's Point.

With the Cheltenham beds must be grouped all the others
from which we have recorded fossils in the present paper, with
the exception of those above indicated as Eocene. Overlying
these beds we have a series of sandstones and gravels which,
wherever seen in the district south-east of Melbourne, appear
to be inseparable from the underlying fossiliferous Miocene.
Towards the north these deposits thin out on the flanks of the
Silurian and are probably in the main of freshwater origin. To
the south-east they are overlain by the still more recent deposits
of Carrum Swamp and reappear beyond its southern boundary.
They cover a large part of the northern portion of the Mornington
Peninsula, where they can be seen in fine cliff section uncomform-
ably overlying the Marine Eocene. Similar rocks reappear in the
Bellarine Peninsula (11). The survey grouped these rocks
together and referred them to the Pliocene. At South Yarra,
and if the locality reference of the fossils be correct, at Windsor,
we have some difficulty in deciding whether the Eocene has or
has not, a Miocene cover. Provisionally, however, we may group
the superficial rocks of this area with the rest of the Miocene.
Similarly to the north and north-west of Melbourne there is, in
places, considerable difficulty in separating the Eocene from the
Miocene beds. Probably the Eocene does not extend further
north than the line from Royal Park to Keilor. As shown
by the bores at Altona Bay the Eocene thickens towards the
south. It thins out to the north where it is covered by the
Miocene which overlaps and runs far inland passing under the
basalt plains. The deposit, where not protected by the lava flow
has suffered much from denudation, and its material has
frequently been redistributed. This great denudation had
already progressed far before the outpouring of the Newer
Volcanic Rocks, and in some places, as at Northcote Hill, we
find an inlier which rises high above the lava plain.

The ferruginous beds, according to Selwyn (1), underlie the
lowland between Melbourne and Port Melbourne. The bores to

224 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

which Selwyn refers were probably put down in connection with
the scheme for a canal from Melbourne to the bay and may be
the same as the series alluded to by Mr. Henry Ginn (20).
Another series, "through the foot of Emerald Hill" by Mr.
James Blackburn (20), seems to- have proved nothing but the
absence of " rock." The Coode Canal does not, as shown by
Mr. A. H. S. Lucas, cut through anything but the post-tertiary
series (21). There is no evidence to show whether these ferrugi-
nous beds under the area in question are Eocene or Miocene,
though from the depth at which they were struck, Eocene
seems more probable. The same uncertainty prevails about the
yellow sands and clays in the upper part of the Altona Bay and
Newport shafts.

Taken as a whole, it seems that the Miocene sediments grow
finer as we approach the present coast-line. Conglomerates are
commoner inland where they cap many of the hills and extend
over wide areas. About Brunswick the sections exposed in the
brick pits show in places a fairly heavy conglomerate of quartz
pebbles. On the Brighton coast the beds are finer in texture
and no coarse conglomerates have come under our notice, while
the presence of fossil-wood still points to the proximity of land.
No marine fossils have been recorded at any great distance from
the present coast-line and it seems probable the marine series
does not extend far inland, but gives place to a series of terrestrial
and freshwater beds.

The thickness of the Marine Miocene does not seem to have
been very great. The section exposed in the Beaumaris cliffs
does not exceed a hundred feet in thickness and may be taken
as indicating approximately the thickness of the series.

The clip of the Miocene beds is very inconstant and is as a
rule slight, 5° - 10° being the usual amount, while in one
instance, at Beaumaris, the dip is over 20° though only persist-
ing for a short distance. The general strike is about north-west
but is somewhat variable. The deeper beds of the series being-
more ferruginous than the upper ones are more weather-resisting
and when brought to the surface on the shore-line form the
points which project into the bay. Every little point has either
a mass of the ferruginous beds in situ for its base or by its beds
of shingle shows their near proximity.

Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 225

The Newer Volcanic Rock.

This is mapped as " Upper Newer Volcanic " and is younger
than miocene. Its junction with the underlying ferruginous
sands and gravels of probably Miocene age may be seen clearly
in a quarry behind the old Flemington Meat Preserving Works
on the Saltwater River at Maribyrnong, and in several other
escarpments along the Saltwater from here up.

Post Tertiary.

Near the Williamstown Racecourse is a large area covered
with marine beds, reaching about 20ft. above sea-level. Mollusca
are abundant and seem, as far as we have examined them, to be
all living species. The fossiliferous beds of the Yarra Estuary,
and the Elwood Swamp, the silt beds of Albert Park, marking an
old course of the Yarra towards St. Kilda, and the shell-bearing
beds of the Carrum Swamp may be referred to the same epoch.

Capping the Miocene from Elsternwick to Mordialloc recent
shells are to be found in places. These have frequently been
referred to as indicating a recent subsidence and subsequent
upheaval. As far as our observations go the shells are confined
to the present coast line, and Mr. T. S. Hart tells us that he is
of the same opinion. Their present position is due we think to
two causes : the lighter shells have been blown up the slopes by the
wind, while the heavier ones may have been carried there by the
natives. At Picnic Point, on its northern side, these shells can
be traced from sea-level, where the deposit is daily being added
to, up the slope to a height considerably above the level of even
a "storm beach." If a cliff were cut back here now we should
have a similar state of affairs to that which we find commonly
along the coast.

Origin of the Sediments.

Silurian rocks have probably yielded the greater part of the
Tertiary sediments. In places, however, the sand grains are
large and roughened so that the presence of granite in the
neighbourhood is probable. Such sands occur south-east of Black
Rock. The quarter-sheet states that the Tertiary rocks, near the
Toorak Railway Station, rest on "decomposed granite." The

226 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

bed rock is not now visible about here, so that we cannot discuss
this statement. The new edition of the Catalogue of Rocks in
the Technological Museum describes a specimen (Nr. I., 79) as
" decomposed granite " from the foundations of the Royal Hotel,
St. Kilda. The specimen in the -Museum is evidently a granitoid
rock, but we have not had an opportunity of closely inspecting it.

The sewerage tunnel under Stoney Creek, north of the pumping
station, passed through a granitic sand composed of roughened
quartz grains, white clay and flakes of black mica. Mr. Spry
has shown us similar material from a sewerage shaft near the
South Yarra Railway Station. The large sand grains in the
clays under the Older Volcanic at North Melbourne seem to
suggest a similar granitic origin.*

In conclusion we have to thank numerous friends for informa-
tion, and for the opportunity of examining fossils from various
localities. Mr. T. S. Hart's knowledge of the Brighton district
has been of great help. Mr. A. W. Craig has allowed us to
carefully examine his large collections from the Eocene of Royal
Park. We have also received fossils from various localities from
Rev. G. Ramage, Messrs. J. A. Atkinson, A. E. Kitson, J. T.
J utson, E. J . Robertson, Graham Officer, and others, while
Messrs. G. D. Barker and Hosie have kindly supplied us with
particulars in reference to several bores. Mr. T. W. Fowler has
been good enough to survey the cutting in Royal Park for us
and to cive us the contour of the cutting.

* Since the paper was read Mr. J. A. Atkinson has drawn our attention to the presence
of a decomposed coarse granitoid rock in a sewerage shaft at Kensington Road, Toorak.
Some hundreds of loads were obtained.

Tertiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 227

In the Map the figures refer to the fossiliferous localities as
numbered in the body of the paper.

f CSSUlfEKCUS TERTIARY
OUTCROPS.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIII.

Railway cutting in Royal Park. The measurements were
made along the south-east side. North-east end to left.

228 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Literature.

1. Sekvyn (A. R. C.)— "The Geology, Palaeontology and

Mineralogy of the country situated between Melbourne,
Western Port Bay, Cape Schanck and Port Nepean,"
with map and three sections, 1854. Votes and Pro-
ceedings of the Legislative Council, 1854-5, vol. i.

2. Bla?idowski (JVt/i.) — "Personal Observations made in an

Excursion towards the Central parts of Victoria," etc.
Trans. Phil. Soc. Vic, 1855.

3. Selwyn (A. R. C.) — "Report of the Geological Surveyor on

the Geological Structure of the Colony of Victoria, the
Basin of the Yarra and part of the Northern, North-
eastern and Eastern Drainage of Western Port Bay,"
with map and section. Votes and Proc. Leg. Council,
1855-6, vol. ii.

4. Smyth (R. B rough) — " Notes on the Rock Formations of

Victoria, etc.," 1873. London International Exhibition,
1873. (Melbourne, 1872-3.)

5. Etheridge (R., jr.) — " Description of a New Species of the

Genus Hemipatagus, Desor, from the Tertiary Rocks
of Victoria, Australia, etc." Q.J.G.S., xxxi. (1875).

6. M'Coy (Sir Frederick) — " Prodromus of the Palaeontology

of Victoria." Decs. 1-7, 1875-9.

7. Murray (R. A. F.) — "The Geology and Physical Geography

of Victoria." 18^7.

8. Tate (Prof. R.) — "Census of the Fauna of the Older

Tertiary of Australia." Proc. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales,
1888.

9. Griffiths (G. S.)—" The Geology of Melbourne." Aust, Ass.

Handbook, Melbourne, 1890.

10. Hall (T. S.) — "Notes on the Geology of the Moonee Ponds

District," Victorian Naturalist, VII. (1890), p. 59.

11. Pritchard (G. B.) — " Remarks on the Tertiaries of Australia

together with a Catalogue of Fossils." Ann. Rep.
South Aust. School of Mines, 1891 (pub. 1892).

12. Hart (T. S.) — "Notes on the Rocks of Brighton and

Moorabbin and the Surrounding District." Victorian
Naturalist, 1893.

(X

' /

'H

>- *
p^ -

cS —

\r

?

TeHiaries in the Neighbourhood of Melbourne. 229

13. Hall {T S.) and Pritchard (G. B.)— "Notes on the Eocene

Strata of the Bellarine Peninsula," etc. Proc. Roy.
Soc. Vic, 1893.

14. Officer (Graham)— "Excursion to Keilor." Vic. Nat., 1893.

15. Tate {Prof. R.) and Dennant (/.) — " Correlation of the

Marine Tertaries of Australia." Trans. Roy. Soc.
South Aust., 1893.

16. Tate {Prof. P.)—11 Unrecorded Genera of the Older Tertiary

of Australia," etc. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1893.

17. Hall and Pritchard—" The Older Tertaries of Maude," etc.

P.R.S. Vic, 1894.

18. Howitt {A. IV.)— "Notes on the Metamorphic Rocks of the

Omeo district, Gippsland." Aust. Ass., Sydney, 1888,
p. 209.

19. Hall and Pritchard. — "On the Age of certain Plant Beds,"

etc. Aust. Ass., Adelaide, 1893.

20. " Report of the Select Committee on the Harbours of

Melbourne and Geelong," etc. Votes and Proc. Leg.
Coun. Vic, 1852-3, vol. ii.

21. Lucas {A. H S.) — "On the Sections of the Delta of the

Yarra, displayed in the Fishermen's Bend Cutting."
Proc. R.S. Vic, 1886.

22. Selwyn {A. R. C.) and Aplin (C. D. H.)— Geological

Quarter-sheets, 1 S.W.; 1 N.E.; 1 SI; 1 N.W.
1859 (?)

Art. XV. — Catalogue of Non-Calcareous Sponges collected
by J. Bracebridge Wilson, Esq., M.A., in the
Neighbourhood of Port Phillip Heads.

Part III.
By Arthur Dendy, D.Sc,

Professor of Biology in the Canterbury College, University of New
Zealand; Corresponding Member of the Eoyal Society of Victoria.

Introductory Remarks.

The present instalment of the catalogue deals with the families
Axinellida, Sitberitidce and Spirastrellidce, together with a few
specimens which, owing to the difficulty of determining their
true systematic position, were accidently omitted from their
proper places in the preceding parts. Altogether forty species
are included in this part, of which twelve are new to science. It
has been necessary to erect two new genera, Sigmaxinella and
Pseudoclathria.

. This brings us to the end of the Monaxonida, at least according
to the acceptation of that term in the Challenger Report, but
there still remain a number of genera of doubtful position, whose
consideration I postpone until I shall have been able to study
more fully the Tetractinellid Sponges, with which they seem to
have more or less affinity. Such are the genera Tethea, Chondrilla,
Stelleitmopsis, Trachya, Halisarca and Chondrosia.

At this stage of the work one cannot help being struck with
the exceeding richness of the monaxonid sponge-fauna of the
Victorian coast. The present catalogue includes altogether 135
species and no doubt many still remain to be discovered.

Perhaps I may be allowed in this place to express my very
deep regret at the death of my old friend Mr. J. Bracebridge
Wilson, to whose untiring exertions the study of Spongology is
so deeply indebted, and whose loss leaves a gap in the list of
Australian Naturalists which we can scarcely hope to see rilled.

Catalogue of Non-Calcareous sponges. 231

Family AXINELLID^E.

Skeleton typically non-reticulate ; consisting of ascending
axes of fibres from which arise subsidiary fibres radiating to
the surface. Fibres typically plumose. Megascleres typically
stylote but ranging to oxeote. Microscleres rarely present,
never chela?.

Genus Hymeniacidon, Bowerbank.

Skeleton reticulate, with or without well-defined spiculo-fibre,
not plumose. Megascleres styli or subtylostyli. No microscleres.
. Von Lendenfeld's genus Stylotella, placed by himself amongst
the Heterorrhaphidaj and by Topsent amongst the Esperellime,
is clearly not distinguishable from Hymeniacidon, even when
the latter is employed in the restricted sense of the Challenger
Report.

Hymeniacidon rigida, Lendenfeld, sp.

Stylotella rigida, Lendenfeld, Catalogue of Sponges in the
Australian Museum, p. 186.

I identify with this species a single specimen (R.N. 362) of
digitate form, with thick, irregular branches and small vents
chiefly on the sides of the branches. The skeleton is a loose
reticulation of fairly stout and slender fibres, branching towards
the surface, and with very wide irregular meshes between. The
fibres contain a great many spicules densely packed together and
invested by abundant spongin. A large number of spicules are
irregularly scattered between the fibres. The dermal skeleton is
very scanty, consisting of sparsely scattered spicules slightly pro-
jecting from the surface. The spicules are straight, slender
styli, rather abruptly sharp-pointed and sometimes with slightly
developed heads. They vary much in thickness, averaging say
about 0T7 by O005 mm. when full-grown. Judging from the
fragment sent for identification, I believe that B.M. sp. 73, left
undescribed by Mr. Carter, also belongs to this species.

R.N. 362 (20 f.; "pale terra-cotta red").

B.M. sp. 73 (Reg. 86-12-1 3-35).

Genus Axinella, Schmidt.
Sponge typically ramose but may be massive. Skeleton fibre
plumose. Megascleres stylote and sometimes oxeote. No
microscleres.

232 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Axinella villosa, Carter.

Axinella villosa, Carter, A.M.N.H., November, 1885, p. 361.

The only additional specimen of this species is short-stalked,
bushy, with short, thick, digitiform branches, tapering rather
abruptly to their apices and about half an inch thick in the
middle. The surface is uniformly granular. The texture is
firm and tough, with axial condensation. The skeleton is very
regularly plumose, and the spicules are stout and rather short
oxea, with a few stylote.

R.N. 1017 (x B).

B.M. d. 83("Axine/la villosa," Reg. 86-12-15-398).

Axinella stelliderma, Carter.

Axinella stelliderma, Carter, A.M.N.H., November, 1885, p. 360.

There are three specimens in the collection which T have some
hesitation in identifying with this species because, although they
agree very well indeed with the fragment of the type sent to me
from the British Museum, there is one feature in Mr. Carter's
original description which I cannot find in any of the specimens
examined by me. I refer to the long spicule " projecting from
the summit of the granule and surrounded at its base sheaf-like
by a number of shorter ones." In my preparations all the
spicules either end naturally or are broken oft' short at or near
the surface, and I cannot find any conspicuously differing in size
from the remainder. I find that the largest spicules in the type
measure about 0-68 by 0008 nun., which agrees very well with
Mr. Carter's own measurements.

The skeleton is very Raspallla-like ; with a central axis of
thick, anastomosing, laminated horny fibres, cored by the slender
styli, from which loose, irregular slender whisps of similar
spicules curve outwards towards the surface.

The external form varies somewhat, the branches being some-
times long and sometimes short, but always coming off more or
less in one plane. Two specimens show minute vents, mostly
marginal.

The name stelliderma is hardly well-chosen and evidently refers
to a very minute character which entirely escaped my own obser-
vation, for I have noted the surface as being even but granular.

Catalogue of Non-Calcareous Sponges. 233

R.N. 271 (20 f. ; "rich maroon-red mottled with a lighter
shade"); 887 (s. 9); 889 (s. 9).

B.M. sp. 60 (" Axinella stelliderma, C. one of types/' Reg.
86-12-15-33).

Axinella ace rata, Carter.

Axinella stelliderma var. acerata, Carter, A.M.N.H., November,
1885, p. 360.

I identify with this species (which appears to be quite distinct
from A. stelliderma), three specimens which agree with Mr.
Carter's description fairly well, except that the colour in life
was yellow or orange instead of purple, and I have been unable
to recognise in my sections the stellate character of the dermis.
The latter, however, I imagine to be due to the arrangement of
the soft tissues and not to the spicules, and it may even be an
effect of shrinkage. The slender oxeote spicules vary a good
deal in size, as also does the length of the branches of which
the sponge is composed. The Raspailia-\'\ke arrangement of the
skeleton and the irregularity exhibited by the ends of the oxeote
spicules are characteristically axinellid.

R.N. 355 (19 f.; "dull ochre-yellow "); 358(19 1; "orange");
405 (x, 19 f.; "Indian yellow").

Axinella clathrata, n. sp.

The single specimen is erect, stipitate ; composed of short,
slender, subcylindrical branches extended in one plane and
anastomosing in a clathrous manner. Surface glabrous and
minutely conulose. Vents not visible. Colour in spirit nearly
white. Texture tough and resilient.

Skeleton, consisting of a thick central axis of densely but
irregularly packed spicules, occupying nearly half the entire
thickness of the branch and giving off at frequent intervals
thick, loose, irregular strands of spicules towards the surface,
where they end in the low conuli. There is no visible spongin.

Spicules, long, slender, unequal-ended oxea ; usually gently
curved and sharply pointed at both ends and very finely at at
least one, but sometimes becoming stylote ; measuring about
0-i by 0-006 mm.

234 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

The skeleton is very like that of a Raspailia but for the
absence of spongin and of spined styli.
R.N. 1006 (x B).

Axinella pilifera, Cartel*.

Axinella pilifera, Carter, A.M.N.H., November, 1885, p. 362.

It is with some little hesitation that I identify with this
species four specimens varying from massive to coral-like in
external form. The surface is cactiform and glabrous, minutely
reticulate between the conuli. The texture is very soft and
spongy, and there is a scanty skeleton of stout horny fibre
containing oxeote spicules which measure about 0-33 by 0'008
mm., and which are sometimes arranged in a typically axinellid
fashion. The fibres end in the conuli. The specimens are
very opaque, owing to the development of immense numbers of
granular pigment cells. The colour in spirit is pale yellow.

R.N. 463 (s. 9, 20 f . ; (" ochraceous-buff ") ; 493 (s. 10, 8 £.;
"orange ochraceous "); 904 (s. 10); 1109 (x C).

B.M. sp. 62 {« Axinella pilif era, C. Type;" Reg. 86-12-15-135).

Axinella solida, Carter.

Axinella solida, Carter, A.M.N.H., November, 1885, p. 362.

This species has a sessile, spreading or proliferously lamellar
habit, with conulose surface. The columnar structure, due to
the plumose skeleton fibres, is very characteristic. The spicules
are stylote, varying much in size.

R.N 731 (xB; "wax-yellow"); 738 (x B ; "orange"); 890
(s. 9); 1158.

{B.M. sp. 61, labelled " Axinella solida" and registered 86-12-
15-59, contains sigmata and trichodragmata, and is evidently
wrongly named ; indeed, Mr. Kirkpatrick informs me that Mr.
Carter suggests its being re-examined. It is a specimen of
Sigmaxinella flabellatd).

Axinella meloniformis, Carter.

Axinella meloniformis, Carter, A.M.N. H., November, 1885,
p. 362.

The original type was globular, sessile, ridged like a melon,
but it was very small and may well have been young. All the

Catalogue of Non-Calcareous Sponges. 235

three specimens now recorded are lobose and corrugated, and two
of them have short stalks. The skeleton is very irregular, sub-
reticulate, with a tendency to form slightly plumose fibres, in
which the rather large spicules are held together by an abundant
coating of pale spongin. Even in the type specimen a few styli
occur amongst the oxea.

P.JV. 337 ("dull grey-buff, with brownish-red on higher parts");
503 (x, 20 f ; "flame scarlet"); 605 (x, 20 f ; "cadmium yellow").

P.M. sp. 65 {"Axinella meloniformis, C. Type." Reg. 86-12-
15-117).

Axinella kirkii,* n. sp.

Massive, sessile, hemispherical ; sides rugose ; upper surface
covered with numerous conspicuous, short, slender, conical
processes. Vents small, scattered on the upper surface between
the conuli. Surface glabrous or sub-glabrous, with beautifully
reticulate dermal membrane between the conuli but no dermal
skeleton. Texture compact, firm, but compressible and resilient.
Colour in spirit yellowish-grey or brown.

Skeleton very loose and irregular, with very stout, slightly
plumose columns of loosely packed spicules ascending and ending
in the conuli, which they completely fill and from which some of
the spicules project beyond the surface. In the body of the
sponge numerous spicules are irregularly scattered between the
columns.

Spicules very variable, rather large but slender, gently curved ;
oxeote, stylote or strongylote. Size very variable, up to about
1-0 by 0-009 mm.

R.N. 686 ; 884 (s. 9).

Genus Phakellia, Bowerbank.

Sponge more or less flabellate or cup-shaped. Skeleton often
more or less reticulate. Megascleres styli and often oxea. Ku
microscleres.

Phakellia flabellata, Carter.

Phakellia flabellata, Carter, A.M.N.H., November, 1885, p.
363.

* Named after my friend Mr. H. B. Kirk, the New Zealand Spongologist.

236 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Phakellia crassa, Carter, A.M.N.H., November, 1885, p. 363.

Phakellia villosa, Carter, A.M.N.H., November, 1886, p. 379.

(Not Phakellia flabellata, Ridley and Dendy, Challenger
Monaxonida, p. 171).

Mr. Carter's three species appear to me to be indistinguishable.
The sponge is characterised by its stipitate, flabellate, often
proliferous external form, with granular surface and small
stellate vents. The skeleton is subreticulate but with slightly
plumose main fibres curving outwards towards the surface. The
spicules are short stout styli, sometimes oxeote, measuring about
0-25 by 0-01 mm. in the type of P. crassa, and varying somewhat
in different specimens.

(By an unfortunate oversight the name flabellata was given in
the Challenger Report on the Monaxonida to a Phakellia from
Port Jackson which is quite distinct from Mr. Carter's species.
As the latter has priority, though only by a short while, I
propose to re-name the Challenger species Phakellia jacksotiiana).

R.N. 326 (18 f.; "orange-yellow"); 679 (s. 9; "orange"); 1162
(x).

B.M. sp. 58 ("Phakellia crassa, C. Type," Reg. 86-12-15-129);
sp. 56 ("Phakellia villosa, C. one of types," Reg. 86-12-15-78);
d. 86 ("Phakellia villosa," Reg. 86-12-15-437).

Phakellia titmida, n. sp.

The single specimen is compressed, lobose, irregular ; varying
greatly in thickness; thinnest in the middle and with the
margin more than an inch broad. Vents very small, abundantly
scattered on the margin. Surface uneven, slightly warty and
rugose ; subglabrous ; very minutely reticulate on the flattened
surfaces. Compact but very compressible and resilient. Pale
greenish-yellow in spirit.

The skeleton is a pretty close-meshed but extremely irregular
network of branching and anastomosing fibre. The fibres are
about 0*09 mm. thick, not very definite, containing a great many
spicules and no obvious spongin. Towards the surface the fibres
subdivide rapidly and give rise to the dermal tufts of spicules,
which in surface view are seen to be arranged in a close reticula-
tion. Large numbers of sjficules are thickly scattered in the soft
tissues between the fibres of the main skeleton.

Catalogue of Non-Calcareous Sponges. 237

The spicules are slightly curved styli or subtylostyli; gradually
sharp-pointed and measuring about 018 by O006 mm.

This species appears to combine the characters of Hymeniacidon
with those of Phakellia and it is with some doubt that I include
it in the latter genus.

R.N. 1155 (x).

Genus Acanthella, Schmidt.

Axinellidje of ramose, bushy or frondose external form ; of
cartilaginous consistency, and with glabrous surface beset with
ridges and spines. No distinct horny fibre. The smooth linear
megascleres range from stylote to oxeote in form. No micro-
scleres.

The arrangement of the spicules in dense wide tracts with
intervening spaces almost or quite devoid of spicules appears to
be also very characteristic.

Acantheila stipitata, Carter.

Acanthella stipitata, Carter, A.M.N.H., May, 1881, p, 380,
pi. xviii., fig. 8.

Acanthella cactiformis, Carter, A.M.N.H., February, 1885,
p. 114.

Acanthella hirciniopsis, Carter, A.M.N.H., November, 1885,
p. 364.

Acanthellina parvicomelata, Carter, A.M.N.H., November,
1885, p. 365.

Acanthellina rugolineata, Carter, A.M.N.H., November, 1885,
p. 365.

The forms here included all appear to belong to one very
variable species ; at any rate there are so many intermediate
characters that I can find no tangible points of distinction
between them.

R.N 389; 465 (x, 20 f.; "poppy-red"); 659; 740 (x B;
"orange"); 1003 (two specimens, s. 1 and x B); 1004 (x B);
105S (x A); 1159; 1161 (x).

B.M. sp. 49 ("Acanthella cactiformis, C," Reg. 86-12-15-91);
sp. 50 ('■'■Acanthella parviconulata, C," Reg. 86-12-15-56); sp. 51
("Acanthella hirciniopsis, C," Reg. 86-12-15-38); sp. 52 ("Acan-
thella rugolineata, C," Reg. 86-12-15-94); d. 90 ("Acanthella
rugolineata" Reg. 86-12-15-365).

238 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Acanthella tenuispiculata, n. sp.

Compressed, flabellate, only about one-third of an inch thick ;
may be proliferous. Surfaces glabrous, closely beset with small
conuli which are sometimes joined in short ridges ; may be
minutely porous between. Vents in one specimen not seen, in
the other small but prominent, scattered on both surfaces, each
on a small low eminence. Texture tough, compact, leathery, with
strong skeletal condensation in the median plane. Pale yellowish
pink or nearly white in spirit.

Skeleton without any visible spongin, composed of long slender
spicules densely packed together in the median plane and
extending obliquely outwards and upwards in thick looser
parallel strands into the low conuli.

Spicules very long and slender styli (sometimes oxeote), gently
curved and with irregular points, measuring about 0-64 by O008
mm.; with occasional very slender sinuous forms.

R.N. 542 (x, 19 f.; "orange-chrome"); 1188.

Genus Ciocalypta, Bowerbank.

Sponge with large subdermal cavities roofed over by the
dermal membrane, which is provided with a well-developed
dermal skeleton and supported on pillars of spiculo-fibre radiating
outwards from the denser central portion of the main skeleton.
Megascleres stylote or oxeote. No microscleres.

This genus includes Mr. Carter's Leucopkhvus*

Ciocalypta penicillus, Bowerbank.

Ciocalypta penicillus, Bowerbank, Mon. Brit. Spong., vol. i.,
pi. xxx., figs. 360, 361 ; vol ii., p. 81 ; vol iii., p. 33, pi. xiii.,
tigs. 2, 3, 4.

Leucophhvus massalis, Carter, A.M.N.H., November, 1883, p.
323, pi. xiv., fig. 15.

1 Ciocalypta penicillus, var. aciculata, Carter, A.M.N.H.,
November, 1885, p, 366.

Leucophhva- massalis, Carter, A.M.N. H., November, 1885, p.
366.

* For characters of Leucophloeus see A.M.N.H., February, 1884, p. 130.

Catalogue of Non-Calcareous Sponges. 239

The sponge consists of a massive, rounded base, from which
spring numerous upright, finger-like processes. The dermal
membrane, with its abundant spicules, is supported over large
subdermal cavities by columns of spicules radiating from a dense
axial skeleton in the digitiform processes. The spicules are all,
or nearly all, stylote, and of variable size, sometimes all of about
the same diameter, sometimes with some of the internal spicules
much stouter than the others.

Mr. Carter himself points out the close resemblance of his
species to that of Bowerbank, as follows : — " The illustration of
C. penicillus (op. et I.e.) closely resembles in figure that of
Leucophlceus massalis, only the latter is more compact towards
the centre, but the form of the spicule is the same, viz., oaeate,
while the two other species of Ciocalypta present acerate spicules ;"
etc.* In face of these remarks I am unable to understand
why the genus Leucophlceus should have been erected, or why
Ciocalypta penicillus and Leucophkvus massalis should have been
both included as distinct species in the work on Mr. Bracebridge
Wilson's sponges.

R.N. 379 (s. 8, 8 f.; "lemon-yellow ").

B.M. sp. 55 (" Leucophlceus massalis, C." Reg. 86-12-15-82);
d. 92 {"Ciocalypta penicillus" Reg. 86-12-15-457).

Ciocalypta tyleri, Bowerbank.

Ciocalypta tyleri, Bowerbank, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1873, p.
21, pi. iv., figs. 9-12.

Ciocalypta tyleri, Carter, A.M.N. H., November, 1885, p. 366.

The sponge is massive with digitiform processes, like C.
penicillus, but with all or may of the spicules oxeote.

Specimens intermediate in spiculation between C. penicillus and
C. tyleri are met with. B.M. sp. 5 If is very remarkable in this
respect and should perhaps form the type of a new species. It
has a mixture of very stout and very slender styli in the main
skeleton but only very slender oxea in the dermal skeleton.

R.N. 585 (s. 1, 14 f.; "ochre-yellow"); 595 (x, 19 f.;
"primrose-yellow"); 810 (s. 5); 905 (s. 8); 949 (s. 9); 1089
(x A); 1133.

* A.M.N.H., November, 1883, p. 326.

t Labelled " Ciocalypta penicillus, Bk. P.P.H. 19 fms." Reg. 86-12-15-136.

240 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Ciocalypta compressa, Carter, sp.

Leucophloeus compressus, Carter, A.M.N.H., November, 1883,
p. 324, pi. xiv., tig. 16.

This species is at once distinguished from the preceding by its
compressed, lobose, flabellate, proliferous, sometimes stipitate
external form. The dermal skeleton gives to the surface a
minutely reticulate appearance, and the densely spiculous
dermal membrane is supported over large subdermal cavities
by the expanded ends of the outwardly curving, plumose fibres
of the main skeleton. The spicules are rather slender oxea,
gently curved and gradually and smoothly pointed, very variable
in size, up to about 0-4 by O0083 mm. in the specimen measured.

R.N. 272 (20 f.; "yellowish light brown"); 381 (19 f.); 449
(s. 9, 17 f.; "chrome-yellow"); 500 (s. 6, 6 f.; "ochre-yellow");
754 (s. 5; wax -yellow "); 800 (s. 5); 917 (s. 8); 961 (s. 6).

Sigmaxinella, n. gen.

Axinellida? with microscleres in the form of sigmata and
trichodragmata.

The genus comes near to Thrinacophora, Ridley and Dendy,
but differs in the addition of the sigmata, and as there are three
well-marked species exhibiting this character in the collection,
the erection of a new genus for their reception seems to be
desirable. It is the only known genus of Axinellidae in which
sigmata are present and is therefore very remarkable.

Sigmaxinella australidna, n. sp.

Sponge consisting of a bushy bunch of rather slender, short,
subcylindrical or somewhat compressed branches, sometimes
anastomosing and supported on a short stalk. Surface granular
or minutely hispid. Vents small, sometimes stellate, scattered
or serial along the branches. Tough, compressible, resilient.
Pale greyish-yellow in spirit.

Skeleton Raspailia-\\ke ; consisting of a thick, dense axial
portion from -which slender fibres curved outwards towards the
surface, where they end in sparse, slightly projecting tufts of
spicules. There is a strong development of pale coloured
spongin, forming definite fibres rather sparsely cored by the

Catahxj up of Non-Calcareous Sponges. 241

spicules. These horny fibres form a close reticulation in the
axial portion of the sponge and to a less extent towards the
periphery. The relation of the spicules to the spongin is not
very definite, they are chiefly embedded in and projecting from
the main fibres.

Megasderes slender, ranging from stylote to oxeote, often with
irregular ends. Size very variable, up to about 0-3 by 0-006
mm.

Microsderes, (a) very slender, simple and contort sigmata,
varying in size, up to about 033 mm. from bend to bend. Very
abundant, in bundles (sigmadragmata) or scattered separately ;
(/>) short, hair-like raphides, mostly in dense bundles (trichodrag-
mata), about O025 mm. long. Very abundant.

This is one of the best characterised and altogether most
satisfactory species in the collection.

R.N. 352 (19 f.; "brownish-red"); 388; 616 (x, 19 f.;
"orange-rufous, lighter orange below"); 654 (x, 20 f.; "orange-
rufous"); 812, 1063.

Sigmaxinella flabellata, Carter, sp.

Axinella flabellata, Carter, A.M.N.H., November, 1885, p. 361.

Sponge composed of proliferous lamella? about a quarter of an
inch thick, springing from a short, thick stalk. Surface coarsely
granular or minutely conulose. Vents minute, marginal or
scattered. Colour in spirit pale greyish-yellow. Texture tough,
fibrous, resilient.

Skeleton, dense, composed of loose, plumose, spicular fibres,
curving outwards towards the surface, beyond which the ends of
the terminal spicules project slightly.

Megasderes, more or less curved styli, evenly rounded at the
base and gradually and sharply pointed at the apex ; commonly
rather stout, up to about 0*29 by 0-0166 mm., but varying,
especially in thickness.

Microsderes, (a) numerous, very slender, simple and contort
sigmata, measuring about 0-0166 mm. from bend to bend ; (b)
trichodragmata and scattered rhaphides, up to about 0*049 mm.
long.

Three of the specimens are beset with parasitic Actinozoa.

10

242 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

R.N. 480 (x, 20 f ; " vinaceous-cinnamon "); 516 (s. 8, 9 f;
"wood brown"); 681 ("sponge-brown"); 819 (s. 1); 944 (x A).

B.M. sp. 61 (wrongly labelled " Axinella so/ida." Reg. 86-
12-15-59).

Sigmaxinella ciocalyptoides, n. sp.

Massive, sessile, rising above into short digitiform projections ;
the whole apparently formed by the incomplete fusion of
numerous vertical processes enclosed below in a common dermal
membrane. Surface acutely conulose, grooved vertically ; with
very distinct, minutely reticulate dermal membrane supported on
fibrous pillars over large subdermal cavities. Vents sometimes
large, in depressions of the surface. Texture somewhat cavernous
but firm and resilient. Colour in spirit pale greyish-yellow.

Skeleton, composed of stout ascending columns of irregularly
and rather loosely arranged spicules, from which stout plumose
spicular fibres radiate outwards to the surface, where they
end in small conuli from which the ends of the terminal
spicules project somewhat. There is a good deal of spongin in
some of the fibres but its development appears to be very
irregular. Transverse sections of the vertical processes are
extremely characteristic, showing the central mass of spicules
occupying about a quarter of the diameter of the section, and the
stout radiating fibres coming off from it at wide intervals like the
spokes of a wheel and with the large subdermal cavities between
their outer ends. There is no dermal skeleton.

Megascleres, ranging from stylote to oxeote, but chiefly styli ;
slightly curved ; variable in size, up to about 0-5 by 0-018 mm.
but seldom so stout.

Microsderes ; (a) signiata, small and slender but extremely
numerous, simple and contort, about 0*0166 mm. from bend to
bend ; (b) trichodragmata, usually small bundles of short, slender
rhaphides about 0'03 mm. long ; often in dense agglomerations.

The specific name was suggested by a certain resemblance to
the genus Ciocalypta, from which the present species differs,
however, in the absence of dermal skeleton and the presence of
microscleres.

R.N. 338 (18 f; "Projections yellow-buff, the tympanised
interstices grey"); 442 (s. 9, 17 f; " cinnamon, the projections
deep chrome"): 882 (s. 9); 1092 (x A).

Catalogue of Non-Calcareous Sponges. 243

Genus Higginsia, Higgin.

Axinelliclse of massive ol' lobose external form and irregular,
confused skeleton. With oxeote or stylote megascleres and
small spined oxea (microxea) for microscleres.

This genus appears to be nearly related to Dendropsis, Ridley
and Dendy, but differs much in external form and skeleton
arrangement.

Higginsia coralloides, Higgin.

Higginsia coralloides, Higgin, A.M.N.H., April, 1877, p. 291,
pi. xiv., figs. 1-5.

Higginsia coralloides, Carter, A.M.N. H., November, 1885, p.
357. ' '

Higginsia coralloides, var. massalis, Carter, loc. cit.

There are six more specimens of this remarkable sponge in the
collection, and as Higgin's original type was a dried and washed
out specimen, while Carter contents himself with little more
than identification, it may be desirable tc add a few particulars
derived from well-preserved spirit specimens.

The external form varies from massive and irregular to stipitate
and thickly flabellate with marginal vents. The surface is rugose
or conulose, with reticulate dermal membrane stretched between
the projections. Texture pretty compact but resilient and
yielding. Colour in spirit nearly white.

The skeleton is very confused and irregular, without any
definite fibre, composed of densely intermingled oxeote spicules,
especially aggregated in wide tracts which trend towards the
surface and end in the conuli. The presence of these ill-defined
tracts of spicules, with intervening spaces almost free from
megascleres, gives a somewhat columnar character to vertical
sections. Internally all the tracts unite in one dense, irregular
agglomeration of spicules.

The megascleres are, as pointed out by Higgin, of two kinds,
stout oxea and slender oxea, the latter being chiefly aggregated
in loose dermal tufts or brushes. The microcleres are slender,
slightly curved, often angulated, spined oxea.

Having received from Mr. Carter a boiled out preparation of
spicules from a Grenada specimen, doubtless Higgin's original
type, I have been able to satisfy myself of the correctness of the

10A

244 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

identification. The curvature of the ends of the stout oxeote
spicule shown in Higgin's drawing appears to be immensely
exaggerated, as a rule it is not noticeable.

R.N. 517 (s. 8, 9 f.; "hair-brown"); 643 (s. 8, 8 f.; "ecru-
drab and about the edge maroon-purple, subdued with a wash
of brown"); 891 (s. 9); 927 (s. 1); 1101 (x C); 1140 (x).

Higginsia lunala, Carter.

Higginsia lunata, Carter, A.M.N.H., November, 1885, p. 358.

There are three specimens of this sponge in the collection.
They are all massive, sessile, rising above into short digitiform
processes which sometimes bear vents at their summits. The
surface is conulose, with subglabrovs, minutely reticulate dermal
membrane between the conuli. The texture is compact but soft
and spongy.

The skeleton is feebly developed, sparse and irregular, con-
sisting of very loose bands of spicules trending towards the
surface. The megascleres are very long but fairly stout styli and
oxea, commonly with irregular ends. There are also numerous
very long, slender hair-like spicules which may be young forms
of the last or possibly rhaphides. The microscleres are minute
fusiform oxea, usually strongly curved, crescent-like ; Carter
describes them as microspined, but I can only find the faintest
trace of roughening. All the specimens which I have seen are
densely charged with pigment granules, which render the sections
somewhat opaque.

R.N. 374 (18 f.; "Slate-brown with greenish tinge"); 589
(x, 19 f.; "clove-brown, at base sepia "); 680 (s. 5).

B.M. sp. 68 {^Higginsia lunata, C." Reg. 86-12-15-138).

Genus Trachycladus, Carter.

Axinellicke with oxeote to stylote megascleres and minute
spiral microscleres.

This genus probably includes Lendenf eld's Spirophoi'dla* as
Topsent has already indicated, though the type species of that
genus, S. digitata, from Port Jackson, appears from the descrip-
tion to be quite distinct from the common southern species
Trachycladus kevispirulifer.

* Catalogue of Sponges in the Australian Museum, p. 236.

Catalogue of Non~CalcG ireous Spoinges. 245

Trachycladus hcvispiru lifer, Carter.

Trackydadus lavispirulifer, Carter, A.M.N.H., May, 1879, p.
343, pi. xxviii., figs. 1-5, and November, 1885, p. 357.

This species forms a very characteristic element of the
sponge fauna of Southern Australia and may be very readily
recognised by its irregularly branched external form with
usually long and slender branches, by its brilliant red or orange
colour in life, disappearing in spirit, and by its abundant
minute spiral microscleres. Scarcely less characteristic of the
species is the presence of immense numbers of short, jointed
algal rods, in which, according to Mr. Carter, the red colour is
lodged and which give to sections of the sponge a very peculiar
opaque appearance.

Some of my specimens exhibit faint microspination of the
spiral microscleres. This is especially seen in R.JV. 415 and
1046, which are also of more robust and shorter branched habit
than usual. It must be remembered, however, that the original
type figured by Carter was also short-branched.

Ji.N. 297(20 1; "orange-red"); 306 (20 f.; "orange-scarlet");
366 (20 f.; "crimson"); 415 (x, 19 f.); 426 (x, 19 f.; "flame-
scarlet"); 467 (x, 20 f.; "orange-chrome"); 470 (x, 20 f.;
"scarlet"); 983 (s. 1); 984 (s. 1); 1000 (s. 1); 1035 (x B);
1046 (x B); 1061 (x A).

B.M. sp. 71 (" Trachycladus lavispirulifer C," Reg. 86-12-15-
42); d. 126 (" Trachycladus Icevispirulifer," Reg. 86-12-15-421).

Family SUBERITID^.

Megascleres typically tylostylote, sometimes stylote. No
mici'oscleres. Sponge usually massive. Spongin usually absent.
Usually with a dermal crust of radially arranged spicules.

Genus Suberites, Nardo.

Sponge usually irregular in form, massive to ramose, without
mammiform projections and without marginal fringe of spicules.
Usually with well-developed heads to the tylostyli.

Suberites carnosus, Johnston sp.

Halichondria caruosa, Johnston, British Sponges, p. 146, pi.
xiii., figs. 7, 8.

246 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Hymeniacidon carnosa, Bowerbank, Mon. Brit. Spong., vol. ii.,
p. 203, vol. iii., pi. xxxvi., figs. 5-9.

Suberites carnosus, Ridley, Zool. Coll. H.M.S. "Alert," p. 465.

Suberites globosa, Carter, A.M.N.H., February 1886, p. 116.

Suberites (Hymeniacidon) carnosus, Carter, A.M.N.H., Decem-
ber, 1886, p. 456.

Suberites carnosus, Ridley and Dendy, Challenger Monaxonida,
p. 197.

This species is easily recognised by its globular to fig-shaped
external form, compact structure and long, slender, pin-headed
spicules (tylostyli) arranged confusedly in the interior and in
radiating brushes at the surface. The spicules in my specimens
measure about 029 by O004 mm., which is rather smaller than
Bowerbank gives for the British form. My Victorian specimens
are also characterised by conspicuous, usually large vents, while
in the British form the vents are inconspicuous, but this
difference can scarcely be specific.

R.N. 294 (20 f.; "brownish-yellow"); 427 (x, 19 f . ; "Cinna-
mon"); 1010 (x B); 1034 (x B); 1090 (x A).

B.M. sp. 15 ("Suberites globosa, Carter?" Reg. 86-12-15-106);
d. 119 (" Suberites carnosa," Reg. 86-12-15-386).

Suberites flabellatus, Cartel'.

Suberites flabellatus, Carter, A.M.N.H., February, 1886, p. 117.

1 Suberites globosa (elongated form), Carter, A.M.N.H., Febru-
ary, 1886, p. 116.

This species is very common in Port Phillip and may be easily
l'ecognised by its compressed, lobose, digitate or branching form,
its orange or yellow colour in life, fading in spirit, and its typical
pin-headed spicules considerably larger than those of .S. carnosus.

R.N. 296 (20 f.; "wax-yellow"); 378 (18 f.; " dark orange");
488 (s. 10, 8 f.; "orange-ochraceous"); 623 (x, 19 f.; "orange");
799 (s. 10); 809 (s. 5); 893 (s. 10); 988 (s. 9); 1012 (x B).

B.M. d. 115 (" Suberites flabellata," Reg. 86-12-15-384); d. 116
("Suberites globosa (branching form)," Reg. 86-12-15-378).

Suberites insignis, Carter.

Suberites insignis, Carter, A.M.N.H., February, 1886, p. 118.
This species is distinguished by its massive form, with wide

Catalogue of Non-Calcareous Sponges. 247

canals internally, and its dark grey colour in life and in spirit.
My specimen is only a piece, so that I cannot confirm Carter's
observations on the remarkable canal system.

R.N. 705 (s. 5 ; " dark slate, turns green in spirit ").

B.M. sp. 14 {"Suberites insignis C. Type;" Reg. 86-12-15-125).

Suberites wilsoni, Carter.

Suberites wilsoni, Carter, A.M.N.H., February, 1885, p. 113.

This species is quite unmistakable on account of its brilliant
carmine or purple colour, which is not lost either in spirit or in
drying, and which has a remarkable power of staining other
objects when it is bruised in sea-water. It grows to a large size
and is massively lobose, with large vents arranged along the
prominent ridges, and it usually contains a great deal of coarse
sand.

R.N. 331 (IS f. ; "rich aster-purple"); 524 (x, 20 f . ; "aster
purple ").

B.M. sp. 13 {"Suberites wilsoni, C"; Reg. 86-12-15-107); d.
113 (" Suberites wilsoni"; Reg. 86-12-15-253).

Suberites spirastrelloides, n. sp.

? Suberites wilsoni, var. albidus, Carter, A.M.N.H., February,
1886, p. 116.

The single specimen is massively lobose, compressed to a
narrow ridge at the top. Surface warty below, slightly rugose
longitudinally above. Vents rather large, in close-set single
series on the ridge-like margin. Wide oscular tubes lead up to
the vents, running parallel up each flattened side just beneath
the surface in a very characteristic manner. Texture compact
but somewhat cavenious; scarcely compressible, with much coarse
sand internally. Colour internally, in spirit, sandy-yellow. (The
surface is now dark purple, but that this is due to artificial
staining, probably by some other sponge, is proved by the fact
that two of the cut surfaces have the same colour, and the colour
does not penetrate beyond the surface).

Skeleton, extremely confused, composed of slender spicules, for
the most part abundantly and irregularly scattered, but with a
slight tendency to collect together in loose fibres which may then

248 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

form an irregular reticulation. The dermal skeleton is rather lax
for a Suberites, composed of radiating tufts of similar spicules,
frequently interrupted by a delicate pore-bearing membrane.

Spicules, long, slender, styli or subtylostyli, straight or slightly
curved; with feebly developed and irregular heads or none at
all; usually fairly sharply pointed at the apex. Size tolerably
uniform throughout, say about 0-37 by O006 mm., with no
marked distinction between the dermal and deep spicules.

I have little doubt that this species is identical with Mr.
Carter's S. ivilsoni, var. albidus, though in the absence both of
proper description and specimen of the latter it is impossible to
be certain, and it seems safest to give it a distinct specific name.
The absence of the very remarkable and characteristic colour of
S. wilsoni appears to be sufficient reason for specific distinction
in this case.

R.N. 1128 (x).

Suberites difficilis, n. sp.

Sponge massive, rounded, lobulated, compressed. Vents?
Surface granular to subglabrous. Texture compact, corky,
scarcely compressible. Colour in spirit pale yellow (accidentally
stained pinkish on the outside).

Skeleton, internally composed of loose, irregular bands of rather
large spicules forming a very irregular network, the meshes of
which are filled with numerous much smaller spicules thickly
scattered through the soft tissues. Dermal skeleton composed
of dense brushes of the smaller spicules arranged radially at the
surface in the usual manner.

Spicules, of two very distinct sizes, though of course with
intermediate forms ; (a) relatively large, long and slender,
straight or nearly so, fusiform, tapering 'gradually to each
end, sharply pointed, without heads or with slightly developed
annular swellings at some little distance from the evenly rounded
base, size variable, averaging say about 0-9 by 0-01 mm., but
difficult to measure, as owing to their great length they are
generally broken in the section, (b) Of the same form as the
above but very much smaller, averaging say about 0-l 2 by
0-014 mm.

Catalogue of Norh-Calcareous Sponges. 249

This is an extremely difficult species to characterise, and may
perhaps be best recognised by the subreticulate character of the
main skeleton, and the two very different sizes of spicules of
which it is composed, together with the feebly developed heads
to the spicules, which are often simply stylote.

P.JV. 1129 (x); ?394.

[S//berltes parasiticus, Carter].

Saberites parasitica, Carter, A.M.N.H., February, 1886, p. 119.

Our knowledge of this species is altogether too insufficient to
justify its maintenance, the type being merely "a thin layer of
small pin-like spicules about 40 by 1 -6000th inch, together with
others of % Halichondria panicea about twice the length, parasiti-
cally covering a fucus." It is very possibly merely a young form
of some common species.

P.M. sp. 11 (" Suberites parasitica, C. Type;" Reg. 86-12-
15-110).

Genus Polymastia, Bowerbank.

Sponge massive, sessile, with more or less well -developed
mammiform processes arising from the upper surface. Without
marginal fringe of spicules. Spicules often collected in strands ;
often simply stylote.

Polymastia ? blcolor, Carter.

Polymastia bicolor, Carter, A.M.N.H., February, 1886, p. 119.

Polymastia blcolor, var. glomerata, Carter, A.M.N. H., February,
1886, p. 119.

This species is by no means a satisfactory one. It appears to
be intermediate in structure between the genera Suberites and
Polymastia, the well-developed mastoid processes of the latter
being represented by mere warts or tubercles not sharply distin-
guished from the body, such as one finds in some species of
Spirastrella. The strands of very long and stout spicules which
run up into the processes of a typical Polymastia are also
wanting, the larger spicules referred to by Mr. Carter by no
means coming up to the usual standard.

R.N. 289 (18 f; "slate-brown with a yellowish-brown tinge
in parts"); 538 (x, 19 f . ; "gallstone-yellow"); 878 (s. 9); 1 286
(18 f; " dull lemon-yellow ").

250 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

B.M. sp. 17 ("Polymastia bicolor Type," Reg. 86-12-15-97);
sp. 19 ("Polymastia bicolor, C. var. glomerata," Reg. 86-12-15-114).

Polymastia ? massalis, - Carter.

Polymastia massalis, Carter, A.M.N.H., February, 1886, p. 121.

This species appears to resemble P. bicolor in external form
and to differ from it chiefly in the smaller size of the principal
spicules. It is probably a mere variety.

B.M. sp. 20 ("Polymastia massalis, G," Reg. 86-12-15-53).

Polymastia crassa, Carter.

Polymastia bicolor, var. crassa, Carter, A.M.N.H., February.
1886, p. 120.

There are numerous specimens in the collection of a typical
Polymastia, with well-developed mastoid processes containing the
usual longitudinal bundles of very large and stout spicules,
besides the smaller spicules. These specimens appear to agree
sufficiently closely with Carter's Polymastia bicolor, var. crassa to
justify an identification. The species must, however, be separated
from P. bicolor, though whether it is distinct from previously
described species of Polymastia may be considered doubtful.

R.N. 273 (20 f. : "sand-brown, projections dull yellow"); -4-10
(s. 9, 21 f.; "pinkish-buff"); 1098 (xC); 1135 (x); 1146 (x);
1169.

B.M. sp. 18 ("Polymastia bicolor, C. var. crassa," Reg. 86-12-
15-39); d. 114 ("Polymastia bicolor, var. crassa," Reg. 87-7-11-29);
?d. 32 ("Polymastia bicolor,- Reg. S6-1 2-1 5-354).

Genus Cliona, Grant.

Suberitidse of boring habit, excavating narrow passages in
shells, etc.

It appears certain that the sponge sometimes outgrows the
shell which it attacks and then assumes a massive form (e.g.
Raphyrus griffithsii ).

Cliona celata, Grant.

Cliona celata, Grant, Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal,
I., 78 : II., 183, pi. 2, tig. 7.

Halichondria ? celata, Johnston, British Sponges, p. 125.

Catalogue of Non-Calcareous Sponges. 251

Hymeniacidon celata, Bowerbank, British Spongiadre, vol. ii.,
p. 212, vol iii., plate, xxxviii., tigs. 5, 6.

Cliona celata, Carter, A.M.N.H., December, 1886, p. 458.

I give only some of the more important references to the
literature of this common species. As regards the identification
of the Australian with the European form I rely upon Mr.
Carter's great experience. There happens to be only one
specimen in the present collection, pei'forating and inhabiting
a dead oyster shell, but I do not think the species is by any
means uncommon in Port Phillip. The sponge may be readily
recognised by its perforating habit and oidy pin-head spicules.

R.N. 452 (s. 9, 17 f.; "gallstone-yellow").

B.M. sp. 16 ("Cliona celata, Grant?" [Westernport] ; Reg.
86-12-15-135).

Family SPIRASTRELLID^.

Main skeleton confused or reticulate. Megascleres usually
tylostylote or stylote, occasionally becoming oxeote. Microscleres
some form of aster, often forming a dermal crust.

Genus Spirastrella, Schmidt.

Microscleres typically spined spirula? (spirasters) ranging to
double asters and irregular spherasters and spined microxea.

This interesting genus appears to have its head-quarters in
Australian waters and is represented in the collection by some
very remarkable and beautiful species.

Spirastrella spinispirulifer, Carter, sp.

Suberites spi?iispiru lifer, Carter, A.M.N.H., May, 1879, p. 345,
pi. xxviii., figs. 6, 7.

Suberites spinispirulifer, Carter, A.M.^.H., December, 1886,
p. 456.

This beautiful species may be easily recognised by its minute
spiral microsclere, resembling that of Trachycladus, but spined.
The external form is massive, solid ; the surface subglabrous but
may be warty ; the texture fairly compact and the colour in
spirit pale greyish-yellow.

R.N. 622 (x, 19 f ; " orange-ochraceous ").

B.M. sp. 10 ("Suberites spinispirulijera, C," Reg. 86-12-15-112).

252 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Spirastrella papulosa, Ridley and Dendy.

? Spirastrella cunctatrix, Carter, pars, A.M.N. H., February,
1886, p. 114.

Spirastrella cunctatrix, var. porcata, Carter, A.M.N. H., Febru-
ary, 1886, p. 115.

Spirastrella papulosa, Ridley and Dendy, A.M.N.H., December,
1886, p. 491.

Spirastrella papulosa, Ridley and Dendy, Challenger Monaxo-
nida, p. 232, pi. xli., tig. o ; pi. xlv., tigs. 11-1 1^.

Sponge massively lobose, compressed or subcylindrical, usually
with more or less warty but otherwise smooth and subglabrous
surface. Agents variable in size, may be large, grouped on
prominent parts. Texture firm, compact, corky, but penetrated
by many large oscular tubes. Colour in spirit usually dark
grey throughout. The surface is sometimes much infested by a
parasitic Actinozoon.

Skeleton, in the deeper parts dense and confused, composed
of abundant interlacing spicules, sometimes subfibrous and sub-
reticulate. Dermal skeleton of abundant similar but smaller
spicules, radially disposed, sometimes in pretty distinct brushes.

Megascleres, in the main skeleton rather long and slender,
straight or slightly curved, with inconspicuous or fairly distinct,
ovoid or rounded heads, with blunt or sharp apex ; averaging
about 046 by O0083 mm. In the dermal skeleton similar,
though perhaps with proportionally larger heads, but of much
smaller size, averaging say 02 by 0-004 mm.

Microscleres, spirasters of ordinary form, but as usual very
variable. Mostly rather long and slender, with three or four
slight bends, abundantly spinose, say about O05 by 0-012 mm.,
including the spines; varying to subglobostellate, up to 0"03
mm. in diameter. Scattered throughout, but most abundant at
the surface.

The skeleton arrangement and spiculation agree well with the
specimen of Spirastrella cunctatrix, var. porcata, in the British
Museum. To judge from B.M. d. 120, Mr. Carter has given the
length of the megascleres in his "Spirastrella cunctatrix" nearly
twice what it should be. In spite of a little difference in the
size of the megascleres, I think there can be no doubt of the

Catalogue of No7b~Calco ireous Sponges. 253

Victorian specimens being specifically identical with Spirastrella
papulosa, obtained by the Challenger in Port Jackson.*

R.N. 674 (s. 10); 896 (s. 10); 934 (x A); 1051 (x B). The
following also probably belong here, but they are mostly mere
pieces and do not show the vents; 300 (18 f. ; "dark slate");
421 (x, 19 f.; "olive"); 486 (s. 10, 8 f.; "olive-grey"); 537 (x,
19 f.; "gallstone-yellow"); 620 (x, 19 f.; "slate-grey"); 1156 (x).

B.M. ? d. 120 ("Spirastrella cunctatrix" [south coast of Aus-
tralia], Reg. 86-12-15-250); d. 125 (" Spirastrella cunctatrix, var.
porcata," Reg. 86-12-15-351).

Spirastrella papulosa, var. porosa, nov.

1 Spirastrella cunctatrix, Carter, pars, A.M.N. H., February,
1886, p. 113.

This variety is distinguished from the preceding by the sieve-
like oscular areas replacing the distinct separate vents. The
colour also appears to be lighter than is usual in the typical form
and rather brown or yellow than dark grey. I can detect no
difference in skeleton arrangement or spiculation. The best
specimen is the upper part of a large, erect, compressed, thickly
lobose sponge. The general surface is beset with large irregular
conuli, wide apart and with a beautiful pore-bearing membrane
stretched between ; (these strongly developed porous inhalant
areas may also be a varietal distinction). The upper margin
is truncated, giving rise to a broad, slightly depressed area,
perforated by innumerable small pores, beneath which the great
vertical oscular tubes terminate. The colour in spirit is grey.

R.N. 290 (18 f.; "wax-yellow"); 301 (18 f.; "snuff-brown ");
562 (x, 20 f.; " raw umber ").

B.M. 1 d. 120 ("Spirastrella cunctatrix^ Reg. 86-12-15-250).

Spirastrella robusta, Carter, sp.

Spirastrella cunctatrix, var. robusta, Carter, A.M.N.H., Feb-
ruary, 1886, p. 114.

This sponge is lobose, compressed, thick, with smooth and even
surface and small marginal vents. The texture is firm, compact
and leathery, and the colour in spirit pale yellow. The megas-

* In the Challenger Report the length of the spiraster is accidentally given as 0T>
instead of 0'OiJ mm.

254 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

cleres are tylostyli, measuring about 0-44 by O01 mm. and the
microscleres very robust spirasters of the ordinary form, by no
means confined to the surface of the sponge but densely crowded
throughout, intermingled with slenderer and probably young
forms of the same. The spirasters measure about O044 by
0 033 mm. (including the spines) when fully grown. This species
is certainly nearly related to Schmidt's S. cunctatrix.

R.N. 432 (x, 19 f.; "cadmium-orange"); 592 (x, 19 f.j "poppy-
red, shading to buff below"); 107S (x A).

B.AI. d. 121 ("Spristrella cunctatrix var. robusta." Reg. 86-12-
15-353).

Spirastrella fibrosa, n. sp.

Sponge sessile, massively lobose or irregularly rounded, or
tongue-shaped with narrow margin. Surface subglabrous,
minutely reticulate in parts, almost smooth or faintly conulose,
nodular or warty. Vents usually small but prominent, grouped
on upper parts, sometimes on small, conical, thin-walled projec-
tions. There may be a distinct cortex, but this appears to
depend upon the state of growth. Texture firm, compact (but
with large exhalant canals), corky, resilient. Colour in spii'it
pale yellow or white.

Skeleton. The main skeleton is an irregular and very wide-
meshed reticulation of stout, dense, compact spicular fibre.
The main lines of this fibre are about 0-36 mm. thick, and are
but sparingly interconnected by secondary lines in the deeper
parts of the sponge. As it approaches the surface, however, each
main fibre gives sives 0ff numerous slender branches at different
levels and these subdivide again and again until they end in
brushes of radiating spicules whose apices, intermingled with
abundant asters, sometimes from a definite dermal reticulation,
and sometimes merely a rather scanty armature of slightly
projecting points. There is no visible spongin and, although the
megascleres are mostly collected in the stout multispicular fibres
of the main skeleton, yet many of them are irregularly scattered
in the intervening ground-tissue.

Megascleres. Straight, slender styli, evenly rounded or very
slightly inflated at the base and gradually and sharply pointed at
the apex; of very uniform shape and size, measuring about 0*33
by 0 007 mm.

Catalogue of Non-Calcareous Sponges. 255

Microsderes. Very beautiful double asters with the abundantly
spiny ends separated by a well-developed, smooth, cylindrical
shaft. The ends vary from subglobostellate to Latrunculia-\\)s.e,
with two whorls of spines, the terminal whorl being smaller, a
condition especially distinct in the smaller and slenderer forms.
The larger forms measure about O05 mm. in total length, the
smooth shaft about one-third of the total length and O0083
mm. in diameter, and the heads about 0'029 mm. in transverse
diameter including the spines. The smaller forms vary a good
deal in their proportions but are relatively slenderer and with
longer shafts. The microscleres are abundantly scattered both
in the deeper parts of the sponge and in the dermal membrane,
but they do not form a continuous dermal crust.

This very beautiful and well-marked species appears to be
most nearly related to Carter's Latrunculia (Spirastrella) corticata,
said to come from the Red Sea, both in the arrangement of the
skeleton and in the form of the microscleres, but in the latter
the megascleres are oxeote. It is at once distinguished from
Schmidt's Suberites bistellatus by the absence of distinct heads to
the megascleres, and the well-developed, smooth shaft of the
microscleres, which form an interesting transition to the unequal-
ended discasters of Latrunculia.

R.N. 319 (18 f.; "orange-yellow"); 475 (x, 20 f.; "heliotrope-
purple, fading into a whitish tint below"); 642 (x, 20 f.; " orpi-
ment-orange, shading to buff below "); 1171 ; 1179.

Spirastrella areo/afa, n. sp.

Sponge sessile, massively lobose, with rounded margin, upon
which numerous small vents are scattered. The largest specimen
has been dried and now measures about 7^ inches high, 8 inches
long, and -14 inches thick ; it thus forms a large mass but it
appears to be only half of a divided specimen. Surface in spirit
subglabrous but more or less areolated or at least warty. In the
dry specimen the areolation is extremely distinct, especially
where the cortex is least contracted, the surface being marked
out in very distinct polygonal areoke about a quarter of an inch
in diameter, separated from one another by tine but sharp raised
boundaries, and each area with a slightly roughened raised centre.
On the rounded margin of the sponge many of the vents may be

256 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

seen to occupy each the centre of such an areola. Where the
surface is much contracted the polygonal outlines between the
areola? became much less distinct, and the surface may even
appear simply warty. The inhalant pores appear to be located
in the slight elevations which occupy the centres of the areola?
over the general surface ; the vents occupy the apices of similar
though more pronounced elevations on the margin of the sponge,
a condition which reminds one somewhat of the arrangement in
some species of Latrunculia.

There is a dense cortex 1 mm. thick or more. The texture in
spirit is very compact and corky, but slightly compressible and
resilient, and with large exhalant canals. A little very stout,
anastomosing fibre may be visible to the naked eye in the
interior. Colour in spirit pale dull yellow throughout. The dry
specimen is very hard, tough and incompressible, and of a pale
"sponge brown" colour.

Skeleton. The main skeleton is a very sparse and irregular
network of very stout, ill-defined fibres or tracts of densely
agglomerated megascleres. The very wide spaces intervening
between these tracts are rather sparingly occupied by loosely and
irregularly scattered megascleres. The cortical skeleton is very
dense, the deeper part consists of megascleres lying confusedly in
every position, in the more superficial part the megascleres are
arranged more or less at right angles to the surface. Sometimes
the lines of demarcation between the adjacent areola? appear to
be continued right through the cortex, as shown in vertical
section by the peculiar arrangement of the megascleres, which
diverge from the dividing plane like hair at the parting.

Megascleres; slender, slightly curved tylostyli, with well-
developed heads inflated at a short distance from the base as in
many species of Suberites ; apex varying from bluntly rounded to
sharp-pointed ; size about 04 by O006 mm.; perhaps a trifle
shorter in the outer part of the cortex, while in the deeper parts
numerous long slender hair-like forms, with relatively large
heads, occur amongst the ordinary ones, of which they are
probably simply young individuals.

Microscleres ; of two chief forms, both doubtless modifications
of the spiraster ; (a) short, straight, rod-like, thickly covered
with small spines and blunt at the extremities ; size about 0-015

Catalogue of Non^Calcareous Sponges. 257

by 0-003 mm. including the spines ; (b) longer and slenderer
spined microxea, slightly curved or even angulate, measuring
about 0-06 by 0-003 mm. These spicules remind one forcibly of
those of Higginsia. The microscleres are abundantly scattered
both in the deeper tissues and in the dermal membrane, but they
are so small that they form no conspicuous part of the skeleton.
The short rod-like forms are the most plentiful.

R.N. 479 (x, 20 f.; "orange-chrome"); 1187; also dried
specimen.

Genus Pronax, Gray.*

Sponge of boring habit ; megascleres tylostylote, microscleres
asters (spirasters).

Pronax carteri, n. sp.

Vioa johnstonii, Carter, A.M.N.H., December, 1886, p. 458.

The sponge described by Carter is certainly quite distinct from
Schmidt's Vioa johnstonii, having tylostylote in place of oxeote
megascleres, in virtue of which it falls under Gray's genus
Pronax. As I have seen no specimen I must content myself
with referring to Carter's original description.

ADDENDA.

The following have, owing to the difficulty of determining
their true position, been accidentally omitted from their proper
places in the first two instalments of this catalogue.

Genus Rhaphisia.

(Continued from Part I., p. 257).

Rhaphisia pallida, n. sp.

Sponge massive, sessile, irregular. Surface uneven ; rugose,
warty or conulose, but subglabrous. Vents inconspicuous,
scattered on prominent parts. Texture compact but compressible
and resilient, soft. Colour in spirit pale greyish-yellow or white.
In life, usually at any rate, pale grey.

Skeleton very lax and rather scanty ; consisting of slender
megascleres loosely scattered, or in loose whisps which run

* Proc. Zool. Soe. Lond. , 1867, p. 526.

17

258 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

mainly towards the surface and end in the conuli. Very
loosely and irregularly reticulate in parts. No dermal skeleton.

Megascleres ; long and slender, usually more or less curved,
with variable ends ; strongylote, oxeote or stylote. Size very
variable, commonly about 0-45 by 0-0055 mm.

Microscleres ; numerous long, hair-like rhaphides; scattered
and in loose bundles of very variable length ; sometimes about
0-2 mm. long, but often more or less.

R.N. 314 (18 f.; " very light grey-buff''); 621 (x, 191; "smoke-
grey"); 737 (x B; "pale grey-slate"); 879 (s. 9); 982 (s. 1).
1 527 (x, 20 f ; " buff-pink "); ? 1015 (x B).

Genus Stylotrlchophora.

Stylotrichophora rubra, Dendy.

(Continued from Part I., p. 260).

The following also belong to this species :

R.N. 510 (x, 20 f.; "coral-red"); 561 (x, 20 f.; "poppy-red");
1043.

Genus Pseudodathria, n. gen.

Skeleton reticulate, the libres composed of smooth styli
cemented together by spongin; with immense numbers of short
spined styli scattered through the soft tissues and forming a
dermal crust, but none truly echinating the fibre although often
lying alongside it. No microscleres.

This genus is proposed for the reception of Carter's Halichon-
dria compressa, regarded by its describer as " incertce sedis." I
was at first misled by the remarkable small, curved spined styli,
and their irregularly scattered arrangement into supposing that
the species might be nearly related to Higgi?isia, and therefore
omitted it from the Ectyonince, amongst which I have now little
doubt that it should take its place as an aberrant form, inter-
mediate in some respects between Clathria and Pliunohali-
chondria.

The species might, according to definition, be included in
Topsent's genus Yvesia* but that appears to me to be a somewhat
heterogeneous assemblage which will certainly have to be recon-

* Campagnes scientifiques du Prince de Monaco. Fascicule II., p. 102.

Catalogue of Non-Calcareous Sponges. 259

sidered. Meanwhile as Yvesia is said to have normally diactinal
smooth megascleres (though Topsent mentions two exceptions)
we may at any rate keep the present species apart.

Pseudodathria compressa, Carter sp.

Halichondria compressa, Carter, A.M.N.H., December, 1886,
p. 450.

This is a very remarkable and easily recognised species,
evidently by no means uncommon in the neighbourhood of Port
Phillip Heads. The compressed, but thick, flabellate form, with
broad, vent-bearing margin, is very characteristic. The rather
slender fibres, composed of smooth, straight, slender styli held
together by spongin, run chiefly towards the surface, the
secondary connecting lines being feebly developed. Mr. Carter
speaks of the smooth styli as being curved, but this must be a
mistake, for even in his type specimen they are characteristically
straight. The short, curved, very richly spinecl styli, abundantly
scattered throughout the sponge, and forming a dense dermal
crust, are also very characteristic.

R.N. 371 (18 f.; "orange-red"); 541 (x, 19 f.j "vermilion");
543 (x, 19 f.; " saturn-red ") ; 590 (x, 19 f.; "orange-chrome");
632 (x, 19 f. ; " orpiment-orange below deep chrome"); 1041
(xB).

B.M. sp. 28 ("Halichondria compressa, C. Type;" Reg. 86-12-
15-9).

17a

Art. XVI.— Oh the Spectra of the Alkalies.
By L. Rum mel.

(Communicated by R. L. J. Ellery, C.M.G., F.R.S.)
[Read 12th November, 1896].

In the paper I venture to lay before the Royal Society of
Victoria, I have attempted to detei'mine the values of the wave
lengths of the spectrum lines of the alkalies, as formed into
series by Kaiser and Runge, by means of a new formula. To

y

this formula I have given the shape Xn=x + —^ , A meaning

the wave length, ;/ a whole number, commencing with 2, and
x, y, z 3 constants. It requires three equations to determine
these constants. Supposing three members of a series, viz.,
a, b, c, are known to form the series 3, 4, 5, then we get the
three equations :

b=x+y

lb - z

which give the solution :

„_Q ll2(d-c)

16(a-b)-7(a-c)

(«-J)(9-g)(16-g)

7

y

x = a- •*

9-2

If the numerals are respectively 4, 5, 6, the values are :
180(b-c)
20(<z - b) - 9(« - c)
_(a-b)(l6-z)(25-z)
J 9

On the Spectra of the Alkalies. 261

Different combinations of numerals will of course require
different values for a solution, but these are easily determined by
deducting their square numbers and multiplying the differences
respectively.

I shall refer to the three constants by calling x the root,
because it is identical in value to Balmer's constant; y the ampli-
tude, because its square root gives the final number of the series;
and z the excentricity, as it determines the shape of the curve.

To ascertain the numerals of a series generally requires
repeated trials. If z turns out negative, of course the numerals
are wrongly chosen, but even in the case of its acquiring a
positive value, the final test applied consists in working out
the values and to select the numerals, that accord best with the
experimental values. I have thus been forced to change the
numerals, as given by Kaiser and Runge, in many instances.

A second difficulty is offered by the degree of exactness of the
experimental values. The latter have been supplied by Kaiser
and Runge, Liveing and Dewar, Lecoq do Boisbeaudran and
Snow, and they do not always accord well. But even the values
of one observer may greatly differ in exactness and may cause
considerable discrepancies, which will show themselves most
markedly in the red and ultrared rays.

Only a few lines do not seem to fit into any series. These
lines are all of a slight intensity, they differ sometimes in aspect
from the other lines or are omitted by other observers. I there-
fore conclude them to be due to impurities.

Several' series of the same metal may be united either by the
same root or the same excentricity or by both combined. In
the Table of Wave Lengths I have bracketed those values.

The spectrum lines of each alkali metal seem to form two
groups, divided by a large gap or interval, and appear to form
two octaves, differentiated by their amplitudes especially. These
gaps proceed towards the red with increasing atomic weight.

During the progress of my work T have been assisted by Mr.
R. L. J. Ellery, late Director of the Melbourne Observatory,
who aided me in solving difficult algebraical questions, and
by Mr. W. Sutherland, the author of important works on
molecular physics. To these gentlemen I hereby offer my
grateful acknowledgment.

262 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.
Lithium. The three equations, expressing the 3 series, are :

1.8*97+ 15°" =X-

?r — 5-88o

1 QJ.Ofi

2. 3497+ , ^=A»

n- - 3 -bo

3. 2297+ , 5^„=X"

«a- 2-6535

The line 3838 does not agree closely, but fits exactly into a

Banner formula, viz., A" = 3731 x " . the head-line of which

n1— 4

is 6708. The series, however, is not continuous.
Sodium is represented by 6 equations, viz. :

1. «7M + _»1» i"

;r - boo

2. 4072 +-?»" -X-

n — b-ob

3. 4085 + ..18fL = A"

;r- 4-532

4. 4082-5+ ,183A3 =X»

rr - 4-532

5. 2416-7+ a59^A1=X"

n - 2201

6. 2416-7+ a5903^m=Xw

«" - 2-201

The two lines 5676 and 5670 are omitted as most likely
belonging to a foreign metal, perhaps Titanium.
Potassium likewise furnishes 6 equations :
, ,„„„.«. 18865 =x„

= \n
= \"
= \»
= X»

33 = A"

1 n1- 1-022

2.

4562

18742
«•- 1-022

3.

4578

18170
«2- 1-153

4.

4566

18062
' »a- 1-153

5.

2860

8151
+ ?r- 2-133

6.

2860

8133

+ ^ -^—

TABLE OF WAVE LENGTHS OF THE ALKALIES.

_

LITHIUM.

SODIUM.

POTASSIUM.

RUBIDIUM.

CAESIUM.

A.

1 & 2.

B.

3.

B.

1 & 2.

B.

3&4.

B

5 &6.

B.

1 &2.

B.

3 & 4.

B.

5& 6.

B.

1 & 2.

B.

3&4.

B.

1 &2.

B.

3& 4.

B.

2

6708

6708

5896)
5890]

5896
5890

10908\
10855/

11550
10860

10927\
10877/

12200
11550

7226)
7215/

7699?

7666?

14162)
13876)

14750
13180

7562)
7401)

8450?

26317\
24923/

8341\
7945/

8330

3

83231
6104/

8110
6104

3233

3233

11696\
11669/

11320

8200)
8188/

8200
8188

3303\
3301/

3303
3302

6936)
6909/

6939
6911

6893)
6868/

6911?

4047 \

4044J

4047
4044

7729)
7602)

7950
7811

4216)
4202)

4216

4202

9099\
8743/

9000
8820

4593)
4555/

4593

4555

4

4972)
4602/

4972
4602

2741

2741

6161\
6155/

6161
6155

5689)
5683/

5688
5683

2853

2853

5832)
5812/

5832
5813

5802)
5783)

5802
5783

3447)
3446)

3447
3446

6299)
6207)

6299
6207

3592)
3587)

3592
3587

6974\
6724/

6974
6724

3889\
3877/

3889
3877

5

4273\
4132/

4273
4132

2562

2563

5153)
5148/

5154
5149

4984\
4979/

4984
4979

2679

2680

5360)
5343 j

5360
5343

5340)
5323)

5340
5324

3217)
3215)

3218
3217

5725)
5647/

5724

5648

3351 \
3349/

3351
3349

6214\
6010/

6213
6011

3617)
3612/

3617
3612

6

3986\

3914J

3986
3915

2475

2475

4752)
4749/

4752
4748

4669)
4666/

4669
4665

2593

2594

5113\
5098)

5113

5098

5100\
5084]

5100
5084

3101)
3100)

3102
3102

5433\
5362/

5432
5363

5843\
5663/

5845
5664

7

3845\
3794/

3838
3795

2425

2426

4545\
4542/

4546
4543

4499\
4494/

4500
4494

2544

2544

4967)
4952)

4965
4952

4957"!
4943]

49E7
4943

3034)
3033]

3535

5263\
5196/

5260
5195

5637\
5468/

5635
5466

8

3720 1

3719

2394

2395

4422)
4420/

4424
4420

4394)
4391)

4394
4391

2514

2512

4874)
48591

4871
4857

4867)
4853/

4864
4851

2992)
2991 (

2992

5155)
5091/

5162

5086

5506)
5345)

5502
5346

9

3671 j

3671

2373

2374

4343 )
4341/

4344

?

4325)
4323/

4326
?

4810}
4796 5

4809
4797

4805 (
4792 j

4804
4789

2963

2963

5082\
5020/

5086
5022

5419)
5262)

5411

5258

10

2357

2359

4764)
4751 J

4760

2943

2943

5357")

5346?

11

5313\

5311

Column A contains the serial number. Columns B, B the exparimental wave lengths. Columns 1, 2, 3, 4, 3, 5. 6 the calculate! values.

On the Spectra of the Alkalies. 263

The head-lines of 5 and 6 differ greatly from the experimental
values. The equations

7822

5. 2865+ /"^■X*

rr - 2-3b2

6. 2865+ ,78~ =A"

n -2-0/1

would put them and the other lines into perfect accord, excepting

the two pairs < 0(l/, and-; „,„- which would be reduced to
r | 344b I 321 < ,

\ ^J-'^Q auc^ ' °->10 Perhaps an error has been committed.

Rubidium, Three of the lines, viz., 6160, 6071 and 5654 are
not included in my equations. The first of the three lines looks
suspiciously like the Sodium line 6161, and the other two lines
may be due to Iron or Titanium. The four equations are :

21171

1. 4815 +->-ii'j =A"

n — i't oo

0 .„_Q - , 20649 ,„

2. 47o9-5 + — — - — ^=X"

?i- - I -735

8452

3. 2981 +— 2l±L—=\n

tr - 2T5o

8428

Caesium. Only one line, viz., 5579 has not been included in
the four equations which are :

rr — 2-b4

2. 4965+ 2231f* =*"

n - 2-84

9564

3. 3199+ m l\=\"

tr - 2 T 4

949 2

4. 3199+ , =A"

n - 2

In conclusion I may say, that the above formulas do not
pretend to be final, but to draw the attention of physicists to a
novel way of ascertaining the members of the series of other
spectra and to determine, which lines are essential and which are
due to foreign bodies.

Art. XVII. — On the Variations in the Spinal Nerves
of Hyla aurea.

By Miss Geokgina Sweet, B.Sc.

(Communicated by Professor Baldwin Spencer).
[Eead 12th November, 1896.]

During the years 1893 and 1895 there appeared two papers by
Dr. Hermann Adolphi, on the Variations of the Spinal Nerves
of three of the European Anura, Bufo variabilis, Pelobates
Jitsa/s, and Rana esadenla. Comparatively little being known of
the more minute details in the morphology of the Australian
Amphibia, it was the wish of Professor Spencer that I should
undertake a similar work in connection with some of our
Australian forms. Accordingly, in April of this year, I
commenced my observations on the nerves of Hyla aurea, the
common green frog of Victoria, in the Biological Laboratory at
the Melbourne University, and my thanks are due to Professor
Spencer for his kindly help and advice given during the progress
of this work.

On each side of the spinal column there are given off generally,
ten nerves, as in the European forms, Rana esculenla* and Bufo
variabilis.^ The first nine pairs, as usual pass through the
intervertebral foramina, and the tenth pair through the canalis
coccygeus in the urostyle. Occasionally in Hyla aurea there is
found an eleventh nerve on each side, which, like the tenth to
which it is posterior, passes out by a foramen in the urostyle.

As in the Anura generally, there is no representative of the
first spinal nerve or sub-occipital, shown by Furbringer to be
present in the Urodeles, where it passes out between the skull
and first vertebra ; and in Pipa dorsigera, among the Anura,
there piercing the first vertebra.

Nerve II., the Hypoglossal, is somewhat thin, and passes out
between vertebrae I. and II. It then runs in a straight line

* Ecker : Anatomy of the Frog (English Translation, Haslam), p. 175.
+ Adolphi: Morphologisches Jahrbuch, 1893, p. 316.

Va/riations in Spinal Nerves of Hyla aurea. 265

toward the side of the body for some distance, and turning
sharply, often at an angle of almost ninety degrees, runs
forwards to supply the muscles of the tongue. In a very few-
cases I observed that the hypoglossal divided into two parts
which united again a little farther on, leaving a space through
which the carotid artery passed towards the head. Between the
hypoglossal and pneumogastric nerves there passed in one or
two instances a twig of communication which, however, was very
tine. Haslam mentions a similar connection as having been
described by Hoffmann for Rana* though he himself has not
noticed it. The relations of II. with the brachial plexus are
varied. Most frequently II. has no connection with the
brachial plexus as stated by Adolphi for Bufo variabilis. Some-
times a branch passes from II. to join either III. itself, or else
the coraco-clavicular branch of III. (cf. Rana esatlen/a, as stated
by Weidersheim, Fiirbringer, and Hoffmann), f In a few instances
in Hxla aurea, we find that II. is fused with III., and where
this is the case, a nerve corresponding in destination to II., and
composed also chiefly of IT. fibres, leaves III. to run forwards at
the same position as that in which II. ordinarily turns forwards.
In one specimen, II., divided into two equal parts at its exit
from the intervertebral foramen, the anterior half passing out
freely, while the posterior half fused with III. as above,
leaving it again to join the anterior part as it turned forwards.
According to Ecker j this fusion is not uncommon in Rana.

III. is the largest of all the spinal nerves. It passes outwards
from its origin between vertebra? II. and III., and forms the
large Brachial nerve, which supplies the muscles and skin of the
arm. While in the trunk, it gives off a branch of considerable
size, forming the Coraco-clavlcularls nerve, which supplies the
Deltoldeus, Sterno-radlalis, Transverso-scapularis, and Obliquus
abdominis Inter mis muscles. As stated above, a branch from II.
sometimes joins III. or the coraco-clavicular. Very rarely I
found the coraco-clavicular nerve originating from II., with only
a small twig from III. Where II. fused with III. entirely, the
coraco-clavicular is given off at the same place as II. passes away,

* Ecker : loc. cit., p. 183.

t Ecker : loc. cit., p. 183, also Adolphi, loc. cit., 1893, p. 316.

I Ecker: loc. cit., p. 187.

266 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

and there may be a bi'anch of communciation between II. and
the coraco-clavicular after they have left III. Generally also,
a branch passes between III. and IV., most frequently running
from III. to IV. Sometimes also IV. is found fused with III.
at one point, or rarely, for some distance. Beyond its connection
with II. or IV., where such exists, the brachial nerve sends from
its posterior side a large branch to the Latissimus dorsi muscle,
with a twig to the Infraspinatus muscle. Then a nerve passes
off supplying the skin of the axilla and dorsal surface of the
upper arm. A short distance further a large branch runs off to
the pectoral muscles, while on its anterior face, the brachial
nerve sends off branches to the Delioideus muscle. Just beyond
the origin of these nerves, and as the brachial enters the arm,
or sometimes somewhat before, it divides, forming the radialis
and ulnaris nerves.

The branches supplied by these two nerves are as follows : —
The ulnar nerve passes along the upper arm, merely giving off
one or two small branches to the skin of the inner surface. Just
above the elbow it gives off a large branch, the Cutaneus anti-
brachii inferior (dorsalis), which supplies chiefly the skin of the
dorsal surface of the hand. The Ulnaris continues its course into
the forearm and there gives off the Cutaneus antibrachii superior
nerve, passing to the skin of the inner side of the forearm.
Much lower down, the Ulnaris divides into two — the smaller
branch — Ulnaris medialis — supplies some of the flexor muscles
and digit V. : while the larger — Ulnaris lateralis — supplies
the adjacent sides of the digits II., III., IV., and V. : sending
also a branch to the flexor muscles of the palm.

The radial nerve soon after its origin from the brachial gives
off twigs to the Delioideus and Subscapular muscles. Immedi-
ately below this is the Ramus cutaneus superior which supplies
the skin of the outer surface of the upper arm. Three twigs are
then given off" to the Triceps muscle, two of these being close
to the Ramus cutaneus superior, the other arising much lower.
"When it reaches the forearm the Radial nerve divides into the
Ramus radialis medialis — which supplies some of the extensor
muscles of the hand, the skin, and ends in digit V. — and the
Ramus radialis lateralis which supplies other of the extensor
muscles — and also by bifurcating branches, adjacent sides of the
digits II., III., IV. and V.

Variations in Spinal Nerves of Hyla awrea. 267

Nerve IV. passes outwards from its foramen between vertebra?

III. and IV., and runs near, and almost parallel to III., with
which, as before mentioned, it has a communicating branch, or
with which it may sometimes fuse for a longer or shorter distance.

IV. is a thin nerve, never even approximating III. in size, as
contrasted with Bufo variabilis in which IV. is stated by
Adolphi* to be sometimes the thickest in the body. It gives off
branches to the Transversa-scapularis major, very rarely one to
the coraco-clavicular, and always, a branch which runs through
the Obliquus abdominis internum to the Rectus abdominis muscle
where it branches, and finally ends in the skin, being known as
the Thoracicus inferior nerve.

Nerves V. to VII. are thin. They pass out obliquely back-
wards and outwards, and then downwards, on the ventral surface
of the Intertransversarius muscle, and piercing the Obliquus
interims divide forming the Ramus muscularis, and Ramus
cutaneus abdominalis, supplying therefore the muscles and skin
of the body wall. I have seen no trace of communication
between V. and the brachial plexus, such as Adolphi has
observed in Pelobates juscus. f But in one case, there was on
both sides of the body a well-defined branch passing from VII.
to join VIII. above the origin of the ileo-hypogastric nerve.

Nerves VIII. to XI. form the sacral plexus. They pass out
from the vertebral column and run backwards parallel with the
urostyle into the pelvis, giving rise to the ileo-hypogastric, crural,
and sciatic nerves, besides branches to the alimentary canal,
oviduct and bladder. Nerve VIII. is generally somewhat thin,
and in the great majority of cases forms the Ileo-hypogastricus
nerve without any assistance from IX., though in a few
instances fibres of IX. enter VIII. above the origin of the
ileo-hpyogastric, and in one case, two ileo-hypogastrics were
present, one composed of VIII. fibres only, the other of IX.
fibres only, both having the same destination. In each case
where IX. enters into the composition of the ileo-hypogastric,
VIII. is somewhat thinner than usual, but VIII. is also thinner
when IX. has no connection whatever with the ileo-hypogastric.
This nerve divides as in Rana into two branches, the Ramus

* Morph. Jahr. xxii., 1895, p. 451. t Loc. cit. xxii., 1895, p. 451.

268 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

cutaneus abdominalis, which pierces the Obliquus interims muscle
on its way to the skin, and the Ramus muscularis, supplying the
abdominal muscles. The rest of the VIII. fibres pass backward
to join the sacral plexus. Nerves IX. 'and X. are thick, IX.
being generally the thicker of the two. The crural nerve
generally consists of fibres from VIII. and IX. in almost equal
proportions, and may contain fibres from X. or not, according as
X. joins IX. above or below the origin of the Cruralis.
Occasionally the crural nerve may consist chiefly of IX. fibres
with a very small branch from VIII., or more seldom of chiefly
VIII. fibres with very few from IX. Very rarely, the crural
nerve may be composed of IX. fibres only, the whole of VIII.
then forming the ileo-hypogastric, or more often, the cruralis
consists of VIII. fibres only, in which case VIII. sends down also
a branch to enter the sciatic nerve. As in Rana, the crural nerve
runs out to the thigh and there lies upon the Ilio-psoas muscle
in an angle between the Adductor maguus, and the Rectus femoris
anticus. By far its larger branch, the Ramus cutaneus femoris
supplies the skin while other branches supply the Adductores
longus and bfevis, Ilio-psoas, Vastus inlernus, and sometimes the
Rectus femoris anticus and pectineus. From the fusion of IX. and
X. arises the sciatic nerve, which supplies all those parts of the
leg to which the cruralis does not send branches. It may or may
not contain any fibres from VIII. according to the manner in
which VIII. is connected with the sacral plexus, i.e., whether it
joins IX. above the origin of the crural from IX., or joins the
crural itself.

The sciatic nerve most frequently consists of almost equal
quantities of IX. and X alone, though often VIII. fibres enters
into its composition and rather less frequently XL fibres, while
very rarely indeed X. forms the bulk of the sciatic, which then
also contains very few IX. fibres; or it may be chiefly IX., in
which case X. is a thin nerve, and VIII. fibres are always
present. The sciatic nerve runs backwards and enters the thigh
having almost the same relations as in Rana. While still in the
body it gives. off a branch — Ramus cutaneus femoris posterior —
which supplies the skin of the ventral and inner sides of the
thigh ; and also sends a twig to the Rectus internus minor. In
its course down the thigh, the sciatic sjives off several branches

Variations va Spinal Nerves of Hyla aurea. 269

to the Semimembranosus, to both heads of the Semitendinosus,
and to its posterior portion, to the inner surface and body of the
Adductor magnus, to the Biceps, and to the Rectus internus major.
Beneath the Biceps the sciatic divides, forming the Tibialis and
Peroneus. The former passes down the leg to the foot, giving off
nerves supplying the skin, the Gastrocnemius, the Tibialis posticus,
the flexors of the fingers, the Abductor hallucis, and lower down
divides into two nerves, the one supplying the ventral surface of
the digits, and the other the deep or under-surface of the muscles
of the sole. The second division of the sciatic, the peroneal,
gives off immediately after its origin, nerves to the skin. It then
divides into two — one half lies between the surrounding muscles
and gives off branches to the Tibialis anticus, Peroneus, and
Flexores tarsi anterior -And posterior. The other half runs straight
through the substance of the Extensor cruris brevis, to which it
gives off a small branch, and continues clown to the ankle, where
it joins the other half, close to the bone, and below the Flexor
tarsi posterior. Just before it unites, however, a branch is given
off running to the skin and extensors of digits IV. and V.,
while the large nerve, formed by the junction, runs down to
supply the extensors of digits I., II. and III., and the skin of the
toes. This peculiar branching and junction of the peroneal nerve
would appear to be the same as that described by Ecker fur
Pa/ia* — where the Peroneus medialis joins the Peroneus lateralis,
forming a common stem, the peroneus communis inferior.

The Xlth. nerve is a thin nerve, and may have a direct or an
indirect connection with the sacral plexus. In the former case,
in which XL always take some part in the formation of the
sciatic nerve, the whole nerve may enter X., or it may join X.
by two or more of its own branches, either passing entirely into

X. in this way, or sending down a branch which has an indirect
communication with X. This latter means of connection is by
far the most frequent, and is seen in instances where branches of

XI. join branches of X. or of the sciatic, often forming a net-
work.

Nerve XII., which Aclolphi mentions as occurring in one per
cent, cases in Bufo variabilis, and very rarely in Pelobates fuscus,

* Efker : loc. cit. , p. 196.

270 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

I have found present in 3-2 per cent, cases in Hyla aurea,
in each of which it either joins XI. directly or joins the network
formed by the branches of X. and XI. This plexus supplies
branches to the Coccygeus and Levator ani muscles, and to the
bladder, cloaca, and oviduct ; while, in addition, the last three
seem sometimes to have nerve fibres from XT. only.

The thickness of a nerve is an essential element in deciding
which is its more primitive, and which its more advanced,
condition. I have therefore drawn up a series of tables com-
parable to those made by Adolphi for Bnfo variabilis and Pelo-
bates fusais.

As a basis for the valuation, I have taken (1) the most
frequently occurring thickness of nerve VI., the central nerve of
those three which do not send any fibres to the limbs, as thickness
4. As in Bufo variabilis, nerves V., VI., and VII. have generally
very nearly the same thickness, and as a rule in animals of
approximately equal size, these three nerves have also about the
same thicknesses. VJI. is generally the same thickness as V. and

VI. sometimes slightly thicker or thinner. In the one case in
which I found any connection between it anil the sacral plexus,

VII. had one of the smaller thicknesses noted for that nerve.
(2) The most frequently occurring thickness of nerve IX., in the
aacral plexus, is represented as thickness 9. The figures 0 to 19
show, of course, only the relative thickness of the nerves, though
in such a manner that for each increase in the absolute thickness
of -1 millimetre, there is an increase of 1 in the relative thickness ;
e.g., thickness 4 corresponds to -3 millimetres, thickness 5 to "4
millimetres and so on.

So that this may be clearer I have drawn a curve showing
the exact value of the separate thicknesses 0 to 19. Along the
horizontal line are placed the numbers of the relative thicknesses
consecutively, while the vertical represents the actual value of
those separate thicknesses, increased some twenty times.

Variation* in Spinal Nerves of Hyla aurea. 271

13 h S 6 J 8 f lo It 1% 15 fU /5~ t6 /y /? /?

Fi*. A

So far as I am able to judge from the data given by Adolphi,
the numbers thus arrived at should be quite comparable with his.

I have examined 125 specimens of Hyla aurea, and instead of
regarding, as Adolphi has done, each specimen as yielding two
separate observations, one for each side, I have considered it as
one observation, or where the two sides differ from one another
as two half observations. This does not interfere with the
comparison of the two sets of tables, as the percentage relations
are not affected thereby. The following results are brought
together in Table A.*

Nerve XII., as I have mentioned above, was found in 3'2 per
cent, of all cases — of these 2*4 per cent, had thickness 1, and #8
per cent, thickness 2.

Nerve XL varies in thickness from 1 to 6 — The majority of
cases, 88 -8 per cent, were divided between thicknesses 2 and 3,
the former having 46*4 per cent., the latter 42-4 per cent.
Thickness 4 and over occur but seldom. This nerve was
present in every case, as constrasted with Bufo variabilis.^

In Nerve X. we find a wide range of thickness, viz., from 3 to
12. The majority, 82-4 per cent, are found among thicknesses
7 to 10. Thicknesses 4 to 6 are seldom seen, and 3, 11, and 12
very seldom.

* All Tables referred to are placed at the end of the memoir.
t hoc. cit., 1893, p. 321.

272 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Nerve IX. has thicknesses 6 to 11 and 16, the latter, however,
occurring only in one out of the 125 cases. 85 ■ 6 per cent, of
all cases have thickness 8 to 10, the greater number of these
having thickness 9.

Nerve VIII. Thicknesses 3 to 8 are present : 3 to 5 being-
most frequent, occurring in 88 per cent, of all cases — of these
39-2 per cent, have thickness 4. Thicknesses 6, 7, 8, occur in
6, 4, and 2 per cent, of cases respectively.

Nerve VII. varies in thickness from 2 to 5. Thicknesses 2
and 5 are seldom met with — while thickness 3 occurs in 27' 2
per cent., and thickness 4 in 65-6 per cent, of all cases, these
two thicknesses having thus a total of 92-8 per cent.

Nerve VI. Thicknesses 3 to 6 occur, 5 and 6, however, but
rarely — thickness 3 was found in 36 per cent., and thickness 4
in 59*2 per cent, of all cases — total for thicknesses 3 and 4 being
thus 95-2 per cent.

Nerve V. varies from 1 to 5 in thickness: 91-2 per cent, of
the cases having thickness 3 or 4, while thicknesses 1 and 2
occur very seldom.

Nerve IV We find here thicknesses 2 to 6 of which 2 and 6
are each only met with in -8 per cent, of cases. Thicknesses 3
and 4 are equally frequent, each occurring in 44 per cent, of all
cases, while in 10- 4 per cent, of cases we find thickness 5.

Nerve III. has a considerably greater thickness than IV., the
smallest thickness seen here being 7, and that only in one
instance (-8 per cent.)

On the other hand, the greatest thickness seen was 19, this
also occurring in only one instance (-8 per cent.). Of the inter-
mediate thicknesses, I observed from 9 to 15 only, of which 80-8
per cent, cases were distributed between thicknesses 11, 12 and
13; 12, the most frequent, being found in 40 per cent, of all cases.

Nerve II. varies in thickness from 3 to 6. By far the greatest
number of instances 79*2 per cent., or about three-fourths, have
thickness 4, while thickness 5 occurs in 12 per cent, of cases;
thicknesses 3 and 6 are not often found in connection with
nerve II.

In comparing Table A with the corresponding Table for Bufo
variabilis,* the following are the principal differences noticeable : —

* Adolphi, loc. cit.. p. 321.

Variation* in Spinal Nerves of Hyla aurea. 273

While in Bufo variabilis^ nerve XII. only occurs in one per cent,
of all cases, in Hyla mora, it was noted in 3-2 per cent. Nerve
XI., which was found to be absent in 4"5 per cent, cases in Bufo
variabilis, was never absent in Hyla aurea, and while in the
latter, the smallest thickness (1) is very rare (1-6 per cent.), the
next thickness being the most common, in Bufo variabilis the
smallest is the most frequent (36-5 per cent).

In Hvla aurea, nerve X. has a much wider range of thickness
than in Bufo variabilis, and while in the latter the greatest
number of cases, have the greatest thickness noted for that nerve
(9), in Hyla aurea we find that the greatest number of cases
have thickness 8, which is in the centre of the range for that
nerve (3 to 12), the number of cases in which other thicknesses
are found gradually increasing up to 27 "2 per cent, cases for
thickness 8, and then gradually decreasing again. A similar
difference is seen when we compare the percentages for nerve
IX. In Bufo variabilis we again find the greatest thickness 9,
in the greatest number of cases (54 per cent.), the percentage
occurrence increasing with the increasing thickness up to that
point, while in Hyla aurea we see that the percentage increases
with an increase in thickness up to 9 in the centre of the range
for this nerve, and then diminishes with a further increase in
thickness. In nerve VIII. there is no marked difference. In
Bufo variabilis 97' 9 per cent, of the cases are divided between
the three least thicknesses (4 to 6), and in Hyla aurea 88 per
cent, are distributed between the three least thicknesses, which,
in this case, are 3 to 5. For nerves VII., VI. and V. in Bufo
variabilis we have no data for comparison, but in Hyla aurea we
find that for each nerve thicknesses 3 and 4 have by far the
greatest number of cases, 4 always preponderating in this respect
over 3.

Nerve IV. in Hyla atirea has a much more restricted range
than in Bufo variabilis, and while in this form, two-thirds of the
cases have the smallest thickness (4), in Hyla aurea thicknesses
3 and 4 are found in a total of 88 per cent, of all cases, the
smallest thickness (2) being very rare (-8 per cent.).

Nerve III. The differences between the percentages for this
nerve in the two species recall those noted in the case of nerves
X. and IX. While in Bufo variabilis the greatest number of

is

274 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

cases (95 per cent.) have the greatest thickness (12), in Hyla aurea
we find that the central thickness (12) of the range has the
greatest number of instances (40 per cent.), with a gradual
increase in percentage up to this, and then a gradual decrease.

It will be noticed that both nerves IX. and III. in Hyla aurea
reach a greater thickness than any other nerve in one case in
each nerve, and also that the 3 or 4 thicknesses below these
extremes are not met with.

Nerve II. In both Bufo variabilis and Hyla aurea the great
majority of instances have the smallest thickness but one, being
in the former, thickness 5, in the latter, thickness 4.

It has been found from observations on the larva; of several
of the Amira,! that in the tail of the larva are several pairs of
spinal nerves which disappear during metamorphosis. Between
this and the adult, intervene stages in which nerves X., XL and
XII., have in succession the following thicknesses 9, 4, 1; 8, 2, 0;
7, 1, 0, and sometimes 6, 0, 0. But since we must regard the
larval condition as similar to that of the ancestors of that
animal, the first of the above four stages is the most primitive,
and the last the most highly advanced. From this reduction of
the most posterior spinal nerves in order, we can deduce the most
primitive and the most advanced condition of spinal nerves
anterior to these. For this purpose it is necessary to proceed
from these most posterior nerves to those in front of them.

The following Tables, B, 1 to 28, show all the combinations of
thicknesses found in those specimens of Hyla aurea examined.

Tables B, 1 to 8 show the various thicknesses with which
nerve XII. occurs, but owing to the few specimens containing
examples of this nerve we cannot rely too much on results
obtained from them, unless as confirming other results.

1. While XII. decreases, XL increases. Thickness 1 of nerve
XII. is found with the higher thicknesses 3 and 5 of nerve XL,
while thickness 2 of XII. is only found with thickness 2 of
nerve XL

2. While XII. decreases, X. increases. Nerve XII., thickness
1, is only found with the higher thicknesses 6, 7, 8, 9, of nerve
X. ; and nerve XII., thickness 2, with nerve X., thickness 5.

; Adolphi : loc. cit., 1S93, p. 335.

Variations in Spinal Nerves of Hyla aiirca. 275

3. While XTI. decreases, IX. increases. Nerve XII., thick-
ness 2, is only found with nerve IX., thickness 9, while nerve
XII., thickness 1, is also found with nerve IX., thickness 11.

I. While XII. decreases, VIII. decreases also. Nerve XII.,
thickness 2, is found only with nerve VIII., thickness 5, while
nerve XII., thickness 1, is found also with nerve VIII.,
thickness 3.

5. While XII. decreases, IV. increases. Nerve XII., thick-
ness 2 is only found with nerve IV., thickness 3 ; while nerve
XII., thickness 1 is also found with nerve IV., thickness 4.

6. While XII. decreases, III. decreases also. Nerve XII.
only occurs with the central thicknesses of the series for nerve
III.: but these appear to show that nerve III. decreases with
nerve XII. Thus : Nerve XII., thickness 2 is only found with
III., thickness 12, while thickness 1 of nerve XII. is also found
with nerve III., thicknesses 10 and 11.

7. This table shows no regularity whatever.

8. While XL diminishes, so does X. In the higher thick-
nesses of nerve X., there are some irregularities, but from
thickness 10 downwards, nerve XI. seems to decrease in
thickness as nerve X. also diminishes. The frequency of
nerve X., thickness 10, diminishes almost regularly with the
decreasing thickness of nerve XL, and was never noted in
combination with thickness 1 of nerve XL The frequency of
nerve X., thickness 9, decreases with a falling thickness of
nerve XL, reaching a minimum with nerve XL, thickness 2.
The frequency of nerve X., thickness 8, increases and then
decreases with decreasing thickness of nerve XL, and in the
smaller thicknesses of nerve X., the frequency increases with
a diminishing thickness of nerve XL, as would be expected.

9. This table shows a somewhat irregular combination.
While nerve IX. increases, nerve XL first increases and then
diminishes. The frequency of nerve IX., thickness 7, increases
with increasing thickness of nerve XL, while nerve IX., thick-
ness 8, and nerve IX., thickness 9, are very irregular.

10. If we overlook irregularities in the smallest and higher
thicknesses of nerve VIIL, we find that as nerve XL diminishes,
nerve VIIL increases. The frequency of nerve VIIL, thick-
nesses 3 and -4 varies greatly. That of nerve VIIL, thickness

ISA

276 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

5, increases as nerve XI. decreases, also nerve VIII., thicknesses
6 and 7.

11. Nerve XI. and IV. show only a slight relation to one
another. As nerve XI. decreases in thickness, the frequency
of thickness 3 of nerve IV. increases, reaching its maximum
with nerve XI., thickness 2. Independently of irregularities in
nerve XI., thickness 1, due probably to the small number of
observations here, we find that the frequency of thicknesses 4
and 5 of nerve IV. tend to decrease with decreasing thickness
of nerve XI., so that it would appear that nerve IV. decreases
with a decreasing thickness of nerve XI.

12. Nerves XI. and III. vary very irregularly, the pei'centages
showing no constant progression. The table shows that the
highest thickness 19 of nerve III. is found with a lower thickness
(2) of nerve XI., than is the lowest thickness (7) of nerve 3.
This may be taken to indicate the fact that while nerve XI.
decreases nerve III. increases, but since there are but few
observations for those particular thicknesses, it is doubtful how
much reliance can be placed on this.

13. The only definite relations shown by this table to exist
between nerves XL and II. is the fact that the smallest thick-
ness (3) of II. only exists with the three smallest thicknesses
of nerve XI. The converse is not, however, by any means true.
Further, the frequency of the occurrence of intermediate thick-
nesses gives no information whatever on the variations of nerves
XI. and II. The highest thickness, however, 6, of nerve II., does
not occur with the two lowest thicknesses of nerve XL Therefore,
probably while nerve XL diminishes, nerve II. diminishes also.

14. As X. decreases, IX. tends to increase. The two
smallest thicknesses of nerve X. are only found with the four
highest thicknesses of nerve IX., and rather more frequently
with the two highest, 11 and 16, of nerve IX.

15. While X. decreases, VIII. increases. The percentage
relations are somewhat irregular ; but it will be seen that nerve
VIII., thickness 4, reaches a maximum with nerve X., thickness
9 ; and nerve VIIL, thickness 5, with nerve. X., thickness 5
(omitting thicknesses 3, 11, and 12, of nerve X., in which there
is but a single occurrence), while nerve VIIL, thickness 6, has
its maximum with nerve X., thickness 4; also nerve VIIL,
thicknesses 7 and 8, occur chiefly with a lower thickness of

Variations in Spinal Nerves of Hyla aurea. 277

nerve X. (6), than does nerve VIII., thickness 3. We may thus
say that there is a tendency for VIII. to increase in thickness as
X. decreases.

16. As X. diminishes, IV. may diminish also. Again we
find great irregularities. The maximum frequency of nerve IV.,
thickness 4, independently of single occurrences, is found with
thickness 9, of nerve X., while that of nerve IV., thickness 3, is
found with nerve X., thickness 7. On the other hand nerve IV.,
thickness 2 occurs only with nerve X., thickness 9, and nerve
IV., thickness 6, only with nerve X., thickness 8.

17. If we examine first the smaller thicknesses 10 to 12, of
nerve III., we find a tendency for nerve III. to decrease in
thickness with a decreasing thickness of X. But thicknesses 13
and 14, of nerve III., appear to directly oppose this, since their
maxima of frequency occur with the lower thicknesses of nerve
X. On the other hand, however, the table as a whole (exclusive
of thickness 19, of nerve III.), would appear to show a decrease
in nerve III. with a decrease in nerve X.

18. As X. decreases. II. decreases also. The frequency of
thicknesses 3 and 4, of nerve II., seem to point to a decreasing
thickness of nerve II., corresponding to a falling thickness of
nerve X.

19. While IX. increases, VIII. increases also. The relations
between these two nerves are very indefinite, but there is
evidently a tendency for an increase in thickness of nerve VIII.
to accompany an increasing thickness of nerve IX., as seen in
the position of the maxima of frequency of thicknesses 4, 5, and 6
of nerve VIII., with thicknesses 7, 10, and 10 of nerve IX.

20. While IX. increases, IV. increases also. The frequency
of nerve IV., thickness 3, reaches a maximum with nerve IX.,
thickness 1 ; nerve IV., thickness 4, with nerve IX., thickness 9;
and nerve IV., thickness 5, with nerve IX., thickness 11 ; while
nerve IV., thickness 2, is found with nerve IX., thickness 8, and
nerve IV., thickness 6, with nerve IX., thickness 11.

21. While IX. increases, III. increases also. The lowest
thicknesses, 7 and 9, and highest, 11 to 19, of nerve III., bear
evidence rather in favour of this statement, while the frequency
of the intermediate thicknesses of nerve III., i.e., 10, 11, 12 and
13, reach their maxima with nerve IX., thicknesses 7, 9, 10 and
11 respectively.

278 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

22. Nerves IX. and II. show no decided relations with one
another. The frequency of nerve II., thickness 3, 4 and 5,
reaches its maxima with nerve IX., thicknesses 10, 7 and 11 in
order. This might be understood to indicate increase in the two
nerves. On the other hand nerve II., thickness 3, occurs chiefly
with nerve IX., thickness 10, and nerve II., thickness 6, with
nerve IX., thickness 9.

23. While VIII. increases, IY. increases also. Nerve IV.,
thickness 2, only occurs with nerve VIII., thickness 3, and nerve
IV., thickness 6, only with nerve VIII., thickness 8; also the
maxima of frequency of nerve IV., thicknesses 3, 4 and 5, are
found with nerve VIII., thickness 6, 7 and 8 respectively.

24. Nerves VIII. and III. probably increase concurrently,
though the table appears somewhat irregular. The two smallest
thicknesses 7 and 9 of nerve III. are only found with the two
smallest thicknesses 3 and 4 of nerve VIII. The maxima of
frequency of nerve III., thicknesses 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14, are
found severally with nerve VIII., thicknesses 3, 6, 5, 8 and 8.

25. No definite relations appear between nerves VIII. and

II. in this table beyond the occurrence of the highest thickness
(6) of nexwe II. with nerve VIII., thicknesses 3 and 4 only,
which may be understood to signify that an increase in VIII.,
is accompanied by a decrease in II.

26. While IV. decreases, III. decreases, or while IV.
increases, III. increases. Independently of slight irregulai-ities
in nerve III., thickness 10, we find that there is a gradual
increase in thickness of nerve III., corresponding to an increase
of nerve IV. This is confirmed by the occurrence of nerve III.,
thicknesses 15 and 19 with thicknesses 4 and 5 of nerve IV.,
while nerve III., thicknesses 7 and 9 occur with nerve IV.,
thicknesses 3 and 4.

27. Nerves IV. and II. appear to have no regular relation
between them beyond the fact that nerve II., thickness 3,
occurs slightly more frequently with nerve IV., thickness 5,
while nerve II., thickness 6, only occurs with nerve IV., thick-
nesses 3 and 4.

28. This table distinctly shows on the whole an increase in
thickness of nerve II., with an increase in thickness of nerve

III. Thus nerve II., thicknesses 3, 4, and 5 occur chiefly
with nerve III., thicknesses 9, 10, and 13. Further, nerve II.,

Variation* in Spinal Nerves of Hyla aurea. 279

thickness 3, occurs chiefly with nerve III., thickness 9, and
nerve II., thickness 6, with nerve III., thickness 10.

Comparing the evidence of these tables with that obtained by
Adolphi for Bufo variabilis, we find that on the whole there is a
confirmation of Adolphi's results with reference to the sacral
plexus. In Table 9, showing the variations in thickness of
nerve XI. accompanying those of nerve IX., there is partly a
confirmation and partly a denial, similarly in Table 17 for
nerves X. and III. Tables 13 (nerves XL and II.) and 18
(nerves X. and II.), on the other hand give a somewhat
positive result, where in Bufo variabilis we see no connection :
while Tables 20 (nerves IX. and IV.), 23 (nerves VIII. and
IV.), 25 (nerves VIII. and II.) perhaps, 26 (nerves IV. and
III.), and possibly 27 (nerves IV. and II.), offer results directly
opposed to those obtained from similar tables for Bujo variabilis:
while Table 28 (nerves III. and II.) exactly compares with
Adolphi's results for similar nerves. The chief difficulties are
with reference to the brachial plexus. Instead of nerve IV.,
the most posterior of the brachial plexus in Hyla aurea, being
in a condition of decrease in thickness as in Bufo variabilis,
Tables 20 and 23 distinctly show that it is in a condition of
increase, Table 11 being the only one disagreeing with this in
the slighest degree. Moreover, if this inference be correct, viz.,
that nerve IV. is in a state of increase in thickness, then by
Table 26, nerve III. also must be increasing in thickness, and
this result for nerve III. exactly agrees with Adolphi's observa-
tions for Bufo variabilis. Further, Tables 13, 18, 25, and 27,
in which a relation is seen between nerve II. and the other
nerves, point to the fact that nerve II. is decreasing in
thickness, and this also agrees with Bufo variabilis.! Assuming
that Adolphi's conclusions based on his examination of the larva1
of Rana temporaria and Pelobates fuscus be correct, that the
thicker condition of nerves X., XL, and XII. is the more
primitive, if as seems to be the case from the tables in Bufo
variabilis, a greater thickness of nerve IV. is found with a
greater thickness of nerves XL and X. and pari passu with
these, the smaller thicknesses of nerves IX., VIIL, and III.,
and vice versa, the smaller thicknesses of nerves XL, X. and

% Adolphi : loc. cil , 1893, p. 341.

280 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

IV. accompany the greater thicknesses of nerves IX., VIII.,
and III.; it is not easy at tirst sight to understand why in
Hyla aurea while the sacral plexus agrees entirely with that of
Bufo variabilis, the brachial plexus should show such a marked
unconformity with the European forms. The true bearing of
this difference in nerve IV., will, however, appear later on in
this paper.

Of the other spinal nerves, V., VI., and VII., have a fairly
constant and similar thickness, viz., chiefly 3, 4 and 5, the
greatest percentage in each having a thickness of 4.

In order to trace the influence of this change in the thickness
of the spinal nerves, on their form and position, I have summed
up my observations on the relative positions of the nerves
forming the two plexuses in a series of figures and tables.
Fig. 1 to 4, and Tables C to L relating to the sacral plexus, and
Fig. 5 and 6, and Tables M to O to the brachial plexus.

Fig. 1 and Table C show the gradual development by means
of which the function of nerve IX. in giving rise to the ileo-
hypogastric nerve has been passed on to nerve VIII.

jrho

Looking at Table C and remembering the results which we
obtained from the previous set of tables, that the smaller thick-
nesses of nerve VIII. are the more primitive, and the highest the
most advanced — we see that without any question form iii. is
the most advanced, for it not only is the sole one occurring
with all the thicknesses from the lowest to the highest, but it
gradually increases in frequency with an increasing thickness of
nerve VIII., until with thicknesses 5 to 8 it reaches 100 per

Variation* in Spi/naZ Nerves of Hyla wu/rea. 281

cent., being the only form having those thicknesses of nerve
VIII. On comparing this with Fig. 1, form iii. (to which the
Table C, iii. refers), we find that the ileo-hypogastric originates
entirely from nerve VIII., the remainder of which passes down
and unites with a branch from IX. to form the cruralis, that is
to say, the region supplied by the ileo-hypogastric, is controlled
by nerve VIII. only. On the other hand the most primitive
form, according to the percentages, should be form i., which only
occurs with the smallest thickness of nerve VIII. Fig. 1, form i.)
shows that in this the most primitive condition, nerve VIII.
takes absolutely no share in the formation of the ileo-hypogastric
nerve, this as well as the cruralis being supplied by nerve IX.
only. Between these two forms, i., the most primitive, and iii.,
the most advanced, we have as an intermediate stage form ii., in
which we find VIII. and IX. taking an equal share in forming
the ileo-hypogastric. The cruralis is variously formed when this
is the case, four per cent, of such cases having the position and
relations shown by the continuous lines only, and sixty per cent,
that shown by both continuous and dotted lines. I have not
separated these two forms in the table, as there are but very few
observations, and also I shall discuss the progression of the crural
nerve in detail later on.

It will thus be seen that whereas the ileo-hypogastric in its
more primitive condition originates from nerve IX., as it
advances, it tends more and more to become connected with
nerve VIII. , until in the great majority of the present forms it
is only connected with that nerve, thus showing a transference
of function forwards, i.e., from IX. to VIII.

A further instance of this was noted in one specimen in which
the ileo-hypogastric branch of VIII. received a branch — tine,
certainly — from VII. It would thus appear that there is now
a tendency for VII. to be drawn into the sacral plexus, and
possibly it will, later on, take part in the formation of the crural
nerve also, progressing in just the same way as VIII. has done,
as may be seen from Figs. 1, 2 and 3. Of this, however, one can
only speak with reserve, inasmuch as it only occurred in one
specimen, and then not in conjunction with any of the greater
thicknesses of VII. or VIII. (VII. having thickness 3, and
VIII. thickness 5). Table C shows that by far the most

282 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

common form at present is form iii. ; this, however, is not
frequent with the higher thicknesses, 6, 7 and 8, so that in an
isolated case of the more advanced form, one can understand
that it might not occur with the greatest thickness, as a strict
inference would imply.

H - <i

Fis. 2.

Variations in Spinal Nerves of Hyla aurea. 283

Table D and Fig. 2 show a steady progression in the manner
in which the cruralis originates. Since nerve VIII. is in a
condition of increasing thickness, we learn from Table D that the
most advanced form is viii., this being the only form occurring
with the highest thickness, 8, and also since its greatest
frequency, even excluding that with thickness 8, is at least with
as high a thickness (7) as that of any other form. Further, we
learn from the same source, that form i. is the most primitive, its
frequency reaching a maximum with the lowest thickness 3, and
gradually decreasing up to thickness 5. Referring to Fig. 2, we
see that these two extremes point to the same kind of advance-
ment as took place in the ileo-hypogastric, in other words, we
find that in form i., the most primitive, the cruralis consists of
fibres from nerve IX. only, while in form viii., the most advanced,
the fibres come from nerve VIII. only, a transference of
function from IX. to VIII., continuing that of the ileo-hypo-
gastric, which, being nearer the exit of the nerve from the spinal
cord, seems to lead the way in this respect. Of the intermediate
stages, it would seem from the table that ii. is the most primitive,
and iii. the next, iv., v., vi. and vii. following in succession.
Fig. 2 shows us the following characters for each of these several
forms. In form ii., we see that the cruralis is formed of chiefly
IX. fibres, with a small branch from VIII. In form iii., similar
relations exist between the fibres from IX., and from VIII., with
the addition of a certain number of fibres from X. The next
advance is seen in the greater proportion in the cruralis of fibres
from VIII., which equals that of the IX. fibres in both iv. and
v., the cruralis in iv. showing fibres from X., which are absent in
v. Up to this, forms i., ii., iii., iv., and v. have occurred from
the lowest thickness of VIII. upwards. Form vi., however,
does not occur with the lowest thickness 3, showing the next step
upwards, while form vii. in the table shows another similar step
in advance. In Fig. 2 these two forms vi. and vii. exhibit the
same relationships to one another as were seen in the two
previous pairs. Thus, in both, the cruralis consists chiefly of
VIII., with only a small branch from IX., fibres from X.
entering into its composition in form vi., but not in form vii.
Bearing in mind the general transferrence in the origin of the
cruralis from IX., and probably previously from X., though of

284 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

this we have only indirect evidence,
to VIII., we notice in Fig. 3 a
gradual but certain advance in this
direction.

A somewhat peculiar exception
to this is seen in forms ii. and iii.
in the figure, which would seem to
reverse the natural order, but in
the face of the evidence given
for those two forms in the table,
form iii., certainly occurring with
a higher thickness than ii., I have
not felt justified in changing the
order, though it would certainly
appear that a form in which the
criiralis contains X. fibres, as well
as IX. and VIII., would be more
primitive than one in which only
IX. and VIII. fibres occur. This
deviation, however, is not nearly
sufficient to nullify the evidence
of the rest of the table, which
entirely agrees with Adolphi's
results for Bujo variabilis, viz.,
that " nerve VIII. originally
destined for the body wall (by
the ileo-hypogastric) is passed
over to take care of the leg (by
the criiralis), and gradually gains
an ever-increasing value in that
direction."

I have also drawn up a Table
(E), which should show the rela-
tions between the thickness of
nerve IX. and the form of the
criiralis, if any exist. There is a
somewhat regular progression in
forms i. to v., but forms vi., v i i . ,
and viii.j are very irregular : also

Variations in Spinal N&rves of Hyla awrea. 285

we see that the three most primitive forms i., ii., iii., occur
with lower thicknesses than the most advanced (viii.).

Tables F, G, H and K, were compiled for the purpose of
ascertaining whether the variations in the composition of the
sciatic nerve, bear any relation to the variation in thickness of
any component nerve.

I find that with the thickness of VIII. (Table F), the only
relations noticeable are that form i., which is evidently the most
primitive from its occurrence only with two of the smaller
thicknesses of nerve VIII., occurs most frequently with a
smaller thickness than does form v., which must be the most
advanced, since it does not occur with the two smallest thick-
nesses of VIII. In the three intermediate forms there is a
distinct increase in the thickness with which each of the three
forms occur most frequently, i.e., form ii. is found most often
with thickness 3, form iii. with thickness 4, and form iv. with
thickness 7. Thus, although the table as a whole appears
somewhat irregular, these two parts would seem to show a
distinct advancement pari passu with an increase in thickness.
The absence of a strict progression is scarcely to be wondered
at, since VIII. really only takes any share in the formation of
the sciatic in two out of the five forms. This will be clear on
reference to Fi<* 4.

I W

^tTT

In this it will be seen that the progression found in Table F,
when compared with the five figures of the forms of that table,
offers a confirmation of the forward transference of function
found in connection with the cruralis and ileo-hypogastric nerves.

28C Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

In form i. (Fig. 3), we see the sciatic composed chiefly of X.
fibres assisted by some from IX., having none from VIII. In
forms ii., iii., and iv., X. and IX. enter almost equally into the
composition of the sciatic nerve, in form ii. some fibres from XI.
enter this union, in iii. we have only X. and IX., in iv. we have
the first appearance of VIII. fibres in this nerve. Form v., the
most advanced according to Table K, might have been allotted
that position by inference from the advance of the four previous
forms as seen in the figure, since in it we find the sciatic with
a majority of IX. fibres, and also a constant presence of VIII.
fibres, X. sinking to a third place in this respect. A further
explanation of the irregularity in the maximum percentage
frequency in Table K here suggests itself. Just as we And
forms ii., iii., and iv., form a complete series in themselves in
the table, so we find from the figures that this is also the case,
all three coming under a general description, viz., possessing
equal quantities of X. and IX. fibres, which forms an inter-
mediate stage between form i. with a majority of X. fibres, and
form v. with a majority of IX. fibres.

Table G does not appear to give us any evidence beyond the
fact that form i., which we have found to be the most primitive,
occurs with a lower thickness than form v., the most advanced.
Table H on the other hand shows a well-marked order agreeing
with that proved from Table F and Fig. 3. Since nerve X.
was found to be in a state of decreasing thickness the most
primitive composition of the sciatic ought to occur chiefly with
the higher thicknesses, and the more advanced forms in a
definite order with the decrease in thickness. Such is the case.
Excluding the isolated cases in thickness 11 we find that form
i. occurs most frequently with thickness 10, form ii. with
thickness 11 and then thickness 9, form iii. with thickness 8,
form iv. with thickness 6, and form v. with thickness 3.

Table K showing the relations between the thicknesses of XL
and the composition of the sciatic offers a further confirmation
of those results, since we find that XI. being in a decreasing
condition, form i. occurs most frequently with thickness 5, form
ii. with thickness 5, form iii. with thickness 3, excluding an
isolated case in thickness 1, form iv. with thicknesses 2 and 1,
while form v. chiefly occurs with thickness 2.

Variation* in Spinal Nerves of Hyla mwea. 287

We have yet to describe in connection with the sacral plexus,
the further relations which a decreasing thickness of XI. bears
to the advancement of the nerves in this region.

According to Table L, nerve XI. being in a state of decrease
in thickness, we see that form i. is the most primitive, and form
iii. the most advanced, form ii. being an intermediate stage.

Fig. 4 will show the bearing of this on the results of previous
tables. In form i. we see the closest connection of XL with the
sciatic nerve, the whole of nerve XL entering into the composi-
tion of the sciatic. In ii., we have nerve XL entering the sciatic,
or joining X. by two or more trunks, while in form iii., XL has
no share in the sciatic at all, merely joining branches of that
nerve which supply only the viscera at the posterior end of the
body with some of their muscles.

On comparing these results of observations on the sacral plexus
of Hyla a urea with those made by Adolphi on Bufo variabilis,
and Pelobates fuscus, it will be seen that there is a marked
similarity with those results, viz., that the centre of gravity of
the sacral plexus is gradually moving towards the head, or in
other words, nerves VIII. and IX. increase in thickness as X.
and XL decrease in thickness, and pari passu with this change
in size and consequent advancement, nerves VIII. and IX.
are gradually losing their original relations to the body wall and
are assuming a greater importance in the innervation of the leg.
It would further appear from the tables relating to the most
posterior spinal nerves of Hyla aurea, especially XL, that there
is at the same time a change whereby these nerves are losing
their connection with the leg, and are, and will supply, in its
place, the viscera of the hinder part of the trunk, perhaps
preparatory to dying out altogether, as XII. is now doing.

It remains to be seen what relations the thickness of the
anterior nerves of the spinal column bears to their form.

Since we found in Tables B, 20 and 23, that IV. is increasing
in thickness, then the most primitive form of that nerve will occur
most frequently with the smaller thicknesses of the nerve. In
Table M, therefore, form i. is the most primitive, and form iv.
the most advanced, forms ii. and iii. being intermediate stages.

288 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria,

ff.

///.* J£\

iv

Fig. 5 shows the following positions of the nerves in the forms
i. to iv. In form i., nerve IV. is clistincly free from nerve III. ;
in form ii. a branch passes between the two nerves, either from
nerve III. to IV., or vice versa; in form iii. we find a still closer
connection, III. fusing with IV. at one point, while in form iv.
the fusion is continued for some distance. But since we found
that nerve III. agreed in its manner of increase with that in
Bnfo variabilis and Pelobates fuscus, it will be most instructive to
take its evidence into consideration.

In Table N then the most primitive form should occur most
frequently with the smaller thickness and the most advanced
with the higher thickness of nerve III., and according to this
table we find that form i., which Table M shows to be the most
primitive, occurs chiefly with a lower thickness than does form
iv. the most advanced, which so far confirms the previous results.
Form iii. shows a slight irregularity in thickness 15, which may
possibly be due to the small number of observations in that
thickness. It seems therefore that in Hyla aurea, as nerve IV.
increases in thickness, advancing in development, it takes an
increasing share in the formation of the brachial plexus.

Variations in Spinal Nerves of Hyla a urea. 289

With reference to the condition of nerve II. with regard to
the brachial plexus, we find the following results : — -

Since nerve III. is increasing in thickness, we must regard
forms i., ii. and iii. as the most primitive, since they occur mostly
or only with the lower thicknesses of III ; forms iv. and v. on
the other hand occur not only with the four lower thicknesses of
III., but also with the live higher ones. The percentages are
somewhat irregular in their progression.

%.'t

Fig. 6 shows the positions of the nerves in these forms. In
form i. we find a connection of the coraco-clavicular with nerves
II. and IV., nerve II. thus taking a share in the brachial plexus.
This condition, however, was only found on one side of one
specimen and so might be regarded as an aberrant condition.
In form ii. we see the closest connection of II. with the
brachial plexus, this nerve being fused entirely or in part for
some considerable distance with III. In form iii. the connection

290 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

is less marked, here the coraco-clavicular is composed chiefly of
nerve II. having only a tine branch from III. A modification
in the proportions of the fibres from the two nerves would
readily give rise to form i\\, in which the coraco-clavicular arises
as a branch from III. with a few fibres from II. passing either
to III. itself or to the coraco-clavicular. In form v., nerve II.
has no connection whatever with the brachial plexus. This is
what might have been predicted from the fact that IV. is taking
an increasing share in the brachial plexus. But when we come
to compare with this the Table (P) showing the thicknesses of
nerve II. with which these forms are found we meet with a
strange discrepancy.

If we regard nerve II. as being in a state of decrease as
deduced from Tables 13, 18, 25, etc., we find that the order of
the forms in Fig. 6, according to their point of development,
beginning with the most primitive, should be v., iv., ii., iii. —
excluding i. From this we obtain the remarkable result that as
nerve II. decreases in size, it assumes fresh duties in addition to
those which it had previously. Especially is this unexpected
here, as since II., in a diminishing condition, takes upon itself to
"ive rise to the coraco-clavicular, it is difficult to conceive from
whence the region supplied by this branch is to derive its nervous
supply, as II. diminishes to a thickness of 0. Further, if in the
face of Tables B, 13, 18, 25 and 27, we accept the evidence of
Table B, 28, viz., that II. increasing in thickness, we merely have
the difficulty reversed, for an increase in thickness of a nerve is
unnecessary for a more and more restricted area of action. I
have considered that probably this irregularity is due to the
change in habit of Hyla a/irea, originally an arboreal form, to
a terrestrial life. In this connection, it would be interesting to
know whether the true Tree frogs of Europe show any deviation
from the general combinations of Bufo variabilis and Pelobates
fuscus. In the absence of a more extended knowledge on this
point, we may accept for the present, at least, the evidence of
Table O, since it seems most in accordance with all the facts
relating to nerves IV., III. and II.

The increasing thickness on the part of nerves IV. and III.
and the apparent decreasing thickness of nerve II. together with
the above tables, indicate the fact that in the brachial plexus of

Variations in Spinal Nerves of Hyla awea. 291

Hyla aurea we have a further stage of what Bateson calls back-
ward Homceosis of the nerves composing this plexus, in other
words that we have here, as in the sacral plexus "an assumption
by one member of these Meristic series of the form and characters
proper to other members of those series." But, whereas in the
sacral plexus, nerves VII. (probably), VIII. and IX. are exer-
cising in an increasing degree the functions previously exerted
only by nerves posterior to them (viz., IX., X., XI. and XIL);
in the brachial plexus, nerve IV. appears to take up new duties
previously performed only by II. and III.

We have seen that in the Urodeles and in Pipa among the
Anura there is a nerve anterior to II., viz., the sub-occipital,
which passes out as the case may be between the skull and the
first vertebra, or else pierces the first vertebra ; also, we found
that in Hyla aurea as in the Anura generally this is absent.

Pipa thus seems to be, in some degree, an intermediate form
between the Urodeles and the other Anura. A further
stage is seen in Rana, since "the fact that the last spinal
nerves to join the brachial plexus in Pipa are the Illrd,
while in Rana they are IVth, is again an evidence of backward
Homceosis."*

That in Hyla we have a continuation of the same process is, I
think, beyond doubt, since we have an increasing thickness both
in III. and IV., concurrent with a decreasing thickness in II.,
and also a most intimate connection of IV. with the brachial
plexus. To sum up the results of these observations on Hyla
aurea, in a few words, we have found a forward Homceosis in the
saci'al plexus, also a backward Homceosis in the brachial plexus.
We may therefore conclude that in the Anura, as represented by
the forms studied in this connection, there is an advance-
ment in the direction of a concentration of the origin and
functions of the spinal nerves towards the central region of the
body.

APPENDIX.

In addition to Hyla aurea, I have examined a few other forms
found in Australia, viz., Helioporus pictus, and Limnodynastes

* Bateson : Materials for the Study of Variation, p. 143.

292 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

tasmaniensis from Victoria, and Limnodynastes ornatus and
Chiroleptes platycephalus from Central Australia, for specimens of
which, together with those of Hyla aurea, I am indebted to
Professor Spencer. There being but few observations in each
case, I have not attempted to tabulate the results, as a few
words with a reference to the figures and tables of Hyla aurea
will make their size, condition, etc., clear, since here I have
taken the same standards for comparison. The manner of
distribution and position of the various nerves do not differ very
greatly from those of Hyla aurea.

In Helioporus pidus the various thicknesses found are the
following : —

Nerve. Thickness. Percent.

II. - 4 - 50

III. - 5 - 50

IV. - 6 - 50

V. - 2 50

VI. - 3 - 50

VII. - 2 - 50

VIII. 3 50

IX. 7 50

X. - 7 50
XL 1 50

Nerve XII. was not found to occur at all.

The following conditions were observed in the nerves of
Heliopot us pidus.

We find Fig. 1, form ii., with nerve VIII., thickness 2, and
Fig. 1, form iii., with nerve VIII., thickness 3, showing with an
increase in thickness of nerve VIII. a corresponding advance in
the composition of the ileo-hypogastric nerve comparable to that
of Hyla aurea.

In the cruralis we have Fig. 2, form v., occurring with nerve
VIII., thickness 2, and nerve IX., thickness 5, and form vii.,
with nerve VIII., thickness 3, and nerve IX., thickness 7.
Thus we see that both the ileo-hypogastric and cruralis show
here as in Hyla aurea a forward Homuiosis in the origin of these
two nerves, viz., from nerve IX. to nerve VIII. , the ileo-hypo-

Thickness.

Per cent.

3

-

50

C

-

-X)

•->

-

50

2

-

50

2

50

3

-

50

2

-

50

5

-

50

5

-

50

2
ill

-

50

in.
ved in

the

nerves

Variations in Spinal Kef res of Hyla a urea. 293

gastric preceding the cruralis because of its position nearer to
the spinal column.

In Fig. 3 we find form ii. occurring with nerve VIII., thick-
ness 2, nerve IX., thickness 5, nerve X., thickness 5, and nerve
XI., thickness 2 ; and form iii. with nerve III., thickness 3,
nerve IX., thickness 7, nerve X., thickness 7, and nerve XI.,
thickness 1 — that is to say, as nerve VIII. increases, nerve
IX. increases, and nerve XI. decreases, thei*e is a decreasing
tendency for nerve XI. to take any share in the forma-
tion of the sciatic. There is, therefore, here again a
forward Homoeosis. Nerve X. would seem to offer a slight,
difficulty in this respect, due probably to the small number
of observations.

In Fig. 4 we see again an evidence of this same forward
advance in the composition of the sciatic, and in the
l'elations of nerve XI. to the leg, since form i. occurs
with nerve XL, thickness 2, and form iii. with thickness 1
of nerve XI., nerve XL it will be remembered being in a
state of decrease.

In Fig. 5, form ii. occurs with nerve III., thickness 6, and
nerve IV., thickness 3 ; and form iii., with nerve III., thickness
5, and nerve IV., thickness 6. Here we see that nerve III.
appears to oft'er a slight deviation from Hyla aurea, since it
decreases slightly in these few observations. On the other hand,
however, nerve IV. increases greatly and as it does so takes an
increasing share in the brachial plexus and therefore in the
innervation of the fore-limb.

The results with reference to nerve II. are interesting. We
find that in Fig. 6, form ii., nerve II. has thickness 3, and in
form iii. it has thickness 4. If we premise, that as in Hyla aicreay
II. is decreasing in thickness, then we have here, it would
appear, an increasing connection of II. with the brachial plexus;
but reference to Tables P and O will show that Fig. 6, form iii.
is a very unusu'al form in Hyla aurea, so that we cannot attach
much importance to this fact.

In Limnodynastes tasmanieiisis we find the following thick-
nesses : —

294 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Nerve.

Thickness.

Per cent.

Thickness.

Per cent.

Thickness.

Per cent.

II.

- 3 -

100

_ .

—

—

TIL

5

66-6

- 8 -

33-3

. .

—

TV.

- 3 -

33-3

- 4 -

33-3

7

33-3

V.

2

33-3

- 3 -

66-6

— .

—

VI.

2

66-6

- 3 -

33-3

- — .

—

VII.

3 -

100

VIII.

3 -

66-6

- 4 -

33-3

—

—

IX.

5

100

X.

- 4 -

33-3

- 6 -

66-6

—

—

XI.

o

100

.

Nerve XII. is again absent.

All the specimens have the ileohypogastric composed of VIII.
fibres only as in Fig. 1, form iii., i.e., at its highest present state,
of advancement. When nerve VIII. has thickness 3, nerve IX.
thickness 5, and nerve X. thickness 6, we find the cruralis in the
condition drawn in Fig. 2, form v. It consists therefore of equal
quantities of nerves VIII. and IX., with no other fibres : X.
being absent. With nerve VIII. thicknesses 4 and 3, nerve IX.
thickness 9, and nerve X. thicknesses 6 and 4, the cruralis
finds its highest development, i.e., it contains only fibres from
nerve VIII. {vide Fig. 2, form viii.).

In all forms, the sciatic has also reached nearly its highest
point of development as. shown in Fig. 3, form iv., nerves IX.
and X. sending equal quantities of fibres to it together with some
from VIII. Nerve tibres from XL are absent from the sciatic,
that nerve (XL) having reached its highest stage, as in Fig. 4,
form iii. In the brachial plexus we find with nerve IV.
thicknesses 7 and 3 and nerve III. thickness 5, nerve IV.
is fused with III. for some distance, Fig. 5, form iv., while
we get a branch between III. and IV., Fig. 5, form ii., with
nerve III. thickness 8, and nerve IV. thickness 4. When we
have nerve III. thicknesses 8 and 5, we find Fig. 6, form
iii., i.e., that II. is free from III., and with nerve III.
thickness 5 we have a branch between II. and TIL, i.e., Fig. 6,
form iii.

The following observations were made on Limnodynastes
ornatus. The thicknesses of the nerves were these : —

Variations in Spinal Newes of Hyla av/rea. 295

Nerve.

Thickness.

Per cent.

Thickness.

Per cent.

II.

-

3

-

100

—

—

III.

-

5

-

50

7

50'

IV.

-

3

-

100

. —

—

V.

-

o

-

100

—

—

VI.

-

2

-

100

—

—

VII.

-

2

-

100

—

—

VIII.

-

3

-

50

2

50

IX.

-

4

-

50

5

50

X.

-

5

-

50

6

50

XI.

-

2

-

100

—

—

Nerve XII.

was

: not presen

t.

The ileo-hypogastric always shows its highest development,
Fig. 1, form iii. The craralis has reached the stage in which
it has only equal quantities of VIII. and IX. (cf. Fig. 2,
form v.) AVe tind Fig. 3, form iii., the sciatic heing composed
of IX. and X. fibres in equal quantities, with nerve VIII.,
thickness 2, nerve IX., thickness 5, nerve X., thickness 6, and
nerve XL, thickness 2, and with the other thicknesses noted for
these nerves, we tind in addition to IX. and X. fibres, some of
VIII. Nerve XL is entirely absent from the sciatic, having
reached its highest development, Fig. 4, form iii.

In the brachial plexus we find Fig. 5, form ii., with nerve IV.,
thickness 3, and nerve III., thickness 5, and form iii., with nerve
IV., thickness 3, and nerve III., thickness 7.

Thus with an increasing thickness of nerve III. we get an
increasing importance of IV. in the brachial plexus. Further
with an increasing thickness of nerve III. we have an increasing
connection of II. with this plexus, since with nerve III., thick-
ness, 7, we have Fig. 6, form ii., and Fig. 6, form iii., with nerve
III., thickness 5.

In the specimen of Chiroleptes platycephalus from Central
Australia, which I examined, I found the following thicknesses :
Nerve II., thickness 3, nerve III., thickness 11, nerve IV.,
Thickness 5, nerve V., thickness 3, nerve VI., thickness 2, nerve
VII., thickness 3, nerve VIII. , thickness 4, nerve IX., thickness
8, nerve X., thickness 5, nerve XL, thickness 2. The ileo-hypo-

290 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

gastric was at its highest stage (Fig. 1, form iii.). The crural is
had the same relative position as in Fig. 2, form v. The sciatic
only contained fibres of nerves IX. and X., as in Fig. 3, form
iii., nerve XL having the relations shown in Fig. 4, form iii.

In the brachial plexus, nerve IV. was in a highly advanced
state, similar to Fig. 5, form iii., and nerve II. was quite free
from the plexus as in Fig. 6, form iii.

Table A.

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, i8g6.
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla aurea.

TABLE A.

Nerve XII.

Nerve XI.

Nerve X.

N«

rve IX.

Nerve VIII.

Nerve VII.

Nerve VI.

Nerve V.

Nerve IV.

Nerve III.

Nerve II.

Thick-
ness.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

Thick

ness.

0

1

2
3

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

Thick-
ness.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

Thick,
ness.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

Thick-
ness

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

Thick-
ness.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

Thick-
ness.

No. of
Obs.

45

Pel-
cent.

Thick-
ness.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

Thick-
ness.

0
1

2
3

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

Thick-
ness.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

Thick-
ness.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

0
1
2

121
3

1

96-8

2-4

•8

2
58
53

1-6

46-4
42-4

0

1

2
3

A

•4

0

1

2
3

0

1

2
3

16

12-8

0
1

2
3

1

34

•8
27-2

0
1

2
3

36-0

0
1

2
3

1

2
38

•8

1-6

30-4

1
55

•8
44-0

0

1

2
3

0

1

2
3

9

7-2

125

4

7

5-6

4

3

2-4

4

4

49

39-2

4

82

65-6

4

74

59-2

4

76

60-8

4

55

440

4

4

99

79-2

5

4

3-2

5

7

5-6

5

5

45

36-0

5

8

6-4

5

5

4-0

5

8

6-4

5

13

10-4

5

5

15

12-0

6

1

•8

6

7
8

8*

25

34

6-8
20-0
27-2

6

7
8

2

8

37

1-6

6-4

29-3

6

7
8

n

5

21

6 0
40
2.0

125

6

1

•8

125

6

1

•8

6

7
8

1

•8

6

1-6

125

125

125

125

9

27

21-6

9

50

40-0

9

2

1-6

10

17

13-6

10

20

16-0

125

10

11

8-8

11

1

■8

11

7

5-6

11

32

25-6

12

2

1-6

12
13

12
13

50
19

40-0
15-2

125

14
15
16

1

•8

14
15
16
17
18

6
3

4-8
2-4

125

19

1

•8

125

Table B.

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, i8g6.
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla aarea.

TABLE B.

1. — Thickness of Nerve XI.

Oh
1*

1

2

3

4

5

6

o.o

Is

No. of | Per
Obs. cent.

No. of j Per
Obs. cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of 1 Per
Obs. cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

3 >

o

0

1

2

2

1-6 5G

1
1

46-7
33-3
100-0

52
1

42-1
33-3

7

5-7

3
1

2-4
33-3

3-2

1
1

•s

121
3
1

Totals 2

1-6 58

46-4

53

42-4

7

5-6

4

•8 125

2. — Thickness of Nerve X.

c a>

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

1

2

CO

^ C

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per No. of
cent, j Obs.

Per

cent.

No of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

-4-3 U

O <V

o

0

1

•4

3

2-4

6

4-9 8

7-3

24

19-7

33i

27-6

26

21-4

17

14

O

1-6

1

•8

121

1

I i

2

16-6

1

13-3

I 46-6

1

33-3

3

2

l

100-0

1

Totals

*

•4

3

2-4

7

5-6 Sh 7-8

25

20-0

34 27-2

27

21-6

17

13-6

2

1-6

1

•8

125

3. — Thickness of Nerve IX.

o„'

6

7

8

9

10

11

16

c

J*

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

37

Per
cent.

30-5

No. of
Obs.

47

2
1

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

S £

o a>
O

0
1
2

2

1-6

8

7-0

38-8
66-6
100-0

20

16-5

6
1

5-3
33-3

1

•8

121
3
1

Totals

2

1-6

8

6-4

37

29-6

50

40-0

20

16-0

7

5-6

1

•8

125

Table B (continued)-

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, 1896.
Sweet Nerves of Hyla a urea.

4. — Thickness of Nerve VJII.

o _;

.a >
a

I'

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Per
Obs. cent.

o o

■if

0

15

12-4

49

40-5

42

1

1

13-3

9

0

1

Totals

16

12-8

49

39-2

45

34-7 7|
66-6

100-0

36-o| 7|

6-2

6-0

4-1 21

4-0 2i

2-0 121
3
1

2-0 125

5. — Thickness of Nerve IV.

Oi_i

2

Q

O

4

5

6

0.2

No. of : Per
Obs. cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

c3 >

0 u

O

0
1
0

1

■8

53

1
1

55

43-8
33-3

ioi-o

44-0

53

2

43-8
66-6

13

10-8
10-4

1

•8

121
3
1

Totals 1

•8

55

44-0

13

1

■8

125

6. — Thickness of Nerve III.

i*

7

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

19

o.2

No. of
Obs:

Per
cent.

No. of Per
Obs. cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of Per
Obs. cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

cS >
O O)

O

0

1
0

1

•8

2

1-6

10

1

8-0
33-3

31
1

25-G
33-3

48
1
1

39-6
33 3

100-0

19

15.7

6

4-8

3

2-4

1 ! -8

121
3

1

Totals

1

•8

2

1-6

11

8-8

32

25-6

50

40-0

19

15-2

6 4-8

3

2-4

1 -8

125

Table B (continued)—

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, i>
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla autea.

7. — Thickness of Nerve II.

2

4

5

6

o.2

X :>

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

H |
O

0

1

o

8

1

6-6
33-3

97
1
1

80-1
33-3
100-0

15

12-4

1

1

•8
33 3

121
3

1

Totals

9

7-2

99

79-2

15

12-0

o

1-6

125

8. — Thickness of Nerve X.

"c .

o

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

1

2

CO

1*

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of i Per
Obs. cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Per
Obs. cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

n -

3

1

1

50-0

1

50-0

2

2

1
o

•8

H

2-4

5

8-5

7 A

13-0

17

29-3

121

21-5

8 13-6

4

6-8

1

1-7

1

1-7

58

3

H

2-7

1

1-8

8

15-0

20i

39-5

15 28-1

6

111

1

1-8

53

4

1

14-2

2 28-4

4

56-8

7

5

2 50-0

2

50-0

4

6

20-0

34

27-2

1

100-0

1

Totals

l

2

•4

3

2-4

7

5-6

8*

6-8

25

27 21-6

17

13-6

1

•8

2

1-6

125

9. — Thickness of Nerve IX.

4> a.

6

7

9

10

11

16

o.2
2. d

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Per
Obs. cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

o S
O

1

2

100

2

2

1

1-7

4

6-8 14

24-1

24

41-3

10

17-2

4

6-8

1

1-7

58

3

2

3-7 18

33 9

20 ' 37-6

10

18-8

3

5-6

53

4

1

14-2

1

14-2 2

28-5

3 42-6

7

5

1

25-0 2

50-0

1 25-0

4

6

1

100-0

40-0

1

Totals

2

1-6

8

6-4

37

29-6

50

20

160

7

5-6

1

•8

125

Table B (continued)

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria. 1 8g6
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla aurea.

10. — Thickxess of Nerve VIII.

3

4

5

6

7

8

o o

a »

I*

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

Xo. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Per
Obs. cent.

1

o 2
O

1

1

50 0

1

50-0

2

o

7

12-0

16

27-6

27

45-9

4

6-8

3

5-1

1 1-7

58

3

6

11-3

26

49-0

15

28-2

21

4-7

2

3-7

H 2-8

53

4

2

28-5

3

42-8

2

28-5

7

5

1

25-0

2

50-0

1

25-0

4

6

1

100-0

1

Totals

16

12-8

49

39-2

45

36-0

n

6-0

5

4-0

01 9

2

125

11. — Thickness of Nerve IV.

o .

o

2

Q

4

5

6

o_o

■2 t
.2 3

Xo. of

Per

No. of

Per

No. of

Per

No. of

Per

Xo. of

Per

o 2

S*

Obs.

cent.

Obs.

cent.

Obs.

cent.

Obs.

cent.

Obs.

cent.

1

1

50-0

1

50-0

2

2

35

60-3

20

34-5

3

5-1

58

3

18

33-9

25

47-1

9

16-9

1

1-8

53

4

1

14-2

1

14-2

5

71-6

7

5

1

25-0

3

75-0

4

6

1

50-0

1

Totals

1

•8

55

44-0

55

44-0

13

10-4

1

•8

125

Table B (continued)-

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, i8g6.
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla aurea.

12. — Thickness of Nerve III.

1*

7

9

10

11

VI

13

14

15

19

"c.2.

1*

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of | Per
Obs. cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Per
Obs. : cent.

No. of

(lbs.

Per

cent.

© 3
O

1

1

50-0

1

50-0

2

o

1

1-7

6

10-3

18

30-9

20

34-0

9

15-5

2

34

1

1-7

1

1-7

58

3

1

1-8

1

1-8

4

7-6

10

18-8

27

50-9

6

11-2

3

5-6

1

1-8

53

4

2

28-5

1

14-3

3

42-9

1

143

7

5

1

25-0

1

25-0

1

25-0

1

25-0

4

6

1

100-0

1

Totals

1

•8

2

1-6

11

8-8

32

25-6

50

40-0

19

15-2

6

4-8

3

2-4

1

•8

125

13. — Thickness op Nerve II.

3

4

5

6

to C3

ll

No. of

Per

No. of

Per

No. of Per

No. of

Per

3 £

£*

Obs. •

cent.

Obs.

cent.

Obs. cent.

Obs.

cent.

O

1

1

50-0

1

50-0

2

2

4

6-8

45

77-5

9

15-5

58

3

4

7-6

43

81-1

5

9-4

1

1-8

53

4

6

85-7

1

14-3

7

5

3

75-0

1

25-0

4

6

1

ioo-o

1

Totals

9

7-2

99

79-2

15

12-0

2

1-6

125

Table B (continued)^

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, i8g6.
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla aurea.

14. — Thickness of Nerve IX.

o .

6

7

8

9

10

11

16

o.J

11

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Per
i >bs. cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

o 3
O

3

1
2

100-0

1

4

1 | 16-6

1

16-6

1

33-3

1

33-3

3

5

1

14-2

6 | 85-2

7

6

1

11-7

2

23-4

4 46-8

H

17-6

Si

7

1

4-0

8

32-0

10 400

3

12-0

3

12-0

25

8

2

5-8

2

5-8

9

26-4

12| 3(3-7

6

17-6

21

7-3

34

9

3

11-1

10

37-0

10 37-0

4

14-8

27

10

1

5-8

6

35-2

5 29-4

5

29-4

17

11

1 100-0

1

12

1
37

50-0

1 50-0

2

Totals

o

1-6

8

6-4

29-6

50 40-0

20 16-0

7 5-6

1

•8

125

15. — Thickness of Nerve VIII.

'o
v a,

3

4

5

6

7

8

o.I

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Per
Obs. cent.

-3 u
o a>

O

3

I

2

100-0

1
2

4

1

33-3

1
2

16-6

H

49-9

3

5

1

14-2

5

71-0

i

14-2

7

6

1

11-7

4

47-0

l

11-7

1

11-7

H

17-6

8*

7

5

20-0

10

40-0

8

32-0

l

4 0

1

4-0

25

8

6

17-6

16

47-0

8

23-2

3

8-8

1

2-9

34

9

5

18-5

15

55-5

6

22-2

l

3-7

27

10

5

29-4

10

58-8

2

11-7

17

11

1

100-0

1

12

16

49

2
45

100-0

2

Totals

12-8

39-2

36-0

71

' 2

6-0

5

4-0

"2

2-0

125

Table B (continued)—

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, i,Sq6.
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla aurea.

16. — Thickness of Nerve IV.

o

2

3

4

5

6

*l

^ u

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

c3 >

o &

O

3

1

ioo-o

1
2

4

1

16-6

H

49-9

1

33-3

3

5

3

42-6

4

57-0

7

6

4

47-0

H

41-0

1

11-7

81

7

20

80-0

3

12-0

2

8-0

25

8

ISA

455

15*

45-5

o

5-8

1

2-9

31

9

1

3-7 6

22-2

16

59-2

4

14-8

27

10

4

23 5

10 58-8

3 17-6

17

11

1

100-0

1

12

1

50-0

1 iso-o

2

Totals

1

•8 55

44-0

55 44-0

13

10-4

1

•8

125

17. — Thickness of Nerve III.

"S

7

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

19

o.2

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of ' Per
Obs. cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of Per
Obs. cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

o 3

3

•

1

ioo-o

I
2

4

1

16-6

1

16-6

1

33-3

1

33-3

3

5

1

14-2

2

28-5

2

28-5

1

14-2

1

14-2

7

6

2

23-5

2

23-5

21

29-4

2

23-5

8£

7

2

8-0

10

40-0

10

40-0

1

4-0

2

8-0

25

8

1

2-9

2

5-8

101

44-1

17

49-7

31

10-3

34

9

2

7.4

4

14-8

1

3-7

13

48-1

5

18-5

2

7-4

27

10

6

35-2

5

29-4

2

11-7

1

5-8

3

17-6

17

11

1

ioo-o

1

12

2

ioo-o

2

lotah

1

•8

2

1-6

11

8-8

32

25-6

50

40-0

19

15-2

6

4-8

3

2-4

1

•8

125

Table B (eontinued)-

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, 1896.
Siveet. Nerves of Hyla aurea.

18. — Thickness of Nerve II.

c
6 0

3

4

5

i

°o.o

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

5

3

1

100-0

1

2

4

1
2

16-6

H

49-9

1

33-3

3

5

2

28-5

5

71-4

7

6

8i

100-0

Sh

7

2

80

22

88-0

1

4-0

25

8

21

7-3

25

73-2

16-1

1

2-9

34

9

1

3-7

22

81-5

3

111

1

3-7

27

10

1

5-8

14

82-5

2

11-7

17

11

1

100-0

1

12

7-2

1

99

50-0
79-2

1
15

50-0

2

TotaU

9

12-0

2

1-6

125

19. — Thickness of Nerve VIII.

Id

3

4

5

6

'i

8

0.2
■i >

IE*

H

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

H 1
O

6

2

ioo-o

2

7

1

12-5

4

50-0

3

37-5

8

8

6

16-2

15

40-5

12

32-4

H

3-9

2

5-4

h

1-3

37

9

7

14-0

20

40-0

17

34-0

3

6-0

2

4-0

1

2-0

50

10

7

35 0

10

50-0

2

10-0

1

5-0

20

11

2

28-5

1

14-2

3

42-6

1

14-2 7

16

12-8

1

ioo-o

1

Totals

16

49

39-2

45

36-0

74

6-0

5

I

4-0

21

2-0 125

9

Table .B (continued y

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, i8g6.
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla a urea.

20. — Thickness of Nerve IV.

o .
oS1-1

2

3

4

5

6

°l

X 1-
.2 a

— Z

H

No. of
Olis.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

o S

Hi

O

6

O

ioo-o

2

7

5

62-5

3

37o

8

8

1

2-7

17

45-9

15

40-5

4

10-8

37

9

21

42-0

24

48-0

5

10-0

50

10

9

45-0

9

45 0

2

10-0

20

11

3

42-7

2

28-5

1

14-2

1

14-2

7

16

1

1000
10-4

1

Totals

1

•8

55

44-0

55

44-0

13

1

•8

125

21. — Thickness of Nekve III.

"5 .

7

9

1
10

n

12

13

14

1

5

19

o.2

II

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

Cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

Cent.

o 3
r

6

2 100-0

2

7

2

25-0

2 25-0

3

37 5

1

12-5

8

8

1

2-7 1

2-7

4

10-8

7 18-9

15

40-5

4

10-8

4

10-8

1

2-7

37

9

»

10-0

15 30-0

19

38-0

9

18-0

1

2-0

1

2-0

50

10

1

5-0

4

20-0

10

50-0

3

15-0

1

5 0

1

5-0

20

11

2

28-5

3

42 -8

2

28-5

7

16

1

100-0

1

Tetuls

1

•8 2

1-6

11

8-8

32

25-6

50 400

19

15-2

6

4.8

3

2-4

1 -8

125

Table B (continued)-

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, i8g6.
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla aurca.

22. — Thickness of Nerve II.

23. — Thickness of Nerve IV.

Id

1"

3

1

5

6

o 3

H

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

II

3

6

2 loo-o

2

7

7 87-5

1

12-5

8

8

3

8-1

31 83-7

3

8-1

37

9

3

6-0

42 84-0

3

6-0 2

4-0

50

10

3

15-0

13 65-0

4

20-0

20

11

4 571

3

42-8

7

16

9

7-2

1
15

100-0

1

Totals

99

79-2

12-0

0

1-6

125

o _4

0> P>

2

3

4

5

6

o.2

H*

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Pei-
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

3 >

H g

O

3

1

6-2 8

50-0

6

37-6

1

6-2

16

4

20

40-8

24

49-0

5

10-2

49

5

20

44-4

20

44-4

5

11-1

45

6

4

53-3

2

26-6

H

19-9

7h

7

2

40-0

3

60-0

5

8

1

40-0

i

20-0

1

40-0

21

Totals

1

•8 55

44-0

55

44-0

13

10-4

1

•8

125

24. — Thickness of Nerve III.

CD K*

7

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

19

o.2

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

Cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

e3 >
O O)

o

3

1

6-2

2

12-4

4

24-8

7

43-8

2

12-4

16

4

2

4-0

5

10-2

15

30-6

17

34-7

7

14-3

1

2-0

2

4-0

49

5

4

8-8

9

20-0

20

44-4

8

17-6

3

6-6

1

2-2

45

6

3

40-0

3

40-0

l

6-6

1

13-3

7*

7

1

20-0

2

40-0

1

20-0

1

200

5

8

1

40-0

1

40-0

1

20-0

21

Totals

1

■8

2

1-6

] I

8-8

32

25-6

50

40-0

19

15-2

6

4-8

3

2-4

1

•8

125

Table B (continued)-

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, i8q6.
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla a urea.

25. — Thickness of Nerve II.

3

4

5

6

"0.2

HZ

No. of

Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

=3 -
0 z

3

15 93-7

1

6-2

1(5

4

5

10-2

41

83-2

o

4-0

1

2 0

49

5

3

6-6

34

75-5

8

17-7

45

6

1

13-3

31

46-6

3

40-0

71

7

4

80-0

1

20-0

5

8

H

600

1

40-0

2.1

Total a

9

7-2

99

79-2

15

12-0

2

1-6

1 25

26. — Thickness of Nerve III.

7

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

19

c.2

2- C

No. of J Per
Obs. j cent.

No. of Per
Obs. cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Per
Obs. cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

1

No. of I Per
Obs. | cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

H J

2

1

ioo-o

1

3

1

1-8

1 1-8

4

7-2

19 34-5

23

41-8

5

9-0

•:

>

3-6

55

4

1 1-8

7

12-6

11 20-0

20

36-0

13

23-6

0

3-6

1

1-8

55

5

2

15-3

5

38-4

1

7-6

•:

>

15-3

2

15-3

1

7-6

13

6

1

ioo-o

1

Totals

1

•8

2

1-6

11

8-8

32 25-6

50

40-0

19

15-2

6

4-8

3

2-4

1

•8

125

Table B (continued)

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, lSg6.
Siveet. Nerves of Hvla aurea.

27. — Thickness of Nerve II.

28. — Thickness of Nerve II.

"o, •

3

4 5 6

a aj

DC ~*~,

No. of

Per

No. of

Per

No. of

Per

No. of

Per

Obs.

cent.

Obs.

cent.

Obs.

cent.

Obs.

cent.

o

1

ioo-o

l

3

4

7-2

44

80-0 6

10-9

1

1-8

55

4

4

7-2

44

80-0 6

10-9

1

1-8

55

5

1

7-6

10

77-01 2

15-3

13

6

1

ioo-o

1

Totals

9

7-2

99

79*2 15

12-0

2

1-6

125

3

4

5

G

o.|

No. of

Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of
Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of
Obs.

" r
Per ^ 7
cent. ^ -

c

7

1

ioo-o

1

9

1

50-0

1

50-0

2

10

10

90-9

1

9-0

11

11

7

21-8

22

68-7

3

9-5

32

12

1

2-0

42

84-0

6

12-0

1

2-0

50

13

15

79-0

4

21-0

19

14

5

83-0

1

16-G

6

15

3

ioo-o

3

19

7-2

99

1

1000

1

Totals

9

79-2

15

12-0

2

1-6

120

Table C.

TABLE C.

"£ hH

i.

ii.

iii.

= o

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

n

a £

Per
cent.

Per
cent.

Per
cent.

H

s*

One
side.

Both

sides.

One Both

side, sides.

One
side.

Both

sides.

3

1

6-2

1

6-2

14

87-5

16

4

4

8-2

45

91-8

49

5

45

100-0

45

6

1

7

100-0

7|

7

5

100-0

5

8

1

2

100-0

21

Totals

1

•7

5

3-9

2

118

95-4

125

Tables D and E.

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, 1896.
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla aurea.

TABLE D.

._

i.

ii.

iii.

iv.

V.

vi.

vii.

viii.

i_ ~

No, of Obs.

No. of Obs.

.No. Of < lbs.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

j|

a r

Per
cent.

Per

cent.

Per
pent.

Per

cent.

Per

cent.

Per
cent.

Per
cent.

Per
cent.

H

Sz

One

Sit).'.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both

sides.

1 ine
side.

Both

sides.

■

side.

Both
sides.

one
side.

Both
sides.

One

side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both

,i'lus.

One

side.

Both
sides.

3

1

6-2

0

12-5

4

■25-0

"1

31-2

3

18-0

6-2

16

4

2

4-0

1

4

9-1

9

IS -3

s

13

34-6

6

11

28 5

1

2-0

1

3-0

49

6

1

1.1

1

3

7-7

3
3

6-6

39-9

3

15

1

36-6
13-3

14
2

31-1
26-6

1

1

3-3

4

8-8

1

4-4
20-0

45
7',

7

1

1

30-0

1

100

1

10-0

1

20 0

1

30-0

.")

s

1

3

3 -2

—

1

2

100-0

■-)_

Totals

9

8-0

19

15-2

12

35

32-7

7

30

26-6

2

0

2-3

5

4-0

6

7

8-0

125

TABLE E.

!~

i. ii. i;i. iv. v.

vi.

vii.

viii.

No. of Obs.

Per

cent.

No. "i Ohs.

No. 0

1 iii,.

cent.

50-0

No. of Obs.

Pi 1

cent.

No. of Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of Obs.

Per

oent.

H

One
side.

Both
sides.

One

side.

Both

sides.

cent.

One
side.

Both

sides.

One
side.

Both

Sill,',.

One
side.

Both

sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

cent.

50-0

One

side.

Both
sides.

One

side.

Both

sides.

6

1

1

2

7

1

12-5

1 12-5

2

o

37-5

1

2

31-3

1

6-2

8

8

2

5-4

1

1

4-0

7

18-8

5

10

33-7

2

8

24-3

1

2-7

4

10-8

37

9

7

14-0

6

12 0

5

15

35-0

4

11

26 0

1

1

3-0

4

8-0

O

2-0

50

10

1

2-5

1

2-5

4

20-0

6

30-0

6

30-0

1

2-5

3

1

12-5

20

11

1

14-2

2

28-4

2

28-4

2

28-4

7

10

9

32 8

7

1

30

100-0
26-8

2

2-4

5

40

6

1

Totals

1

3

2-8

O

8-0

19

15-2

12

35

2

7

8-0

125

Tables F and Of.

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, i8g6.
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla aurea.

TABLE F.

"3 l-H

i.

ii.

iii.

iv.

v.

5 «

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

"3

o C

Per

cent.

Per
cent.

Per

cent.

Per

cent.

Per

cent.

o
H

s*

One
side.

Both

sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

One

side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both

sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

3

1

2-7

2

6

37-8

7

37-8

4

21-0

18$

4

2

14

26-7

32

57-1

9

16-0

56

5

2

44

1

5

12-3

20

44-0

16

35-2

1

2-2

441

6

1

1

21-4

2

28-5

1

2

35-7

1

14-2

7

7

1

20-0

1

3

70-0

1

10-0

5

8

1

1

37-5

1

25-0

1

1

37-5

4

Tut, Hi

1

o

1-8

7

28

22.5

62

45-9

3

35

27-0

1

2

1-8

135

* It will be noticed that there appear to be discrepancies between the totals of Tables F, G, H, K, etc., and those in
Table A. This is due to the fact that one frog, or even one side of one individual, may be represented in two columns,
e.g.. in Table K, form ii., sometimes after sending one or more large branches to nerve X., nerve XI. will pass down
and breaking up join branches of nerve X. as in form iii.

TABLE G.

o

i.

ii.

iii.

iv.

v.

6 "^

s >

No. of Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of Obs.

Per

cent.

"3
o

-V,

One
side.

Both

sides

One
side.

1

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both

sides.

6

1 50-0

1

1

50-0

3

7

2 22-2

4

44-4

3

33-3

9

8

13 31-7

15

36-5

12

29-3

1

2-4

41

9

1

•9

2

12 24-3

25

46-7

15

28-0

531

10

2

10-4

1 5-2

13

68-4

2

1

10-4

2

5-2

19

11

1 11-7

5

58-5

2

23-4

1

5-8

Sh

16

1

100-0

1-8

1

Totals

1

2

1-8

3

30

22-5

62

45-9

3

35

27-0

3

1

135

Tables H and K.

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, i8g6
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla a urea.

TABLE H.

*s .

i.

ii.

iii.

iv.

v.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

No. o

f Obs.

No. of Obs.

"rt

o z>

Per

cent.

Per

cent.

33 3

Per
cent.

Per
cent.

Per

cent.

c

One
side.

Both

sides.

One
side.

Both

sides.

1

One
side.

Botli
sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

1

One
side.

Both

sides.

12

1

33 3

33-3

3

11

1

50-0

1

50-0

2

10

1

5-8

1

3

20-5

7

41-0

5

294

1

2-9

17

9

1

3-1

o

10

34-8

13

41-2

1

6

20-6

3H

8

1

14

1

6

18-3

1

22

G3-3

6

16-9

3-H

7

1

7

28-8

9

34-6

1

9

36-5

26

C

4

46-8

1

4

52-9

8 A

5

4

56-8

2

284

1

14-2

7

4

1

16-6

1

33-3

1

33-3

1

16-6

3

3

1

1

28

33-3

1

33-3

45-9

3

I

33-3

u

Totals

o

1-8

7

22-5

2

61

35

27-0

3

1

1-8

135

TABLE K.

"o .

i.

ii.

iii.

iv.

V

8*

No. of Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of Obs.

Per

cent.

No. of Olis.

Per
cent.

No. of Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Obs.

Per
cent.

o

One
side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both

sides.

One
side.

Both

sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

6

1

100-0

1

5

1

114

3

66-6

1

22-2

H

4

1

9-5

1

4

42-8

2

19-0

3

28-5

101

3

2

14

26-0

29

504

13

22-6

1

.87

571

2

1

1-7

9

15-3

28

46-2

1

19

32-8

2

1

3.4

591

1

1

50-0

1

1

50-0

3

1

2

Totals

1

2

1-8

3

30 22-5

62

45-9

36

27-0

1-8

135

Tables L and M.

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, 1896.
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla aurea.

TABLE L.

ii.

iii.

1*

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

Per

"3

0

M t

Per
cent.

Per

cent.

E-i

One
side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both

sides.

cent.

One
side.

Both

sides. 1

6

1

100-0

1

5

1

1

37-5

1

12-5

2

50-0

4

4

1

2

31-2

1

12-5

1

4

56-2

8

3

4

9

18-3

2

6

11-6

4

40

70-0

60

2

7

12-0

2

3-4

49

84-4

58

1

2

100-0

2

Totals

6

19

16-5

3

9

7-8

5

98

74-8

|l33

TABLE M.

i.

ii.

iii.

iv.

C 0

No. of Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of

One
side.

Obs. j

Per

cent.
Both
sides.

No. of Obs.

Per 1
cent.

"3

0
H

One
side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

9

1

1000

1

3

7

1

7-3

10

40

73-7

3

9

17-2

1

1-6

61

4

2

1

3-5

9

34

67-2

5

12

25-4

2

•6-0

57

5

5

7

72-2

1

2

19-0

1

7-6

13

1

6

1

100-0

4

Totals

19 2

\

4-8

24

83

71-4

9

I 23

20-6

3-0

17

133

Table N.

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, i8<j6.
Sweet. Nerves of Hyla a urea.

TABLE N.

"O !_•

i.

ii.

iii.

iv.

No. of Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Obs.

Per

cent.

"3
"o
H

2 2

One
side.

Both

sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both

sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

7

1

1000

1

9

1

50-0

1

50-0

2

10

3

11-1

2

9

74-0

2

1

14-8

m

11

3

1

74

5

23

76-1

1

5

16-4

331

12

2

1

3-7

5

36

71-2

5

9

21 -2

2

3-7

54

13

13

68-2

4

21-0

2

10-5

19

14

1

8-3

4

2

66 '6

1

1

25.0

6

15

1

33-3

2

66-6

3

19

1

100-0

1

Totals

9

2

4-8

16

87

71-4

9

23

20-6

4

3-0

133

/

18

Tables O and P.

Proc. Royal Society of Victoria, i8g6.
Sweet. Nei-ves of Hyla aurea.

TABLE O.

'o .

i.

ii.

iii.

iv.

V.

■- >

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

No. of Obs.

"3

.3 Z

Per
cent.

Per
cent.

Per

cent.

Per

cent.

Per

cent.

100-0

o
H

One
side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

7

1

1

9

1

1

75.0

1

25-0

2

10

1

4-5

2

9-0

1

4-5

4

7

81-8

11

11

1

1-5

1

1-5

4

11

40-6

4

16

56-2

32

12

3

11

25-0

3

36

75-0

50

13

1

4

23-6

1

14

76 3

19

14

1

1

25-0

1

4

75 0

6

15

3

100-0

3

19

1

100-0

1

Totals

1

•4

3

1-2

1

•4

11

28

26-8

14

82

71-2

1 25

TABLE P.

o .

i.

ii.

iii.

iv.

v.

Ii

o o

No. of Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Obs.

Per
cent.

No. of Obs.

Per
cent.

23-3
26-7

38-8

No. of Obs.

"3

o
Per H

One
side.

Both

sides.

One
side.

Both

sides.

One
side.

Both
sides.

One
side.

Both

sides.

One Both
side, sides

cent.

6
5

4
3

1

25-0

2
1

3

1-0
5-5

1

5-5

1

9
3

3

22

2

1

3

13

1

1
10
65

4

80

75-0 2
76-6 15
72-2 99
50-0 9

Totals

1

•4

1-2

1

•4

13

27

26-8

28

71 2 125

ANNUAL REPORT OF THE COUNCIL

FOR THE YEAR 1895.

The Council of the Royal Society herewith presents to the
Members of the Society the Annual Report and Balance Sheet
for the Year 1895.

The following Meetings were held, and Papers read during the
Session : —

March 14. — 1. " On the Relation between the Atomic Weights
and the Wave-lengths of the Spectrum Lines of the Elementary
Bodies," by Ludwig Rummel (communicated by R. L. J. Ellery,
F.R.S.) 2. " A Statistical Account of Australian Fungi," by D.
McAlpine. 3. "Preliminary Notice of a New Marsupial from
Central Australia," by Professor Baldwin Spencer, M.A.

April 9. — 1. "Further Preliminary Notice of Certain New
Species of Lizards from Central Australia," by A. H. S. Lucas,
M.A., B.Sc, and C. Frost, F.L.S. 2. "Notes on Birds Nesting
on Albatross Island, Bass Straits," by Dudley Le Souef and
H. P. C. Ashworth. 3. " Further Notes on Birds' Nests and
Eggs," by A. J. Campbell.

June 13. — 1. "Catalogue of Non-Calcareous Sponges," col-
lected by J. Bracebridge Wilson, Esq., M.A., in the neighbour-
hood of Port Phillip Heads. Part II., by Professor Arthur
Dendy, D.Sc. 2. "Observed Variations in the Dip of the
Horizon," by T. W. Fowler, M.C.E. 3. " Notes on Uromyces
amygdali" Cooke (Prune Rust). " A Synonym of Puccinia
pruni. Pei-s," by D. McAlpine. 4. " A Puccinia on Groundsel,
with Trimorphic Teleutospores," by D. McAlpine. 5. " Aus-
tralian Fungi," Part II, by D. McAlpine. 6. "Preliminary
Description of Certain New Marsupials from Central Australia,
together with remarks on the occurrence and identity of Phasco-
logak cristicauda" Kretft, by Professor Baldwin Spencer, M.A.
7. "Exhibition of Micro-metric Rulings," by J. Shephard.

August 8. — 1. "Preliminary Notice of Certain New Spiders
from Central Australia," by H. R. Hogg, M.A. 2. " Oologieal

298 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Notes," by Dudley Le Souef. 3. "On the Occurrence of a
Cambrian Formation in Victoria," by R. Etheridge, Jun. 4.
"Exhibition of Anaglyphs," by Professor Kernot, M.A., C.E.
5. " Exhibition of the Spectrum Top," by Dr. J. W. Barrett.

October 10. — 1. "Notes on the Tertiary Fossils of Table
Cape, Tasmania," by G. B. Pritchard. 2. " Observations with
Aneroid and Mercurial Barometers and Boiling Point Thermo-
meters," by T. W. Fowler, M.C.E.

November 14. — 1. " A Historical Sketch of the Royal Society
of Victoria," by Fredk. A. Campbell, C.E. 2. " Notes on the
Custom connected with the Kurdaitcha Shoes of Central Aus-
tralia," by P. M. Byrne (communicated by Professor Spencer).
3. "Notes on Didymograptus caditceits, Salter, with remarks on
its Synonymy," by T. S. Hall, M.A.

December 12.— 1. " Remarks on the Proposed Subdivision of
the Eocene Rocks of Victoria," by T. S. Hal], M.A., and G. B.
Pritchard. 2. " Note on a Victorian Host of the Larval Stage
of the Liver Fluke," by Thomas Cherry, M.D., M.S. 3. "The
Present Position of the Glacial Question," by E. G. Hogg, M.A.
(illustrated by Lantern Slides).

During the course of the year two members and three asso-
ciates have been elected, and eight members and three associates
have resigned.

The Librarian reports as follows : — The rate of growth of the
Society's Library has been maintained during the year, 1328 new
books and parts of periodicals having been received. The
crowded condition of the book-shelves having become a serious
inconvenience, a Committee was appointed to confer with the
Librarian on the matter. The Committee accepted the estimate
of Mr. C. Hill for shelving one side of the Council Room at the
cost of £10 10s. The work is now done, and the Librariwaa
proposes that in future the room hitherto termed the Library
shall be reserved for works published in English, French or
German, while those in other languages will be kept in the
Council Room, where they will be available for members."

During the year the following publication has been issued : — ■
"Transactions," Vol. IV. — containing a "Monograph of the
Tertiary Polyzoa of Victoria," by the late Dr. P. H. MacGillivray.
Vol. VIII. of the " Proceedings " is now in the press and will
shortly be issued.

Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria. 299

The publication of "Transactions," Vol. IV., has practically
exhausted the funds at the disposal of the Society for publishing
purposes, and it has been with great regret that the Council has
been obliged to forego the publication of certain papers presented
to it.

The Government Grant has been reduced to £100, and this,
together with the smaller amount received from subscriptions,
leaves but little money available when the necessary expenses
connected with the maintenance of the building and library have
been defrayed.

During the past year the Society has lost by death three of its
most prominent members — Mr. Cosmo Newbery, Dr. P. H.
MacGillivray, Mr. J. Bracebridge Wilson. The first-named,
owing to ill-health, had been prevented during recent years from
taking any active part in the work of the Society, in which,
during earlier years, he was a prominent and active worker. At
the time of his death, Dr. MacGillivray was engaged upon the
publication of his " Monograph of the Tertiary Polyzoa," which
has since been issued in quarto form, illustrated by 22 plates.
This work will form a lasting monument to the ability and
enthusiastic work on the subject to which Dr. MacGillivray had
devoted all his leisure time. Through the generosity of the
Government the whole of Dr. MacGillivray's collection and his
valuable library of works relating to the Polyzoa have been
secured for the colony.

In Mr. J. Bracebridge Wilson the Society has lost one of its
most active workers. It has been entirely due to his efforts
that a splendid collection has been made of the marine fauna
of Port Phillip. Various memoirs, dealing with a portion of
this materia], have been published by the Society, but it will be
many years before the whole material has been dealt with.
Mr. Wilson's services have always been placed ungrudgingly at
the disposal of the Society, to which he presented the whole of
his large and valuable collection, and his loss will be keenly felt.

300 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

-

^

{?

R

os

O

Ol

o

o

co

O

CD

CO C

T.

o

co

o

'.0

CD

£

b-

o

•M

o

o

CD

o

,_,

05 ^H

l^

05

i>

05

CO

CO

§

I— 1

<- 1

iH

T— 1

<->

1—1

1—1

,—l

■>*

CO

oo

a

i>

01

■*

CO

t- CO

I>

,-H

CD

CD

00

■*

co

c

CM

ci

CO

C

0<1

10

^

as
o

CO
3D

DS

^

tf

-p

d

©
CO

a

>>

i

©

a
#o
'-P

-p
Jl

cS

X

"n

o

0
o

CO

©

p*

O

CO

co

a

a

o

3

CO

,£2

to

_a
'-3

CO

©

CD

d

d

©

co

o

■p

o

CB

©

a

eg

CO

«

c3

CO

=
CO

-p

TV

-P
©

CO

£

fcD

a

to

CO

CO

3

a

cfi

.a

+3

CO

tj

T3

o

CO

O

©

'S

u

CD

c

'S
d
i— i

Ph

P3

O

0Q

w

o

Ph

H

=q

fe

H

pq

pq

>>

pq

00

o

O

o

CD

•^

o

co

o

o

-fi

-*1

O}

T)

o

CO

o

10

Tj(

3

10

^,

00

■rfl

t-

ri

*■

o

>o

=♦?

o

00

CD
CO

o
>o

°ti

w

^

00

1^

CD

OS

CD

•N

co

oo

<H

\

10

>>

OS

s

Si

a

CO

©

-p

d

6
-p
o

-

CO

01

a

o

5
a

~2
©

o

d

CO
0)

©

1

CO

a

o

to
©

u

-P

CO

©
-P

CO

CO

0
O

o

CO

=<-c

0)

03

43

a

=

5

CD

«

>

©
o
a

a

a

©
>
o

c3

pq

1)

=

es

-P

CO

©

O

CO
CO

-^

4-i

o
-p

a

©

CO

r.

-p

CO

P

a>
-p

CI

i— i

u

J9)

pq

-

H

02

HH

f.

o

Eh

Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria. 301

'£

-

=

u

a

DC

P4

o o
o o

© I

EC

r— 9

pq

pq

.5 §

F«4 f-1

o

o

©

o

o

©

o

CO

00

o

©

CO

CO |

■q

^ >

«2

8 m

g

pq

r^

„

£

H

cS

H

CO

W

<X>

M

c*

o

o

<1

t>

pq

a

REPORTS OF COMMITTEES.

(1) Report of the Port Phillip Biological Committee.

During the year Mr. E. II. Sykes, B.A., has reported on the
collection of Polyplacophora which had been got together mainly
by the late Mr. J. Bracebridge Wilson. The report with a plate
has been published m the " Proceedings of the Malacological
Society," vol. II., pt. 2, July, 1896. Mr. Sykes has been able to
compare the specimens with those types which are in the British
Museum and, in some cases, lias had the advantage of the advice
of Mr. Pilsbry. He has thus executed a revision which will be
of the greatest value to students of our Mollusca, and for which
the warmest thanks of the Society are due. The types of the
new species and the originals of the figured specimens, together
with examples of all the twenty-two species enumerated have
been returned to the Society, and are at present in the Museum
of the Biological School.

Owing to the scarcity of funds at the disposal of the Society
for publication purposes Mr. G. B. Pritchard has suspended his
work on the revision of the Mollusca of Victoria. This is greatly
to be regretted as he had already completed a portion of the work
and has a large amount of material and notes on hand.

Baldwin Spencer, Secretary.

(2) Report of the Gravity Survey Committee.

The work of the Committee, consisting of Professors Lyle and
Masson, Messrs. Baracchi, Ellery, Love (Secretary), and White,
during the past year consists mainly in a determination of the
constants of the pendulums. This is now nearly completed, and
will be finished very shortly. The reduction of Mr. Love's
observations is in great measure completed ; and it is hoped that
the complete results of the Melbourne observations and of those
made in England will be ready for publication early next year.

E. F. J. Love, Secretary.

Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria. 303

(3) Report of the House Committee.

At the beginning of the present year new shelving was put up
in the Council Room, owing to the increase in the number of
books in the Library. No other expense has been incurred.
The Rooms, Library, etc., have been kept in order and cleanli-
ness, and the building grounds, and fences are in fair condition.

C. R. Blackett, Convener.

Wat Eamtl %miin of ficiark

LIST OF MEMBERS,

WITH THEIR YEAR OF JOINING.

Patron.

His Excellency Lord Brassey, K.C.B. ... ... 1895

Honorary Members.

Agnew, The Hon. Sir J. W.3 K.C.M.G., M.E.C., M.D., 1888

Hobart, Tasmania

Clarke, Colonel Sir Andrew, K.C.M.G., C.B., CLE., 1854

London {President, 1855 to 1857)

Forrest, The Hon. Sir J., K.C.M.G., West Australia ... 1888

Hector, Sir James, K.C.M.G., M.D., F.R.S., Wellington, 1888

N.Z.

Liversidge, Professor A., F.R.S., LL.D., University, 1892

Sydney, N.S.W.

Neumeyer, Professor George, Ph.D., Hamburg, Germany 1857

Russell, H. C, F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Observatory, Sydney, 1888

N.S.W.

Scott, Rev. W., M.A., Kurrajong, Heights, KS.W. ... 1855

Todd, Sir Charles, K.C.M.G., F.R.S., Adelaide, S.A. . . 1856

Verbeek, Dr. R. D. M., Buitenzorg, Batavia, Java ... 1886

Life Members.

Barkly, His Excellency Sir Henry, G.C.M.G., K.C.B., 1857

Carlton Club, London (President, 1860 to 1863)

Bosisto, Joseph, The Laboratory, Bridge-road, Richmond 1857

Butters, J. S., Empire Buildings, Collins-street West .. 1860

Eaton, H F., Yatala, Walsh-street, South Yarra ... 1857

Elliott, T. S., Cahillstone, Coldstream, Gippsland ... 1856

Elliott, Sizar, 20 Porter-street, Prahran, Victoria ... 1856

Fowler, Thomas W., M.C.E., University, Melbourne ... 1877

Gibbons, Sidney W., F.C.S., 31 Gipps-street, East Melb. 1854

Gilbert, J. E., 210 Walsh-street, South Yarra ... ... 1872

List of Members. 305

Howitt, Edward, Rathmines-road, Auburn, Victoria ... 1868

Love, E. F. J., M.A., 213 Victoria Terrace, Royal Park 1888

Nicholas, William, Bambra-road, Caulfield ... ... 1864

Rusden, H. K., Ockley, North-road and Cochrane-street, 1866
Brighton

Selby, G. W., 99 Queen-street, Melbourne ... ... 1881

White, E. J., F.R.A.S., Observatory, Melbourne ... 1868

Ordinary Members.

Allan, Alex. O, Sixth Floor, Colonial Mutual Chambers, 1867
Collins-street, Melbourne

Bage, William, M.I.C.E., Prell's Buildings, 70 Queen- 1888

street, Melbourne

Balfour, Lewis, Iltapa, Princess-st., Kew, Victoria ... 1892

Baracchi, Pietro, F.R.A.S., Observatory, Melbourne ... 18.^7

Barnes, Benjamin, Queen's Terrace, South Melbourne ... 1866

Barrett, Dr. J. W., 47 Collins-street East, Melbourne ... 1891

Beckx, Gustave, Queen's Place, St. Kikla-road ... ... 1880

Blackett, C. R,, F.C.S., Thalassa, Ormond Parade, 1879

Elwood

Boese, C. H. E., 20 Erin-street, Richmond, Victoria ... 1895

Campbell, F. A., C.E., Working Men's College, Latrobe- 1879

street, Melbourne

Candler, Samuel Curtis, Melbourne Club, Melbourne ... 1888

Cherry, T., M.D., University, Melbourne ... ... 1893

Cohen, Joseph B., A.R.I.B.A., Public Works Department, 1877

Melbourne

Danks, John, 391 Bourke-street West, Melbourne ... 1871

Dennant, John, F.G.S., F.C.S., Russell-street, Camberwell 1886

Dunn, E. J., F.G.S., 77 Packington-street, Kew, Victoria 1893

Edwards, Thomas Elford, Bourke-road, Balwyn, Victoria 1896

Ellery, R. L. J., C.M.G., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., {President, 1856
1866 to 1885), Observatory, Melbourne

Fox, W., Westbourne Terrace, Grey-street, St. Kilda ... 18S7

Fryett, A. G., Cambridge, Ho. College Park, Lewisham, 1893
London

•21

306 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Goldstein, J. R. Y., Office of Titles, Melbourne ... 1879

Gotch, J. S., 109 Albert-street, East Melbourne ... 1881

Hake, C. N., F.C.S., Melbourne Club, Melbourne ... 1890

Hall, T. S., M.A., University, Melbourne ... ... 1890

Hefternan, E. B., M.D., 10 Brunswick-street, Fitzroy ... 1879

Hogg, H. R., M.A., 16 Market Buildings, Flinders-lane 1890

Hogg, E. G., M.A., Trinity College, University, Melbourne 1891

Howitt, A. W., F.G.S., Finch-street, South Malvern ... 1877

James, E. M., M.R.C.S., c/o The Hon. Sir William Zeal, 1883

5 St. James' Buildings, William-street

Jamieson, James, M.D., 56 Collins-street East, Melbourne 1877

Joseph, R. E., 644 High-street, Armadale, Victoria ... 1877

Kernot, Professor W C, M.A., C.E. (Preside///, 1S85 to 1870
1896), University, Melbourne

Lyle, Professor T. R., M.A., University, Melbourne ... 1889

McCoy, Professor Sir F., K.C.M.G., D.Sc, F.R S. 1855

(President, 1864), University, Melbourne

McAlpine, Daniel, Ardeer, 22 Armadale-street, Armadale, 1889

Victoria

Main, Thomas, City Surveyor's Office, Melbourne ... 1881

Masson, Professor Orine, M. A., D.Sc, University, Melbourne 1887

Mathew, Rev. John, M.A., B.D., Coburg, Victoria ... 1890

Moerlin, C, Eden Park, New and Dendy streets, Middle 1872

Brighton

Moors, H., 498 Punt-road, South Yarra ... ... 1857

Muntz, T. B., C.E., Prell's Buildings, Queen-street, 1873

^Melbourne

Nanson, Professor E. T., M.A., University, Melbourne ... 1875

Nimmo, W. H., Melbourne Club, Melbourne ... ... 1888

Officer, C. G. W., B.Sc, Clendon-road Toorak ; 434 1890

Collins-street, Melbourne

Oldtield, Lenthal, 36 Nicholson-street, Fitzroy, Victoria 18S0

Rosales, Henry, F.G.S., Alto Mira, Grandview Grove, 1880

Armadale

Rule, O. R., 4 Station-street, Canterbury, Victoria ... 1882

Sargood, Sir Frederick, K.C.M.G, M.L.C., Elsternwick 1883

Spencer, Professor W. Baldwin, M.A., University, Melb. 1887

Sugden, Rev. E. H., B.A., B.Sc, Queen's College, Carlton, 1889
Victoria

List of Members. 307

Sweet, George, F.G.S., Wilson-street, Brunswick, Victoria 1887

Tisdall, H. T., 7 Washington-street, Toorak, Victoria ... 1883

Topp, C. A., M.A., LL.B., F.L.S., Observatory Ho., 1887
South Yarra

Wilkinson, W. Percy, College of Pharmacy, Melbourne ... 1894

Country Members.

Barber, Rev. H. Bride, Parsonage, Beaufort, Victoria ... 1895

Cameron, John, Orbost, Victoria ... ... ... 1888

Clark, Donald, School of Mines, Bairnsdale, Victoria ... 1892

Conroy, Jas. McDowall, Wingham, Manning River, N.S.W. 1877

Dawson, J., Scott-street, Camperdown, Victoria ... 1891

Dobson, A. Dudley, M.I.C.E., F.G.S., Warrnambool, 1891
Victoria

Kastick, J., Millaquin Sugar Refinery, Bundaberg, 1893
Queensland

Fardy, F. J., California Gully, Bendigo ... ... 1894

Fennelly, Richard, A.M.I. C.E., Kilmore, Victoria ... 1895

Field, William Graham, Railway Department, Melb. ... 1880

Foord, George, Boundary-road, Burwood, Victoria ... 1894

Ivey, James, Ballarat, Victoria ... ... ... 1888

Keogh, Lawrence F., Heytesbury Park, Camperdown ... 1872

Loughrey, B., M.A., C.E., 3 Elgin-street, Hawthorn ... 1880

Manson, Donald, Elgin Buildings, Sydney ... ... 1889

Murray, Stuart, C.E., Department of Mines, Melb. ... 1874

Oddie, James, Dana-street, Ballarat, Victoria ... ... 1882

Officer, Sidney, c/o Mrs. Officer, Ottawa, Toorak ... 1890

Oliver, C. E., C.E., Metropolitan Board of Works, Melb. 1879

Powell, Walter D. T., Cape Moreton Light House, 1886

Brisbane, Queensland

Purdie, A., M.A., School of Mines, Bendigo, Victoria ... 1892

Shaw, W. H., Phoenix Foundry, Ballarat ... ... 1888

21.4

308 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Tipping, Isaac, 75 Lyons-street, Ballarat, Victoria ... 1892

Williams, Rev. W., F.L.S., Wesleyan Parsonage, North 1885
Melbourne

Corresponding Members.

Bailey, F. M., The Museum, Brisbane, Queensland ... 1880

Dencly, Professor Arthur, D.Sc, F.L.S., Canterbury 1894
College, Christchurch, N.Z.

Etheridge, Robert, Junr., Australian Museum, Sydney, 1877
N.S.W.

Lucas, A. H. S., M.A., B.Sc, F.L.S., Newington College, 1895

Sydney, N.S.W.

Stirton, James, M.D., F.L.S., 15 Newton-street, Glasgow 1880

Ulrich, Professor G. H. F., F.G.S., Dunedin, Otago, N.Z. 1857

Wagner, William, LL.D., Philadelphia, U.S.A. ... 1884

Associates.

Atkinson, John A, 2 Mary -street, Windsor ... ... 1894

Avery, D., M.Sc, Queen's College, Carlton, Victoria ... 1893

Baker, Thomas, Bond-street, Abbotsford, Victoria ... 1889

Bale, W. M., Walpole-street, Hyde Park, Kew, Victoria 1887

Barnard, Robert J. A., M.A., Queen's College, Carlton, 1892

Victoria

Bennetts, W. R., 184 Brunswick-street, Fitzroy, Victoria 1894

Bevan, Rev. L D., D.D., LL.B., Congregational Hall, 1889

Russell-street

Booth, John, M.C.E., Rennie-street, Coburg, Victoria ... 1882

Campbell, A. J., Elm Grove, Armadale, Victoria ... 1894

Chase, L. H., Leslie-street, Moonee Ponds, Victoria ... 1885

Cress well, Rev. A. W., M.A., St. Jude's Parsonage, 1887
Camberwell, Victoria

Danks, A. T., 391 Bourke-street West, Melbourne ... 1883

Ferguson, W. H, 23 Service Crescent, Albert Park, 1894
Victoria

List of Members. 309

Finney, W. H., Bridport-street, South Melbourne ... 1SS1

Fison, Rev. Lorimer, M.A., Essendon, Victoria ... 1889

Gabriel, J., Simpson's-road, Abbotsford, Victoria ... 1887

Green, W. Heber, Albany Crescent, Surrey Hills, Victoria 1896

Hart, T. S., M.A., Wilson-street, Brighton, Victoria ... 1894

Harvey, J. H., 127 Gipps-street, East Melbourne ... 1895

Hill, TV H. F., Glenrowan, Dandenong-road, Windsor ... 1894

Holmes, W. A., Telegraph Engineer's Office, Railway 1879

Department, Melbourne

Hubbard, J. R., Perth, West Australia ... ... 1884

Ingamells, F. N., c/o Ronalds, Florist, Swanston-st., Melb. 1889

Jutson, J. T., 16 Roseneath-street, Clifton Hill, Victoria 1895

Kernot, Frederick A., Royal Park, Melbourne ... 1881

Kitson, A. E., 372 Albert-street, East Melbourne ... 1894

Lambert, Thomas, Bank of New South Wales, Collins- 1890

street, Melbourne

Le Souef, Dudley, Zoological Gardens, Royal Park ... 1894

Lidgey, E. A., Department of Mines, Melbourne ... 1894

Luby, W. H., Department of Mines, Treasury, Melbourne 1896

Maclean, C. W., 276 Walsh-street, South Yarra ... 1879

Melville, A. G., Mullen's Library, Collins-street East, 1889

Melbourne

I

Phillips, A. E., c/o Mr. Gordon, 372 Little Flinders-street 1883

West, Melbourne

Pritchard, G B., Mantell-street, Moonee Ponds, Victoria 1892

Quarry, Herbert, G.P.O., Melbourne ... ... 1880

Robertson, E. J., 411 Toorak-road, South Yarra, Victoria 1895

Robinson, C. A., Lands Department, Treasury, Melbourne 1894

Rosenhain, Walter, B.A., Williams-road, South Yarra ... 1896

Schafer, R., Union-street, Windsor, Victoria ... ... 1883

Shaw, Alfred C, Bond-street, Abbotsford, Victoria ... 1896

Shephard, John, 135 City-road, South Melbourne ... 1894

Steele, W. H., M.A., Sherwood-street, Richmond, Victoria 1892

Stewart, C, Third Floor, Oxford Chambers, Bourke-street, 1883
Melbourne

310 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Strettle, W. S., B.C.E., Public Works Department, Perth, 1891
W.A.

Tate, Frank, M.A., Station-street, Box Hill ... ... 1889

Wallace, W. Mines Department, Treasury, Melboure ... 1896

Wedeles, James, 231 Flinders-lane, Melbourne ... 1896

LIST OF THE INSTITUTIONS AND LEARNED
SOCIETIES THAT RECEIVE COPIES OF THE
"TRANSACTIONS" AND "PROCEEDINGS'' OF
THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF VICTORIA.

England.

Agent-General of Victoria

Anthropological Institute

Balfour Library

Biological Society of Liverpool ...

Bodleian Library

British Museum

Colonial Office Library

" Electrician "

Foreign Office Library

Free Public Library ...

Geological Society

Institute of Mining and Mechanical Engineers

Institution of Civil Engineers ...

Linnsean Society

Literary and Philosophical Society

Literary and Philosophical Society

Manchester Museum, Owens College

Marine Biological Laboratory . . .

Natural History Museum

Naturalists' Society

"Nature" ...

" Natural Science "

Owens College Library

Patent Office, 2o Southampton Buildings

Philosophical Society ...

Physical Society

Radclitie Library

Royal Asiatic Society ...

Royal Astronomical Society

Royal College of Science

Royal Colonial Institute

Royal Gardens

Royal Geographical Society

Royal Microscopical Society

South

London

London

Cambridge

Liverpool

Oxford

London

London

London

London

Liverpool

London

Newcastle

London

London

Liverpool

Manchester

Manchester

Plymouth

London

Bristol

London

London

Manchester

London

Cambridge

London

Oxford

London

London

Kensington

London

Kew

London

London

312 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Royal Society
Statistical Society
University College
University Library
Yorkshire College

London

London

London

Cambridge

Leeds

Scotland.

Botanical Society

Geological Society

Royal College of Physicians' Laboratory

Royal Observatory

Royal Physical Society

Royal Society

Royal Scottish Society of Arts . . .

Scottish Geographical Society

University Library

University Library

Philosophical Society ...

Edinburgh
Edinburgh
Edinburgh
Edinburgh
Edinburgh
Edinburgh
Edinburgh
Edinburgh
Edinburgh
Glasgow
Glasgow

Ireland.

Natural History and Philosophical Society
Royal Dublin Society .. .
Royal Geological Society
Royal Irish Academy
Trinity College Library

Belfast
Dublin
Dublin
Dublin
Dublin

Germany.

Gesellschaft iiir Erdkunde ... ... ... Berlin

Grossh. Hessische Geologische Anstalt ... ... Darmstadt

Jenaische Zeitsch. f. Medicin unci Naturwissenschaft Jena

Konigl. Botanische Gesellschaft ... ... Regensburg

Konigl. Orient!. Bibliothek

Konigl. Preussische Akademie der Wissenschaften . . .
Konigl. Sachs. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften
Konigl. Socie tat der Wissenschaften
Naturforscliende Gesellschaft
Naturforscliende Gesellschaft
Naturforscliende Gesellschaft
Naturforscliende Gesellschaft Bleichstrasse 59.
Naturhistorisch Medizinischer Verein
Naturhistoriscb.es Museum
Naturhistorisch.es Museum
Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein ...

Dresden

Berlin

Leipzig

. . . Gbttingen

Emden

Halle

Leipzig

Frankfurt am M.

... Heidelberg

Hamburg

Hanover

Bremen

Oberhessische Gesellschaft fur Natur &i Heilkunde

Giessen

List of Institutions.

313

Schlesische Gesellschaft fur vaterlancl. Cultur ... Breslau

Verein fur Erdkunde ... ... ... ... Darmstadt

Verein fiir Erdkunde ... ... ... ... Halle

Verein fiir Naturkunde ... ... ... Kassel

AUSTRO-HUNGARY.

Imperial Observatory ... ... ... ... Prague

K. K. Akademie der Wissenschaften ... ... Vienna

K. K. Geologische Reichsanstalt ... ... Vienna

K. K. Geographische Gesellschaft ... ... Vienna

K. K. Naturhistorisches Hofmuseum ... ... Vienna

K. K. Zoologische Botanische Gesellschaft ... Vienna

Switzerland.

Geographische Gesellschaft ... ... ... Berne

Geogr. Commerc. Gesellschaft ... ... ... St. Gallon

Geogr. Commerc. Gesellschaft ... ... ... Aarau

Naturforschende Gesellschaft ... ... ... Zurich

Schweizerische Naturforschende Gesellschaft ... Berne

Societe de Physique et d'Histoire Naturelle ... Geneve

France.

Academie des Sciences, Belles Lettres et Arts ... Lyon

Annuaire Geologique Universel .. ... ... Paris

Bibliotheque et Faculte des Sciences ... ... Marseilles

Feuilles des Jeunes Naturalistes ... ... Paris

Societe Academique Indo-Chinoise ... ... Paris

Societe de Geographie ... ... ... ... Paris

Societe d'Etudes Scientifiques ... ... ... Paris

Societe Nationale de Cherbourg ... ... Cherbourg

Societe Zoologique de France ... ... ... Paris

Societe des Sciences Naturelles de l'Ouest de la France

(Museum) ... ... ... ... Nantes

Italy.

Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale Vittorio Emanuele ... Rome

British and American Archaeological Society ... Rome

Museo di Zoologia ed Anatomia Comp., R. TJniversita Turin

Ministerio dei Lavori Pubblici ... ... ... Rome

R. Accademia delle Scienze dell' Instituto ... Bologna

Reale Accademia di Scienze ... ... ... Palermo

Reale Accademia di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti ... Lucca

Regia Accademia di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti ... Modena

Societa Geograhca Italiana ... ... ... Rome

Societa Toscana di Scienze Naturali ... ... Pisa

Zoological Station ... ... ... ... Naples

314 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

Spain and Portugal.

Real Academia de Ciencias exactas, fisicas y naturales Madrid
Sociedade de Geographia ... ... ... Lisbon

Holland and Belgium.

Academie Royale de Belgique ... ... ... Bruxelles

Bataviaasch Genootschap van Kunsten en Weten-

schappen ... ... ... ... Batavia

Musee Teyler ... ... ... ... Haarlem

Magnetical and Meteorological Observatory ... Batavia

Natuurkundig Genootschap ... ... ... Groningen

Nederlandisch Botan. Vereiniging ... ... Nijmegen

Kon. Akademie van Wetenschappen ... ... Amsterdam

Societe Hollandaise des Sciences ... ... Haarlem

Societe Malacologique Royale de Belgique . . . Bruxelles

Societe Provinciale des Arts et Sciences ... ... Utrecht

Denmark, Sweden, and Norway.

Academie Royale
Entomologiska Foreningen
Videnskabs-Selskabet . . .
Royal University Library
Kong]. Vetenskaps Akademien

.Copenhagen

. Stockholm

Christiania

Upsala

Stockholm

Russia and Roumania.

Institut Meteorologique de Roumanie ... ... Bucharest

Jardin Botanique Imperial ... ... St. Petersburg

Minister of Agriculture, St. Petersburg, c/o Russian

Consulate .. ... ... ... Melbourne

Russian Geographical Society, Priamom Branch,

Ishita ... ... ... ... ... Siberia

Societe des Naturalistes de l'Universite de Kasan . . . Kasan

Societe des Naturalistes Kiew ... ... Kiew

Societe des Naturalistes de la Nouvelle Russie ... Odessa

Societe Imperiale des Naturalistes ... ... Moscow

Societe Imperiale Russe de Geographie ... St. Petersburg

Magyar Kiralyi Termeszettudomanyi Tarsulat ... Budapest

Cape of Good Hope.
South African Philosophical Society, Observatory ... Cape Town

List of Institution*.

315

India.

Geological Survey of India

Madras Literary Society

Natural History Society

Royal Bengal Asiatic Society ...

Royal Asiatic Society, Ceylon Branch

Mauritius.

Meteorological Society

China and Japan.

Astronomical Observatory

China Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society

Imperial University ...

Seismological Society of Japan ...

Canada.

Canadian Institute

Geological and Natural History Survey of Canach

Minister's Office (Militia and Defence)

Royal Society of Canada

Calcutta
Madras
Bombay
Calcutta
Colombo

Mauritius

Hong Kong

Shanghai

Tokio

Tokio

Toronto

Ottawa

Ottawa

Montreal

United States.

Academy of Natural Sciences

Academy of Natural Sciences

Academy of Sciences ...

American Museum of Natural History, Central

American Academy of Arts and Sciences

American Geographical Society ...

American Philosophical Society...

Astor Library

Bureau of Ethnology, Smithsonian Institute

Colorado Scientific Society

Cooper Union for the Advancement of Science

Denison University

John Hopkins University

Maryland Historical Society

Natural Academy of Sciences

Office of Chief of Engineers, U.S. Army ...

Philosophical Society ...

"Science"

Smithsonian Institution

Society of Natural History

Society of Natural Sciences

Texas Academy of Sciences

... Davenport
Philadelphia
San Francisco
Park New York
Boston
... New York
Philadelphia
... New York
"Washington
Denver
k Art New York-
Ohio
Baltimore
... Baltimore
Washington
Washington
Washington
... New York
Washington
Boston
Buffalo
Austin

316 Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria.

United States Geological Survey ... Washington

University of California, Berkly ... San Francisco

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters ... Madison

Mexico.

Ministerio de Fomento

Mexico

Observatorio Meteorologico, Magnetico Central Mexico

Observatorio Astronomico National

Tatubaya

Sociedad Cientifica, " Antonio Alzate "

Mexico

Sociedad de Ingeniecos de Ialisco

Guadalajara

Secretaria de Fomento

... Guatemala

Argentine Republic.

Academia Nacional de Ciencias Exactas .

Cordoba

Direccion General de Estadistica

Buenos Ayres

La Museo di Plata

Buenos Ayres

Australasia. — Victoria.

"Age"

... Melbourne

"Argus"

... Melbourne

Athenaeum ...

... Melbourne

Astronomical Observatory

. . . Melbourne

Chief Secretary's Office

. . . Melbourne

Department of Mines and Water Supply .

... Melbourne

Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria

... Melbourne

Free Library

Echuca

Free Library

Geelong

Free Library

Bendigo

Geological Society of Australasia

... Melbourne

Gordon Technical College

Geelong

Government Entomologist

... Melbourne

Government Statist

.. Melbourne

Medical Society

... Melbourne

Parliamentary Library

... Melbourne

Pharmaceutical Society of Australasia

... Melbourne

Public Library

. . . Melbourne

Kail way Library

... Melbourne

Royal Geographical Society

... Melbourne

Royal Mint ... ...

... Melbourne

School of Mines

Ballarat

School of Mines

Castlemaine

School of Mines

Bendigo

School of Mines

Maryborough

School of Mines

... Bairnsdale

School of Mines

Stawell

The Exhibition Trustees

... Melbourne

Town Hall Library

Prahran

List of Institutions.

317

University Library
Victorian Chamber of Manufactures
Victorian Institute of Engineers
Victorian Institute of Surveyors
Working Men's College

New South Wales.

Australian Museum

Astronomical Observatory

Botanic Gardens

Department of Agriculture

Department of Mines ...

Linnsean Society of New South Wales

Parliamentary Library

Public Library

Royal Geographical Society

Royal Society

Technological Museum

University Library

South Australia.

Parliamentary Library
Public Library and Museum
Royal Society of South Australia
University Library

Queensland.

Parliamentary Library
Public Library and Museum
Royal Geographical Soceity
Royal Society of Queensland

Tasmania.

Parliamentary Library

Public Library

Royal Society of Tasmania

Melbourne
Melbourne

Melbourne
Melbourne
Melbourne

Sydney
Sydney
Sydney
Sydney
Sydney
Sydney
Sydney
Sydney
Sydney
Sydney
Sydney
Sydney

Adelaide
Adelaide
Adelaide
Adelaide

Brisbane
Brisbane
Brisbane
Brisbane

Hobart
Hobart
Hobart

New Zealand.

Auckland Institute and Museum ... ... Auckland

Colonial Museum and Geological Survey Department Wellington

Museum
New Zealand Institute
Utago Institute
Parliamentary Library
Public Library

West Australia.

Observatory

Christchurch

Wellington

Dunedin

Wellington

Wellington

Perth

PRINTED BY

KURD AND SON, CARLTON,

MELBOURNE.

PROCEEDINGS

tf ot -i /-

PROCEEDIN

§opl Mmitty of firtork

VOL. IX. (New Series).

Edited under the Authority of the Council.

ISSUED MARCH, 1S97.

{Containing Papers read before the Society during i8g6).

THE AUTHORS OF TUB SEVERAL PAPERS ARE SEVERALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE
SOUNDNESS OF THE OPINIONS GIVEN AND FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE

STATEMENTS MADE THEREIN.

MELBOURNE :
FORD & SON, PRINTERS, DRUMMOND STREET, CARLTON.

AGENTS TO THE SOCIETY:
WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON.

To whom all communications for transmission to the Royal Society of Victoria,
from all parts of Europe, should be sent.

1897.

MBL WHO| Ljbrary . Serja|

5 WHSE 00599